diff options
Diffstat (limited to '21387.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 21387.txt | 15745 |
1 files changed, 15745 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/21387.txt b/21387.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e89b706 --- /dev/null +++ b/21387.txt @@ -0,0 +1,15745 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of In the Eastern Seas, by W.H.G. Kingston + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: In the Eastern Seas + +Author: W.H.G. Kingston + +Release Date: May 8, 2007 [EBook #21387] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK IN THE EASTERN SEAS *** + + + + +Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England + + + + +In the Eastern Seas, by W.H.G. Kingston, + +________________________________________________________________________ + +The book, quite a long one, is concerned with the adventures of a boy, +Walter Heathfield, and of his sister Emily. They appear on the scene in +chapter one, in rather a dramatic fashion, as they are rescued from a +sinking ship, along with their dying father, moments before the ship +finally vanishes. On reaching London their relations are traced, but +none appear at all interested in them, except for Uncle Tom, who has but +little money, and who unfortunately dies before the chapter is done, of +a horse-riding accident. + +As a result the ship's captain and his family decide to look after them. + +The captain has a daughter, Grace, and a kindly wife. He asks them all +to accompany him on the ship's next voyage, which is to the eastern +seas. There is a passenger, a Mr Nicholas Hooker, who is a naturalist, +and who of course delivers himself of numerous speeches describing the +animals and plants they see during the trip. + +They have numerous adventures, including of course (as you would expect +in a Kingston novel) the loss of the ship. Walter keeps a journal, +though at times Emily has to write it for him. When they finally get +back to Old England, the old relative, Lord Heatherly, who had refused +to help them, dies, and it turns out Walter is his heir. So the +fortunes of Walter and Emily are very much changed. + +Quite a good read, or listen. + +________________________________________________________________________ + +IN THE EASTERN SEAS, BY W.H.G. KINGSTON. + + + +CHAPTER ONE. + +THE INDIAMAN. + +"Well, Thudicumb, I hope by noon we may at last get a glimpse of the +sun," said Captain Davenport to his first officer, as they walked the +deck of the _Bussorah Merchant_, homeward bound from the East Indies, +and at that time rolling on over the long heaving seas of the Atlantic. +The sky was overcast, but ever and anon a gleam of light burst forth +amid the clouds, playing on the foaming crest of a wave. It was blowing +hard, but had evidently been blowing much harder, of which fact the +condition of the Indiaman gave evidence. A portion of the starboard +bulwarks were stove in, one of her quarter boats was shattered, and +other slight damages were visible. + +"We must be ready for him, sir, at all events," said the first officer, +looking at his watch. "It is not far off noon now." + +"Tell Oliver to bring me my sextant," said the captain, as the mate +descended from the poop into his cabin. + +Mr Thudicumb soon returned, bringing his own instrument, and followed +by a boy with the captain's. Continuing their walk, they looked +anxiously every now and then at the spot in the heavens where they +expected the sun to appear. They were accompanied by one who seemed to +take as much interest as they did in what was going forward. When they +turned, he turned; when they looked up at the sky, he looked up also; +balancing himself when the ship rolled as they did, by leaning over to +the opposite direction to which she was heeling. He, however, could not +have afforded them any assistance in their observation, for though his +eye and the expression of his countenance exhibited much sagacity, he +was of the canine species--a large dog--a magnificent-looking fellow, +who could, the crew declared, for he was a great favourite with them, do +everything but talk--and, they might have added, take a meridional +observation, or a lunar. + +Mr Thudicumb again looked at his watch. "There he is, sir," he +exclaimed at length. + +He and the captain stopped in their walk; their sextants were quickly at +their eyes; and there they stood, their feet planted firmly on the +heaving deck, in an attitude long practice alone could have enabled them +to maintain. A clear space was seen in the sky, increasing rapidly, and +yet not altogether blue, but the vapour which drove across it was not +sufficiently thick to prevent the sun's rays descending upon the sea. + +"She has dipped, sir," said the first officer. + +"She has," observed the captain. + +The sun's elevation was read off on the index, and the instruments were +returned to their cases. The calculation was very quickly worked out on +a scrap of card. + +"Make it noon, Mr Thudicumb," said the captain, as, returning the case +to the young cabin-boy, he directed him to take it below. While the +captain and his first officer were making their observation, a group of +midshipmen had collected on the deck with their quadrants in their +hands, doing their best to shoot the sun, but their less experienced +eyes could make but little of it in that heavy sea; and when they came +to read off their observations, they were somewhat surprised at the +wonderful difference which existed among them. Stopping to listen to a +few remarks made to them by the captain, they hurried off the deck to +deposit their quadrants in places of safety. The dog all the time stood +with his feet firmly planted on the deck, watching the captain, as if he +fully understood what was going on. Captain Davenport, as he turned, +patted him on the head. "You are a wise dog, Merlin," he observed; "but +you cannot take an observation yet." Merlin wagged his tail as if he +had received a compliment, or, at all events, well pleased at the notice +taken of him. + +The captain was a tall man of spare figure, his white locks and +weather-beaten countenance making him appear considerably older than his +firm, yet light and active step, seemed to warrant. His eye, too, was +still full of life and fire, and his voice clear and strong, evidence of +which had been given when he issued his orders in the late gale, and +when, by his promptitude and decision, he had saved the ship, seemingly +on the point of destruction. + +Scarcely had eight bells been struck, when the voice of the boatswain +from the forecastle was heard shouting, "A vessel on the lee bow, sir! +A dismasted ship! It can be nothing else!" + +Captain Davenport went forward, followed by Merlin. + +"Where away is she, Mr Tarbox?" he asked of the boatswain. + +"There, sir, you will catch her over the bumkin-head," answered the +boatswain. "I saw her again just as you stepped on the forecastle. She +cannot have gone down in the meantime!" + +"I hope not indeed," said the captain, looking out eagerly in the +direction towards which the boatswain pointed. At last he too caught +sight of a dark object lifted on the top of a sea. "A dismasted ship; +no doubt about that," he observed. "We will keep away for her. There +are probably people on board, and although it would be a difficult +matter to take them off while this sea is running, we may do so if it +goes down, as it has been gradually doing since daylight." + +The Indiaman stood on, now rising to the summit of a sea, now gliding +into the valley below, gradually approaching the dark object which had +been discovered. The boatswain had gone aloft, and quickly returned. + +"No doubt about it, Captain Davenport. She is a big ship--lost her +masts, no doubt, in the gale; and from the way she is rolling, I have a +notion she has no small amount of water in her. If we had not sighted +her, it is my opinion that those on board would be fathoms down in the +ocean, as she will be before another sun rises." + +"We will do what we can to save any people on board her," said Captain +Davenport. "Get the life-boat ready for lowering, Mr Tarbox." + +"Ay, ay, sir; I am ready to go in her," answered the boatswain. + +"Perhaps Mr Thudicumb may wish to go, or the second officer; but if +not, Tarbox, I would intrust her to you more readily than to anybody." + +The news that a dismasted ship was in sight brought all the passengers +who were below on deck, and numerous glasses were now turned towards +her. No signs, however, of any one being on board were discovered. She +was a complete wreck; the masts had gone by the board, the bulwarks were +stove in, the caboose and booms and everything on deck had been swept +clear away. The Indiaman stood on, passing close to leeward of her. + +"She is deserted, sir; little doubt about that," said Mr Thudicumb, +examining the ship. "The people thought she was going down, and took to +their boats. Better have stuck to her in such a sea as they must have +had to encounter. Little chance of any boat living." + +"Haul the tacks aboard then, Mr Thudicumb; down with the helm," said +the captain. "Unless for the sake of rescuing any fellow-creatures, I +would not risk a boat to board her, while the sea runs as high as it now +does." + +As he was speaking, Merlin had been eagerly watching the wreck; and now, +stretching out his fore-feet and neck towards her, he uttered a loud +mournful howl or wail, which sounded strangely wild and sad to all who +heard it. + +"What is the matter, Merlin?" asked the captain, bending down and +patting the dog's head. + +"That dog has got more sense than many human beings," observed the +boatswain. "Now, I should not be surprised but what he knows there is +somebody on board that craft--dead or dying, may be--just as well as if +he saw them. If I was our skipper, I would not leave that wreck without +an overhauling." + +Just then a human head was seen issuing from the companion-hatch. It +was that of a young boy. He sprang on deck and waved a handkerchief +wildly, apparently shouting with all his power, though his voice could +not be heard amidst the roaring of the sea and the lashing of the ropes +as the ship was luffed up close to the wind. Captain Davenport seized +his speaking-trumpet and shouted, "We will keep by you! Do not fear!" +Just then another head was seen. "A young girl!" cried several of those +looking on. A mere child she seemed at that distance, her light hair +blowing about in the wind. + +"Bless them!" said old Tarbox; "I would go to help them if there was +twice the sea there is on." + +Preparations were now made for heaving the ship to, but the captain was +anxious to wait, in the hopes of the sea going down still more before +night, when there might be less risk in bringing the people from off the +wreck. A great risk under similar circumstances is run when those on +board a ship on fire or likely to sink leap hurriedly in too great +numbers into the boat alongside. In many such instances the boat has +been swamped, and the lives of all in her sacrificed. Here, such a +danger was not likely to occur, as no crew apparently remained on board. +The question, however, was, whether the wreck would float till the sea +had sufficiently gone down to enable a boat to board her without risk. +As the ship gradually receded from the wreck, the young boy was seen to +lift up his hands imploringly, as if to beg for assistance. At length +the boatswain came aft and addressed the captain. + +"If you will let me have the life-boat, sir, there are six hands ready +to go in her; and I will undertake to board that craft, and bring off +any people we may find alive. To my mind, from the way she rolls, she +has not got many hours longer to swim; and if she was to go down, those +young people we saw would have to go down in her, and that's what my +eyes would not like to watch." + +"No indeed, Tarbox," said the captain. "Mr Thudicumb, what do you +say?" + +"I was going to volunteer, sir," said the first officer; "but though I +yield to no other man on board in the management of a boat, I +acknowledge that Tarbox can handle one in a sea better than any man I +have ever met with; and on that account, and not because I am afraid of +risking my life, I yield to him." + +"Thank you, Mr Thudicumb," said the boatswain. "I should have said the +same thing of you, sir; but you have a wife and children at home, and it +matters little what becomes of old Dick Tarbox." + +Once more the ship was brought up as close as she could be to the wreck, +and again being hove to, the life-boat, with the six hands selected by +the boatswain, was carefully lowered. And now everybody on board +watched her with anxious eyes, as she pulled towards the wreck. The +young lad saw her coming, and was observed to be bending down as if to +announce the event to some one below. Again the little girl's head +appeared above the deck, but the lad would not allow her to come up +further, evidently being afraid of her being jerked overboard--an event +but too likely to occur, from the way the ship was rolling. On pulled +the boat, now sinking down deep into the trough of the sea, which curled +into mountain billows, and seemed about to overwhelm her; now she rose +up high on the crest of a wave. Many of those who gazed at her held +their breath, scarcely believing that she could possibly live amid the +tumult of waters. Slowly she proceeded, guided by the well-practised +hand of the old boatswain. She was close to the wreck. Now she seemed +to sink far down below the deck, now to rise up, as if the next instant +she would be thrown upon it. Could any human being ever manage to gain +the wreck from that tossing boat? Yes, yes! a man stands up in the +boat. He makes a spring! He has gained the deck, hauling himself up by +a rope which he has clutched. He waves off the boat till he is ready to +return to her. + +Dick Tarbox was the man. He was seen to leap down the hatchway. For +some time he did not appear. What could have become of him? "There he +is! there he is!" shouted several voices. He came, bearing a young girl +in his arms. The boat again drew near the dismasted ship. Those who +looked on held their breath, for how could he manage to convey his +burden to the tossing boat? He stood for a minute or more waiting, but +not irresolute. His eye was watching the boat. He was calculating the +rolling of the ship. He made a signal to one of the men to be ready to +receive the girl. Then, quick as lightning, he leaped across the deck, +and dropped her--so it seemed--into the man's arms. The boat again kept +away from the ship, and the boatswain disappeared once more down the +hatchway. + +"He will bring the boy this time!" But no; he came up carrying a far +heavier burden--a man wrapped in a cloak, and apparently unable to help +himself. Dick shouted to one of the crew to go aboard and help him. +Together they got the sick man into the boat. The little girl clasped +her hands in her anxiety as she saw him lowered down. Sorrowfully she +stooped over him, supporting his head in her arms; forgetting, +apparently, where she was, and the fearful danger to which she was still +exposed. The boy had followed the boatswain, apparently with the +intention of leaping into the boat by himself. Dick was seen to hold +him back: then he lifted him in his arms, and, waiting for the right +moment, sprang into the boat. + +No one on board had watched these proceedings with more apparent +eagerness than Merlin; and as the boat came alongside the ship, he ran +to the gangway to receive those whom she brought. The little girl was +first lifted up the side, and received by the captain, Merlin instantly +coming up to lick her hands and attract her attention. She had no +thought, however, for any one round her, but endeavoured to look down +into the boat to watch her companions. The sick man was next hoisted +up; the boy, till he was safe, refusing to leave the boat. He then, +aided by Dick Tarbox, hauled himself up on deck. + +"We will carry him aft, and take him at once to my cabin," said the +captain. "He looks very ill." + +This was done; the young people keeping by the sick man's side, +anxiously gazing on his countenance, apparently scarcely aware where +they were, and paying no attention to any one else. + +"Is he your father, young gentleman?" asked the captain, as the sick man +was placed on the bed. + +"Oh yes, yes!" answered the boy. "But can you do nothing for him? He +is, I am afraid, very, very ill." + +At that moment the surgeon, who had been attending on a patient below, +came up, and entering the cabin, looked at the sick man's countenance +and felt his pulse. The look he gave the captain was observed by the +little girl: she seemed to understand it. + +"Oh do, sir, tell me what is the matter with him! Will he die?" she +asked, bursting into tears. + +"There is no time to be lost," observed the surgeon, hurrying away to +his own cabin without answering the question. + +"Our lives are in God's hands, young lady," said the captain, in a kind +tone. "The doctor will do all he can for your papa; be assured of +that." + +The surgeon instantly returned with a restorative; after taking which +the sick man recovered slightly, and was able to utter a few words in a +faint voice. He recognised his children, and beckoned them to approach. + +"I am leaving you, I fear," he whispered; "for I feel as I have never +felt before. Walter, take care of Emily; never leave her. Think of +your dear mother and me sometimes." Then he turned his glance towards +the captain. "These, sir, will be orphans before many hours have +passed," he said, in a faltering voice. "You, perhaps, are a father, +and can feel for me. As a fellow-creature, you can do so. You have +been the means of preserving the lives of those children; watch over +them, and do what you can for them. They will tell you about +themselves. I cannot speak more." + +While he was uttering these words, he seemed about to relapse into a +state of insensibility. His eye was growing dim. He stretched out his +hands, however, and took those of his children; and thus, almost without +uttering another word, his spirit passed away. + +"We will leave your father now," said the surgeon; and made a sign to +the captain, who led the boy and girl out of the cabin. + +The boy seemed to understand what had happened; but there was an +anxious, scared, and inquiring expression on the countenance of the +little girl, which showed that even now she was not certain that her +father had been taken from her. + +Captain Davenport was a father, and a kind, affectionate one, and knew +how to sympathise with the bereaved children. He had been in the cabin +but a few minutes when a midshipman entered. + +"She is sinking, sir!" he exclaimed. + +Captain Davenport hurried on deck. The boy had caught the words, and +followed him. Just then Merlin uttered a low, mournful howl. They were +just in time to see the after-part of the dismasted ship, as, plunging +head first, she went down beneath the foaming billows. + +"We were but just in time to save you, my lad," said the captain, +turning to the boy, whose hand Merlin was licking, as if to congratulate +him on his escape. + +"Indeed you were, sir," answered the boy; "and we are very, very +grateful to you, and to that brave sailor who carried my father and +Emily out of the ship, and helped me into the boat. I want to thank him +more particularly, and so would my father; but oh, sir, do you think he +will soon recover out of that fearful swoon? Or do, do tell me, for I +did not like to ask you before my sister, is he--is he really--dead?" + +The boy's voice dropped as he spoke. + +"I fear, Walter, that he is dead," answered the captain. "But we will +do our best to comfort your little sister; and so, I am sure, will you. +You have reason to be thankful that he was permitted thus to die quietly +in bed, and to know that your lives were spared." + +"Oh yes, yes! I know," answered the boy, hiding his face in his hands. + +It was some hours before Emily could understand that her father could +never again speak to her or caress her. Her brother's anxiety to +console her probably prevented him from so poignantly feeling his own +loss. + +The captain and all on board treated the young orphans with the greatest +kindness and consideration. The following day their father's body was +committed to its ocean grave; and Walter and Emily felt that for the +future they must be all in all to each other. + +"Yes," thought Walter, as he gazed at his sister's fair and gentle +countenance, "I will watch over her--and die for her, if needs be--to +protect her from harm." + + + +CHAPTER TWO. + +THE HISTORY OF WALTER AND EMILY. + +The captain and those on board were naturally anxious to know something +about the young orphans, and how it happened that they and their father +had been left alone on board the sinking ship. + +"The people would not take poor papa in the boat, and we would not leave +him," said Emily, when the captain first spoke on the subject. + +"I should think not," said Walter. "It was very, very sad to have poor +papa so ill, and no one to help him except us. The poor captain and the +first officer had been washed overboard; and the surgeon was killed by +the falling of the masts, when papa was hurt at the same time. He was +ill, though, when we sailed; but he thought the change, and the warm +climate of the country we were going to, would restore him to health. +We had good reason, however, to be thankful we did not go in the boats; +for scarcely had they left the ship, as I was watching them from the +companion-hatch, than I saw the sea break over one of them, and down she +went, the unfortunate people in her struggling for a few instants before +they all sank. I was in hopes that the other, which was larger, might +escape; but she had got to no great distance when it seemed to me that +she went right into a curling sea. Whether she went through it and rose +again I could not discover, for I saw no more of her. It was very +dreadful; but I had to hurry back to papa, for I heard Emily calling me. +I did not tell him what had happened, for I thought it would make him +even, more sad than he was." + +The boy, overcome with his feelings, could with difficulty speak, and +was for some minutes silent. He then continued:-- + +"The ship was the _Mountaineer_. We had been three weeks at sea, and +had had frequent calms, when we met with the fearful gale from which she +suffered so much. Papa was going out as British Consul to --, in the +Brazils; and as mamma died a year ago, and he had no one to leave us +with, he determined, to our great joy, that we should accompany him. +Emily had been at school; but when mamma was ill she came home to stay +with her, and after that papa could not hear the thoughts of again +parting with her. I had been at Winchester School, and had intended +going into the army; but papa lost his fortune soon after mamma's death, +and told me that I must give up all thoughts of that, as he could not +purchase my commission, and I could not be in the army without money. +The loss of his property tried him very much. He had to take me away +from school; and he used to say he was afraid we should all die of +starvation. However, when he got the appointment he was in better +spirits, and Emily and I hoped we should see him once more like +himself." + +"But have you no relations or friends, young gentleman?" asked the +captain, in a kind tone. + +"I do not know about friends," answered Walter; "but I have some +relations. Unfortunately, however, my father was not on good terms with +them. His elder brother--my uncle--had quarrelled with him. Why, I do +not know. But when, before we were leaving England, papa desired to be +reconciled to him, he refused; and I know, from what I have heard, that +he would on no account have anything to say to Emily or me." + +"But had your mother no relations?" asked Captain Davenport. + +"Not many. She had, I know, a brother, and I think I recollect him when +I was a little boy; but he left England many years ago, and I know has +not for a long time been heard of. Papa, besides his brother, had some +cousins. One, I know, is Lord Heatherly; but I never saw him, and I +think papa kept up no communication with him. We now and then saw his +brother, Mr Tom Heathfield--for the family name is the same as ours. +He is a very good-natured, merry person, and used always to try to make +us laugh when he called. And our eldest uncle had some sons, but I +never met them; indeed, I am sure their papa would never have let them +come to the house." + +"From all accounts, then, the only relation you know anything about is +your father's cousin, Mr Tom Heathfield. Do you know where he lives?" + +Walter thought a moment. "No," he answered; "somewhere in London, I +know, and I daresay I can find out." + +"Well, we must do our best to discover him when we get on shore," said +the captain. + +It was evident to him that the young people had not realised their +thoroughly destitute condition. Whatever property their poor father +might have had must have been lost in the _Mountaineer_. "However," he +thought to himself, "if the brother's heart cannot be moved to take care +of the orphans, perhaps this Mr Tom Heathfield or Lord Heatherly will +do so. In the meantime, I must look after them." + +The _Bussorah Merchant_ reached the Thames in safety, and went into the +docks to discharge her cargo. + +"You must come with me, my young friends, till we can find out your +cousin," said the kind captain. "My good wife, Mrs Davenport, will be +very glad to see you, as will our little girl Grace. You must be +content with such fare as we can offer, and you may be sure of a hearty +welcome." + +"Thank you, sir," said Walter. "Emily and I, I am sure, shall be very +happy with you. Do you live in the West End of London?" + +"No," answered the captain, smiling; "I live at Poplar. It is a +different sort of locality; but I have had a good many losses, and am +not so well off as some masters of ships. But my life has been +preserved when others have lost theirs, and I retain my health and +strength. I have a good wife and an affectionate little girl, and I +have therefore reason to be thankful; and so I am." + +Captain Davenport, as soon as he was at liberty, accompanied by his +young charges, set off for his home. It differed, however, greatly from +the sort of house Walter and Emily had been accustomed to live in. But +it was very neat; with green palings in front, and neatly-painted +shutters, and the whitest of stone steps leading up to the hall door. +The captain had had no time to tell his wife of the guests she might +expect. After, therefore, the first greetings between them were over, +and he had embraced his little daughter Grace, Mrs Davenport naturally +inquired who the young strangers were. No sooner had she heard their +history than she gave an affectionate embrace to Emily. + +"Yes, indeed, you are welcome here," she said; "and if you are content +with this house, we shall be glad to have you remain in it. And I am +sure Grace will do her best to make you at home, young lady," she said, +placing the girls' hands in each other's. + +The captain, of course, had a great deal to do on his first arrival +after a long absence, and could not, therefore, go in search of Mr Tom +Heathfield, Walter's cousin. Walter acknowledged that he was not likely +to find him himself, as he had but seldom been in London, and did not +know his way about. All he could tell was, that he lived somewhere in +the West End, and he thought he belonged to two or three clubs. + +"Very likely, young gentleman," said the captain, laughing. "However, +when I can get hold of one of those books they call Court Guides, I may +be able to find him." + +A week passed pleasantly enough away. Grace was very kind to Emily, and +Walter was never tired of walking about the docks, and watching the +large ships loading and unloading the bales and casks of goods coming +and going to all parts of the world. It gave him some idea of the vast +amount of commerce of London, when such a stream of merchandise was +coming in and going out all day long. + +At length the captain told him that he had some hours to spare, and they +set off together to try and find Mr Heathfield. They got down at +Charing Cross, where a bookseller allowed them to look over a Court +Guide. + +"Yes, that must be my cousin," said Walter, seeing the name. "I now +remember going there with my father. Yes, and those are the clubs he +belongs to." + +Having put down the address, the captain and Walter at once set off to +find it. They were not long in getting there. A woman opened the door. + +"Mr Heathfield is not in town; he seldom is at this time," was the +answer. "He may come up for a day, or he may not; but letters addressed +here will find him." + +"But can you tell me where he is?" asked Walter. "I am a relation of +his." + +"As to that, he may be at Newmarket, or some other races. You know he +is a sporting gentleman, and is likely to be in one place one day and in +another place another. But he sends for his letters, and, as I have +told you, if you like to write, one will find him." + +This was not very satisfactory information. + +"I am afraid he is not likely to do much for the poor children," thought +Captain Davenport. "However, there is nothing like trying." + +He then bethought him that he would inquire the address of their uncle, +whose heart might relent when he heard of the death of his brother. "If +not, I will write to Lord Heatherly himself," said the captain. + +The nobleman's address was easily found, and after some trouble the +captain ascertained that of Walter's uncle, and with this information he +returned home. + +"You must have patience, my boy," he said. "If you are not tired of +staying with us, we are not tired of you." + +On reaching home, the captain wrote the three letters. Several days +passed by, and no answer came. At length two appeared by the same post. +One was from the orphans' uncle, stating that he had children of his +own, and that he had long ceased to have any communication with his +brother. He must therefore decline interfering in the matter. The +other contained the words:--"Lord Heatherly presents his compliments to +Mr Davenport, and not having been personally acquainted with the late +Mr Heathfield for many years, must decline in any way interfering with +regard to any children he may have left." + +"Oh dear me!" said Mrs Davenport, when she saw the letters. "If the +poor young orphans are treated in this way by their nearest relative and +by the head of their family, I am afraid we can expect very little from +the only other relation we have heard of." + +"Well, my dear wife," said the captain, "if nobody else looks after +them, God intends that we shall. We must not decline the charge he has +given us, but do the best we can for them." + +The following day a private cab was seen passing along the street with a +sporting-looking tiger behind. The gentleman driving stopped once or +twice, then turning round, brought up at Captain Davenport's door. Down +jumped the tiger, and out sprang the gentleman. Walter and Emily were +in the parlour. + +"Why, that is cousin Tom!" exclaimed Walter, and he ran out to open the +front door. + +Cousin Tom came in, and shook hands with Walter and Emily, and was soon +talking away to Mrs Davenport as if he had known her all his life. + +"I am very much obliged to you and to your worthy husband for all you +have done for these young people," he said. "And my poor cousin Harry, +I little thought he was so soon to be cut off. However, we must not +talk about those sort of things. Why, Walter, you are almost a man now. +We must see what we can do for you. Your uncle Bob will not help you; +I have heard all about that. We will not talk about him; and as for +Heatherly, there is no help to be got from him. I am going out of town +to-night, or I would have had you, Walter, come and dine with me and +talk matters over. However, if your friends will look after you for a +day or two longer, I hope we may settle something. I have an idea that +my aunt, Lady Di Pierpoint, will take charge of Emily. I must insist +upon her doing so. She mixes a good deal in the world, rouges, and is +rather addicted to scandal, it is true; but I say, Emily, you must not +follow her example, and you will get on very well with her. Look after +her lapdogs, feed her parrots, write her notes for her, and all that +sort of thing. Well, I think we may consider that settled.--And now, my +good madam, I must wish you and the young people good-bye. I hope to be +back in a few days with Lady Di's answer. And as to Walter, I have no +doubt about him. In the meantime, I will just beg you to take these two +notes, which you will have the kindness to expend as you think best in +getting a proper outfit for the young people--as I have no doubt they +lost everything when the ship went down; and I should wish, if you will +allow me, to repay you for the expense to which you have been put." + +"Thank you, sir," said Mrs Davenport. "We desire no repayment; but I +will gladly expend the money to the advantage of my young friends as you +desire." + +"Well, well, do as you like!" exclaimed Mr Tom. "I am very much +obliged to you in every way. And now, good-bye, Emily; good-bye, +Walter; and I wish you farewell, madam. Present my compliments to your +kind husband. I should have liked to have made his acquaintance. I +hope to do so another time. I am deeply indebted to him, for I had a +great regard for poor Harry. Though he might not have been very wise-- +none of us are; and his wife, she was an angel. Good-bye, good-bye!" + +Thus rattling on, Mr Tom Heathfield ran out at the door, and jumped +into his cab; the tiger skipped up behind, and off he drove. + +Day after day passed by, and no news came of Mr Tom Heathfield. The +packet he had left behind contained a couple of ten-pound notes, with a +few words written on the paper surrounding them:--"It is all I have got; +but if Constellation wins, I will send another hundred." + +Captain Davenport was now again busily engaged in preparing his ship for +another voyage. She required but few repairs, so she was likely to be +soon ready. He had resolved to take his wife and daughter with him; and +Grace was _very_ full of the thoughts of accompanying her father. Mrs +Davenport had made two or three voyages; but Grace had not been at sea +since she was a very little girl. + +"I wish I was going too," said Emily; "how delightful it would be!" + +"I am sure I wish that I was going!" exclaimed Walter. "I have often +thought I should like to be a sailor; and though I once should only have +wished to go into the royal navy, I should now like to go anywhere with +Captain Davenport." + +Week after week passed by. The _Bussorah Merchant_ was ready for sea. +A cabin had been fitted up for Mrs Davenport, and another for Grace. +No news came from Mr Tom Heathfield. Captain Davenport wrote: he +considered it his duty to do so. The day before he sailed, his letter +came back in an enclosure, stating that Mr Tom Heathfield had broken +his neck riding a steeple-chase, and that though he had wished to leave +his property to his young cousin, as all would be swallowed up in paying +his debts, there would be none forthcoming. Walter and Emily felt very +sorry when they heard the sad end of their poor cousin, though Emily +confessed to Grace she was very glad that she had not to go and live +with Lady Di Pierpoint. + +"Well, my young friends," said Captain Davenport, "I have no one with +whom I can leave you, and I certainly will not desert you. If, +therefore, Emily would like to come and be Grace's companion, we shall +be very glad of her company; and, Walter, if you wish to come to sea and +learn to be a sailor, I will undertake to instruct you as if you were my +own son." + +Walter was truly glad to accept the kind captain's offer; indeed, it +would be difficult to say what else he could do. + +"When we return to England," said Captain Davenport, "we will make more +inquiries about your relations, and if they still persist in refusing to +acknowledge you, you will, at all events, have learned a profession, and +be independent of them. After all, you will be far better off than had +you been brought up in idleness, and dependent on those who might care +very little for your true interests and welfare." + + + +CHAPTER THREE. + +WALTER HEATHFIELD'S JOURNAL. + +The _Bussorah Merchant_ was now ready for sea. Mr Thudicumb was first +mate, as he had been on the previous voyage; Dick Tarbox was boatswain; +young Oliver Farwell was cabin-boy. Merlin, too, who indeed never left +the ship, was on board, and welcomed my sister and me, whom he +recognised the moment we appeared with signs of the greatest +satisfaction. The ship was bound out to the coast of China and Japan, +with a prospect of visiting several other interesting places before she +returned home. I was delighted with the thoughts of all I should see, +and was very glad to find on board several books descriptive of those +regions. The ship came to an anchor at Gravesend, where several +passengers joined her. Among them was a gentleman with very broad +shoulders, a broad forehead, and light curling hair covered by a very +broad-brimmed white hat. His eyes were blue and remarkably keen; he had +a nose somewhat turned up; and a firm mouth, with a pleasing smile, +showing a set of strong white teeth. He brought with him a number of +cases and boxes; among them gun-cases, and fishing-rods, and cases which +looked as if they enclosed instruments, with numerous other articles not +usually carried by travellers. His business-like, quiet manner showed +that he was well accustomed to move about the world. Who he could be I +could not tell. Soon after he came on board he called Oliver Farwell to +help him arrange his cabin; but as Oliver had other duties to attend to, +I offered my services. + +"Yes, my lad, I shall be very much obliged to you," said the gentleman. +"I should have liked to have got these things on board before the ship +left the docks; but there was no time for that; and it is important that +they should be secured before we get into a tumbling sea, from which +they may receive damage." + +I observed that Mr Nicholas Hooker was painted on all the cases, and of +course concluded that such was the name of the gentleman. He had a +number of screws with which he fastened some of the articles to the +bulkheads, and lashed others in a seamanlike fashion. There were charts +and telescopes; indeed, from the various articles he had with him, I +fancied that perhaps the gentleman was a naval officer. Still, as I did +not see R.N. at the end of his name, I thought again that he could not +be so. + +At length Mr Hooker, having unpacked his books, various instruments, +and other articles, begged that the cases might be stowed away below. +His directions were promptly obeyed, and having surveyed his cabin, he +seemed satisfied that all was in perfect order. + +"Now, young gentleman," he said, with a pleasant smile which won my +confidence, "I daresay you would like to know what all these things are +for. Some are for taking the latitude and longitude, ascertaining the +exact position of places on the earth's surface. Others are for +measuring the height of mountains, some the temperature of the air and +water, and so on. Then I have cases for creatures which move in the +water or fly in the air, which walk or crawl on the earth or burrow +beneath it; and I have the means of shooting them or trapping them. +Those I can, I hope to preserve alive; and if not, to be able to exhibit +to my scientific friends, when I return home, the forms of some perfect, +the skins of others, and the skeletons of others. And now, having told +you thus much, I must leave you to guess what I profess myself to be. +One thing I can tell you, I know very, very little compared to what +there is to be known. I hope to gain more knowledge but I am very well +aware that, gain all I can, I can but add a very small portion to what +is already known, and a still smaller compared to what is to be +ascertained. Here comes the captain. We are old friends, and that +induced me to select this ship for my voyage. Are you his son?" + +"No, sir," I answered; "but he is a very kind friend of mine; and were +it not for him, I know not what would have become of me and my sister." + +The _Bussorah Merchant_ had a fine passage down Channel, and taking her +departure from the Land's End, stood across the Bay of Biscay. Four +days afterwards the captain told us that we were in the latitude of Cape +Finisterre, but no land was to be seen. Another eight days, with the +wind abeam, carried us into the neighbourhood of the island of Madeira. + +"Would not it be as well to have a look at it, sir," I said, "and then +we shall better know where we are." + +The captain smiled. "That is not at all necessary," he answered. "By +the observations we are able to take with the perfect instruments we +possess, we are able at all times to ascertain our exact position on the +ocean; and we might thus sail round either Cape Horn or the Cape of Good +Hope to New South Wales without once sighting land till we were about to +enter Port Jackson." + +"It is very wonderful," I said. "What puzzles me is how you can find +the longitude. I know you get the latitude by seeing how high the sun +is above the horizon at noon, and then with the aid of the nautical +almanac you can easily work out the calculation." + +"With the aid of the chronometer we can as easily ascertain the +longitude, though the calculation is a little longer," answered Captain +Davenport. "I can explain it to you more easily. The chronometer shows +us the exact time at Greenwich. We know by our nautical almanac that, +at a certain hour on a certain day, the sun will have attained at +Greenwich a certain altitude. When on that day and that hour we find +that the sun is so many minutes behind hand in attaining that altitude, +we know we must be a certain distance further to the west, as, the world +turning from west to east, the more westerly a place is the longer it +will be before the sun appears there. If, on the contrary, we find the +sun has gained a fixed altitude some time before it would have gained +that altitude at Greenwich, we know that we must be to the east of +Greenwich, or have met the sun sooner than the people at Greenwich have +done. Thus, the further we sail east day after day, the sooner we see +the sun; while the further we sail west, the longer the time which +passes before he shines upon us." + +"I think I have an idea about it now, sir," I exclaimed; "and I should +be very much obliged if you will show me how to take an observation and +to make use of the books, as well as to work out the calculations. Why, +may I ask, do you cry Stop, sir, to the second officer or to Mr +Thudicumb, who are watching the chronometer while you are taking an +observation?" + +"That they may mark the exact moment shown on the chronometer, while I +mark the sun's elevation as shown on the index of the sextant." + +"But then you take observations at night sometimes, sir, looking at the +moon or the stars?" + +"We do that to discover the distance which one star appears from another +at a certain hour, or their elevation above the horizon. The object is +the same as that for which we take an observation of the sun, though the +calculation is rather more intricate." + +After this I set to work, and whenever the captain and his mates took an +observation, I took one also, although I was, I must own, at first very +far from correct. Sometimes my observation was imperfect; at other +times I made mistakes in the calculation. + +At length the ship, which had been favoured with a breeze more or less +strong ever since she left England, was becalmed. Sometimes she got a +little wind which lasted for an hour or two, and then died away; then +light airs came, first from one quarter, then from another, and the crew +were constantly employed in bracing up, or squaring away the yards. + +"It is always like this in these Horse Latitudes," said the boatswain as +he walked the forecastle, where I had gone to have a talk with him. + +"Why do you call them `Horse Latitudes?'" I asked, as I listened to his +remarks. + +"Why, I have heard say that they were so called by the Yankees, or the +people of _New_ England, before they were separated from Old England. +They used to send out deckloads of horses to the West Indies, and they +were very often kept becalmed so long in these latitudes that their +water grew scarce, and to save the lives of some of the horses they were +obliged to throw the others overboard; so that is how this part of the +ocean came to be called the `Horse Latitudes.'" + +I afterwards told Mr Hooker what Tarbox had said. + +"A more scientific name would be the Tropic of Cancer," he answered. +"We had a good breeze before we entered it, but often the wind to the +north of where we now are is very variable. After we have passed this +belt of calm and light airs we shall get into the regions of the +north-east trades, which will carry us along at a fine rate till we get +into the very worst part of the ocean for trying a person's temper, +called the Doldrums. Remember to ask me more about it when we get +there. You will remember, then, the Variables are to the north of the +Tropic of Cancer. The `Horse Latitudes' are on either side of the +Tropic. Then we get into the north-east trade-winds, which carry us up +to the Doldrums about the Equator; and passing through them with more or +less trial of temper, we get into the south-east trade-winds, which we +shall have to cross with our tacks aboard. Then we shall probably find +calms about the Tropic of Capricorn; after which, without once sighting +land, we may very likely find a breeze, more or less favourable, but +seldom against us, which will carry us through the Straits of Sunda, +between Java and Sumatra, to the west of the great island of Borneo, +right away to the north, through the China sea, leaving the Philippine +Islands on our right hand, up to Japan. I will have a talk with you +another day about those East India Islands, for they are very curious, +and are probably less generally known than most parts of the world." + +The events occurred very much as Mr Hooker had predicted. For nearly a +whole week our ship lay with her head sometimes one way, sometimes +another, the sails flapping against the masts. Then she got a breeze +which carried her a few miles further to the south, and people's spirits +began to rise, soon again to fall when once more the sails would give a +loud flap, and hang down without a particle of wind in them. At length, +however, they once more bulged out. The yards were squared away. The +captain walked the deck with a more elastic step than for the last week +had been the case, and on the ship went hour after hour, the breeze +rather increasing than lessening. + +"We are in the north-east trades," observed Mr Hooker. "Little fear +now, for another two weeks or so we shall have a fine run of it." + +Three day after this, a seaman from aloft shouted out, "Land ahead!" + +"Ay, ay," answered Mr Thudicumb, who had charge of the deck. "It is +land that will not hurt us, though;" and he continued to let the ship +run on in the course she had been steering. + +Curious to know what had attracted the man's attention, I went aloft, +and there I saw spread out on the surface of the calm ocean, what looked +like a dark field, but little raised, however, above the water. On +returning on deck, I told the first officer that I really thought there +must be land ahead. + +"No, Walter, no fear of that," answered Mr Thudicumb; "we are crossing +the Sargasso Sea. You will observe that it is merely sea-weed and +drift-wood collected in this spot from all parts of the ocean. The +currents and winds bring it, but why this place is selected I do not +exactly know. In a calm it might bother us, but we shall only pass +through a small portion of it, and there is wind enough to send us along +in spite of the obstruction it may offer. We must get a bucket ready, +for Mr Hooker will be anxious to have some of it up on deck, that he +may examine the creatures who live upon it. In the Pacific there is a +collection of the same sort, and people who could not otherwise for want +of fuel inhabit some of the islands in that region, are enabled to do so +in consequence of the supply of drift-wood it brings them." + +The ship, soon clear of the Sargasso Sea, glided on proudly, with all +sail set below and aloft. The weather was delightful; the passengers +constantly on deck. Emily and Grace were very happy together, for +everything was new and interesting. They had plenty of employment; for +Mrs Davenport, knowing what a sea voyage is, had brought work of all +sorts. And then they had books; and they were not above running about +the deck, and playing at ball occasionally, and _Les Graces_, and other +games suitable for ship-board. + +Thus day after day passed pleasantly by: the sea sparkling, the sky +bright, or occasionally mottled with light clouds. One morning, +however, when they came on deck expecting to see the blue sky above +their heads, they saw only a thick canopy of clouds. The sails were +flapping against the masts; the air was oppressive. There the ship lay, +her head moving now in one direction, now in another. Those who had +before been full of life and spirits began to complain of lassitude and +weariness. The seamen no longer moved actively about the decks, but +went sauntering along when called upon to perform any duty. The heat +grew greater and greater. The iron about the ship was unpleasant to +touch. The pitch bubbled in the seams of the deck and stuck to the +feet. Emily and Grace no longer wished to play at ball, or _Les +Graces_, or any other game. Even Merlin went disconsolately up and down +the decks, as if he thought something serious was going to happen. I +felt as I had seldom felt before. + +"Are we going to have a storm, sir?" I asked of the captain. "I have +read that storms are apt to come on after weather such as we now have." + +"I do not expect one," answered Captain Davenport, "though we may +possibly have a squall of a few hours' duration; and I should not be +sorry for it, if it would carry us out of this region. We are now in +the Doldrums." + +"Not a bad name, considering the condition of all us poor mortals on +board," observed Mr Hooker. + +"We are now under the cloud ring which encircles this part of the earth. +God has placed these clouds above our heads in this region for a +particular purpose. You will observe that the thermometer and barometer +stand lower under this cloud ring than they do on either side of it. +The clouds not only promote the precipitation which takes place in this +region, but they also cause the rains to fall on places where they are +most required, shading the surface from which the heating rays of the +sun are to be excluded, and thus giving tone to the atmospherical +circulation of the world and vigour to its vegetation. You have often, +when the sun is sending his rays with great heat down on the earth, seen +the atmosphere dancing, as it were, and trembling. This appearance is +caused by the ascending and descending columns of air. The cloud ring +creates on a greater scale this circulation of the atmosphere; indeed, +the more we examine the phenomena of Nature, the more we shall discover +the hand of a directing Providence, in suiting all things for the +convenience and use of the beings placed by Him on the earth." + +Day after day the ship remained in this calm region with a cloudy sky. +People began to feel ill; and some fancied that as they were going +further south the heat would increase, and could scarcely understand +that as they proceeded the atmosphere would again become cold. Captain +Davenport and the officers were on the watch to make use of every breath +of air which would forward the ship on her course; and at length she +once more got the breeze, and those who had before been complaining of +lassitude and illness suddenly revived and came on deck to enjoy the +renovating and refreshing breeze. The sky was clear; the sea bright and +sparkling as before. Cheerful countenances were everywhere visible, +instead of the weary, downcast looks which most of those on board had +worn for the previous ten days. The only person who never seemed +depressed was Mr Hooker. When not taking exercise on deck, he always +had a volume in his hand, from which he was constantly making notes into +his pocket-book. + +"You see, my young friend," he said to me one day, "I am anxious to +ascertain what others have known, because all that man can aim at is to +increase the stock of knowledge possessed by his fellow-men." + +The varied changes of the ocean, and the creatures which appeared +beneath its surface, and occasionally above it, afforded us an unfailing +source of interest. On a bright morning I was engaged with some work by +the side of the boatswain when I heard Grace cry out-- + +"Oh, look--look what funny birds!" + +"Why, miss, those are not birds, unless they may be called water birds; +those are flying-fish," said Mr Tarbox, who had come with me to the +ship's side. + +Others, with Mr Hooker, came also, looking on at the curious sight. +Numbers of fish with wings, or more properly fins, as long as their +bodies, were rising out of the water and darting along for a +considerable distance above the surface, again, however, to fall +helplessly into their native element. Directly after them, in pursuit, +appeared several large fish--now one of the latter leaped half out of +the water, now another, seldom failing to catch one of the beautiful +creatures in its huge jaws. + +"The dolphins are getting a fine banquet," I heard Mr Hooker remark. +"The poor _dactylopteri_ are the sufferers; but they do not fall a prey +to their persecutors without a brave attempt to escape. See, no sooner +have they wetted their wings than they are out of the water again, and +will lead them a long chase, till the dolphins are wearied out." + +We watched the pursuers and pursued till they were lost to sight in the +distance. + +The ship once clear of the Doldrums, met the steady trade-wind blowing +from the south-east. With her tacks aboard, she stood away towards the +South American coast. When I went on deck at night, I observed a change +in the appearance of the constellations; and now the beautiful one of +the Southern Cross became every day clearer, rising as it were in the +sky. The magellhenic clouds also came in sight, showing that the ship +was now in the southern hemisphere. Frequently patches of light were +passed in the water; caused, Mr Hooker told me, by the _pyrosoma_. +They exhibited a beautiful pale silvery light; but when they were taken +out of the water the light disappeared, till any particular part of the +creature was touched, when the light again burst forth at that point, +pervading the whole animal mass. + +The _Bussorah Merchant_ did not, however, as many ships do, touch at Rio +de Janeiro; but passing through another belt of calms at the Tropic of +Capricorn, kept away eastward towards the Cape of Good Hope. One +evening, while I was keeping watch under the first officer--for I was +considered fit to take regular duty on board--the ship running at the +rate of four or five knots an hour through the water, I heard a sound as +if substances were falling upon the deck. As I went to windward, a +large dark object, wet and cold, struck me on the shoulder, and then +fell down. I instantly sung out; when the boatswain, who was on deck, +brought a lantern; and there, to the surprise of all of us, a dozen or +more cuttle fish were found, which had sprung over the weather bulwark. + +"Well," exclaimed Mr Tarbox, "I never did see such a thing as this +before." + +Mr Hooker, however, said that he had heard of it, as the creatures can +spring an immense distance. "I have known some," he said, "to spring +right over a ship; though, certainly, to look at them, it is difficult +to ascertain their means of rising out of the water." + +The island of Tristan da Cunha was sighted, looming in the evening light +like some huge monster rising out of the ocean. Looking over the sides +the water appeared unusually clear; and I could see, far down, the fish +swimming about by the side of the ship. Even Mr Hooker, however, did +not succeed in catching any. The stormy petrel now made its appearance; +and I and Emily and Grace were delighted soon afterwards to see a +magnificent white bird with outstretched wings following the ship. "An +albatross! an albatross!" I shouted, for I guessed at once what it was. +Mr Hooker said he wished to catch two or three and prepare them to +send back to England by the _Bussorah Merchant_. He accordingly made +preparations to catch them. + +"I should not like to shoot one though," I remarked. "You remember what +became of the `Ancient Mariner' who shot an albatross; how his ship +floated all alone on the ocean day after day, and week after week, and +month after month, till all on board had died and he alone remained." + +"Oh no; pray don't!" exclaimed Emily, "lest so dreadful a fate should +overtake us." + +"It is only a fancy of the poet's, perhaps," I remarked. "At the same +time I like to try and believe it." + +"I hope the same fate does not overtake those who catch the bird with a +bait. It is his own fault, recollect, if he swallows it," said Mr +Hooker, who had now got a strong line with a hook and a piece of meat on +it, with a float to keep it from sinking. This he now veered astern. I +could not help admiring the wondrous power exhibited by the bird as it +glided on without flapping its wings. Now one was seen to dash down at +a piece of refuse which the cook had thrown overboard, slowly again to +rise and then to follow the ship, apparently without the slightest +exertion. + +"That gives me an idea," said Mr Hooker, throwing a large piece of fat +overboard before he let go his baited hook. Again the albatross darted +down on it; and then, without rising again, swam vigorously after the +baited hook. + +"There--he has snapped it up!" I exclaimed. + +Instantly the bird found the obstruction. When the sailors who had come +aft began to attempt to haul him in, out went his wings, with which he +endeavoured to hold himself back, offering a powerful resistance to the +line. Although three men were pulling away with might and main, yet the +bird could not be drawn nearer the stern; and, at length, crack went the +line, and off it flew with the hook and the remainder of the line in its +mouth. + +"Poor creature! I am afraid it will die a miserable death, instead of +speedily being put out of its sufferings, as it would have been had it +more wisely come on board," observed Mr Hooker. "However, we must get +another line and take care there is no flaw in it." + +The passengers now amused themselves by throwing bits of meat overboard, +and seeing the albatrosses pounce down and snap up the tempting morsels. +At last Mr Hooker's fresh line was got ready. No sooner had the bait +reached the water than down pounced a bird upon it, rising immediately +with the hook in his mouth. This time the sailors, instead of pulling +the line up, had to haul it down, just as a paper kite is hauled down +from the sky; and, at length, by running forward, the huge bird was +brought on deck. Still it fought bravely with its wings, which it would +have been dangerous for any one to have approached. At length Mr +Hooker put an end to its sufferings by a blow from a boat's stretcher. +The other albatrosses, in no way disconcerted by the disappearance of +their companion, still followed the ship. Two more were caught; one +hauled out of the water, the other hauled on deck like the first. + +A young gentleman going out to Japan then made his appearance with a gun +in his hand; and in spite of my warnings of what might be our fate +should he kill one, began firing away at the birds. Even a practised +marksman would not have found it easy to hit one of them, although they +were in no way scared by the report of the gun. At length, however, a +bullet struck one of them on the head, just as he descended into the +water. In an instant down pounced his companions, driving their beaks +into the dead body; and in a few minutes, while it still remained in +sight, they had torn it almost to pieces. + +"I hope no harm will come of that shot of yours," I said to the young +civilian; "but look out!" + +The young gentleman laughed, and said he did not believe in such +nonsense. Mr Hooker was soon busily employed in skinning his +albatrosses and preparing the skins for stuffing. + + + +CHAPTER FOUR. + +I PERFORM A SATISFACTORY EXPLOIT. + +Scarcely had the albatross been shot, than the wind, which had hitherto +been moderate, increased considerably, and in a short time we had two +reefs in our topsails. The weather, however, was in other respects +fine, and away the ship went, careering over the foaming seas like a +high-bred hunter, dashing them aside as she rushed onward on her course. +There was something very exhilarating in the movement. The air, too, +was bracing, and everybody seemed in high spirits. As I happened to +pass the caboose, however, I heard Potto Jumbo, the black cook, +grumbling greatly. Some one had told him that he would have to roast +one of the albatrosses for dinner. Although generally a very merry, +good-natured fellow, this had made him excessively irate. + +"No good ever came from shooting albatross!" I heard him exclaim. "Dey +like to live as much as man. Dey love freedom. Soar high, high up in +de sky, den swoop down, and fly along de foaming waves. Ah, if I had +wings like dem, I no peel potatoes and boil soup for ship's company!" + +He looked up, as he spoke, towards the magnificent birds which ever and +anon appeared high above the ship's bulwarks, as they darted forward as +if to show at how far greater a rate they could dart through the air +than she could glide over the ocean. + +"Ah, you once slave, Potto Jumbo! Fancy you flying with white wings! +Ha, ha, ha!" + +This remark was made by a dark-skinned native of the East, who was +standing at the time near the caboose. He was the serang of the +Lascars, of whom we had a dozen on board. Ali Tomba was his name. He +and Potto Jumbo could not abide each other, so it seemed. His dark +countenance, with high cheek-bones and fierce eyes, was far from +prepossessing, though his figure was well-formed; his shoulders broad, +with a small waist, and muscular arms and legs, denoting great strength +and activity. His hands and feet were wonderfully small, considering +the work to which they had been put from his earliest days. He and his +men wore their Eastern dress, consisting of shirt and jacket, and a sort +of kilt formed from a circular piece of plaid, a scarf worn over the +shoulders, which served as a covering in bad weather, or could be +wrapped round the arm for a shield in battle. A red cotton +handkerchief, generally well stiffened, was their usual head-dress. +They were remarkably active fellows aloft, and few things which an +English sailor could do they would not venture to undertake. However, +neither Ali nor his men were favourites on board. They obeyed the +superior officers readily enough, but I observed that when Mr Tarbox +directed them to do anything, they did it in a sulky way. Why this was +I could not make out.--Ali stood by, bantering the cook about his +remark. Potto Jumbo had taken a liking to me. He had been on board the +ship in her former voyage, and I believe knew my history. He himself +was deserted--without friends in the world--and this gave him a fellow +feeling, as he considered that his case was similar to mine. I had an +idea, indeed, that there was more in Potto Jumbo than appeared. Though +he had a warm and quick temper, he was evidently kind-hearted I judged +it by the way he treated the animals on board. Merlin, especially, was +a favourite of his, and he took good care that he should never be +without a plentiful dinner. Even in the way he put the dog's food down +he showed his kind disposition; and while he was mixing up the mess and +Merlin stood by wagging his tail and licking his lips, Potto Jumbo +always cast a kind glance downwards at his four-footed friend, and +generally had a pleasant word to give him into the bargain. + +For Oliver Farwell, however, he had a greater regard than for anybody on +board. I rather think because he more than any one else seemed to +require sympathy and protection. Though the boy had plenty of spirit, +he seemed scarcely fitted for the rough life on board ship. The other +boys, when they could do so without being seen by Potto Jumbo, amused +themselves by ridiculing and teasing Oliver. They seemed to delight in +playing him all sorts of tricks, and very often pretty rough ones too. +I had never spoken much to Oliver, though I observed that whenever Mr +Hooker was describing anything, Oliver, if he could do so without +impropriety, stopped and listened, and seemed to take great interest in +what was said. When work was over, I often saw him in the pantry +reading. Not only on Sundays, but every day nearly, it seemed to me, he +read the Bible at odd moments; indeed, a sailor at sea, unless he takes +odd moments for reading, may never read at all. Oliver had not only his +duties as a cabin-boy to attend to, but as he wished to become a sailor, +and the captain desired that he should become one, he was frequently +employed on deck. + +At the moment I am describing, Oliver Farwell had gone forward, and with +several other boys was in the fore-rigging. What they were about I do +not remember, but, looking up, I saw they were skylarking, and it seemed +as if the others were trying to play Oliver some trick. Be that as it +may, all of a sudden I saw one of them fall from aloft. I thought it +was Oliver. Of course it ought not to have made any difference to me +who it was. I expected that he would be killed, but he struck the +hammock nettings, and bounded overboard. I did not stop a moment to +think. It did not occur to me that it would take a long time to heave +the ship to, and to lower a boat, and with the heavy sea running the +operation would be a difficult and dangerous one, and that it would be +equally difficult to pick anybody out of the water. I had been noted at +school for being a good swimmer, and had, just before I left, saved the +life of a school-fellow who had got out of his depth, and been carried +out a good way by the current. I had followed him, dived after he had +sank, and brought him to the surface, and then hauled him on to the bank +of the river where we were bathing. I remembered this, or perhaps I +should say I did not think about anything but the one idea of saving the +life of a fellow-creature. I was lightly clad. Throwing off my jacket, +before Potto Jumbo could cry out, or any one else attempt to stop me, I +was overboard. I was in the water almost as soon as the cry of "A man +overboard!" was raised. + +A glance aloft showed me that it was Oliver Farwell who had fallen. As +I reached the water I could see him on the top of a wave, just as the +ship's quarter glided past me. I shouted out to him, and swam forward. +I now found how different it was swimming in smooth water and swimming +in the heavy sea there was running. At the same time I had been +accustomed to fresh water, which is less buoyant than salt, and thus I +felt myself greatly supported. + +The instant the cry of "A man overboard!" was raised, a life-buoy was +let go. It fell some distance from me. I doubted whether I should swim +to that and tow it to Oliver, or go to Oliver first and try to get him +up to it. My fear was that Oliver would sink before I could reach him. +I determined to get hold of Oliver. I could hear the cries of the +people on board as they watched me, encouraging me in my attempt. I had +scarcely been in the water ten minutes when I heard a peculiar rushing +sound, and turning round my head saw the long wings of an enormous +albatross passing close above me. A blow from its beak would have been +fatal. I looked towards Oliver more anxiously than ever, fearing that, +passing me, it might strike him. I shouted to him, and told him to +shout too, hoping that the noise might scare off the bird. Others, +however, came sweeping by. Again a wing almost touched my head. +Diving, I knew, would have been of no use, for the creature might have +followed me far lower than I could have sunk. Still I swam on. + +I heard another shout, and as I rose to the top of a wave I saw just +astern of the ship a black head and face--it was Potto Jumbo. Above his +head he waved a long knife. He intended it as a signal that he was +coming to my assistance. At the same instant a loud bark came from the +stern of the ship, and I saw Merlin, who appeared one moment at the +taffrail, and the next leaped over into the foaming ocean. Nearer and +nearer he approached. I was more anxious for him than for my human +friend, as I was afraid the albatrosses would attack him, and he had no +means of defending himself. Although I had followed Oliver almost +immediately into the water, it seemed a long time before I could get up +to him. A curling wave rolled towards him; he was buried beneath it. I +thought he had sunk for ever. I darted forward, and caught sight of him +just beneath the surface. I seized him by the collar of his jacket, and +together we rose to the surface. He was still conscious. + +"Throw yourself on your back!" I cried. I helped him to do so. And +now I struck out for the life-buoy. A sea providentially threw it +towards us. Sooner than I could have expected I had hold of it, and had +placed one of the beckets in Oliver's hands. Not a moment too soon. I +turned my glance upward for an instant at the bright blue sky, out of +which the hot sun shone on the sparkling waters. Suddenly a dark shadow +seemed to intervene. I heard a rushing sound, distinct amid the roar of +the waves, and, to my horror, I saw close above me a huge pair of white +wings, from which projected the head and formidable beak of a bird. He +was darting towards me. A blow from that beak might have struck either +of us senseless. The only means of defence I could think of was my +shoe. I pulled it from my foot to ward off the blow. The bird seized +it, and, as if content with his prize, off he flew. A shout of applause +from Potto Jumbo reached us, and in another minute he and Merlin got up +to the life-buoy. A sea was on the point of taking off Oliver, but +Merlin seized him by the collar, and dragged him back within my reach. +Satisfied for the moment, he kept swimming round and round us, as if +prepared to render any assistance which might be required. I was indeed +thankful that he had come, for I could with difficulty help Oliver to +hold on to the life-buoy. Another, and another bird flew towards us, +but whether frightened at our shouts, or the flourish of Potto Jumbo's +sharp blade, I do not know, but, circling round, they flew off again as +if in search of other prey. + +We could now see the ship hove to. A boat was lowered, but so long was +she before shoving off, so it seemed to me, that we were afraid some +accident had happened. One idea occurred to me while in the water. +Should I be lost, what would become of Emily? I thought of the prayer +of the sinking master of the ship in Falconer's "Shipwreck," and I +prayed for her I loved best on earth, as many a seaman undoubtedly has +prayed, when tossing on the foaming waves. Still I had no fears; I knew +that that prayer would be heard. + +"Keep up, Massa Walter! Keep up!" cried Potto Jumbo, as he helped me to +hold our companion on to the life-buoy, and saw that I indeed required +aid myself. "Keep up, Massa Walter! boat soon come. See, see! dere she +is away from the ship! Hurrah! Never say die! See, she comes! Joe +Tarbox or the first mate in her. Never fear! Hurrah, hurrah!" + +Thus he continued shouting, for the double purpose of keeping up our +spirits, and of scaring away the albatrosses. Now, at length, I saw +that the boat was clear of the ship. On she came. Now she appeared on +the summit of a foaming sea, now she was hid from view in the trough +below it; then again she came in sight, for when she was sinking we at +the same time were rising in most instances, and could therefore look +over the intervening seas. Still the time seemed very long. It +required careful management to get near the life-buoy without striking +us. To pick up one person was difficult, but to take up three the risk +was far greater. + +"You go first!" cried Potto Jumbo, as the boat approached. + +"No, no," I said; "let Oliver be taken in. He is almost drowned as it +is." + +We could see the boat's bows almost above us. It seemed as if the next +instant she would come down like a huge hammer upon our heads. But Joe +Tarbox knew well what he was about, and turned her head aside, while a +strong arm stretched forth, seized hold of Oliver as Potto Jumbo held +him up, and he was safe on board. My companion insisted on my going +next. Again the boat, which had been driven off by the sea, approached +us. + +"Quick! quick!" cried Joe. "Have them both in at once!" + +I was nearest my friend, and seizing hold of me he hauled me in over the +quarter, while Potto sprang to the side, and was dragged in by the other +men. Merlin waited till he saw us both on board, and not till then did +he push for the boat, with his snout lifted up as if asking for +assistance. Ready hands were stretched out to him, and with their help +he quickly scrambled on board, and made his way aft to the stern-sheets, +where he looked into my face as if to inquire whether I was all right. + +"We must have the life-buoy, though," cried Joe; "for another of us may +be falling overboard before long." + +As there was no danger of injuring the life-buoy, that was quickly got +on board. And now commenced our return to the ship. It required +careful steering to make our way amid those heavy seas, and still more +dangerous was it to get alongside. Oliver, who was scarcely conscious, +was first hoisted up. I was very glad of assistance to get up too; for +though I did not feel fatigued, my strength had really almost gone. No +sooner had I reached the deck than I found myself in Emily's arms. + +"Dear, dear Walter!" she exclaimed; "you brave boy; and yet--" and she +burst into tears. + +Mrs Davenport and Grace were close behind her. "You must come below, +Walter--come below and get off your wet things!" they exclaimed. + +Merlin followed Potto Jumbo on deck, and, giving himself a thorough +shaking, came aft, wagging his tail, to receive the approving pats of +his friends; while the black cook, casting a look behind him, which +seemed to say that he was indifferent to the compliments which might +have been paid him, made his way forward into the fore-peak to shift his +wet clothes. + +I will not repeat the complimentary things which were said to me by the +passengers. Mr Hooker wrung my hand. + +"It was well and bravely done, Walter," he exclaimed. "I am glad to see +that you have got it in you." + +"Oh! I did not think about it," I answered honestly. "I once before +picked a fellow out of the water, so I thought I ought to try to do it +again. I know there are a good many people who cannot swim, and I hoped +that I could do it." + +I quickly had my wet things off, and made my appearance again on deck, +not much the worse for my exertions, though perhaps my hand did tremble +a little; and I was not sorry when the captain asked me into the +cuddy-cabin, and gave me a glass of wine. + +"I am thankful that you saved that poor boy, Walter," he said, giving me +one of his kind looks. "I should be deeply grieved to lose him. He is +the only son of a widowed mother, and her heart would have been broken +had he been lost. He had shipped on board a vessel bound for the coast +of Africa, when I found him, and persuaded the captain to let him come +aboard my ship; for the crew were a rough lot, and he would have learned +no good among them, while the risk of losing his life on the coast would +have been very great. His poor mother had seen better days, I found. I +do not know much of her history, but I know she brought up two +daughters, and gave them a good education, and she had done in the same +way all she could for this boy; but I believe that her means failed her, +and she was then unable to pay for his instruction, so that he only got +what she herself could give him. The boy's whole heart had been set on +going to sea, little knowing, of course, what he would have to go +through." + +Soon after we came on board, it began to blow much harder; and we had +good reason to be thankful that the accident had not happened later in +the day. I was, after this event, made a good deal of on board. The +captain observed that I ran a considerable risk of being spoiled. It +was not fair, indeed, that I should get all the praise, when the black +cook had also behaved in a gallant manner. Indeed, if it had not been +for him, I suspect that the albatrosses would have finished both Oliver +and me before the boat could have got up to us. + +"Very glad you escaped, Massa Walter," said Potto Jumbo, the following +day. "Dear me! I jump overboard twice as much sea as dat!" he added, +when I told him how thankful I was to him. "Me fight shark with one big +knife, and cut him under the t'roat and kill him. Potto Jumbo one +'phibious animal, so doctor once say to me. I swim in de water like +porpoise, and climb tree like monkey. Ah! you see de monkeys when we +get out dere," and Potto Jumbo pointed eastward. "Ah! dat one fine +country, only little too hot sometimes for lily-white skins;" and Potto +Jumbo grinned from ear to ear, as if congratulating himself that his own +dark covering was impervious to the sun's rays of that or any other +region. + +Potto Jumbo's chief friend was an English seaman--Roger Trew by name. +Roger was short and stout, with wonderfully long arms, and of immense +strength; but he never put it forth except in the way of duty, and was +on ordinary occasions as mild and gentle as a lamb. I believe Potto +Jumbo admired him because he had the power of knocking any man down on +board who might offend him, and yet did not use it. The captain +considered Trew a good seaman; and so, I know, did Joe Tarbox. His +figure did not appear well suited for going aloft, and yet no man could +more quickly overhaul the weather earing in a heavy gale than he could. +I have said sufficient about the ship's company for the present. I do +not mention others, because there was nothing very remarkable about +them. I had been doing my best to become a seaman ever since I stepped +on board, both by making myself acquainted with every manoeuvre +performed, and learning the arts of knotting and splicing, reefing and +steering, as well as studying navigation. The captain told me that he +was well pleased with my progress, and this encouraged me to persevere. +My great ambition was to learn a profession, and thus to be independent. +It is what all boys should aim at. I had originally no particular +taste for the sea; but having chosen it, I was determined to be a +thorough sailor. How many among my schoolfellows could not make up +their minds what to be, or did not seem to think that it was necessary +to be something or other. Now my idea was, and is stronger now, that +every person ought to possess some especial knowledge of a profession, +calling, or trade, by the practice of which he can maintain himself. If +all boys and lads were impressed with this important practical truth, +how many might be saved from ruin, from "going to the dogs," as the +phrase is, simply because they have no honest means of supporting +themselves. I say this here, because I may otherwise forget to say it +elsewhere, and I am very anxious to impress it on the minds of my +readers. We had two men on board the _Bussorah Merchant_ who had been +at good schools, and at a university, but had failed to benefit by their +advantages. They had had money--one, indeed, several hundreds a year-- +but they had dissipated the whole of it, and had been wandering about +the streets of London for several months utterly penniless, till they +shipped as seaman before the mast on board a ship bound round Cape Horn. +After knocking about in the Pacific for some years, they had returned +home no richer than when they went out, and were glad immediately to +ship aboard us. From their appearance and manners I should not have +suspected what they had been, till one day I heard one of them quoting +"Horace" to the other. He was rather surprised when I capped the verse; +and by degrees, having gained their confidence, they gave me the account +I now repeat, with a great many more circumstances which I do not +consider it necessary to narrate. Poor fellows, they had been so +thoroughly accustomed to the rough ways of the roughest of seamen, that +I suspect they had lost all taste for a more refined style of life. So +I say to my young readers, whatever you do, fix upon a profession, and +try to make yourself thoroughly competent to fill it. Do not rest or +flag till you have done so; and never for a moment suppose that you will +have any permanent enjoyment in an idle life. + +We had got nearly half-way across the Indian Ocean, when, one day as I +was aloft, I saw in the far distance an object which looked like a log +of wood, with a tiny white sail appearing above it. I hailed the deck, +and Mr Thudicumb bringing his glass, came up to look at it. After some +time it was reported to the captain, and the ship was kept away towards +it. As we approached, Mr Thudicumb said it appeared to him like a +canoe; but though she seemed to be steering steadily before the wind, no +one could be seen aboard her. + + + +CHAPTER FIVE. + +SUSPICIOUS BEHAVIOUR OF THE LASCARS. + +Numerous telescopes were turned towards the object I have described. "I +see a man's head!" cried one. "Yes; and his shoulders!" exclaimed +another. "He is leaning back in the stern of the canoe, steering with a +paddle." He had not discovered us, though, for on he went careering +over the seas as unconcernedly as if he were not some hundreds of miles +away from land. + +In a short time we were abreast of the canoe, passing her to leeward. A +dark-skinned man, lightly clad, sat in the stern steering with an oar. +His sail was a piece of calico spread on a slender yard, the mast being +scarcely thicker than the yard. Not till we were close to him did he +perceive us. Lifting up his hands towards the ship, he pointed to his +mouth, making an imploring gesture at the same time. Apparently he was +trying to speak, but his voice was too weak to be heard. Still he sat +as before, not attempting to rise and lower the sail; but on went the +light canoe, dancing from wave to wave, now gliding down from the top of +one, quickly to mount to the summit of another. + +"I doubt, sir, whether he has got the strength to move," said Mr +Thudicumb to the captain. "Or he is afraid of his canoe broaching to, +should he attempt to leave the helm." + +"We must run on, and heave to for him," said Captain Davenport. "We can +then lower a boat and pick him up. It is as you suppose, Thudicumb; I +have no doubt about it." + +The poor occupant of the canoe made a gesture of despair as he saw the +ship leaving him astern. Apparently he did not understand the meaning +of the words addressed to him through the captain's speaking-trumpet. +Still he sat as before, his eyes kept constantly ahead, while with one +arm he directed the course of his canoe. She flew so fast that we had +to get a considerable distance ahead before we hove to. A boat was then +lowered, into which Mr Tarbox and six stout hands jumped for the +purpose of intercepting the approaching canoe. The boat had only just +time to get ready, with her head in the direction towards which the +canoe was sailing, when she was up to her. We watched her anxiously +from the ship. She was soon alongside the boat. Several strong hands +seized her, while the occupant was lifted out and placed in the +stern-sheets of the boat. Quick as lightning the canoe was passed +astern and secured, and the boat pulled back towards the ship. With the +heavy sea there was running, it was a difficult matter to get alongside, +and still more so to lift up a helpless person without risk of injury. +By the management of the boatswain, however, helped by those above, the +dark-skinned stranger was soon lifted up on deck. He was too weak to +speak, but he had still consciousness sufficient to point to his lips. +Soup for the passengers' luncheon was just being brought aft. A little +was immediately poured down his throat. It had the effect of reviving +him somewhat, and he uttered a few words, but none of those standing +round were able to comprehend their meaning. The canoe was safely got +on board and examined. Not a particle of food was found, but in the +bottom of a small cask there remained about half a pint of water. The +wood, however, from the sides of the canoe had been scraped off. + +"That is what the poor fellow has been living on," observed Tarbox. +"Hard fare, to be sure. It would not help much to keep an Englishman's +soul in his body; but it is wonderful what these black fellows can live +on." + +The canoe was about eighteen feet long, cut out of a single log, worked +very fine, with wash-boards nailed on above. It seemed surprising that +she could have gone through the heavy sea which had been running for +some days past. Her owner was carried below, and after a little more +food had been given him, he fell fast asleep. + +When he awoke, he appeared to be perfectly recovered, sitting up and +looking round him with an air of astonishment, as if he had not been +aware how he had been brought on board. I had accompanied the surgeon +to visit him. He again uttered some of the strange words we had before +heard, but finding no one understood him, he stopped, and appeared to be +collecting his senses. He then said something which sounded like +French. It was very bad French, to be sure; but we shortly made out +that he was expressing his thanks to us for having rescued him. + +The next day he was up and dressed, and though somewhat weak, perhaps, +apparently as well as anybody on board. He now came aft, when, in his +broken language, helped out with a word or two of English, he gave us a +strange story. I cannot pretend to give his account in his own +language--indeed it would not be very clear if I did so, as it was only +after he had been on board some time that we gained all the particulars. +He told us that his name was Macco, that he was born in Madagascar, at +a village in the north of that large island. With several lads from the +same village he had gone on board a vessel which had carried them to the +Mauritius. There he had worked as a field-labourer for some time, and +though not a slave, treated very little better than one. He had learned +something about Christianity, but not much, I am afraid. He knew that +some of his countrymen had become Christians; but as large numbers of +them had been murdered, he was afraid, should he ever go back to +Madagascar, that he might be treated in the same way, and was therefore +unwilling to acknowledge that he was a Christian. After a time he had +engaged with several other people from Madagascar, as well as Creoles of +the Mauritius, to accompany a person to the island of Rodrigez, to be +employed under him as fishermen. They were at once embarked on board a +small colonial vessel, which conveyed them to that island, where they +were hired out to different masters. It appeared, however, that the +Creoles were very jealous of the Malagasys, and poor Macco found himself +very ill-treated by them. Frequently they beat him, and often +threatened his life. Several times he complained of their conduct to +his master; but the man was hard-hearted, and only laughed at his +complaints, telling him to go and thrash the Creoles, and they would +soon cease to torment him. Poor Macco, however, was a mild-tempered +young man, and probably thought that he would only be treated worse if +he made any such attempt. At length, to avoid the persecutions to which +he was subjected, he determined to run away from the island, and +endeavour to reach the Mauritius. He mentioned his determination to one +of his fellow-countrymen, who advised him to put it into execution. He, +however, had to wait some time before he could carry out his project. +He began, however, at once to store up a supply of food to support +himself during his projected voyage. At first he contemplated building +a canoe for himself, but as that might raise suspicions of his +intentions, he resolved to take one belonging to his master. He had +some scruples about stealing it, but at the same time he persuaded +himself that as his master would not redress his grievances, he was +justified in doing so. He probably was unacquainted with the golden +rule of never doing wrong that good might come of it. It was a subject, +indeed, on which casuists might differ. Be that as it may, Macco fixed +on a canoe which he thought would answer his purpose. His countrymen +assisted him, and he procured a piece of calico to serve as a sail, and +soon cut a mast and spar on which to spread it. The only food he was +able to provide for supporting existence was eight pounds of uncooked +rice, and a small barrel of water. + +One evening as it was growing dark he stole down to the shore, and the +wind being as he thought fair, shoved off the canoe, hoisted a sail, and +with an oar for steering, which he secured to the stern of the canoe, +stood away from the land. The weather at first was very fine, and he +glided smoothly over the sea, hoping before long to reach either the +Mauritius or Bourbon. He was unable to restrain his hunger, which the +uncooked rice could have done little to appease, and therefore ate up +nearly a pound a day. Thus at the end of eight or nine days he had +finished the whole of his provisions. He had still some water left, +however, and he knew very well that he could go without food for a day, +hoping before the end of it to have land in sight. He scarcely stirred +from his seat in the stern of the canoe. When he dropped off to sleep, +the movement of the oar very soon awoke him. Few Europeans on such fare +would have lived beyond the first ten days. Macco, however, when his +rice was expended, began to scrape away the wood from the inside of his +canoe. This, cut up fine, he ate, washing it down with water. Day +after day passed by, and still no land, no sail appeared. Often he +slept, steering instinctively, it must have been, before the wind, and +waking up to feel the gnawing of hunger. This he satisfied with the +scraped wood. Incredible as it may appear, such was the only food on +which he supported existence for thirteen days. We had many +opportunities of testing the man's honesty and had no reason to doubt +his veracity. He was of course little more than skin and bone when he +was brought on board. He had actually been twenty-two days at sea when +we found him. + +Note. The narrative is true, and is given exactly as described in the +original account. + +In the course of a few days he had completely recovered his strength, +and seemed very well satisfied with his lot. As he was a smart, active +fellow, he was entered as one of the seamen of the _Bussorah Merchant_. +He knew a little English already, and quickly picked up more. He was +thus well able to understand the orders given him. He did not appear to +be a favourite with the men. He was evidently retiring and unsociable. +Perhaps he had been so long subjected to ill-treatment from others, that +he was unwilling to place confidence in those among whom he was cast, +until he had ascertained that they were well-disposed towards him. I +observed, however, that Ali was constantly speaking to him, but I rather +doubt that their words were very intelligible to each other, as English +was the only common language they possessed. Ali knew it very +imperfectly, and Macco still less. More than once I observed Ali's +quick, piercing, fierce eyes fixed on him attentively, as he appeared to +be endeavouring to impress some matter on his mind. Macco's look all +the time was passive, and he either did not comprehend what was said, or +was uninfluenced by it. + +One night, when it was my watch on deck, I had been standing looking out +on the forecastle, when I heard a voice near me say, "When you step aft, +Massa Walter, I got word to whisper in your ear." It was Potto Jumbo +who spoke. I had thought that he had been in his bunk asleep. + +"What is it?" I asked. + +"I tell presently--not here, though," he answered, gliding away from me, +and going over to the other side of the deck, where he stood, as if +looking up and admiring the stars which glittered above our heads. + +As soon as I could leave the forecastle, I went and stood near the +gangway, where the black cook soon joined me. + +"I no like what going forward on board, forward there," and he pointed +to the fore-peak. "Dat Ali Tomba one big rascal. He go talky talky to +de men, and try to make dem mutinous like hisself." + +"But what can he have to complain of?" I observed; "the crew seem all +well treated." + +"Dere it is dat make me angry," said Potto. "He come to me one day, he +say, `Potto Jumbo, you black slave, you peel potato for white men; dey +make you do what dey like. Why not strike one blow for freedom?' I +say, `I free as any man on board. I come here because I like come here. +I go away when voyage over, and live ashore like one gentleman till +money gone, and den come to sea again. No man more free dan I.'" + +"I think you are right, Potto," I observed, "on that point; but surely +Ali fancies that he has some cause of complaint. Why does he not speak +out like a man, and say what it is? Have you any idea?" + +"Just dis, Massa Walter," he answered; "in de last ship Ali sailed in, +de captain was one big tyrant. He flogged de men, he stopped de men's +wages, he feed dem badly, and treat dem worse dan de dogs in de street +without masters. One day dis Captain Ironfist--dat was his name--go to +flog Ali, but Ali draw his knife and swear he die first or kill de +captain; but de captain knocked him down wid one handspike, and put Ali +in irons, and den flog him, and den put him back in irons; and den +carried him to port, and den put him into prison. Captain Ironfist +sailed away in another ship, and Ali not find him; so Ali swore dat he +would have his revenge on de next captain he sailed wid. He no find +opportunity to do harm to Captain Davenport as yet, but he wait like +snake in de grass to spring up and sting him when he can. Now he and +his men want to go to Calcutta, and dey thought when de ship sailed dat +dey were going dere. Now dey find dat we go to Japan, dey bery angry, +and all swear dat de ship shall go to Calcutta in spite of de captain. +Dere are some bad Englishmen on board as well as demselves, and dey up +to any mischief, and Ali tink he count on dem. He tink too he count on +Potto Jumbo, but he make one big mistake. I no say anything when he +talk to me, but shrug my shoulders, and make one ugly face at him, and +so he tink all right. He tink too he got Macco, but Potto not so +certain of dat." + +"But, surely," I observed, "he and his Lascars would not attempt to take +the ship from the captain and officers, with the larger number of the +white crew, who would certainly side with us?" + +"Don't know," said Potto. "He one daring fellow, and he try anyting; +but if he find he no strong enough, he try to burn de ship or to scuttle +her. At all events, he try to do some mischief." + +"This is, indeed, a serious matter," I observed; "and I am grateful to +you, Potto, for telling me. At the same time, however, bad as Ali's +intentions may be, I really do not think we have much cause for alarm. +Still, I am sure the captain also will be grateful to you for the +warning you give him; but I am afraid he will be very much annoyed when +he hears of it. I think I must first tell Mr Thudicumb, and he can +arrange the best way of letting the captain know." + +"Dat's it, Massa Walter. Tell de first officer. He wise man. He no +put out by dis or any oder matter. I now go forward, lest Ali come on +deck, or any of his people, and see me talking to you." + +"Do so," I said; "but, Potto, I think you will assist us if you would +pretend to be more ready to listen to what Ali has to say to you, and +you can give me information of his plans." + +Potto did not answer immediately. + +"I not certain dat Ali speak de truth to me," he answered. "At first he +did; but he big, cunning rogue, and he suspect dat I no love his plans. +Still, Massa Walter, I do as you wish, dough Potto Jumbo no like to act +spy over any one, even big rascal like Ali. Potto Jumbo once prince in +his own country, before de enemies of his people came and burnt his +village, and kill his fader, and moder, and broders, and sisters, and +carry off him and all dey did leave alive on board de slave-ship. Den +de British cruiser take her, and Potto Jumbo enter on board de +man-of-war, and dere became boy to de cook, and now Potto Jumbo is cook +hisself on board de _Bussorah Merchant_. Dere, Massa Walter, you have +my history. You see I do not wish to do anything derogatory to my +family and my rank;" and Potto Jumbo drew himself up, as if he was again +the monarch of half-a-dozen bamboo-built cottages, and their unclothed, +dark-skinned inhabitants. "Now, good-night, Massa Walter, again; I go +forward." + +Potto Jumbo glided away to the fore-peak, and I walked aft. I had, +however, some little time to wait before my watch was over. I then +hurried into the first mate's cabin. He was about to leave it to take +charge of the deck. + +"Will you let me have a word with you, sir," I said, "before you leave +the cabin. I have something somewhat unpleasant to communicate, and I +do not like to delay doing so." + +"Let me have it out then at once, Walter," he said. "Nothing like the +present moment; and, for my part, I always like to know the worst, if I +can get at it." + +I at once told him in a low voice the information I had received from +Potto Jumbo. The light of the lamp in his cabin fell on his +weather-beaten countenance, but I saw no change in it. + +"Very likely," he observed; "that serang has a hang-dog look, which +shows that he is capable of attempting any atrocity; but I do not think +he will succeed notwithstanding. I will tell the captain in the +morning, but there is no necessity to do so now. For his own sake, he +will not set the ship on fire, or scuttle her, at this distance from +land; and as to his hope of overpowering us, or the English part of the +crew, the idea is absurd. However, I will warn the other officers. You +go and tell Mr Tarbox I wish to speak to him. Take care the Lascar +fellows do not see you; and then go back to your berth and turn in." + +I made my way to the boatswain's cabin, and, rousing him up, told him +that the first officer wished to see him on a matter of importance. + +"I need ask no questions, Walter," he observed. "Do you know what it is +about?" + +"Mr Thudicumb will tell you all about it," I replied; keeping to my +resolution of not speaking to any one else about the matter. + +I then went to my berth, and feeling sure that all would be managed +wisely by the first officer, was in less than a couple of minutes fast +asleep. In my dreams, however, I heard fearful noises. I fancied I saw +the mutineers rushing aft; but instead of ten Lascars, there were fifty +or one hundred dark-skinned fellows, with sharp krisses in their hands, +threatening destruction to all who opposed them. + + + +CHAPTER SIX. + +THE SHIP IN DANGER. + +I was awoke by the cry of "All hands, shorten sail." Slipping on my +clothes, I sprang on deck. The sea was running high, the ship was +heeling over to a strong breeze. I flew to the rigging, and my station +in the mizzen-top. It was daylight. The crew were swarming up the +rigging, and I could distinguish the Lascars forward among the most +active. Whatever might have been their intentions for evil, they seemed +as eager as any one in taking in the reefs. The serang himself lay out +on the weather yard-arm, and I saw him, earing in hand, working away +actively with the rest. The dream was still vivid on my mind; and I +could not help feeling surprised at seeing him thus engaged, when I had +expected to be struggling in a deadly conflict with him and his +companions. The ship was soon brought under snug sail, and standing on +her course to the eastward. The watch below returned to their bunks to +take the remainder of their short night's rest, and I was quickly +asleep. + +Again the same dream came back to me. Once more the Lascars made their +way aft, but this time stealthily. I fancied I saw Ali leading them +through the gloom of night, whilst the captain was unconscious of their +approach, gazing over the taffrail, as if watching some object astern. +I tried to warn him, but could not make my voice heard. Ali was close +to him, with his kriss ready to strike, when I heard the watch below +called. + +In a moment I was awake. My dream was at an end. I dressed as usual +for the morning work of washing down decks, and in another minute was +paddling about with my bare feet on the planks, among idlers +holy-stoning, and topmen dashing buckets of water here and there on +every side, often into the face of some unhappy wight to whom they owed +a grudge. The wind did not increase, but there was sufficient sea on to +keep many of the passengers below. Mrs Davenport, however, with Emily +and Grace, came on deck. They required, however, assistance to move +about, which I and the third mate, and a young civilian going out to +Singapore, had the satisfaction of rendering them. Emily and Grace sat +watching the high, tossing, foaming seas with delight. + +"How grand!" exclaimed Emily. "I quite envy the huge fish which can +swim about unconcerned in these tumbling waves, or the sea-fowl which +fly over them from ridge to ridge bathing in the spray." + +Grace admired the masses of white foam which flew off from the summits +of the seas as they rolled grandly by. Mr Hooker was the merriest of +the party, and seemed well pleased with the delight the girls exhibited +at the new aspect the ocean had put on. He only regretted that he could +not read as much as usual, as he was tempted, like them, to remain on +deck and observe it. + +I had not forgotten what I had heard from Potto Jumbo about Ali and his +companions. I observed them on deck going about their duty as quietly +and orderly as any one. Mr Thudicumb had not again alluded to the +subject, and I could not tell whether or not he had informed the +captain. I could not, however, help suspecting that Ali had seen Potto +speaking to me, and that he might therefore be acting as he was doing +for the purpose of throwing us off our guard. I resolved to mention my +suspicion to Mr Thudicumb as soon as I had an opportunity, and in the +meantime to watch Ali, and try to find out what he was about. I had no +opportunity of speaking, unobserved, to the black cook; for whenever I +went forward either Ali himself, or one of the Lascars, were near the +caboose. I suspected that they went there purposely. + +For three days the gale continued. At last, one evening Mr Thudicumb +called me into his cabin. + +"I have not been asleep, Walter," he said. "The captain knows all about +the matter. He does not think that the Lascars will really carry out +their plans, and suspects that Ali was merely attempting to frighten the +black cook. Still, as a matter of precaution, he has directed all the +officers, as well as most of the gentlemen passengers, to carry arms; +and has warned Mr Tarbox, and three or four of the most trustworthy of +the men, to be on the alert. However, while the gale blows, there is +little fear that they will attempt anything; but if we were to have a +long calm, their courage would get up, as they would believe that they +could navigate the ship in smooth water, should they be able to gain +possession of her." + +That night the sea had gone down, and the weather appeared mending. +While I was on deck, I found Potto Jumbo by my side. + +"Well, Potto," I said, "do you think our friends have given up their +kind intentions?" + +"No, Massa Walter," he answered. "Me tink dey cut your t'roat, and my +t'roat, and de captain's t'roat, and de mate's t'roat, and everybody's +t'roat who no side wid dem." + +"Then would it not be better to get them all put in irons at once?" I +observed. "I wonder the captain does not secure them." + +"Dey done nothing," answered Potto. "Dey good, obedient seamen. What +for de captain put dem in irons? I only try and find out, and tink and +guess what dey want to do." + +"True," I observed; "then all we can do is to watch till they commit +some overt act, as the lawyers call it." + +"I don't know what overt act is," observed my friend; "but I know dat if +dey stick de kriss into me, or de mate, or Massa Tarbox, dey no stop +dere. When dey begin, I know what dese fellows are." + +"Then, what we must do, is to watch them narrowly," I observed. + +"Ay, ay, Massa Walter, I got my eyes about me; neber fear of dat. Dey +tink me go to sleep. When cunning Lascar talk and plot, and say what he +will do, Potto lies wid one eye just little open, peeping out of de bunk +and awake, and snore all the time like de big animal you call 'nosorous +in my country. Dey say, `Dat black cook is fast asleep--he no +understand what we say.'--Now, good-night, Massa Walter; me go below and +talk of de tree glass of grog I got, and den lie down, and go off to +sleep and snore. Ha, ha, ha! Potto Jumbo no sleep when his friends in +danger, and their enemies plotting." + +He said this in his usual low voice, and leaving me, dived below. By +the next forenoon the sea had almost completely gone down. The reefs +had been shaken out of the sails, and under our usual canvas we were +making good speed across the ocean. Passing near the caboose, Potto +Jumbo popped out his head. + +"Tell de first mate to be on de watch. Dey going to do something-- +mischief--never fear dat; me know not what dough, dey so quiet; but dey +intend to take away a boat, dat I heard dem say." + +Having thus delivered himself, Potto drew his head in within his den. +As soon as I could return aft, I found an opportunity of telling Mr +Thudicumb what Potto had said. + +"Not much fear of their getting off," observed the first mate. "It +would be difficult for the serang and his men to lower a boat without +being discovered. We must, however, keep a strict watch over him. He +probably supposes that we are near some land which he hopes to reach. +Still, whatever may be his intentions, we will be even with him." + +The sun had set in a glorious glow of red. The passengers were on deck +enjoying the coolness of evening, though the shades of night quickly +came down over the ocean. Suddenly there was a startling cry of "Fire, +fire!" and a thin wreath of dark smoke was seen ascending up the +fore-hatchway. + +"Strike the fire-bell!" cried the captain. "No rushing, my men! +Steady! Mr Thudicumb will lead the way below. Be ready with the +buckets.--Mr Martin," to the second officer, "rig a pump overboard! +Mr Tarbox, come aft!" + +The captain whispered a few words to him. The men obeyed all the orders +promptly. A line was formed to pass the buckets as they were filled +down the hold. The first officer and several men descended. The +passengers joined the party to pass the buckets. Among the most active +of the people appeared Ali, and two or three of his men. I observed, +however, that the remainder kept together on one side of the ship. The +smoke increased, in spite of the water which was now hove down on the +spot whence it was supposed to proceed. Faster and faster we passed the +buckets. Presently there was a cry, and first one man and then another +was hauled up almost suffocated with smoke. Mr Thudicumb came last: he +could scarcely stand; indeed, he appeared almost senseless. He quickly +recovered, however, and insisted on again going below, though the other +officers begged to take his place. + +"No, no," he shouted. "Bring wet blankets, wet bedding--anything by +which we may smother the flames!" + +Once more he and his companions descended with wet blankets in their +arms. The seat of the fire was evidently far down. + +"We must get at the cargo!" cried Mr Thudicumb, from below, to the +captain, who was standing over the hatchway. + +A crane was rigged, and whips rove, and bales and packages hauled up, +several more men jumping below to assist. I was passing the buckets +when Mr Tarbox came near me. + +"Keep an eye on Ali and his people," he said. "I have a notion this is +their doing. For all they appear so active, they mean mischief, depend +on it." + +Still Ali was working away, now passing along a bucket, now hoisting up +a bale of merchandise. Presently, however, I saw him slip away and +glide off. His men, who had apparently been watching him, directly +afterwards also made their way up to the starboard quarter boat; and I +observed that each man carried a package of some sort. I ran round to +where the boatswain was assisting in hoisting up the cargo; and he and +several men, whom he summoned, instantly sprang aft, where we found Ali +and his companions in the act of lowering the boat. Two were already in +her. "Hold fast, you villains!" cried Tarbox, giving a blow to Ali, +which knocked him over. + +His companions drew their sharp knives, which they had concealed in +their trousers, and made a rush at the boatswain, who was, however, too +quick for them, and drawing a pistol from his pocket, presented it at +the head of the first; while the men, seizing some boat-stretchers which +had been placed ready for use by the boatswain, laid about them with so +much energy that they quickly knocked over several of the Lascars, +though two or three were wounded in the scuffle. Ali had again sprung +to his feet, but instead of attempting to attack Mr Tarbox, he only +cried out-- + +"What do you mean? I lowered a boat to save the ladies! Suppose fire +gain on ship, what you do then with them?" + +"Oh! is that it, my hearty!" answered Tarbox. "However, the fire is not +going to gain on the ship, I hope. Do you tell your men to come out of +the boat quickly, and make fast the falls again, and just you come along +with me." + +Saying this, the boatswain made a rush at the Lascar, and quickly passed +a rope behind his arms. Two other men were seized at the same time, +their knives being taken from them. They were then dragged into one of +the cabins, and a seaman with a loaded pistol placed as a guard over +them. + +"Now, the rest of you go forward!" cried the boatswain to the Lascars; +and, without attempting resistance, they obeyed the order. + +Oliver Farwell was sent aft by the captain to assist the seamen in +watching the prisoners, while I again joined the gangs in passing the +buckets. The smoke continued to ascend as quickly as before; and, as +the cargo was removed, flames burst up, rising through the hatchway. +Again Mr Thudicumb and his companions had to come on deck. + +"Never fear, though," he cried out, as soon as he had recovered from the +effects of the smoke. "We are getting at the seat of the fire! More +volunteers for below! Come, lads!" + +He had not to make any further appeal. A dozen fresh hands, led by Mr +Hooker, each carrying sails or blankets or bedding well saturated, +sprang below; and I could not resist the feeling that I could do more +good there than on deck. Meantime water came rushing down round us, +preventing our clothes from catching fire. Happily the ship was steady, +or the danger would have been greatly increased. + +I shall never forget that scene. The lurid glare of the fire cast a +ruddy glow over the figures of the men as they gathered round the +crater-like opening which had been made, while dark wreaths of smoke +hung over the deck above us, and curled up towards the hatchway. +Scarcely, however, had a fresh supply of sails and bedding been thrown +over the hole, aided by the streams of water which came rushing into it, +than the flames suddenly subsided. + +"Hurrah!" shouted Mr Thudicumb, and the cry was taken up by Mr Hooker +and the rest of us. "More water! more water!" + +Bucket after bucket was handed down and dashed into the opening, and +again hauled up. We were now left in almost total darkness: not a +glimmer of light remained. The smoke entirely disappeared, though the +strong smell of it remained. The first officer called for lanterns, and +they were quickly brought by the boatswain and his mates. He now +descended into the lower hold, and the blankets and bedding were hoisted +up out of it. + +"It is as well we got out these bales," I heard him observe to the +boatswain. "Here, Tarbox; what do you say to this?" + +It was evident on examination that a space had been cleared out under +the cargo, and filled with straw and shavings and other light matter. +This had caused the smoke, though until the bales above it had been +removed the flames were kept down. When the superincumbent bales were +lifted off, the flames quickly rose up; but the material which fed them +being light, had speedily burned out before they had time to ignite the +surrounding cargo, which, fortunately being very tightly packed, did not +easily catch fire. A thorough examination having been made, no further +signs of fire could be discovered. A couple of trusty hands were placed +to watch the hold, and those who were drenched to the skin retired to +put on dry garments. + +I soon afterwards met Mr Tarbox, and asked him if he suspected the +cause of the fire. + +"Of course I do," he answered. "Depend upon it, that fellow Ali and his +gang have had a hand in it; but how they managed to get below without +being discovered is more than I can say." + +The captain and officers held now a consultation, and the rest of the +Lascars were seized, and the whole of the party put in irons. I will +not describe the scenes which took place in the cabin after it was known +that the fire had been thoroughly put out, and that we were once more in +safety. The passengers exhibited their feelings in a variety of ways. +Some wept, others laughed; and many, I am glad to say, knelt down and +returned thanks to Heaven for the protection which had been afforded us. +I kissed my dear sister Emily, and told her how thankful I was that she +was safe; for, indeed, my thoughts had been of her all the time, more +than of anything else. + +The next morning Ali and his companions were brought up for trial before +the captain and officers and several passengers. Suspicions were +evidently strong against them, and yet no one could prove that they had +placed the combustible matter in the hold, or had set it on fire. Ali +himself declared, with many oaths, that he was innocent of the charges +brought against him; his air, indeed, was that of a much injured person. +As to his attempt to lower a boat, he asserted positively, and his men +corroborated his statement, that the order had been given by the second +officer. When Martin declared he had issued no such order, Ali shrugged +his shoulders, and could only say that he must have been mistaken, and +that the error arose in consequence of his slight knowledge of English. +When asked how they came to have arms in their hands, they said they had +brought their knives for ordinary use; and in the same way they had +secured some provisions, knowing that should they have to go in the +boats they would be required, as they could not eat the food cooked by +the Christians. + +Now, if my kind friend Captain Davenport had a fault, it was that of +being too lenient. Instead of keeping Ali and his gang in irons, he at +once liberated them, warning them that though suspicions were strongly +against them, he was willing to believe the best. I do not think either +the officers or passengers were particularly well pleased with his +decision. I afterwards heard Mr Thudicumb tell the boatswain to keep +as bright a look-out as possible on Ali and the other Lascars. + +"I doubt whether that fellow has got any gratitude in his breast; and if +he is determined to do mischief, he will bide his time and do it, depend +on that," he observed. + +"Ay, ay, Mr Thudicumb, I have no doubt about it," observed Tarbox. "I +only wish the captain would have kept them in irons till we get to +Singapore, and would then hand them over to justice. That fellow Ali +deserves hanging, to my mind, as much as any pirate who has ever swung +in chains, or mutineer who has been run up to the yard-arm. It was no +fault of his that this fine ship and all on board were not burned or +sent to the bottom." + +Ali perhaps knew that he was watched; at all events, his whole conduct +was changed. No man could behave more respectfully to the officers, or +could more carefully see that those under him did their duty, while he +himself worked away as hard as any one. He seemed to bear no ill-will +against Tarbox or any of the other men, while he appeared to have +positively a kindly feeling towards Potto Jumbo, and to be especially +patronising to Macco. Indeed, after this everything went on smoothly +and pleasantly among the men, while perhaps the dangers they had gone +through made the passengers even more sociable and pleasant than before. + + + +CHAPTER SEVEN. + +WE ENTER THE EASTERN SEAS. + +Land was in sight, stretching out on either hand. On the port side was +the island of Sumatra; on the starboard, the north end of Java. The +_Bussorah Merchant_, with a light wind, was standing through the Straits +of Sunda. Mr Hooker walked the deck, in spite of the heat, rubbing his +hands with pleasure. He was now approaching the region he had long +desired to examine; and he was pleasing himself with the thoughts of the +wonders of Nature which would be revealed to his sight. Soon the +straits were passed, and numerous low-lying shores of various islands, +large and small, appeared in sight, covered with the richest vegetation, +which seemed to flourish under the fearful heat which oppressed the +spirits of us poor mortals who had come from so much cooler a region. +It had been hot when passing the tropics: it was hotter still now; for +no clouds overhead tempered the sun's rays. The pitch, as before, in +the sides and seams of the deck, melted and oozed out. The tar dropped +from the rigging, and none of us willingly touched any piece of metal +for fear of burning our fingers. Merlin wisely kept in the shade, and +the young ladies followed his example. I, however, being now stationed +in the mizzen-top, had to go aloft. I could not help often wishing, as +I looked down into the clear sea, that I might take a leap overboard, +and dive down into the depths below. + +Singapore--that wonderful emporium of the commerce of the East, +established by the sagacious foresight of Sir Stamford Raffles--was now +reached. It was the first time our anchor had been dropped since we +quitted the Thames. The only land sighted till Sumatra and Java were +seen, was the small island of Tristan da Cunha. + +"You see, my boy, the result of a sound knowledge of navigation," +observed Mr Hooker to me. "But the captain has to thank the +astronomers, and the inventors and the manufacturers of his instruments, +or he could not have thus easily found his way half round the world, as +he has done. You see we depend upon each other; and that is what I want +to impress upon you. You may not have much scientific knowledge +yourself, but if you have observation, you can accurately note the +various phenomena you meet with, and give your descriptions to those who +will make good use of them. I had contemplated leaving the ship at +Singapore; but I have made up my mind to go with you to Japan, and then +to return in her to one of the ports in these Eastern islands which +Captain Davenport purposes visiting." + +I was very glad to hear of Mr Hooker's determination, for I should have +been very sorry to have lost his society. + +The town and island of Singapore exhibit a variety of Eastern races and +different religions and modes of life. The ruling class are of course +English, but the Chinese are the most numerous, and among them are found +many wealthy merchants, most of the mechanics and labourers, and also +agriculturalists. The sea-faring population are mostly Malays. There +are a good many Portuguese, who act as clerks and shop-keepers. There +are also Arabs and Klings of Western India, who are Mohammedans. There +are also Parsee merchants, while the grooms and washermen are mostly +Bengalees. These, with numerous Javanese sailors, as well as traders +from Celebes, Bali, and numerous other islands of the East, make up this +curiously mixed population. Then in the harbour are found men-of-war, +merchant vessels of numerous European nations, large numbers of Chinese +junks and Malay praus, with hundreds of little fishing and passenger +boats. Chinese josshouses, Indian temples, Mohammedan mosques, rise up +on either side with Christian churches. The warehouses are substantial, +the residences of the Europeans large and commodious, contrasting with +the long rows of queer little Malay and Chinese cottages, among which +are found Kling and Chinese bazaars, where everything can be bought, +from a reel of cotton to a sword or razor. Numberless vendors of +various articles throng the streets with water, fruit, vegetables, soup, +and a sort of jolly made of sea-weed. Here a man comes running along +with a pole, having a cooking apparatus on one end and a table on the +other, from which he will immediately furnish a meal of shell-fish, +vegetables, and rice at a small cost. + +The island of Singapore is covered with a number of small hills, some +nearly 400 feet high, covered to the summits with forest trees. In +these forests the Chinese settlers are employed in cutting timber. +Tigers are very numerous on the island, as they have but a short +distance to cross over from the Malay peninsula, and frequently +wood-cutters are carried away by them. + +I accompanied Mr Hooker several times on shore. The naturalist was +delighted with the great variety of beetles and other crawling creatures +which he was able to collect. We were struck by the enormous size of +the trees and the variety of large ferns, as well as the number of +climbing ratan palms. One day we were walking along, Mr Hooker being +in advance, when I saw him suddenly sink into the ground. I ran forward +to help my friend, who fortunately having a long pole in his hand, kept +hold of it. + +"Quick, quick, Walter!" he shouted. "Help me out or I shall be +impaled." + +Not without difficulty I got hold of his hand, and by main force dragged +him up. When at length on firm ground, the naturalist, after resting a +moment, pulled away a quantity of brushwood and disclosed a large pit. +On looking into it we found that it was formed with the top narrower +than the bottom, and in the centre was stuck a pointed stake. A person +falling in, had he escaped impalement, would have found it impossible, +unaided, to get out again. + +"This is a tiger-pit," exclaimed Mr Hooker; "and a very effectual way +of catching a tiger should one attempt to cross it. I really believe +that I have narrowly escaped a fearful death; for see, had I gone +through, I should very probably have fallen on the stake." + +After this, as we proceeded, we carefully avoided the spots covered over +by fallen brushwood, lest they should conceal pits of a similar +description. Still Mr Hooker was too eager a naturalist to give up his +search, and, aided by me, quickly filled his boxes and cases. Evening +was coming on, and we were thinking of returning, sorry to leave the +cool shade of the trees for the still hot, open ground, when we saw a +creature at no great distance moving through the jungle. + +"What can that be?" I exclaimed. + +"A tiger, and it will be as well to put a bullet into my gun in case he +should think fit to follow us. I am told that seldom a day passes that +an unfortunate Chinaman is not carried away by one of these beasts. I +am afraid they are too wary, like rats in England, to be caught in +traps, or there would not be so many of them in the island." + +As we walked along I could not help looking over my shoulder every now +and then in expectation of seeing the tiger. Mr Hooker, too, kept his +gun ready for use in case we were pursued. We left the forest, however, +and took our way over the open, dry ground without again catching sight +of the tiger. + +We got back to Singapore and returned on board that night, as the ship +was to sail the following morning. Emily turned pale when she heard the +account I gave her of the tiger, and all the party were greatly +interested in hearing the account of Mr Hooker's escape from the +tiger-pit. + +The ship's course was now directly through the China Sea--a region in +which every variety of weather is encountered, from a dead calm to a +furious typhoon. The northern end of the Philippine Islands was sighted +on the starboard hand, and afterwards the Bashee Islands to the north of +them. + +"There is a large island lies away there on our right hand, called +Formosa," said the captain. "The inhabitants are Chinese. They seem +even more cruel and treacherous than the rest of their countrymen. Not +long ago two vessels were wrecked, and their crews made prisoners. The +natives marched them off to their capital, somewhere in the middle of +the island, several days' journey from the coast, and there they kept +them prisoners for many months. Some were Englishmen, others Lascars, +to the number of forty or fifty. The lives of a few were saved, but +they cut off the heads of all the others, declaring they were those of +barbarians killed in warfare; and it is said that the chief officers who +commanded this massacre gained great credit, and many rewards for their +bravery. The others were carried away to Nangking, and were there going +to be killed; but the English expedition came out, and were just in time +to save their lives.--I don't like the Chinese," continued the captain. +"They are treacherous, conceited, inhospitable to strangers, grossly +superstitious, heartless, and cruel, though perhaps they may not be said +to be bloodthirsty. Their streets are dirty in the extreme, and their +houses are not much better. However, it cannot be denied that they are +very industrious and persevering, and that a Chinaman will make a living +where a man of another nation will starve." + +Note. The English have now a settlement in Formosa. + +"Perhaps, when we come to know them better, we may find exceptions to +this description," observed Mr Hooker. "Probably we shall discover +noble and high-minded men, according to the light that is in them, in +China as elsewhere. I do not know that all English towns are models of +cleanliness; and certainly, if left to the care of the ordinary +inhabitants, many would be found as bad as those in China." + +At length the high land of the south end of Japan hove in sight. As the +ship stood on towards the harbour of Nagasaki, we were all eagerly +looking out on the beautiful scenery which presented itself. In many +parts the coast is bold, in other places it rises from the beach in +gentle hills covered with apparently impenetrable forests. The narrow +entrance to the harbour now appeared, between lofty overhanging hills +covered with rich vegetation. As Captain Davenport had been there +before, and the wind was fair, we stood boldly on till a pilot appeared, +when sail was shortened to allow him to come on board. On either side, +wherever the ground would allow it, the land seemed cultivated to the +summit of the highest hills. Here and there, however, the muzzles of +guns were seen protruding from amidst green shrubs and trees, ready to +destroy any unwelcome intruder. + +As the ship advanced the harbour widened out. On one side appeared the +beautiful little island of Pappenberg, so named by the Dutch, though the +Japanese call it Tacabooco. Its sides rise directly out of the water in +lofty precipitous cliffs, their summits crowned with dark luxuriant +cedars. It was to this island that a large number of the Japanese who +had been converted to Christianity by the celebrated Roman Catholic +missionary Xavier were carried when they refused to abjure the religion +they had adopted. Conducted up to the summits of the cliffs, they were +cast over the edge, bound hand and foot, at low water, meeting certain +death as they reached the rocks below. Here the mangled remains lay +till the tide coming in carried them off to sea. In late years many +hundred Christians were treated in a similar manner in Madagascar. We +looked with sad interest at the spot, having just before read an account +of the massacre. + +The ship continued her progress up the inlet or gulf, which is four +miles long, till at length she came to an anchor off the town of +Nagasaki. On either side were towering cliffs, precipitous peaks with +green and shady groves below, amid which appeared prettily-painted +picturesque cottages, not altogether unlike those of Switzerland. Many +small bays were passed, in which were moored little boats, kept +scrupulously clean, though unpainted. The sails consisted of three +stripes of sailcloth or matting, united by a kind of lacework, thus +forming one whole sail for light winds. By unlacing one portion, the +sail can quickly be reduced in size. The boatmen, unlike the natives of +the places lately visited, were almost as fair as Europeans. They wore, +however, scarcely more clothing than their brethren in more southern +regions. A Japanese boat is moved by a scull in the stern, with which +she is steered when under sail--no oars being used: the passengers +always sit in the fore part. + +As soon as the ship dropped her anchor the Japanese officials came on +board, one who spoke a little English acting as interpreter. They were +dressed in long flowing robes confined at the waist by a band wound +round the body, in which is suspended a case containing a pipe, a +tobacco-pouch, an ink-horn, and a small brush used when they write. +Over this is worn a transparent dark coat with a white mark on the arms +and back. On grand occasions public officials wear a similar dress of a +light fawn or dove tint. A person of the rank of a gentleman invariably +wears two swords stuck in his girdle. On sitting down he removes the +longest, and places it against some piece of furniture at his side; but +he never parts with the smaller one, which is kept sharp, and in +readiness to kill himself should any accusation of a crime, false or +true, be brought against him. The questions put to the captain having +been satisfactorily answered, we were informed that we might discharge +our cargo. The officers were then invited down into the cabin to +partake of cake and wine, which they seemed greatly to enjoy. They +then, bowing politely, took their departure, leaving one of their number +on board, who was to remain while the ship was anchored in the harbour. + +Mr Hooker had a friend here, a merchant, who came on board to see him. +Emily and I were introduced; and he invited us, and Grace also, to come +and stay at his house with Mr Hooker, while the ship remained off the +place. The residence of the merchant was situated on a platform on the +side of a hill surrounded by trees, at a little distance from the town. +The house had broad verandahs, every door sliding backwards and forwards +in grooves, instead of opening and shutting in the ordinary fashion. In +the garden were quantities of lovely flowers, and it had a pond in the +centre. The pond was full of wonderfully large gold and silver fish, +which were always ready to exhibit their lovely tints when bits of bread +were thrown in to them. The girls especially were delighted with the +beauty of the wild flowers in the surrounding woods, many of them such +as would be valued in a garden in England. Surpassing all others, +however, were the camelia trees, some fully thirty feet high, their +lovely flowers shining out amid their dark-green foliage. We were told +that the camelia is so called in honour of a Spanish Jesuit--Camel--who +brought it to Europe, where it is known as the Camelia japonica. From +one kind, the oleifera, a large amount of oil is extracted, used in +Japan for domestic purposes. The beautiful _lotus_ also is common; the +Japanese using the root when young for food. When thoroughly boiled, it +is very palatable. Mr Hooker was well pleased with the cleanliness of +the streets; so superior in that respect to those of China. They are +nearly all paved in the centre, which is slightly raised, and have +drains running down close to the houses on either side. Thus all +impurities are carried away, and they soon become dry, even after the +heaviest shower of rain. Large plantations of tea exist in the +neighbourhood, the leaf being prepared in the Chinese fashion. The +trade in this article alone has greatly increased since the ports of the +country have been opened. I give a drawing of a Chinese tea-plantation, +which is very similar to those we saw in Japan. The house seen in the +sketch is the drying-house. The tea-plant is produced from seed which +is dropped into holes, several together, four inches deep and four feet +apart, in December. When the rain comes on, the plants spring up and +form bushes. In about three years they yield their first crop of +leaves. In about eight years they are cut down, that fresh shoots may +spring up. The leaves are gathered singly with great care--in three +gatherings: the first, when they just open; the last, when fully +expanded. When gathered, they are first partially dried in the sun, and +then placed on flat iron pans above furnaces in the drying-house. They +require frequent shifting and turning. When sufficiently dried, they +are removed with a shovel on to a mat or basket to cool, and then to a +table to be rolled. This process is repeated, and they are then sifted +and sorted. As far as we could learn, both black and green teas are the +produce of the same plant, but prepared in a somewhat different way. + +I was, of course, very eager to learn all I could about the country; but +there seemed so much to learn, and so little time to learn it in, that I +was frequently almost in despair. The Japanese, although idolaters, and +very unlike Europeans, are evidently a very civilised people. They have +had for centuries their manners and customs unchanged, and their ideas +are peculiar, according to our notions. Soon after we arrived, our new +friend had to pay a visit to the Governor of Nagasaki. The heat was +great; but Mr Hooker begged that we might belong to the party. The +Japanese, like wise people, except in cases of necessity, do not leave +their cool houses during the heat of the day. The town appeared +therefore almost deserted. The main street is broad and clean, the +inhabitants being generally government officials and retainers of the +chiefs, called Daimios. At about every hundred yards there is a barrier +gate. These gates are closed every evening, when a light is suspended +from the beam above, or a paper lantern is hung from one of the side +posts. + +As China and Japan had become civilised long before the mode of +constructing an arch was discovered, and the inhabitants of neither are +addicted to change, they still retain their original style of building +bridges; and I give a sketch of one we crossed on our way. It is +similar to those generally found in the country. Some of their gateways +are very curious; and though they make their bridges with vast slabs of +stone or long wooden rafters, they take the trouble of hewing out of the +rock huge circles, or segments of circles, which are afterwards put +together to form ornamental gateways to their pleasure-grounds. + +At length our party arrived before a handsome flight of steps, with two +magnificent camphor-trees on either side. The gate at the top being +thrown open, we all entered the unpretending yet clean abode of the +governor. A few inferior officers were sitting or standing about in the +vestibule. They saluted us with a careless air, and one of them then +announced our arrival, when the vice-governor, or one of the principal +officers, came forward, and shaking hands, led us into another room. +Here the governor himself was seated. After the proper number of bows +had been made and returned, he requested to know the object of our +visit. While the merchant was explaining this we had time to look about +the room. All round it, with the exception of one side, which opened on +the garden, were suspended screens of white grass-cloth, with a design +which looked like a trefoil worked on them. Over it we caught sight of +several sparkling pairs of eyes--the sex of the owners could not be +doubted. In the garden was a pond in which water-lilies and other +aquatic plants grew, with the usual ornaments of temples and bridges, +artificial rocks being scattered about, and a considerable amount of +invention displayed in the arrangement. While speaking of flowers, I +must not forget the magnificent lily of Japan, which, in point of size, +must be similar I should think to those of Palestine pointed out by our +Lord when he said, "Consider the lilies of the field." But to return to +our visit. + +After the official interview was over, tea, pipes, and cake were served, +with a variety of other dishes. The great man's wife having expressed a +desire to see the strangers, we were introduced to her. She was a very +handsome person; her hair, jet-black, ornamented with amber and +tortoise-shell combs, with a large quantity of hair on the top mixed +with flowers and ribbons. Her costume was magnificent--sky-blue crape, +embroidered with gold and silver, and a profusion of flowers. It was +lined with a bright scarlet silk wadding, which formed a train on the +ground. Only a part, however, was visible, as the silken belt round the +waist allowed it only very slightly to open. She wore a very broad +sash, also of black silk, tied behind in an immense knot. The sleeves +of her dress reached only to the elbow. She had no other ornaments; and +her feet were encased in white cotton socks. Alas! however, her skin +was completely covered with rice-powder, damped, so that it might the +better adhere. Her eyebrows were shaven, as those of all married ladies +are. Her lips were dyed of a bright red colour, and her teeth were +black and polished as ebony. Yet we could judge of what she would have +been by her exquisitely-chiselled nose, and black expressive eyes. We +saw also several of her children, the younger ones dressed in crape of +various colours, the others dressed much as their mother; but their +teeth were beautifully white, their eyebrows unshorn; and very pretty +little creatures they were. We remained for another repast, which +commenced by the servants bringing in, and placing before each person on +the table, which was eighteen inches high, a handsome gold and black +lacquered cup and saucer, with a pair of chop-sticks. Some very nice +chicken soup, with vegetables, were in the cup. After this came a +similar bowl, containing venison, duck, and sweet jelly, all mixed up +together. We found it very difficult eating with the chop-sticks, and +Emily and Grace could not help looking up every now and then and +laughing at each other as they made the attempt. We managed better with +some harder things, such as fish. The last dish contained boiled +chestnuts, peeled. This was placed in the centre of the table, so that +each person could help himself. + +The lady afterwards came to pay a return visit to our friend's wife. +She and her elder children arrived each in a _norimon_. This is a sort +of litter slung to a bamboo pole, each end of which is carried on a +man's shoulder. A cushion is placed at the bottom, so as to come up at +one end for the back, at the other for the knees; and the person sits +crouched up in rather an awkward position. There is a flat covering, on +which the lady's slippers, fan, smoking apparatus, and other articles +are carried. The bearers have each a pole, on which they can rest the +norimon. + +The ladies, I should say, are great smokers, though their pipes are +small and their tobacco of a delicate description. + +I need not describe the entertainment our friends gave their guests, as +it was similar in many respects to that of the Japanese, though with +certain English dishes. Each of their attendants, when they set out on +their return, lighted a paper lantern, which is universally carried +after dusk in all the towns of Japan. + +The Japanese appear to be very fond of their children, and very +indulgent. In our excursions we often stopped and looked into the +cottages, which were invariably neat and clean in the extreme. I +remember one day hearing youthful voices, and looking in, we saw a +couple of children seated by the side of their father on a cushion on +the floor. One of them apparently was ill, and the other was pouring +out some physic from a bottle into a bowl to give to it. The expression +on their countenances amused us. The little invalid was turning away +his head, unwilling to take the potion; while the other seemed to be +entreating that he might not have too much of it. It was a family +picture, however, which gave us a very fair idea of the terms on which +parents and their children exist. + +Generally speaking, the women of Japan are as fair as many Europeans, +and were it not for their peculiar sandals, which give them an awkward +manner in walking, they would be graceful. Their hair is bound up into +thick masses at the back of the head, through which a number of gold and +silver or ivory arrows are placed, much in the manner of the peasant +girls in some parts of Germany. The unmarried women have good eyebrows +and beautiful teeth; but when they marry they blacken their teeth and +shave off their eyebrows, to show their affection for their husbands, +and that they no longer wish to win the admiration of others. The men +have a curious way of saluting each other, passing their hands down the +knee and leg, when they give a strong inhalation indicative of pleasure; +and it is curious to hear these whistling sounds going on while people +are paying each other compliments. When women of the same rank meet, +they bend nearly double, and remain in the same position some time in +conversation, occasionally giving a bob for every compliment that is +paid. When they get up to go away, the same bobbing and bowing goes on +for some time. When an inferior meets a superior, the former makes a +low bow till the fingers almost touch the ground. Both sexes, both at +home and abroad, go with the head uncovered, and to protect them from +the sun they use large fans or paper umbrellas. The military, however, +wear hats. + +The Japanese are fond of field-sports, and the nobles go out shooting on +their estates much in the same way that gentlemen in England do on +theirs. They, as do the Chinese, also hunt game with hawks and falcons. +The birds are trained much as they were in England in former days, when +the gentle craft, as it was called, was fashionable among the nobles and +gentry of the land. The accompanying drawing, which was given to me to +put into my journal, gives a good idea of the Chinese way of hunting +with the falcon. + +The houses we visited were very curious. They are chiefly of unpainted +wood; even the outsides are formed of sliding panels. There is +generally an inside lining at a distance of about six feet or so, the +space forming a sort of balcony. All the rooms are formed in the same +way, with sliding panels. The windows are composed of oiled paper, +fastened to neat frames with a glue which water cannot melt. The panels +which divide the chambers are ornamented with paintings of various +animals--tortoises, cranes, butterflies, and wonderfully unreal +monsters. Mats, about half an inch thick, cover the floors. In the +centre is a square place for a wood fire, when a _brazero_ is not used. +No chairs or tables are employed in ordinary houses, as the inhabitants +sit on the mats round their trays at dinner or when drinking tea; and at +night, mattresses are spread on the floor, covered with cotton, crape, +or silk. The day garment is then thrown off, and a wadded dressing-gown +put on for the night. The Japanese pillow is a little lacquered box +with drawers in it, in which the ladies keep various small articles for +their toilet--paper, hair-arrows, pins, etcetera. In the top of this +curious box is a concavity with a little cushion wrapped in clean paper, +and on this the back of the head is rested. Thus their head-dresses are +not tumbled at night. The inhabitants of the Fiji Islands use a similar +pillow for the same object of preventing their elaborately-dressed hair +from being disarranged. The Japanese, however, only sleep for a short +period at a time, as they have the custom of having trays with +sweetmeats by their bed-sides, which they eat occasionally; or they take +a few whiffs from their pipes, their tobacco-boxes, with live embers, +and other necessaries for smoking, being always at hand. + +They are very cleanly in their habits, bathing-houses being everywhere +found; but it struck us as very odd to see men, women, and children +bathing together. Sometimes as we passed a house we saw the master or +mistress seated in a tub, up to the neck in water. The men, except when +they wear gala costume, are very simply dressed: their sandals are of +straw, and they use a plain fan of white paper and bamboo. They, +however, possess fine dresses, which are kept in their richly-ornamented +lacquered chests. They live chiefly on fish and rice, with various +vegetables, vermicelli, eggs, sea-weed, while cakes and sweetmeats vary +their diet. Tea, sugar-water, saki, are their chief beverages. + +Their paper is one of the most interesting articles which they +manufacture. Some, of a thick sort, is made of bamboo and oil. This is +used for umbrellas, and water-proof coats, coverings for palanquins and +boxes, etcetera. The finer sort is made from the bark of the +mulberry-tree--the _Morus papyfira_--such as is used in Tahiti and other +South Sea islands. It is employed instead of a pocket-handkerchief for +blowing the nose, wiping the fingers, and wrapping up articles. Every +person has a long sleeve pocket filled with it. Printing is very +general, and all sorts of works are produced. Books are printed from +wooden blocks on a particularly fine silken paper, on one side only, the +blank sides being gummed together. The lacquer work is very fine. They +also manufacture silks, and crapes, and linen, and cotton cloth, which, +though coarse, is very soft. Many fruits of temperate and tropical +climes are grown. The lacquer-tree--the _Rhus vernix_--which is used in +the well-known lacquer work, is a handsome tree. The leaf is something +like that of the beech, but broader. The lacquer is drawn from its +milky sap and mixed with the oil of the _bignonia_. The camphor-tree-- +the _Laurus camphora_--is another very fine tree, with red and black +berries. The camphor comes from it in white fragrant drops, which, when +they harden, require but slight purifying to give them the appearance +which the camphor we see in England presents. Everywhere we met with +the tea-tree or tea-plant. It is as common in Japan as our privet or +hawthorn. Japanese money is very thin. Some of the coins are oblong, +some square, and others round. The chief circulating coins are of +copper or iron. The workmen are very skilful: they manufacture cutlery +and sword-blades to perfection. They show great skill also in gold and +silver work. Their mirrors are of bronze, the reflecting surface being +of silver, and polished, the back and handle ornamented with various +devices. Everything, indeed, that a Japanese artisan produces, exhibits +a neatness and elegance which speaks well for the taste of the people. + +We had a great deal of fine scenery in the excursions we made. There +are dense forests, and lofty mountains covered almost to their summits +with trees. No country has ever been subject to a more absolute +despotism than that which exists in Japan. There are two emperors--the +_Mikado_, who is the religious chief of the empire, the head of the +Sintoo religion; and the _Tykoon_, or _Siokoon_, who is the temporal +emperor, and the real source of all political power. His residence is +at Yedo. He has under him various great princes or chiefs, many of whom +are very powerful. Then there are noblemen of different ranks, who are +chiefly employed as officers under the crown, or governors of imperial +domains. Next to them are the Sintoo and Buddhist priests, the latter +of whom are under a vow of celibacy. The soldiers come after the +priests in rank. Their dress is very similar to that of civilians, but +they wear the embroidered badge of their respective chiefs. The fifth +class consist of medical men and literati, as also inferior government +officers. They are allowed, however, to wear swords and trousers. +Below them again are the merchants, who are despised by the superior +ranks, and are never allowed to wear swords. Mechanics rank the seventh +class, and the eighth and last is composed of farmers, serfs, and the +servants or feudal retainers. + +I might mention many more things concerning Japan, but I should occupy +too much space, and I am anxious to give an account of the adventures we +ultimately encountered. We had enjoyed our visit so much to this +strange and beautiful country, that we were sorry when the time came for +quitting it, though we were about to visit still stranger and less known +regions. Bidding our kind friends farewell, we returned on board the +_Bussorah Merchant_. The next morning, having gone through the usual +formalities, we sailed down the magnificent harbour of Nagasaki and +steered a course for the Philippine Islands. Nothing of importance +occurred during this part of our voyage. + +The next port we touched at was Manilla, the capital of the Philippine +Islands, which belong to Spain. On approaching the anchorage we passed +the naval arsenal of Caveti, situated in the bay about nine miles south +of the capital. Having come to an anchor, Mr Hooker invited us to +accompany him on a visit to Caveti. It cannot boast much of its present +glory, but it contained a curiosity--a Spanish galleon--probably one of +the last in existence, then rotting in the basin. We gazed with +interest at the high, ornamented, carved stern with its great lanterns, +its bow adorned in the same manner with carved work. We wondered how +such cumbersome-looking craft could get through with safety the long +voyages they performed. Returning to the ship in the cool of the +evening, we rowed up to Manilla, which is well situated at the mouth of +the river Pasig. This river runs down from a number of lakes, one +beyond another, the nearest of which is about three leagues eastward of +the city. We spent that night on shore at a hotel, and the following +day accompanied Mr Hooker on an expedition to the lakes. We engaged a +curious canoe paddled by Indians, who sat in the bow and stern, while we +occupied the centre. Part of this was covered over with mats, supported +on arched bamboos, which sheltered us at night from the dews, and in the +day-time from the sun. On either side of the river were the country +houses and gardens of the inhabitants. The river was very muddy and the +scenery not particularly interesting, so that we began to be somewhat +disappointed. It was growing dark when we approached the entrance to +the lakes. Sleep then overcame us, but our canoe-men continued paddling +on at a slow pace during the night. + +When we awoke in the morning we found ourselves in a scene so totally +different that it seemed almost like enchantment. The mountains came +sloping down from the sky to the very water's edge, while numberless +picturesque Indian villages, built of the very useful bamboo, lined the +shores. Earthquakes prevailing in this region, has prevented the people +erecting any lofty edifices, while a bamboo hut will stand any amount of +shaking without being brought to the ground. By a hurricane, however, +they are easily overthrown. Over the wide expanse of water, which was +blue and clear like that of the ocean, fish of various sorts were rising +to the surface, as if to look out for the appearance of the glorious sun +over the mountain tops. As we pulled on, passing lofty headlands, or +winding our way amid groups of islands, fresh expanses of the lake +opened out before us. On the level spots, cornfields waved with grain, +surrounded by cocoa-nut trees, affording shelter from the noonday sun. +Numerous canoes were passing, with their white sails shining brightly +over the blue expanse. + +We landed at the head of the lake, into which other rivers ran, opening +up a communication with the far-off parts of the island. Advancing, we +passed through some shady lanes, bordered by hedges of bamboo, the +graceful tops of which bent inwards, forming a complete arch overhead. +In a little time we reached a neat village, the houses, with thatched +roofs, looking clean and well-built. All, however, we learned, "is not +gold that glitters." We were advised not to proceed much further, as a +body of banditti were said to be lurking in the neighbourhood, composed +of deserters from the army and native Indians, and they would have +considered us a rich prize. Probably they would have murdered us for +the money we had about our persons, or for our clothes; or they might +have adopted the more civilised plan, followed in Greece and Italy, of +demanding a ransom. + +"Oh, but they would not dare to attack Englishmen!" observed Emily. + +"I am not so sure of that, young lady," answered Mr Hooker. "They +would probably make very little distinction between Englishmen and +Spaniards, except, perhaps, that they might demand a higher ransom; and +though it might be very romantic to be carried off among those +mountains, and kept there till Captain Davenport could pay the required +sum, I am afraid that none of us would find it very pleasant. However, +as `discretion is the best part of valour,' we will keep near our canoe, +and make the best of our way, with the favourable breeze now blowing, +back to the City of Cheroots." + +As we afterwards glided over the calm water, we saw some huge objects +resting on a sand-bank. They looked like logs of wood; but as we came +near, one of them began to move, and presently a huge pair of jaws were +opened, as if the monster--for it was an alligator--was taking a yawn +after his siesta. + +The principal inhabitants of the capital are Spaniards or their +descendants. The officers of the army are also Europeans. The rank and +file, amounting to about eight thousand men, are natives. The +aboriginal inhabitants are called Tagals. They are somewhat idle, +though a good-natured, pleasure-loving race; are nominally Roman +Catholics, but very superstitious and insincere. Their houses are +formed of bamboo raised on piles, the interior covered by mats, on which +the whole family sleep, with a mosquito curtain over them. The +ornaments in their houses are generally a figure of the Virgin Mary, a +crucifix, and their favourite game-cock. The men wear a pair of +trousers of cotton or grass-cloth, with a shirt worn outside them, +generally of striped silk or cotton, embroidered at the bosom. +Cock-fighting is their chief amusement, as it is, indeed, among most of +the people in all parts of the archipelago. It is a brutal sport, if +sport it can be called. These people seem to treat their birds better +than they do their wives; and so great is their passion for this +abominable proceeding, that they will cheat and pilfer and commit all +sorts of crimes in order to indulge it. + +We visited a manufactory of cheroots, for which Manilla is celebrated. +We were told that four thousand women, and half that number of men, were +employed in this manufactory alone, while in the neighbourhood as many +as nine thousand women and seven thousand men find employment in +producing cigars. This will give you some idea of the immense amount of +tobacco consumed in various parts of the world, as, of course, only a +comparatively small quantity comes from Manilla. As we entered the +building, our ears were almost deafened by the noise made by some +hundreds of women seated on the floor, and hammering the tobacco leaves +on a block with a mallet, to polish them for the outside leaf of cigars. +In other rooms they were employed in rolling them up into the proper +shape. Tobacco is a strict monopoly, and great care is taken, when the +harvest is being gathered, to prevent any being carried off by the +people. The leaves, when picked, are first placed undercover in heaps +to ferment, then sorted into five classes, according to their size, and +suspended in a current of air to dry. From the plantations it is sent +under an escort to the factories round Manilla. It is there wet with +water, or sometimes rum and vinegar, and made up as we first saw it, +into rough cigars, and afterwards rolled into a more perfect form, and +finished by another set of women. The refuse is made into cigarettes. +Nearly the whole population--men, women, and children--smoke. + +We saw the sugar-cane growing. Coffee also is almost wild, and large +quantities of rice are exported to China. The cocoa-palm and the +bamboo, as well as cacao, beans, indigo, silk, and cotton are produced. +We were shown a species of banana, called abaca, the finer filaments of +which, mixed with silk, are manufactured into native cloth. A rougher +sort, called Manilla hemp, is made into rope, which, with the raw +material, is largely exported. The most curious manufacture we saw, +however, was that from the pine-apple leaf, which produces a fibre so +fine and light, that the weaving operation must be carried on under +water, as the least current of air will break it. The Tagal girls work +it into handkerchiefs, which they richly embroider. These are greatly +valued. A more substantial manufacture is produced from the thicker +fibres, for dress pieces, which are also considered of great value. We +saw also some beautiful mats made from strips of bamboo, and leaves of +various trees, used for boat-sails, beds, or carpets. The hats and +cigar-cases of Manilla are also of a beautiful style of manufacture. + +Although I might have written a more interesting account of the country, +I prefer giving this brief extract from my journal, that I may have more +space to narrate the numerous adventures through which we afterwards +passed. + + + +CHAPTER EIGHT. + +CROSS THE SEA OF CELEBES. + +Once more we were free of islands, crossing the wide Celebes Sea. After +the bracing climate of Japan, we felt the heat considerably. We had +done so even when there was a breeze; it now fell calm. I scarcely +before knew what a real calm at sea was. The ocean was literally as +smooth as a sheet of glass--not the slightest swell was perceptible--not +the faintest cat's-paw played over the water. Some chips thrown +overboard floated exactly where they had fallen; and hour after hour, as +I looked over the side, there they were. Even a light vane of feathers +fastened in the mizzen-rigging hung down. The smoke from the galley +fire curled up in a thin blue wreath towards the sky, gradually growing +thinner and thinner, but still visible to a great height. Far as the +eye could reach, in the circle in the centre of which we floated, there +was the same shining, unbroken surface; except when here and there some +flying-fish leaped out of the translucent sea, or the fin of some +monster of the deep appeared as he swam near the surface. + +It was hot below--hotter even than on deck, where at all events we had +the advantage of the open air. The smell of the cooking going forward +in the caboose pervaded the ship; and we could easily guess how it would +be under such circumstances when a fever breaks out on board--how +impossible it must be to get rid of the infected atmosphere, unless +perhaps by powerful and general fumigation. The seams in the deck began +to splutter and hiss, and the pitch stuck to our feet as we walked +about; while any piece of iron we touched seemed almost as hot as if it +had been put in a furnace. We had a good supply of water on board; but +it seemed, at the rate we drank it, we should soon consume our stock if +this sort of weather continued. + +The only person who seemed to enjoy himself thoroughly was Potto Jumbo. +He smiled complacently as he looked about him when he came out of his +sooty den, the hot sun striking down on his uncovered woolly pate, +without having power to injure him. The Lascars appeared to suffer even +more than the Englishmen from the heat. Merlin, wise dog, kept in the +shade; but when he had to change his position, he went about with his +mouth open, his tongue hanging out. A tub of water was placed for him +in a shady spot, where he could go to quench his thirst as he might +fancy--a wise arrangement for him, poor dog, and he did not fail to take +advantage of it. He was not like some human beings, who turn up their +noses when their friends take trouble to arrange matters for their +convenience. + +The English seamen went listlessly about the decks, clothed only in +shirt and duck trousers. Though the human beings on board were +oppressed with the beat, their caricatures and imitators, the monkeys, +seemed thoroughly to enjoy themselves. Perhaps they were aware that +nobody would take the trouble to go after them; so they had the rigging +to themselves, and were now climbing and leaping about every part of it, +now and then descending to the end of a rope to try to carry off a +seaman's hat, swinging themselves close to his head. Now two or three +of them would make their way aft, and come and look down at Mr Hooker, +whom most of them seemed to recognise as their master and owner. Their +great pleasure, however, appeared to be to try and teaze Merlin. The +old fellow, whenever they approached, opened his eyes and watched them +with looks of astonishment, in no way offended at the tricks they tried +to play him. Now one would come down and endeavour to catch hold of his +tail; a second would jump down on his back, but would be off again +before he had time almost to turn his head. Had he chosen, I am sure he +could have caught one or two of the most daring, and would soon with his +powerful jaws have made an end of them; but he disdained to take offence +at their puny efforts to annoy him, and continued to treat them with the +greatest good humour. + +The Lascars were below, or asleep in the shade under the +topgallant-forecastle. I made my way to the caboose, where Potto Jumbo +was singing merrily, though the heat was sufficient to cook the dinner, +one would suppose, without the aid of the fire. Macco had been +appointed to attend on him as cook's mate. The arrangement appeared to +please both parties, for Potto was always good-natured, and Macco +obedient, and apparently anxious to learn his duties. + +"Dere, Macco, you go get bucket of water, and scrape dem 'tatoes, and +wash dem well," he said, pointing to the shady side of the ship, or +rather what was then the shady side, for as she was continually moving +round, that was as often shifting; indeed, so directly almost over our +heads was the sun, that there was very little shade at all. "I want to +tell you someting, Massa Walter," said Potto; "so I send dat black +fellow away." (Macco was many shades lighter than the cook; still he +always persisted in calling him "dat black fellow.") "I wish de captain +had put Ali and his people on shore at Singapore. Dey again plot +mischief. I hear dem talky, talky, when dey no tink I listen, just as +before. What dey intend to do I do not 'xactly know; but it is +mischief, I know dat. Dey no set de ship on fire again; but perhaps dey +try to cast her away, or to scuttle her, or some oder ting. Massa +Walter, dare are many pirate ships out in dese parts; and de last place +we touch at, I know Ali talky wid some black fellows, and me tink he +told dem to follow de ship, and dat he will help to let dem come on +board and take her." + +"But why did you not tell Mr Thudicumb or the captain this?" I said. + +"Dey tink I fond of finding mares' nests," he answered. "De captain +believe Ali when he say before dat he took boat to help ladies; and he +no believe dat he set de ship on fire," was the black's answer. + +"Well, Potto, I will tell Mr Thudicumb what you say, as before, and I +am very sure he will attend to your advice. I think the captain +believed you before more than you supposed; though, had he been +persuaded that Ali had set fire to the ship, he would decidedly have got +him and those who assisted him punished. He has been somewhat +over-lenient, however; there can be little doubt about that." + +"De captain good man, no doubt about dat; too good for dis world, and +for manage such rascal as Ali Tomba and his people." + +"Well, Potto," said I, "I believe you, at all events; but if you have +nothing more to say, I must try to find a cooler spot than this. I am +almost roasted, and feel that I could not stand it many minutes longer." + +"No; I have told all I know," said Potto. "But you just say to Mr +Thudicumb, he be wise man, and keep his weather eye open." + +As I began to move off, Potto shouted out,--"Come here, Macco, you black +rascal; be quick wid dem 'tatoes." They were the sweet potato roots of +which he spoke, by the by. + +On going aft, I told Mr Thudicumb what I had heard. He thought for a +few minutes. + +"I suspect, Walter," he observed, "the black is right. However, twelve +men, let them be ever so cunning, cannot do us much harm, unless they +again attempt to set the ship on fire. I never doubted that Ali had a +hand in that before, though the captain would not believe it. At all +events, if I had had my way, I should have got rid of him and his crew +at the first opportunity." + +Soon after this the mate was engaged in conversation with the captain. +I saw that my kind friend looked somewhat annoyed. He had made up his +mind that Ali was honest, and that Potto Jumbo was fanciful, and I +suspect did not like to be compelled to alter his opinion. He soon +afterwards called me up, and cross-questioned me on the subject. He had +a good deal to make him anxious. The navigation of the seas through +which we were sailing is as difficult as that of any part of the world. +Pirates also swarmed in all directions; and though they might not +venture to attack so large a ship as ours while we were under sail, they +might perhaps, should they find her at anchor, and be able to get round +us in sufficient force to give them a prospect of success. There were +also considerable difficulties in carrying on the trade in the places we +were to visit, as both the Spaniards and Dutch were sure to throw every +impediment in our way, their policy being to monopolise as far as they +could the whole of the trade of these regions. Several times the +captain went into his cabin to examine the barometer. + +"Thudicumb," he said, when he came out, "the glass is falling slowly and +regularly. Depend upon it, this calm is not going to last. We will +shorten sail at once. There is no use in having all this canvas hanging +from the yards; and when the breeze does come, it will come quick and +sharp. It may be only an ordinary gale, but I rather think it will be +something considerably heavier." + +Mr Thudicumb immediately issued the order to the watch on deck to +shorten sail. Some of the men looked about them with an astonished +glance; but, accustomed to obey orders, they asked no questions, and the +ship was soon under her three topsails, closely reefed, and jib. + +"Whatever comes now, we shall be ready for it," observed the captain. + +Still the calm continued, and the heat, if anything, was greater than +ever. The ladies were sitting on deck, keeping as cool as they could +under their sun-shades, when Mr Hooker returned from below, and spread +a map out before them. + +"Here, Walter," he said, turning to me, as I was standing near him, "it +being my watch on deck, I am going to give a lecture; you may as well +come and benefit by it. Here is a chart of the seas through which we +are sailing. See bow vast is this Malayan Archipelago! Putting out +Australia, it covers an area far larger than the whole of Europe; +indeed, from east to west it is fully 4000 miles in length, and 3200 +miles from north to south. Look at Borneo: the whole of the British +Isles might be put down inside it, and yet leave a wide extent of +country on every side. New Guinea is even larger; and Sumatra is fully +equal to Great Britain. Then we have Java, Luzon, and Celebes, each as +large as Ireland. I think we could pick out eighteen or more the size +of Jamaica; and a hundred, of which none are smaller and many +considerably larger than the Isle of Wight. Now, some people hold to +the opinion that all these islands were at one time joined to the +continent of Asia. I, however, believe that though a portion of them +were, that the eastern part was united to Australia, and appeared above +the surface of the water at a later period, forming a vast Pacific +continent. We have thus three regions--Borneo, Java, and Sumatra--that +have only a shallow sea separating them from each other and from Asia. +Between Borneo and Celebes there is, however, a deep sea; as there is +between Celebes and numerous islands to the east and south of it, +including Sumbowa, Flores, Timor, Gilolo, Seram, Bouro, and many others +of smaller size. New Guinea, again, with the Aru Islands, are separated +from Australia by a very shallow sea; and it is remarkable that the +animals found in these three regions differ considerably from each +other. Many of those found in Australia and New Guinea are different +from those found in Celebes, and the other islands surrounded by deep +water. They, again, differ from the animals found in Borneo, Java, and +Sumatra, which are mostly identical with those of Asia. + +"A striking contrast will also be found in the scenery of the islands of +volcanic and non-volcanic origin. A volcanic belt passes from the +north, through the Philippine Islands, down to the north end of Celebes. +There is then a break; and again it commences in the island of Gilolo, +passing through Borneo, Seram, and Banda, down to Timor; then through +Flores, sweeping round to Java, where there is an immense number of +volcanoes. The island of Java contains more volcanoes, active and +quiescent, than any other known district of equal extent. There exist +forty-five at least, averaging 10,000 feet in height. Volcanoes, you +must understand, have been raised up by the accumulation of matter +ejected by themselves, consisting of mud, ashes, and lava. Frequently, +although a mountain has been thrown up by volcanic action, no opening +appears, though probably one will be found in the neighbourhood. Thus +Java is entirely volcanic. In most instances volcanoes are found near +the sea, when the materials of the mighty mound have been drawn from the +surrounding surface, and into the hollow below formed by their +abstraction the water has rushed: thus, although the sea might not have +been there previously, a strait or gulf has been produced. At the very +centre of the great curve of volcanoes I have described, is found the +large island of Borneo; and yet there no sign of recent volcanic action +has been observed, while earthquakes are entirely unknown. In New +Guinea, also, no sign of volcanic action is known to exist: except at +the east end of Celebes, the whole island is free from volcanoes. In my +opinion, this volcanic action did not commence till a comparatively late +period, so that it has not succeeded in obliterating altogether the +traces of a more ancient distribution of land and water. + +"I must now give you a short description of the contrasts in the +vegetation of this interesting region. We shall find a great portion of +the islands clothed with a rich forest vegetation almost to the summit +of their highest mountains. This is the rule with regard to all the +islands on the west. When we reach Timor, however, we find the +eucalypti, and other trees characteristic of Australia. In Timor they +seldom reach any great height, being dried up by the hot wind which, +lasting for nearly two-thirds of the year, blows from the northern parts +of that vast island. In New Guinea, the trade-winds blow from the +Pacific. New Guinea, however, is freer from their influence, and is +therefore covered by a rich and damp vegetation, the forest trees +growing to a great height and size. + +"By examining the zoology of these countries, we find evidence that the +islands we have been speaking about must at one time have formed a part +either of Asia or of a vast southern continent which embraced New Guinea +and Australia. In Borneo we find the elephant and tapir; and in Sumatra +both these animals, as well as the rhinoceros, and the wild cattle which +are known to inhabit some part or other of Southern Asia: showing that +at one time there must have been land communication with that continent, +as those animals could not possibly have swam over the straits which now +separate them. A large number of the smaller mammals are common to each +island as well as to the continent. Birds and insects also found on the +islands exist on the Asiatic continent. It might be supposed that birds +would easily pass over narrow arms of the sea; but this is not so. With +the exception of the aquatic tribes, what are called the perching birds +will never cross the sea; and thus it is certain that they, as well as +animals, must have existed on those islands before they were separated +from the continent. The Philippine Islands possess many of the birds +which are found in Asia; but at the same time there are other +indications which show that they must have been separated from the +continent at an earlier period than the other islands to the west. + +"Now I wish you to observe that the numerous islands to the east of +Celebes and Lombok have a strong resemblance to Australia and New +Guinea, as much indeed as the western islands have to Asia. Australia +is a very remarkable country. It is, indeed, in several respects, +unlike any other part of the world. It possesses no tigers or wolves or +bears or hyenas; no elephants, squirrels, or rabbits; nor, indeed, any +mammals, except such as have been introduced almost within the memory of +man, such as horses, sheep, or oxen. It has, however, what are called +marsupials: kangaroos, opossums, wombats, and the duck-billed platypus. +Instead also of the various birds which exist in other parts of the +world, it has the mound-making brush-turkeys, the cockatoos, and the +brush-tongued lories, as well as honey-suckers, to be found in no other +part of the world. These peculiarities are discovered in the other +islands I have mentioned, forming the Austro-Malayan division of the +archipelago. Looking down to the south-east of Java, we shall find the +small island of Bali. It is divided from the east part of the island of +Lombok by a narrow strait, where the water is very deep, showing, as I +have said, that the separation must have taken place at an early period +of the world's existence. Now in Bali we find woodpeckers, +fruit-thrushes, barbets, and other Asiatic birds. Crossing this narrow +strait to Lombok, the birds I have mentioned are no longer to be found; +but instead of them there are brush-turkeys, cockatoos, honey-suckers, +and other Australian birds. These birds again are not to be found in +Java or any region to the west. Crossing from Borneo to Celebes, there +is a very great difference in the animals. In Borneo, a vast number of +various species of monkeys exist, as well as wild cats, deer, otters, +civets, and squirrels. In Celebes, wild pigs are found, and scarcely +any other terrestrial mammal, besides the prehensile-tailed cuscus. + +"Thus, when we pass from the western to the eastern islands, we feel +ourselves almost in a new region, so greatly do the four-footed and +feathered tribes we find in the one differ from those we have left in +the other. The Aru Islands and others in the neighbourhood agree in +many respects with New Guinea, from which vast island a shallow sea +alone separates them. Possessing this knowledge, a naturalist would +soon be able to learn whether he had landed on one of the islands of the +Asiatic or Australian portion of the archipelago, judging alone by the +animals he might discover." + +Mr Hooker's lecture, of which I have only given a brief outline, was +suddenly interrupted by the voice of the captain shouting, "Up with the +helm!--square away the yards!" I flew to my station. Looking astern, +there appeared a long line of white foam, rushing forward over the +hitherto calm surface of the ocean at a rapid rate, while clouds came +rising out of the horizon, and chasing each other across the blue sky, +over which a thick veil of mist seemed suddenly to have been drawn. In +a few seconds a fierce blast struck the ship, making her heel over to +starboard in a way which seemed as if it was about to take the masts out +of her. Mrs Davenport clung to the cabin skylight, on which she was +sitting. It was with difficulty we could save Emily and Grace from +being carried away to leeward; indeed, they both cried out with terror, +so suddenly had the gale broken on us. + +Down, down the tall ship lay. It seemed as if she would never rise. +The watch below rushed up on deck, looks of dismay on the countenances +of many. The captain shouted to Mr Thudicumb, "Get the axes ready!" +and pointed significantly to the mizzen-mast. The first officer +repeated the order; and Mr Tarbox was seen coming along, axe in hand, +followed by the carpenter and several of his crew. There was no time to +be lost, it seemed. I could not help dreading lest another similar +blast should send the ship over, and the sea, rushing up her decks, +carry her to the bottom. The rudder had lost its power, being nearly +out of the water, so that no means but the desperate one to which we +were about to have recourse remained for getting the ship before the +wind. The risk of those on deck being injured by the falling of the +mast was very great. I made my way up to where my sister, with Mrs +Davenport and Grace, were clinging to the cabin skylight, in order to +conduct them below. The captain shouted to Mr Hooker, and signed to +him to assist me. Unless, however, I had been aided by the second mate, +I could scarcely have done so. + +As soon as I had seen them into the cabin, I sprang again on deck. The +sharp sound of the axe as it struck the mizzen-mast was heard at that +moment. The shrouds on either side were cut, and over the mast fell +into the foaming water. Still the ship lay as before. "It must be +done, Thudicumb!" the captain cried, and this time the mate himself +approached the mast, and stood with gleaming axe uplifted, ready to +strike. The hurricane howled round us. Every instant the seas +increased in height and fury, the spoon-drift from their summits driving +in showers over our deck. The sea came rushing up every instant higher +and higher over the lee bulwarks, up almost to the hatchways. The +captain gave another glance to windward. Still the rudder did not act. +"Cut!" he shouted, his voice sounding high above the roar of the blast. +Mr Thudicumb's glancing axe descended, while at the same moment the +boatswain cut the weather shrouds; and as the mast fell over, several +brave fellows sprang to leeward to divide those on the lee side. Still +the ship lay helpless on the foaming water. + +One more hope remained--the foremast must go; should the ship then be +unable to rise, our doom must be sealed. Anxiously we all watched the +captain. Again he looked to windward, carrying his glance round on +every side. His hand was raised to his mouth, apparently about to give +the same ominous order as before, when suddenly the ship rose up from +her dangerous position; and now, feeling the power of the helm, away she +flew before the fierce hurricane. Hour after hour we continued our +course, wherever the wind sent us--chiefly, however, towards the east. +It was impossible, with the fearful sea there was then running, to +attempt to raise jury-masts. Should land appear ahead, we knew too well +that there was every probability of our being cast on it. We might +anchor, and with the masts gone, the anchors might possibly hold, but we +could scarcely indulge in that hope--indeed, few on board had any +expectation of escaping shipwreck. + +Again and again the captain examined his chart. It could not, however, +be entirely depended on. A bright look-out was, of course, kept ahead, +that whatever danger there might be in our course might be discovered as +soon as possible, and such efforts made as good seamanship might dictate +to avoid it. The time was a very trying one. I should have been +anxious had I no one I cared for on board, but I dreaded the danger to +which my dear sister Emily might be exposed, and I felt, too, for Mrs +Davenport and Grace. Men can more easily escape from shipwreck, and if +cast on a desert island are better able to rough it, than females; but +what hope would there be of two young girls escaping with their lives, +should we be cast on shore? I had not forgotten either the remarks +Potto Jumbo had made about the Lascars. I could not help fancying that +they all had a more than usually sulky manner. When ordered to do any +duty, they generally gave a scowling glance towards the officers, and +performed it in a slovenly, indifferent manner. + +Darkness came on, and still the wind blew as hard as ever, and the ship +flew on before it. I had been on deck for many hours, and it was my +watch below, and in spite of the danger we were in, I could scarcely +keep my eyes open. Even, however, when I laid my head on the pillow, I +knew that any moment I might be awakened by the fearful crashing of the +ship striking on a coral reef, with the sound of our remaining mast +going by the board. Before going to sleep, however, I went into the +cabin, and entreated the ladies to lie down. Emily and Grace said they +would, and Mrs Davenport urged them to do so, but I found that she had +no intention herself of sleeping. She would, I guessed, sit up, and +watch and pray for her young charges. I, however, was scarcely in my +berth before I was fast asleep, in spite of the loud roaring of the +seas, the wild motion of the ship, and the howling of the wind in the +fore-rigging. + + + +CHAPTER NINE. + +THE MOLUCCAS. + +Wonderful was the change which I found had taken place when I returned +on deck. The sun was shining brightly, the wind had fallen to a +moderate breeze. The sea, though heaving and dancing, sparkling +brightly in the sunbeams, had gone down considerably, but still blew +from the same quarter as before. The ship was standing to the east. + +"We have passed through the Straits of Banca, and are crossing the +Molucca passage," said Mr Thudicumb, of whom I asked whereabouts we +were. "The captain proposes making for Ternate, which belongs to the +Dutch. We may hope there to get new masts--at all events, it is the +nearest place which we can reach with the wind as it is at present, and +have any hope of getting the ship put to rights." + +All day long we were busily employed in repairing damages as far as we +could. I had but little time to exchange a word with Emily. I was +thankful to find, however, that she and Grace had quite recovered their +spirits, though they owned that they had been greatly frightened during +the hurricane. + +"Still it is a comfort, Walter, to know that there is One who always +watches over us, and does everything for the best. If he had thought +fit to allow the ship to founder, I am very sure he would have had good +reason for so doing. Still, as I know he wishes us to pray for +blessings, I was praying all the time that we might be preserved, and +especially that no accident might happen to you, my dear brother. Oh, +how I thought of you when you were on deck, and the storm was blowing +and the masts being cut away, knowing the fearful danger to which you +were exposed." + +It was soon after sunrise one morning, when, a light mist clearing away, +before us appeared, at some distance from each other, several lofty +conical mountains rising as it were directly out of the sea, while +beyond them was seen a line of blue land, extending north and south as +far as the eye could reach. + +"You see that peak ahead, Walter," said Captain Davenport to me. "That +is the island of Ternate, to which we are bound. To the right of it is +Tidore. All those peaks are volcanic; and some of them, I believe, +occasionally throw up flames. The land we see beyond is the large +island of Gilolo--a strange land, I believe, but very little is known +about it." + +A light breeze carried us on over the calm blue sea; when at length, +entering between the two islands I have mentioned, the town of Ternate +appeared in sight, stretching along the shores at the very base of the +mountain. + +"This is indeed beautiful!" exclaimed Emily, who just then came on deck, +as she gazed up at the rugged promontories and the lofty volcanic cone +of Tidore on one side, with the high mountain of Ternate on the other, +while numerous other peaks rose on the neighbouring islands, as well as +on the larger island in the distance. Immediately behind the town +appeared thick groves of forest trees; indeed, vegetation was seen +rising to the very summit of the cone, and it was difficult to believe +that, from that calm and beautiful mountain, occasionally lava, streams +burst forth; and produced destruction on every side. + +A large amount of sago, massoi bark, tortoise-shell, tripang, and +paradise birds are brought over from Papua, and shipped at Ternate. A +tax, however, is placed on the exportation of paradise birds, which is +paid to the Sultan of Tidore, whose predecessors ruled these islands. +The paradise birds are chiefly sent to China, where they are highly +valued. Above our heads, as we looked up, we saw the lofty summit of +the mountain of Ternate, from whence, amid the luxuriant vegetation +which surrounds its sides, columns of smoke are for ever rising towards +the blue sky above--indeed, the whole island is simply a lofty volcano, +the base of which is beneath the ocean. Its circumference at the shore +line is about six miles, and its height 5400 feet. Several severe and +destructive eruptions have taken place at different times. The last +occurred only a short time before we were there. The lava poured forth +and flowed down its sides into the sea, loud thunders were heard, smoke +and ashes rose up, and hot stones fell like hail on every side, setting +fire to the dead wood which, after so long a rest, had completely grown +over the ground, and causing it at night to assume the appearance of one +vast mountain of flame. For fifteen hours the solid ground rolled like +a wave of the sea. Fort Orange, which had withstood numberless +earthquakes for two centuries and a quarter, was almost overwhelmed. +The people betook themselves to their boats, for the ocean and land +seemed to have exchanged natures; the water being calm, while the land +was heaving and gaping like a stormy sea. + +Captain Davenport had been unwell for some time. He was acquainted with +a wealthy Dutch merchant in the place, who invited him and his wife and +daughter to take up their residence at his country house while the ship +remained in the harbour. They of course said they could not leave +Emily, who therefore accompanied them. Mr Hooker also went on shore, +but engaged a house at a little distance from the town, where he could +pursue his researches in natural history more uninterruptedly than in +the town. He lost no time in sending out hunters in all directions to +procure specimens. The various specimens which he already possessed +were landed, that he might also re-arrange them. I paid him one or two +visits, and found him enjoying his existence excessively. His house had +of course only one floor: the walls for five feet were of stone; the +roof was supported above them on strong squared posts, the interval +being filled in with the leaf-stems of the sago-palm fitted in wooden +framings. The ceilings were of the same material. The floor was of +stucco. There was a centre hall, with three rooms opening off it on one +side and one on the other; while on two other sides were broad +verandahs, serving as cool drawing-rooms, or sleeping-places, perhaps, +in the hotter months. + +This island was at one time in possession of the Portuguese, who were +said to have tyrannised over the natives. They were driven out by the +Dutch, who are themselves accused of not being over careful of the +well-being of the people they conquered. This island and several in a +line to the south of it are known as the Moluccas, or Spice Islands. It +was the original country of the clove, and here alone it was cultivated. +Although the early visitors procured nutmegs and mace from the +inhabitants, these were brought over from New Guinea, and the +neighbouring islands, where they grew wild. The early voyagers made +such enormous profits by their cargoes of spices from these regions, +that they were able to give in exchange, jewels, gold, and the richest +manufactures, which they brought from Europe or India. When, however, +the Dutch took possession of the country they determined to confine the +production to one or two islands, over which they could keep a strict +watch, in order completely to confine the monopoly to themselves. They +chose the island of Banda for the cultivation of nutmegs, and fixed on +Amboyna for the production of the clove. The cultivation of the nutmeg +in Banda has been eminently successful, but that of the clove in Amboyna +has scarcely paid its expenses; the soil and climate of that island not +suiting it as well as the regions where it was first found. The object +of the Dutch has been to keep the monopoly of the sale of spices in +their own hands, and thus to raise the price. They have therefore +compelled the native chiefs to destroy the spice trees growing in their +territories wherever they have been able to do so. To induce them to do +this, they paid to each a fixed subsidy, the chiefs indeed being +therefore somewhat the gainers. Formerly their sultan kept the trade +solely in his own hands, and he was far more tyrannical than the +Portuguese or Dutch. When our own circumnavigator Drake visited these +islands, he purchased his cargo from the sultan, not from the native +cultivators. As I walked about Ternate I felt satisfied that I should +not at all wish to take up my abode there, for in every direction were +seen the ruins of massive stone or brick buildings of every description +which had been overwhelmed by earthquakes; indeed, considering the +frequency of their occurrence, it is surprising that people should be +willing to remain in the island. I, of course, was not able to see much +of the country, as I was compelled to be on board, the more so as +several of the crew were ill, and had been removed on shore, where the +merchant I spoke of had them kindly looked after. We had great +difficulty in getting a mast of sufficient size to replace the mainmast +we had lost. At length, however, we got both our lower masts in, and we +hoped, in the course of a week, should Captain Davenport and the rest of +the crew be sufficiently recovered, to continue our voyage. + +One evening when work was over, Mr Thudicumb, with the second mate and +several of the men, went on shore, leaving the ship under charge of the +boatswain, with about a dozen Englishmen and the Lascars. I, having +been on shore several times, agreed also to remain to assist Mr Tarbox. +The weather had for some time been threatening, but the clouds had +passed away, and the sky again become serene. That evening the same +appearances occurred. I should say that at Ternate a number of people +of different nations are collected together. The most numerous, +probably, are the Chinese, and their curious little boats are seen +skimming about in all directions. There are traders from all parts of +the East, so that the harbour at times presents a very animated +appearance. I was on deck with Mr Tarbox, when looking out we saw a +thick mass of clouds come rolling up suddenly on every side of the +mountains. + +"I wish Mr Thudicumb and the mate were on board," he said to me; "I +don't like the look of things. We must veer away more cable and get +another anchor over the bows. See, the Chinamen begin to think there is +something in it." + +As he spoke, a number of Chinese and other boats were seen pulling in +for the land; before, however, they could reach it, a loud roaring sound +was heard, and in an instant the whole ocean seemed torn up by some +mighty power, and a fierce blast broke down upon us. The vessels in the +harbour were seen endeavouring to secure themselves as well as they +could; but in a few minutes numbers were driven together, grinding and +striking against each other, while they were sent by the fury of the sea +towards the shore. The boats, tossed like cockle-shells, appeared every +instant as if about to be overwhelmed by the ocean; many were capsized +close to us, but we could render no assistance. Every instant the sea +rose higher and higher, till we could scarcely see the shore beyond it. +The ship, however, held well to her anchors. It was fortunate for us we +had no top gear aloft, or the case might have been different. + +"I only hope Mr Thudicumb and the rest are safe on shore," I observed +to Dick Tarbox. + +"They will not attempt to come off while this gale is blowing." + +In a short time, a fearful havoc was made with the various craft in the +harbour. Around us wrecks strewed the sea in every direction; here and +there poor fellows swimming for their lives, some holding on to pieces +of planks and spars. Many sank before our eyes. Boat after boat was +upset. Some, however, rode over the seas in gallant style, the men on +board pulling bravely. The fury of the gale increased. We veered out +more cable. Night at length coming on, added to the wild horrors of the +scene. Now, as a vessel drove past us, we could hear the shrieks and +cries of the unhappy crew as they were carried to destruction. Such, in +spite of the size of our stout ship, might be our fate should the +anchors not hold. + +Suddenly the wind dropped; still the sea continued to leap and foam +around us. + +"It will be all right, I hope," I said to Mr Tarbox. "These hurricanes +seldom last long, I fancy." + +"Not quite so certain of that, Walter," he observed. "I don't like the +look of the sky even now." Once more examining the cables, he walked +with me aft, from whence we could better see the shore. + +"Hark! what is that roaring?" I said. It seemed as if a blast was +sweeping over the land, hurling down trees and buildings and all +impediments in its course. "Can it be an earthquake? Oh! what will +become of my sister and those on shore?" + +"No, it is no earthquake," answered the boatswain; "it is the hurricane +shifting its quarter." + +As he spoke, the wind struck the ship with redoubled force. She swung +round before it; still, knowing that our anchors had been holding, and +our cables strong, we had little fear of receiving damage, as the sea, +at all events, with the change of wind, would subside instead of being +increased. Suddenly, however, a peculiar sound was heard, as of a chain +running out. The boatswain rushed forward, and I followed him; but we +were only just in time to see the end of the chain cables flying through +the hawse-holes, and away the ship drifted out of the harbour. + +"That did not happen by chance," exclaimed Tarbox; "it is the work of +those Lascars. Quick, lads, for your lives!" shouted the boatswain. +"Range our spare cable! Get the second bower-anchor from the hold!--Now +you, Ali Tomba, see that your men work," he added, turning to the +serang. + +The English seamen worked away energetically; but in the dark it was a +difficult business to get up the heavy anchor and chain cable. The +Lascars were apparently assisting as zealously as the rest of the crew. +Some accident or other was, however, continually occurring; and before +the anchor could be got up and the cable ranged, the ship was in the +centre of the channel, driving away at a rapid rate out to sea. At +length the anchor was got ready for letting go. Scarcely, however, had +it been got over the bows than with a loud splash it fell into the water +free of the chain. + +"Ali Tomba, you or your people have played us that trick!" exclaimed the +boatswain. + +The serang made no answer, but a cry of mocking laughter was heard from +several quarters. Roger Trew, lead in hand, flew to the chains. He +gave one heave. "No bottom," he cried. "We cannot bring up even if we +wish!" + +I asked the boatswain what he proposed doing. "We ought to punish those +Lascars, for they have played us that trick," I observed. + +"Little use to attempt to do that, Walter," he answered. "If I was a +navigator I might know more about it, but my only notion is to let the +ship drive. When the hurricane is over, we must try to do our best to +regain the harbour." + +"I am not much of a navigator yet," I observed, "but I will look at the +captain's chart, and see whereabouts we are going. We shall, at all +events, better know then what to do." + +"Ah, there's nothing like learning," observed Tarbox; "I wish I had more +of it. What a seaman can do I will do, and with your help, Walter, we +may still weather this gale." + +I hurried into the cabin, and soon found the chart. It afforded me but +little satisfaction, however. We were driving to the southward, but +several islands were in our course. We might escape them, but if driven +against them, our destruction would be certain. With sails unbent, and +short-handed as we were, we could scarcely hope to be able to get under +the lee of one of the islands. + +"We must try it, though," said Tarbox. "We have another anchor and +cable, and that will hold us well enough in a moderate breeze with land +to windward, unless these Lascar fellows play us another trick. I +should like to clap them all in irons at once." + +I agreed with him, but as we only mustered twelve men besides ourselves, +and they numbered eleven, it would be no easy matter to do so, +especially as they would probably be prepared for an attack. I, +however, advised the boatswain to keep all our people together, that in +case the Lascars purposed our destruction, we might not, at all events, +be cut off in detail. He agreed to the wisdom of this caution, and sent +Roger Trew to get the people together. + +Our position was indeed a very fearful one. The hurricane seemed rather +to increase in strength than to cease. On, on we drove. The helm was +put up, and we scudded before it, the dark seas rising on either hand +hissing and foaming, and every moment seeming about to overwhelm us. I +could not help feeling also great anxiety about those we had left on +shore. Even should they have escaped injury, I felt how anxious Captain +Davenport would be when he found that the ship had disappeared; and +Emily, too, how great would be her grief at the thought that I was +probably lost. What the Lascars were about, I could not tell. Our +people remained aft, while they kept forward. I have gone through many +trying scenes, but that was decidedly one of the most trying. We felt +it the more because we were personally safe. We could walk about and +take our food, but at the same time we were every moment expecting +destruction. I was soon to be in a far more dangerous position, but +then I was looking out, hoping to be saved. + +The morning at length broke. We saw the Lascars clustered forward. +What they were about to do we could not tell. Still we drove on. Land +appeared on either hand in the far distance. It was evident that we +were between two islands. The chart showed me that one was Gilolo, and +the other the island of Batchian. The want of sails prevented our +taking the ship into some sheltered place which we might hope to find on +one side or the other. + +"We must either compel the Lascars to assist us in bending sails and +getting the anchor ready, or attack them and drive them overboard," said +the boatswain to me. + +"That cannot be done without bloodshed, I fear," I answered, "for they +are armed as well as we are." + +Thus the two parties remained watching each other. Our men were eager +to make a dash forward and attack the Lascars, but the boatswain +restrained them. + +"Wait a bit, lads," he said; "maybe they will attack us, and then, if we +beat them, as I am very sure we shall, we shall not have their blood on +our hands. Depend upon it, if they slipped the cables--and I am very +sure they did--they did not expect the hurricane to continue so long as +it has done. They wish it over as much as we do; and, like many other +villains, in attempting to work us injury they are likely enough to +bring destruction on their own heads." + +Hour after hour passed by, and once more the land seemed to recede from +us, and we were in the open sea. The wind had slightly gone down, but +still it blew with fearful violence. Again darkness was stealing over +us. Our deck presented a strange appearance--a very sad one, in truth. +The small number of human beings there collected, instead of helping +each other, stood prepared for a desperate fight. Possibly, if it had +not been for the Lascars, we might long since have been anchored in +safety. I saw by the chart that several small islands, rocks, and +shoals lay ahead. Should we escape them? There was the question. +Several times the boatswain, or Roger Trew, or one of the other men, had +ascended the main rigging to look ahead in search of land. However, so +high did the sea run, that we might be close upon an island, unless it +was a high one, without discovering it. + +The increasing darkness now prevented us seeing beyond the bowsprit. +All we could do, therefore, was to steer as we had hitherto done before +the sea, to escape its breaking on board us. We had scarcely eaten +anything for some hours, when the boatswain advised us to take some +food. "Whatever happens, we have work before us; and we must keep the +strength in our bodies," he observed. Fortunately there was a good +supply in the cabin, and half our party went down at a time to sup, +leaving the others on guard on deck. All hands had just taken a hearty +meal, when, as we were collected together on the quarter-deck, just +below the poop, the sound a seaman most dreads--the roar of breakers-- +struck our ears. We all listened attentively. There could be no doubt +about it. It was far deeper and louder than the roaring of the sea +against our sides. I held my breath; so I suspect did every one round +me. + +"What is it, Mr Walter?" asked Oliver, who was standing close to me. + +"Some of us will meet with watery graves before many minutes are over," +said the boatswain, "unless Providence works a miracle to save the +ship." + +Scarcely had he spoken when we felt the ship rising to a heavy sea, then +down she came with a crash which made every timber in her quiver and +shake. + +"To the main rigging!" cried the boatswain, seizing me by the collar. I +saw Roger Trew seize Oliver in the same way. "Quick, quick, lads! or +the next sea will wash you off the deck," cried the boatswain. + +We sprang into the shrouds, and climbed up, up, up into the pitchy +darkness. Scarcely were we off the deck than a huge sea came rolling +up, sweeping everything before it. The Lascars had done as we had set +them the example, and numbers of dark forms were seen swarming up the +rigging into the fore-top. Another and another sea followed. No longer +could we distinguish the deck below us, so completely overwhelmed was it +by the raging waters. Higher and higher they rose. The masts swayed +about as if on the point of falling. Fearful, indeed, was the scene. +The boatswain, getting into the top, helped me up, and I found myself +seated with Oliver by my side. We could just distinguish the foremast +through the gloom, the sea rising almost to cover the top to which the +Lascars were clinging, curling over them as if to drag them from their +perches. + +Perilous as was our position, a cry escaped our men as we saw the +foremast begin to totter. Another sea came and over it went, carrying +the shrieking wretches clinging to it away in its embrace. Though good +swimmers, in vain they attempted to reach the mainmast. The next sea +swept them away to leeward. Their fate might be ours, however, any +moment. We all knew that very well. With what desperate energy did we +cling to that lone mast in the midst of the raging ocean. As we looked +round our eyes could not pierce the thick gloom, nor ascertain whether +any land was near. Oliver Farwell was clinging on next to me. The +other men had secured themselves round the mast, others to the top. No +one spoke; indeed it seemed to all of us that our last moments had +arrived. Every instant we expected to be hurled off from our unstable +resting-place, as the seas dashed with redoubled fury against the wreck. +We could hear the vessel breaking up below us, and we all well knew +that in a short time the mast itself must go for want of support. + +Scarcely had one roaring wave passed under us than another followed. +Above our heads was a dark, murky sky, below and around the foaming sea. +Even the best manned life-boat could scarcely have lived amid that +foaming mass of water. + +"It is very terrible!" I could not help exclaiming. + +"Trust in God," said a voice near me. + +Oliver Farwell spoke. + +"I do, Oliver, I do," I answered. + +"Right, Mr Walter," he said. "If he thinks fit he can find a way for +us to escape." + +"Hold on, lads, even though the mast gives way!" shouted the boatswain. +"The mast will float us, and maybe carry us to some pleasant shore. +Daylight will come in time, and show us whereabouts we are. Never fear, +lads." + +"Ay, ay," answered several voices. "We will cling to the mast as long +as our fingers can gripe hold of it." + +"Hold on, Oliver, hold on!" I said. "Don't you feel as if the mast was +going?" + +Scarcely had I uttered the words when another sea came rolling up. It +struck the shattered wreck like a huge hammer. In an instant it seemed +as if all her timbers had parted. A cry rose from many of the sturdy +men on the top. Over bent the mast. Now it swayed on one side, now on +the other, and then with a crash down it sunk into the boiling ocean. I +thought that I had been holding on securely, but at that instant a sea +swept by, catching the end to which I clung. I felt myself torn from my +grasp, and was carried far away off amid the seething waters. + + + +CHAPTER TEN. + +A DESERT ISLAND IS REACHED. + +As I was washed away from the mainmast a cry from Oliver reached my +ears. I knew by this that he too had been carried off by the sea. I +sprang towards him. "I will save him or perish!" I thought, "as I did +once before." He had not been idle since his first accident, and had +done his best to become a swimmer. He kept up boldly. I urged him to +try and recover the mast, but when we looked round we could discover it +on neither side. Now I felt myself carried to the summit of a sea, to +be hurled over again on the other side. I had little hope of escape, +but still I resolved to struggle to the last. Oliver swam bravely by my +side, but I knew from the exertions he was making that he could not long +continue them. + +"Oh, I am sinking! I am sinking!" he cried out suddenly. I caught him +by the collar. At that instant, as I put out my hand, I felt it grasp a +hard object. It was a large spar. I threw myself on it, dragging +Oliver with me. With great difficulty I hauled him on to it, but so +violent was the agitation of the sea that we could scarcely retain our +hold. It seemed to me that we were driving onwards, carried perhaps by +some current, but that might have been fancy. Again and again I looked +out, in the hopes of seeing the mast. Every instant I feared that +Oliver would again be washed off, but the foaming sea around and the +dark sky above was all I could discern. I put out my hand, and caught +hold of a rope which was secured to the spar. The end of this I passed +round Oliver's body, fastening myself with another portion. Still, +though I kept my head well out of water, the sea was so continually +breaking over us that we were almost drowned, even though clinging to +the spar. I do not pretend that I thought of much at the moment but my +own safety and that of my companion, but the thoughts of my old friend, +Dick Tarbox, and Roger Trew, as well as indeed of the other men, did +come across my mind. I felt very sad, for I was afraid that they had +been washed off, and had not been so fortunate as we were, in getting +hold of a spar. Strange as it may seem, I scarcely for a moment +expected to lose my own life. In a cold climate I do not think I could +have held on as I did, but the sea was warm, and I did not feel in any +way benumbed. + +The previous part of the night had appeared very long; this, however, +seemed far longer. I often felt very sleepy, but I was afraid, if I +gave way to sleep, that I should lose my hold, and resisted the +influence. Had I been alone, I felt that I should not have held on, +neither perhaps could Oliver Farwell, but we encouraged each other. We +did not say much, but not a minute during the whole night passed without +our exchanging a word or two. + +At length I began to hope that the sea was going down: indeed, after a +little time it appeared evident that the water was calmer. It did not +break over our heads so frequently as at first. I thought with what joy +we should welcome the first streaks of day. At length, as we rose to +the top of a sea, we caught sight of the sun himself rising above the +horizon. The clouds had cleared away, the wind had almost completely +fallen. How gloriously the sun shot upwards in the clear blue sky. +Still the ocean rose and fell considerably. As we again reached the top +of a billow, I caught sight of an object at no great distance. At first +I thought it was a rock just above the water, but on looking again, I +saw it was a piece of wreck, and on it was seated a human being. I +looked again and again, and so did Oliver. We were certain that we +could not be mistaken. We shouted at the top of our voices. We saw the +person look round. Again we shouted. He stood up. He had not +discovered us. At length I managed to get my knees on the spar, and to +kneel and wave my hand above my head, shouting at the same time. He now +saw us, and waved his hand in return. At first I thought he was one of +the Lascars, but now I saw that it was Macco. The raft on which he +floated afforded far more security than did our spar, but how to reach +it was the question. In smooth water I might have pushed the spar +before me with the help of Oliver. Presently we saw Macco slip off the +raft and strike out towards us. He swam beautifully. I did not think a +human being could make such rapid way through the water. In a short +time we saw his dark-skinned face close to us. + +"Ah! ah! Bery glad, Massa Walter. Bery glad to see you safe." + +"What has become of the other poor fellows, Macco?" + +"I not know. Come now, I help you to get on my raft." Saying this he +swam round, and began pushing the spar before him, one end first, by +which means it was easily driven through the water. It took us some +time to reach the piece of wreck, which appeared to be part of the +poop-deck. Getting on it himself, he hauled up Oliver first at my +request, and then assisted me, making fast the spar to one side. The +deck, under which were some beams, floated well, and supported us +completely. We were thankful that our lives had been thus far +preserved; but yet here we were, out in mid-ocean as far as we could +see, without land in sight, and with no provisions, not even a drop of +water to support life. We all too well knew that unless help should +come, our lives had only been preserved to suffer a more lingering death +than the one we had escaped. One of my first impulses was to stand up +and look round, in the hope of seeing the mast, with some of my +companions clinging to it, but though several pieces of wreck were +visible, nothing of the mast could we discover. Macco could give very +little account of the way he had escaped. He had, I found, been in the +top, and a sea striking him had washed him away; but being a good +swimmer, he struggled manfully for life, now floating on his back, now +looking round in the hopes of seeing something to which he might cling. +At last he found himself close to the deck; which, indeed, was on the +point of being thrown over him, when, had he been struck, his fate would +have been sealed. Darting away from it, however, he escaped the danger, +and then swimming round, succeeded in placing himself upon it. + +"I so glad," he exclaimed, "dat I saved my life, because now I try to +help save yours." + +Oliver and I thanked him very much, though I said that I could not +exactly see how that was to be. + +"A way will be found," observed Oliver, quietly. "Let us trust in God; +he knows how to bring all things about." + +As the sun rose higher in the sky, the heat became very great, striking +down upon our unprotected heads. Fortunately we had all eaten a good +supper; but after a time we began to feel hungry, and thirst especially +assailed us. Oh, what would we not have given for a glass of water! My +companions were inclined to drink the salt water; but I had heard of the +danger of so doing, and urged them to refrain from the dangerous +draught. Oliver and I had fortunately on our jackets. These were soon +dried, and covering up our heads with them, we lay down to sleep on the +raft. In an instant, it seemed to me, my eyes closed, and I forgot all +that had occurred, and the fearful position in which we were still +placed. I suspect that Macco must have slept too, though when we lay +down he said that he should keep on the watch. I was still dreaming, +with my head covered up, thinking that I was seated at dinner at my old +school, and that a number of fellows suddenly burst in, shouting out +that it was to be a half-holiday. The noises grew louder and louder; +and presently a voice shouted close to me. It sounded strangely like +that of Macco; but how he came to be at school I could not tell. +Throwing the jacket off my head, I started up, and there I saw close to +us a large native prow. She was full of fierce-looking people, whose +voices I had at first heard. Macco, who had been asleep, had not till +just before perceived them. Oliver rose at the same time that I did. + +"If they are human beings, they will treat us kindly," he observed, +standing up, and waving his hand. + +Macco seemed far from satisfied with their appearance. "Me no like dem +fellows," he said; "dey cut t'roat--eat! eat!" + +"No fear of that," I observed. "She looks to me like a trading prow, +though her men certainly would suit the deck of a pirate." + +However, we had no choice. It was now perfectly calm, and the prow +rowed up to the raft, the men in her making signs to us to come on +board. As the vessel's side touched the raft, ropes were thrown to us, +and we soon clambered up on her deck. The people began to shout to us, +evidently asking us questions; which, of course, we were not able to +answer, not understanding a word that was said. The vessel was a +strange-looking craft, with large mat-sails, her deck sloping from the +stern down to the bows, which were by far the lowest part. In the +after-part was a poop-deck; under which there was a sort of cabin, while +a small house of bamboo in front of it formed another cabin. She was +steered by two rudders, one on either quarter, the tiller ropes coming +in through ports in the sides, and being worked by men who sat on the +deck under the poop. Her crew were brown-skinned men, in the usual +dress of Malay seamen; that is to say, a pair of trousers fastened round +the waist, a handkerchief encircling the head, and a thin cotton jacket, +which, however, was thrown off when they were at work. Their captain, +however, wore a handsome costume. He was seated on a cushion just +before the poop, enjoying the luxury of an evening smoke, a long pipe +with a bowl being in his hand. We were now taken up before him; and he +again put questions to us, which of course, as before, we were unable to +answer. At length we heard him shouting out to the men forward. One of +them came aft, and the chief said a few words to him. On this he turned +round to us, and said, "Talky Inglis?" I nodded. "Where you come +from?" he asked, pretty quickly. I told him we had been wrecked at no +great distance, and had been floated away from the place. After I had +put my explanation in several different ways, he seemed to understand +me. He explained what I had said to the chief, who seemed greatly +delighted, and immediately issued some orders to his men. They +forthwith got out their sweeps, and began pulling away in the direction, +we supposed, of the wreck. I was very glad of this, as I thought there +was a possibility, should any of our companions have escaped drowning, +of finding them. + +I now told our interpreter that we were very hungry and thirsty. He +understood me more by the signs I made than the words, I suspect; and, +nodding, made me understand that some food would be brought us. "But we +are thirsty, thirsty!" I exclaimed. Indeed, my parched tongue made me +feel that without a draught of water I could scarcely swallow food. On +this our interpreter, going into the hold, brought up a thick cane of +bamboo, and pulling a stopper out of the top, showed us, to our great +satisfaction, that it was full of water. I never enjoyed a more +delicious draught. I thought of my companions, however, and handed it +to Oliver, who passed it on to Macco, after which I took another pull at +it; and so we continued passing it round, till we had drained the +contents. + +We were ready by this time for dinner, and were thankful to see several +dishes brought out of the little building which formed the cook-house on +deck. The chief signed to us to sit down and fall to. One was rice; of +that there was no doubt. Another, too, I soon discovered to be that +most valuable production of the East, the bread-fruit: this was cut in +slices and fried. The third, however, puzzled me excessively, and its +appearance was far from attractive. There was, besides, a little saucer +with red pepper. Oliver and I at once attacked the bread-fruit, when +Macco pointed to the other dish. + +"Eat, eat; good!" he said. + +"Do you take some of it," I observed, unwilling to begin. + +He immediately did so, swallowing a good portion. + +"What is it?" I asked. + +"You know; what sailor call `squid,'" he answered. "Dem very good." + +I now guessed that it was octopus, or ink-fish, the favourite food of +the sperm whale. I would rather have kept to the bread-fruit and rice; +but Oliver was not so particular, and took a little with some red +pepper. On his pronouncing it very good, I followed his example, and +found it far more palatable than I had expected, and I doubt not very +nutritious. I remembered having heard that it was dangerous, after a +long fast, to eat much, and I therefore took but little. Oliver also +was equally abstemious. Macco, however, laughed at my warning, and very +soon finished off the contents of the dishes. + +We hoped, from the hospitable way we were entertained, that we should +continue to be treated equally well. After we had finished our repast, +Oliver and I felt very sleepy. The chief seeing this, made signs to us +that we might go into the bamboo house and rest. It was very clean and +neat; a sort of sofa being on one side, on which there was room for +Oliver and me to lie down, one at one end, and one at the other--with +our legs somewhat drawn up, to be sure, as the whole length was not more +than six feet. We must have slept there the whole night; for when we +got up we found the sun just rising, while the chief and his crew were +turning their faces towards Mecca--or where they supposed it to be--and +offering up their morning prayers. By this we knew that they were +Mohammedans: such, indeed, is the religion of a large number of the +people of the archipelago inhabiting the sea-coasts. + +We had time to look about us, and examine the strange craft we had got +on board. She had no masts, but the sails were hoisted on huge +triangles, which could be lowered at pleasure. Her anchor, too, was of +curious construction: it consisted of a tough, hooked piece of timber, +which served as the fluke or hook, being strengthened by twisted ratans, +which bound it to the shank; while the stock was formed of a large flat +stone, also secured by ratans to the shank. I observed that all the +crew were armed; and on a small piece of timber in the bows a small +swivel gun was placed, a similar piece being fixed in the after-part of +the vessel. The cable also was formed of ratan, which, though strong, +could easily, I suspected, be cut by rocks. + +We found, on seeing Macco, that the vessel had made but little progress +during the night, having anchored near a reef in order not to pass the +spot where the wreck was supposed to have occurred. Little notice of us +was taken by the chief or his men: they all seemed eagerly looking out +for the expected wreck. We also kept our eyes about us in every +direction, earnestly hoping that she might appear; but not a sign of her +was visible. I thought I saw a sail in the far distance. I pointed it +out to Oliver. He was of the same opinion; so was Macco: but whether +the natives saw it or not, we could not tell. + +We continued our course, the breeze being light. After a time the prow +was steered first to the right, then to the left. Then she made a +traverse to the south as near to the wind as she could lay (which, +by-the-by, was not very near, even with the aid of her oars); but though +several reefs were seen, on one of which probably the ship had struck, +she was nowhere to be discovered. We saw, however, pieces of timber and +various articles floating about. At length we caught sight of a long +object in the water. We steered towards it. Yes; it was the very mast +to which we had clung! So it seemed to me, and so Oliver thought. If +so, what had become of our unfortunate companions? Shortly afterwards +another mast was seen. A human form was entangled in the rigging. We +eagerly looked down on it as we passed. The dark skin showed that it +was the body of one of the Lascars. The mast was undoubtedly the +foremast to which they had clung. A light boat was launched from the +deck of the prow, and three hands went into it to the mast. I saw that +they were taking off the girdle of the dead man. As they lifted him up +I distinguished the features--so I thought--of Ali Tomba, who had been +the cause of the destruction of the _Bussorah Merchant_. Leaving the +body, the men returned with the sash and clothes. They were examined, +and found to contain a considerable number of coins, at which the +natives gazed with eager eyes. + +Their whole conduct now changed towards us. The chief had seated +himself in his usual place on the deck, when we were dragged up to him, +and he made signs to us to empty our pockets. Oliver and Macco had, of +course, but a few small coins: I had rather more, but no great sum, in +Dutch money, which Captain Davenport had given me to make some purchases +in the town of Ternate. I suppose they had treated us with civility at +first, not understanding that our ship was entirely lost, and perhaps +expecting that our countrymen would have punished them had they behaved +ill to us. The chief seemed very angry at finding we had so little of +value about us. He now made us a sign that we were to be gone from his +presence. We sat down in the shade before the house, in the centre of +the deck, where Macco began to bewail our hard fate, observing that he +was sure the natives would kill and eat us. I endeavoured to comfort +him by saying, that as they were Mohammedans they certainly would not +eat us, though I could not be answerable for their not taking our lives; +and, as far as I could, I endeavoured to persuade him to be prepared for +whatever might happen. + +"The great thing, Macco," said Oliver, joining in the conversation, "is +to be sure that He who lives up there,"--(and he pointed to the blue +sky)--"who made this world, and all those stars we see, loves us, his +creatures whom he has placed on the earth; and if we trust him, he will +do everything that is best for us." + +"But how I know he does love us?" asked Macco. "He let many people die; +many be drowned; many be killed with blow up mountain or shake of earth; +many die fever, plague; many kill each other." + +"Very true," answered Oliver. "Sometimes he lets those who love him +best die. He does not say that he will keep even his friends alive; but +if he takes them out of a bad world and puts them into a good one, does +not that show his love? Some of those who are killed in the terrible +way you say, are not his friends; but we know he loves us, because he +gave One he loves better than anything else, to die for us, to be +punished instead of us. We deserve punishment; we all feel that. He +has told us, too, that he loves us; and if we believe the Bible, we must +believe that. If man had not sinned, but had always been good and +obedient, we might have reason to doubt God's Word; but we are sure that +man has sinned, and continues sinning, and it was sin which brought all +this suffering on man. Besides, again, as I said, we must not look upon +death--the mere death of the body--as a punishment. It may be a great +blessing; it is indeed so to many. But then, again, Macco, we cannot +pretend to understand all God's dealings with us." + +I listened very attentively to these remarks made by Oliver. A new +light seemed to break on me. God's love! God's love!--oh, how little +do we understand that! It is only a knowledge of that which can enable +us in any way to comprehend his dealings with man. + +"You see, Macco," continued Oliver, "that God is just as well as loving. +He punishes those who continue to refuse his offers of mercy. With +many he tries loving-kindness first. Sometimes his love makes him +afflict people for the sake of bringing them to him, making them feel +their own helplessness. The great thing of all, however, is to know for +a certainty that he loves us, and that whatever he does is for the best. +When a man is sure of this, he trusts to God, whatever happens. I have +a loving mother, who taught me this. I am very sure it is the most +valuable knowledge she could have given me. Though we know that we are +sinners, and deserve punishment, yet we also know that when God's Son +became man and died on the cross, being sacrificed for our sins, he took +away the sins of all those who trust to him; and so, instead of being +sinners in God's sight, when we thus trust to him we are made pure and +holy, and fit to go to heaven--nay, sure of going to heaven when we die. +If you believe this, Macco, you will not be afraid even though the +people round us should suddenly jump up and kill us all, and throw us +overboard." + +Macco was silent for some time. At length he looked up, and +said,--"Bless you, Oliver; you tell me great truth. I no fear to die +now." + +I felt indeed grateful to my young companion. His words had given me a +courage I could scarcely have expected to possess; and though I did not +feel indifferent as to our fate, yet I was prepared, at all events, far +better than I should otherwise have been for whatever might happen. + +The native seamen sat round in the bow of the vessel, eating from a huge +dish of rice, with some dried fish of some sort, seasoned with red +pepper. After they had eaten their fill, they put down the remains of +the dish--into which they had all plunged their unclean fingers--before +us, much in the way they would have put it before a hungry dog, and made +us a sign to eat it if we chose. At first I could scarcely bring myself +to touch the food; but Macco urged me to do so, and he and Oliver at +length beginning their repast, I could no longer resist the desire to +eat. + +I could not make out exactly whether we were on board a trader or a +pirate; perhaps a mixture of both. If she was a trader, I concluded she +was bound to the coast of New Guinea for tripang, or sea-slug-- +considered a great delicacy by the Chinese and other people to the +north; perhaps for pearls to the Aru Islands, or for other productions +of the southern part of the archipelago. We found, at all events, that +they were steering to the south. For several days they stood on, not +altering their course. We were treated in the same manner as we had +been since they had failed to discover the wreck of which we had told +them. They gave us but scanty food, and allowed us but little water. +The interpreter no longer came near us, while scowling looks were cast +at us from every side. At length an island appeared on our port-bow, +towards which the prow was steered. It was thickly wooded, down to the +very water's edge. A variety of strange-looking shrubs were seen, with +lofty and elegant palms rising above them. What they were going to do +we could not surmise. Having got close in, the sails were lowered, and +the anchor let go. A boat was then launched. As we were standing +looking towards the shore, the chief touched me on the shoulder, and +made signs that I was to get into the boat. I knew that resistance +would be useless. Two men then stepped in. I also did as I was +ordered. He then signed to Oliver and Macco to follow; Macco going +forward, and Oliver and I sitting in the stern. We endeavoured to +ascertain from the chief why we were to be carried to the island; but he +did not answer, making only an impatient gesture to us to be off. +Without wasting further words, we took our seats, and the two men began +to pull away towards the shore. + + + +CHAPTER ELEVEN. + +OUR ISLAND. + +A ledge of rocks running out from the land formed a small natural +harbour, into which the boat ran, and soon reached the sandy beach. +Here the crew made signs to us to land. We obeyed, for resistance, of +course, was useless. I jumped on shore, followed by my two companions, +and scarcely wetting our feet, we reached the dry beach. The men, then +giving a shove with their oars, pulled away, leaving us on what appeared +to be an uninhabited island. Why we were thus treated we could not +comprehend. + +"I do not see that we have any great reason to complain," observed +Oliver. "We should have been very thankful had we reached this island +on the raft, and we ought to be very much obliged to those people for +carrying us here. They might have taken us to some place and sold us +for slaves, or might have creesed us and thrown us overboard." + +"You are right, Oliver," I answered; "and we must try to make the best +of it. I only hope we may find food and water. Unless they were less +than human, they could scarcely have placed us on an island which they +knew was destitute of water." We made these remarks as we watched the +boat rowing away toward the prow. She soon reached the vessel, was +hoisted up, and the prow made sail to the southward. We now sat down on +the beach, to see what was best to be done. Macco had his sailor's +knife, fortunately, secured with a lanyard round his neck. I had a +large clasp-knife in my pocket, which, though, like my clothes, somewhat +the worse for having been wetted with salt water, was still serviceable +and sharp. + +The first thing was to survey our island, we agreed, and to try to find +water. The shore was lined in many places with the curious pandanus, or +screw-palm, which may well be described as a trunk with branches at both +ends; or rather the roots seem to have lifted the trunk into the air and +to have assumed the appearance of branches. Its woody fruit, about five +inches in diameter, is in the form of a sphere, and is regularly divided +by projections of a diamond shape. + +The jungle was so thick that we could penetrate but a very little way +through it, with great difficulty. Walking along the beach, we reached +a small opening--a miniature gulf, as it were, into which apparently a +stream of water had at some time flowed, though at present the bed was +perfectly dry. Looking up it, we discovered a high hill some little +distance inland; we agreed that if we could make our way to that, we +might thence have a better view of the surrounding country. We had not +gone far when we came to a grove of bamboos. We each of us cut down a +couple: one we pointed to serve as a weapon of defence; and the other we +formed into the shape of a gouge to serve as a spade, with which we +intended to dig for water, should we not find any stream or pool. +Still, from the rich vegetation which appeared on every side, we had +little doubt that water would be found. Proceeding up the dry +water-course, we approached the hill; but it grew narrower and narrower, +till at length the trees and underwood, with numberless creepers, so +completely blocked up the way, that we could scarcely force a road +through it. Still, to the top of the hill we had determined to go. +Making use of our knives, we cut away the creepers, sometimes crawling +under the trees, sometimes climbing over the stems which bent across our +course. Once more we saw the summit of the hill. It appeared much +higher than we at first supposed it to be. At length we were rewarded +for our exertions by finding that we were actually ascending the side. +On we went, the underwood becoming less dense as we rose higher and +higher. We now had little difficulty in making our way, the trees and +shrubs indeed assisting us in climbing the steep sides. When, however, +we got to the top, we found that what we had supposed to be small shrubs +were, in reality, large trees, covering it so thickly that the view on +every side was shut out. + +"I am afraid we have had all our toil for nothing," I observed. + +"I am afraid so, too," said Oliver. + +"Stay, Massa Walter," observed Macco. "I climb to top of dis tree, and +den see what I can see." + +He pointed to the lofty palm under which we were standing. Descending a +little way, he cut a quantity of creepers, which he soon twisted into a +strong hoop round the tree and his own body. He now began, by placing +the hoop a little way above him and leaning back, to climb upwards, and +with wonderful rapidity reached the summit. We asked him what he saw. + +"We on good big island!" he shouted out. "Plenty of wood; but no see +water. Dere oder islands." And then pointing to the south-east, he +cried out,--"Dere more land, long, long away dere!" + +"Do you make out any vessel?" I asked. + +"No; only prow go away to de south." + +"That must be the coast of New Guinea," I observed to Oliver. "I only +hope none of the inhabitants may come over to this island, for they are +terrible savages." + +"If they come, we must keep out of their way," said Oliver. "It would +be better to remain here than to be carried off and eaten by them." + +Macco, having ended his survey, descended the tree. I tried to get up +the same way, wishing to take a look round myself; but I found that, +though not a bad climber, I could not manage it. Seeing no great use in +persisting in the attempt, I gave it up. We could find no other way +down to the shore, besides the one up which we had come. Having cleared +away some impediments, we had less difficulty in returning than we had +found in going upwards. Macco led; indeed, his knowledge of woodcraft +in his native country was of great service to us, for I believe without +him we should very easily have lost our way, even though we had left the +marks of our knives on the creepers as we went up. As we were pushing +on, my eye caught sight of some trees in a hollow on one side, which I +at once knew to be sago-trees, from the description Mr Hooker had given +me of them. + +"See!" I exclaimed to Oliver, "there is a supply of food sufficient to +last us for months, or years, indeed, if we can manage to manufacture +the sago; and I think we shall have little difficulty in doing that." + +I pointed it out to Macco. He knew them at once. + +"Yes, yes!" he said; "dey bery good. I make food from dem. Come to +look for water dere." + +Following him, we proceeded to the hollow I have mentioned. The ground +was low and soft, and gave us some hopes of finding water. We instantly +set to work, digging with our bamboo spades. We dug and dug in the soft +earth; but though it was somewhat moist, not a thimbleful of water +appeared. Still we did not despair. Oliver proposed that we should +look for another spot at a lower level, where we might hope to be more +successful. We accordingly set to work to force our way through the +jungle towards the shore. Even with sharp axes we should have found +some difficulty; but it was very heavy work with our knives. Still, it +had to be done. Water was the first thing we required. We had +progressed a hundred yards or less, though it had appeared to us upwards +of a mile, when we heard close to us a peculiar cry, which sounded +something like, "Wawk--wawk--wawk!--Wok--wok--wok!" loud and shrill +above our heads. On looking up we caught sight of a magnificent bird, +with rich crimson wings, and a long pendant tail like strips of satin. +The head, and back, and shoulders were covered with the richest yellow, +while the throat was of a deep metallic-green. The end of the side +plumes had white points. I had little difficulty in recognising the +bird of paradise, and I remembered Mr Hooker speaking of one which he +called the red bird of paradise. This, I had little doubt, was the bird +before us. Away he flew, however, followed by a smaller bird of a +sombre brown plumage, which I could scarcely have supposed was his mate, +had I not known that the wives of these gay-plumaged gentlemen are +nearly always robed in Quaker-like simplicity. As he went, he appeared +to be pecking away at the fruit of various trees over which he passed. +It seemed surprising, too, that his long ribbon-like tail should have +escaped catching in the thick foliage through which he rapidly flew. +We, poor creatures, scrambling through the lower part of the forest, had +a difficulty in making our way, without losing our close-fitting +garments; indeed, as it was, they were sadly torn by the underwood. We +were rewarded for our exertions, by reaching another hollow in which a +number of the sago-palms grew. + +The sago-palm has a creeping root-stem, like a nipa-palm, and Mr Hooker +had told me that when it is nearly fifteen years old it sends up an +immense terminal spike of flowers, after which it dies. It is not so +tall as the cocoa-nut tree, but is thicker and larger. The mid-ribs of +its immense leaves are twelve or fifteen feet long, and sometimes the +lower part is as thick as a man's leg. They are excessively light, +consisting of a firm pith, covered with a hard rind. They are +frequently used instead of bamboo; entire houses, indeed, are built of +them. They serve for the roofs of houses, as also for the floors; and +when pegged together, side by side, they form the centre part of the +panels of frame houses. As they do not shrink, but look clean and nice, +without requiring varnish, they serve better for walls and partitions +than do ordinary boards. Boxes, also, are made of them; indeed, it +would be difficult to describe the numberless uses to which they are +put. The trunk, however, is the more valuable part, as the pith of the +interior is the staple food of large numbers of the inhabitants of these +regions. I will not stop here to describe how the sago is made; but I +will do so shortly. + +We again set to work with our bamboo spades, and dug away most +energetically. Some moisture on the ground encouraged us to proceed, +while the burning thirst from which we were suffering increased our +anxiety for success. As we dug lower the ground became soft, and more +and more moist, when Macco, putting down his hand, brought it up full of +liquid mud. "Water come soon," he exclaimed, digging away more +energetically than before. + +"Hurrah!" I shouted. "A spring! a spring! We are indeed lucky!" + +"Let us rather say that God is merciful," said Oliver, though in so low +a voice that it seemed scarcely as if he intended me to hear him. + +"You are right," I answered; "I do feel grateful." Some bamboos grew a +short way off, and Macco, running to them, soon cut several pieces, +leaving the knots at the ends to serve as bottoms; we thus in a few +minutes were each supplied with a serviceable cup. By this time the +thick mud had settled down, though the water was far from limpid. We +each of us eagerly took a draught to quench our thirst. Thus, then, we +were supplied with the first necessary of life. By this time we had all +become very hungry; though we felt sure we could manufacture some sago +out of the sago-palms, yet it would be a work of time. Our chief hope +of obtaining food immediately was on the sea-shore--we might at all +events find shell-fish. Macco told us he was sure he could manufacture +some fishing-lines and hooks; the latter out of the bones of birds, and +the lines from some of the numerous creepers with which the island +abounded. While this was being done, however, we should be starved; we +therefore made the best of our way round through the path we had already +made to the shore. I had often thought the matter over, and I was sure +that many persons had lost their lives from not immediately setting to +work to try and find the means of subsistence. I had read of two +parties being cast away on the same island at a short distance from each +other: the one perishing; the other, from their energy and perseverance, +existing for many months, and ultimately escaping. + +Oliver needed no urging, and Macco especially seemed ready to exert his +faculties in obtaining food. We looked along the beach, but the water +was up, and no shells with live creatures in them could we find. There +was no lack of empty shells, however, some of them of great size and +beauty, such as would fetch a high price in England. + +"They are of very little use to us," I observed. + +Macco heard me. "Not so sure of dat, Massa Walter," he said, for I +should remark that, having learned his English from Potto Jumbo, he +spoke very much in his way. "Here dis big shell make good cook-pot; +here clean out dis, make good cup; here plates, and here dis make good +spoon," and he picked up shells of different shapes. + +"I wish, however, we could find something to put into them and cook," I +could not help saying. + +Soon after, we had reached the beach where we had landed. We found the +sand soft and fine. Macco looked about, and then exclaimed, "Ha, ha! +here's somet'ing;" and he began digging away with the bamboo spade. In +a short time he produced a couple of turtle's eggs: we hunted, and soon +found several more. "Dese do till tide go down and we find shell-fish," +he observed. + +Though very hungry, I had no fancy for eating turtle's eggs raw. "We +must try and find the means of lighting a fire," I observed. "Do you +think, Macco, you could produce a flame with two pieces of wood, as is +done in some countries?" + +"Not so sure," he answered; "but if we had flint, I soon find pith to +set on fire." + +From the character of the island, which appeared to be entirely +volcanic, I had no hope of finding flints. Just then it flashed across +me that a few days before I had been using a glass from my telescope as +a burning-glass, and I recollected putting it in my pocket on being +called off suddenly to attend to some duty; I had little hope, however, +of finding it unbroken. I put my hands into my trowsers pockets, and +then into my jacket pockets, but it was not there; neither was it in my +waistcoat pockets, but there was a hole in one of them, and after +feeling about, I found it had worked its way round into the corner of +the waistcoat by my side. It had thus escaped being broken, or +discovered by the Malays when they took away our money. I produced it +with great satisfaction. Macco ran off immediately, and came back with +some dried pith and a bundle of sticks. We soon produced a flame and +had a fire burning. Macco then made a collection of round stones, which +he put on the fire, at the same time filling one of the shells with +water. "Too much water," he observed, turning some of it out. He then +transferred the hot stones to the water, which began bubbling and +hissing as if it were boiling. "Put in the eggs," he observed; "soon +boil dem." We followed his advice, and in four or five minutes the eggs +were boiled thoroughly, quite as well as if they had been put into a pot +on the fire. We had now no danger of starving, for the present at all +events; and indeed, if we could manufacture the sago, we might supply +ourselves with food sufficient to last for any length of time. + +The tide had, meantime, been going out, and here and there where the +rocks were exposed we caught sight of shell-fish. I, however, knowing +even in that climate the danger of sleeping entirely exposed to the +night air without a roof over the head, advised my companions at once to +set to work and build a hut. We accordingly went back to the sago-palm +grove, and cut down as many of the leaves as we could carry. With these +we returned to the beach, on the highest part of which, just under the +trees, we proposed putting up a temporary hut, till we could get a more +permanent building. We soon had an edifice erected, something like a +North American Indian wigwam, into which we could all creep and lie +conveniently at full length. By this time the tide had gone down, and +by crawling along the rocks, Macco was able to capture a number of +shell-fish. This he did by cutting them off the rock with the bamboo +spear: our only fear was lest they should be poisonous. We asked him +what he thought about the matter. "All right," he answered; "dem good +for eat." He had brought an ample supply for our supper; some were +roasted, but others were boiled as we had done the turtle's eggs. After +this, commending ourselves to One whom we knew would watch over us, we +lay down in our small hut to sleep. + +The sun was just rising out of the horizon when we awoke; the sea was +calm and blue, and the sky was beautifully clear. Our first discussion +while at breakfast on turtle's eggs, was the best means of manufacturing +the sago. If we could get a tree cut down, there would not be much +difficulty; but how to fell it with our clasp-knives was the question. + +"Perseverance conquers all difficulties," observed Oliver. "I remember +the story of the mouse letting the lion out of the net by nibbling away +at the meshes. We can work away at the stem with our knives, and do a +little every day, in the meantime subsisting on the eggs and the +shell-fish." + +"Yes, yes," said Macco; "we choose small tree, enough for us to live on +for many days, and we soon have him down." + +Before starting, however, the tide being still low, we collected a +further supply of shell-fish. As we were proceeding along the beach, we +saw, just rising as it were out of the water, a small ridge. "What can +that be?" I said, drawing nearer to it. I saw, as I got close to the +water's edge, that it was a huge bivalve. As far as I could judge, it +was alive. I called my companions, and catching hold of it, we dragged +it up, though our united strength could with difficulty accomplish our +object. + +"Take care no put hand inside," said Macco, "or he bite bery hard!" + +I am certain that I am right when I say that it could not have weighed +much less than a hundredweight. It would afford us not only one, but +several meals probably, if the creature inside bore any proportion to +his house. I did not know the name at the time, but I afterwards +learned that it must have been a specimen of the _Tridacna gigas_. I +have since heard that the shells themselves, without the mollusc, weigh +even more than that; indeed, I afterwards saw some in use of larger +size. Having captured our prize, however, we found that there was some +chance of our not being able to get at the mollusc inside; for when the +difficulty of opening an ordinary oyster-shell is remembered, the force +required to get at the inside of so large a shell as this would be no +easy task. It was important, however, to get the creature out at once, +for if it were exposed to the sun, it would, in all probability, not be +fit to eat by the evening. Macco, ever fertile in resource, ran off, +and soon returned with a supply of bamboos, which he split up into fine +long wedges. He hunted about on every side till he found a small +opening; into this he instantly inserted the fine point of a piece of +bamboo, and going round the shell, placed another in a similar position. +There was no lack of pieces of coral rock lying about which had been +broken off by the sea, and thrown up on the beach; these served as +hammers. "Now," he cried out, "strike! strike altogether!" We did so, +but Oliver's instrument and mine made no impression; Macco's, however, +went right in, and seemed to cut some part of the creature; for directly +afterwards, by using the wedges as levers, we lifted up one of the +valves, and exposed to view a huge mass of blubber-like flesh. Macco +seemed highly delighted. "Dat bery good, bery good!" he exclaimed, and +soon cut the whole away from the shell, and held it up to let the water +run out. + +"I should be very hungry before I could eat that," I observed. + +"Ah, Massa Walter," he answered, "you will be bery hungry if you no eat +dis, and many oder curious t'ings. De great t'ing is, if good to eat. +If good, no mind looks; better to eat dis dan starve." + +With some powerful blows, he separated the two shells, and now begged us +to carry them up to the hut. "Dey hold water," he observed; "and we +soon have all we want to live well." Having made up the fire, he cut +three very long bamboo stakes, with which he made a triangle over it, so +high that the flames could not reach the poles to burn them. From the +centre he hung down the huge mollusc, so that the smoke might circle +round it. "Dere," he said, "dis now dry, and keep well till we want eat +it." + + + +CHAPTER TWELVE. + +OUR LIFE ON THE ISLAND. + +The success we had already met with in finding food raised our spirits; +but I knew the risk we should run of losing our health if we could not +obtain vegetables was very great. I therefore urged my companions to +set to work at once and try to get the sago manufactured. + +"Come directly," said Macco, collecting a quantity of half-dried leaves. +These he placed on the fire. He then covered them up with green twigs, +thereby preventing the flames bursting out, at the same time producing +an abundant smoke. "Dere, dat do bery well," he observed. "No creature +come to carry off de fish, and he well dry when we come back." + +I cannot say I felt any great confidence in the success of his +experiment; and I thought it of no great importance even should it fail, +as I began to hope that we should have a sufficient supply of food. We +soon found a palm of moderate dimensions, which we might hope, even with +our knives, to cut down in the course of a day or two by working away +assiduously. What, however, would take us several days, a sharp axe +would accomplish almost in the course of almost as many minutes. +However, we could all three work at once. + +"You take one side, Oliver; Macco, you take another; and I will take a +third," I observed. + +"Stay, Massa Walter," he answered; "you no want to break head. Do dis +first. You cut here; Oliver cut here; and I go make rope." + +Some ratans were growing not far off; he immediately began cutting them +away, and having collected a large supply, twisted them ingeniously into +a rope. Oliver and I had made apparently but little impression in the +tree by the time he had done so. Taking the rope, he climbed up as +before, to a considerable height, where he fastened it, and then carried +the other end to another tree at some little distance, so that it might +fall to the ground clear of its companions. + +"Now," he said, "do bery well;" and taking out his knife, he began to +work away with great energy. So dexterously did he ply his instrument, +that he soon had made almost as much impression as we had done, who had +been working so much longer a time. The ratans I speak of, though +allied to palms, are creepers. They grow from the ground, climbing up a +tree, and then running along the branches, and descending again, mount +up another tree, or sometimes climb from branch to branch. They often +encircle a tree, which, in time, is completely destroyed; while they +survive, forming an extraordinary intricate mass of natural cordage on +the ground. In some places the original trunk had entirely disappeared, +leaving only the ratan. They greatly ornament the forest as they hang +in graceful festoons from branch to branch, or adorn their summits with +feathery crowns of leaves, their highest points being erect leafy spikes +which rise up above all the other foliage. + +Macco had collected several lengths of this curious creeper, each +perhaps of fifty fathoms; and having twisted them together, had formed a +very strong rope. The natives make their cables of them, as well as the +standing rigging of their masts; indeed, they are used for all sorts of +stout cordage. While we were working away, looking up, I saw on the +branch of a tree, at no great distance, as if watching our proceedings, +an animal with a small head and very large bright eyes. He was covered, +apparently, with very thick fur, and, I soon saw, had also a long tail, +which was curled on a branch below him. As we did not move, he began +eating away in a fearless manner the leaves from a branch which hung +near his snout. He reminded me somewhat of the opossum, covered with +thick, pure white fur, on which appeared a few black spots of various +shapes. I pointed him out at length to Macco. "He good eat," he +whispered. "I catch him." Several pieces of small ratan lay near us, +and taking one of them, he formed a noose, with which in his hand he +crept towards the tree. On considering what the animal could be, I +recollected one called the cuscus, a picture of which I had seen in one +of Mr Hooker's books. "Yes, I am sure that must be a cuscus. It is a +marsupial, or pouch-possessing animal, like the kangaroo," I said to +Oliver. Macco quickly climbed the tree, and reached a branch just above +the cuscus. Not till then did the creature catch sight of him, and +began moving along the branch, but at a very slow pace. Macco +immediately climbed down towards us and followed it. Just, however, as +he was approaching, cuscus let go his hold, hanging down by his tail. +It was a fatal manoeuvre, for Macco's noose was immediately let drop, +and quickly drawn over the head of poor cuscus, who in vain tried to +liberate himself with his claws. He was now a captive, and Macco, +keeping the noose tight, descended the tree. Cuscus held on by his long +prehensile tail; but Macco pulled and pulled, and down the animal came +with a flop to the ground. His claws were so sharp, that it was rather +difficult to take hold of him without the risk of being severely +scratched. Macco called out to us to bring him one of the bamboo +spears. With this he transfixed the poor creature to the ground; but +even then it struggled, and not till he had made use of his knife, half +severing the head from the body, did the creature die. It looked +somewhat, in its white, woolly covering, like a small, fat lamb; but it +had short legs, hand-like feet, with large claws. + +"He make bery good dinner for us," observed Macco. "No fear of our +starving. Dat good t'ing." + +Oliver and I were very glad, and thanked him very much for catching the +creature. However, I urged him to go back at once, that we might +continue our work on the sago-tree, for I was sure that, though by +eating flesh and fish we might support our lives, we should not retain +our health without bread, or a substitute for it, which the sago would +afford. From the height of the sun, in addition to the hints of our own +appetites, we guessed that it was already past noon. We therefore +proposed returning with the cuscus to our hut. Tying up the legs of our +prize with the ratan, we passed a piece of bamboo through them, and took +our way by the path we had cut to the beach. Our fire was out, and the +number of flies collected round our mollusc made us doubtful whether we +were not too late to preserve it from destruction. + +"Soon drive dem away," said Macco, and bringing fresh fuel, he piled it +up under the triangle. "I get fire dis time," he said. "I see man on +board de prow do it de oder day." + +Taking a piece of bamboo sharpened like a knife in one hand, he held +another piece in the other, split in two, with the convex part +uppermost, in which he had cut a small notch. He began passing the +sharp piece slowly over the other, as a fiddler does his bow over his +fiddle--strings, increasing in rapidity, till, in a very short time, the +powder produced by the friction ignited, and fell down upon the ashes. +This he quickly blew up, and even more rapidly than I could have done +with my burning-glass, a flame was produced. The smoke which ascended +soon sent some of the flies to a distance, while the others fell down +into the fire. This gave us a hint that we must not leave any of our +food exposed, or that it would very quickly be destroyed. + +"Cuscus better for dinner dan dis," he said, for he had heard me name +the creature; and he at once began to draw off the skin; then cutting +some slices off the animal, he soon had them toasting on forked sticks +before the fire. + +"I wish I had some salt," I observed, pointing to the large shell in +which we had boiled our eggs. The water had evaporated, leaving the +sides and stones covered with saline particles. By scraping this off, +we had an ample supply of salt for our meat. + +"It strikes me, Mr Walter," said Oliver, "that we may be able to +manufacture enough salt to preserve the animals we kill, for the time +may come when we may not be able to obtain any, and possibly it might be +a better way of preserving them than by drying them in the smoke." + +"In dry, cool weather we might do so," I observed; "but in this hot +climate I doubt whether we could get the salt in with sufficient +rapidity to stop putrefaction. However, of course, it would assist in +preserving the meat." + +"I am afraid you are right, Mr Walter," he answered. "At all events, +it is satisfactory to know that we can procure salt for our daily use." + +"Oliver," I said, "I must ask a favour of you--it is, not to call me Mr +Walter. A common misfortune has made us brothers, and as a brother, I +am sure, I shall ever look upon you." + +"I will do what you wish," said Oliver, "for I owe my life to you; yet, +though I regard you as a brother, I do not feel myself your equal." + +"Do not talk of that, my dear fellow," I said. "We will not bandy +compliments. I should have been very miserable had I been left on this +island by myself, or even with so honest a fellow as our dark-skinned +friend here; for though we two might have been like Robinson Crusoe and +his man Friday, I have often thought that Crusoe must have passed many +dull and melancholy hours, without a companion with whom he could +exchange ideas on equal terms." + +I felt much more at my ease after I had said this to Oliver. I had long +looked upon him as a very superior lad. His earnest piety, his courage +and his coolness, had made me greatly respect him. Had I been told to +choose a companion in the situation in which I was placed, I certainly +should have selected him. Our meal over, we went back to our sago-tree, +and commenced our work. We made some progress, but still clasp-knives +were very inadequate tools for the work we had undertaken. Every now +and then, as we were labouring on silently, we heard the same cry of +Wawk--wawk--wawk!--Wok--wok--wok! and caught sight of magnificent birds +flitting among the higher branches of the trees, but so rapidly did they +move, that we could scarcely distinguish their forms. We knew them, +however, to be birds of paradise, which Mr Hooker had fully described +to us. I knew from this that we must be on an island very close to the +shores of New Guinea, as Mr Hooker had told me these birds are only +found in that vast country, or in the surrounding islands. When +Europeans first arrived at the Moluccas to obtain cloves and nutmegs, +which were then supposed to be rare, and considered of great value, they +saw, in the possession of the natives, dried skins of birds of beautiful +plumage and unusual shape. On inquiring their name, they were told that +they were God's birds. As the bodies shown them had neither feet nor +wings, they easily believed the story they heard, that they had fallen +from the sun, and the Portuguese therefore called them birds of the sun. +The Dutch, who came afterwards, gave them the name of birds of +paradise. One of their early writers declared that no one had ever seen +them alive, that they existed only in the air, invariably keeping their +heads towards the sun, and never reaching earth till they died. Even as +late as 1760 they were supposed to have no feet, and Linnaeus calls them +footless birds of paradise. Another account says that they come to some +of the spice islands of the East to eat nutmegs, which so intoxicate +them, that they fall down senseless, and are then killed. Mr Hooker, +however, assured me that they were found only in New Guinea, and in a +few groups of islands in its immediate neighbourhood. There is a +considerable number of species of this bird, all of which have a +magnificent plumage. They are of moderate size, and are allied in their +habits and structure to crows, starlings, and to the Australian +honey-suckers. I longed to get some of these beautiful birds; but at +present we had too much important work on which our existence might +depend to allow me to make an attempt to obtain them. + +We laboured on till the sun nearly reached the horizon, and then hurried +back to our hut. As may be supposed, as we passed along the shore we +took an anxious look-out in every direction to ascertain if any sail was +in sight; but the distant horizon still remained unbroken, as it had +been since the prow which had brought us to the island had disappeared +across it. + +I was still unwilling to attack the mollusc; but Macco, cutting off some +slices, toasted them before the fire, and declared them very good. I +preferred supping on the remainder of the turtle's eggs, as did Oliver. +He, however, tried a bit of the mollusc, but agreed that, unless more +perfectly cooked, it was likely to prove very indigestible. Having +finished our repast, we crept into our hut. I should have said we had +strewn it thickly with leaves to serve as a mattress. The nights were +warm, and as there was no wind, we required no covering beyond that +afforded us by the roof. We agreed, however, that as soon as we could +manufacture some sago, we would build a more substantial mansion, in +which we might be able to live should the rains come on. + +I cannot describe the incidents of each day; for having no note-book, +they are somewhat mixed up in my memory. For two days we laboured on at +the tree, and had now begun to make some progress. I became somewhat +eager at length, and hacked away incautiously with my knife. In so +doing, I caught it in the wood; and in drawing it out again, snapped the +blade across. Here was indeed a misfortune. + +"O Massa Walter," exclaimed Macco, "dat bad!" + +"It is indeed," I said; "for though you and Oliver may in time get +through the trunk with your knives, it will certainly take much longer." + +"Not so certain of dat," said Macco. "An idea strike me. You take my +knife--don't break it, though--and I come back by-and-by and see what I +can do." + +Saying this, he handed me his knife, and with greater caution I +continued my task. + +"We must be content to chop out a little at a time," observed Oliver. +"Perseverance will succeed in the end. It might even be done with a +penknife, if we did not attempt to work too quickly." + +Macco, after being absent an hour, returned with several articles in his +hand. One was a thick flat shell, something like an oyster-shell, only +very much larger. He had also brought some pieces of wood, with some +fibre to serve as string, and some small sticks of bamboo. He sat down +near us, and taking the shell, formed with the bamboo a small drilling +machine. With wonderful rapidity he worked away, drilling first one +hole and then another in the shell, till he had formed a line completely +across it. He now asked for his knife, and shaped away the wood he had +brought. Placing two pieces, one on each side of the shell, with +another at the back, he secured the whole together by means of the +fibre, binding it round and round through the holes, till he had formed +a serviceable-looking axe. + +"Dere," he said, lifting the weapon. + +"Let me have it!" I exclaimed. "I will work away gladly with it." + +"No, no, Massa Walter," he answered. "I make de axe, I use it; if you +make it, you use it." + +Macco, lifting his newly-made axe, advanced to the tree, and began +chopping away with careful and delicate strokes. He cut off only very +thin slices at a time, but by degrees he increased the rapidity of his +strokes, and I soon saw would produce far greater effect than we could +do with our knives. When he stopped, we set to work again. By the end +of the day, we calculated that we had got through more than half of the +trunk. It showed, at all events, what perseverance could do; and in +good spirits we returned to the shore. It was some time before sunset, +but we were anxious to try and find some more turtles' eggs. In vain, +however, we searched; and thinking that we might possibly find some more +further on, we continued our walk along the shore. We had gone some +distance without meeting with any success, when, the brushwood appearing +somewhat lighter, we determined to proceed a little way inland. We had +not gone far when we found a large mound fully six feet high, and, I +daresay, not less than twelve feet across. What it could be, we could +not at first tell. It seemed as if a building of some sort had stood +there, and the whole had tumbled down and been broken to atoms. We had +our bamboo spades with us, so we took it into our heads to dig into the +mound. It appeared to be composed, on examination, of dead leaves, +stones, earth, and rotten wood, and sticks of all sorts--indeed, every +variety of rubbish. At first I thought it might possibly be an ant's +nest, as I had read of the curious buildings formed by those creatures. +I had begun on one side; but Oliver went to the very top, and began +digging away. Macco could not assist us, as he said he had seen nothing +of the sort before. One thing we were certain of, that the mound was +artificial. + +"I am afraid we are only wasting our time," I observed; "and it will be +better to go back to the shore to look for turtles' eggs; and perhaps we +may catch a turtle itself." + +I had already begun to walk away, expecting my companions to follow, +when Oliver cried out, "Stay!--stay!--see here!" and he lifted up a +large egg of a light brick-red colour, fully as large as that of a swan. +I hurried back, and now, assisting him to dig, we uncovered a +considerable number--two or three dozen at least. I now recollected +having heard from Mr Hooker of a bird called the megapodius, which lays +its eggs in large heaps. It is said that a number of birds make these +mounds together. For this purpose they are furnished with large feet +and long curved claws, to enable them to scrape up the dirt and rubbish. +This they are supposed to do by labouring together; and they then, +making a hole in the centre, lay their eggs in it and cover them up. +The heat caused by the fermenting leaves is sufficient to hatch the +eggs; and the young birds then work their own way out of the mound, and +run off in a most independent manner into the woods, picking up their +food as they go. They are quite independent of parental control, and +seem at once to obtain all the knowledge they are ever likely to +possess. We determined to watch for the birds themselves, when we had +time, to learn more about them. Of the fact that they thus lay their +eggs, we now had a very pleasant proof. + +"Stay," said Macco; "I make baskets to carry de eggs." + +Ascending a tall palm-tree, he cat from the top some fan like leaves, +and descending, speedily wove them into three baskets, sufficient to +carry away our prize. We left, however, a portion to be hatched, not +liking to take the whole--indeed, there were more than we should +probably require while they remained good. We had not got far with +them, when a dreadful idea struck me. + +"Suppose they are nearly hatched," I said; "I am afraid they would be +uneatable!" + +Macco understood me, and laughed heartily. "Oh, dem bery good," he +answered. "Little bird better dan big, bird." + +However, I could not agree with him. To satisfy myself, I at once broke +one. Greatly to my delight I found that it was perfectly fresh; and +probably, had we approached the mound more cautiously, we might have +found the parent birds in the neighbourhood, for it was evident that the +eggs could only just have been laid. + +As may be supposed, we made a hearty supper. On examining our larder, +we found that the flesh of the cuscus was still perfectly fresh. At +first I had some repugnance to eating a new animal. However, the steaks +which Macco cut from the creature's fat sides looked so tempting that I +did not refuse the portion he offered me, and found it very delicate. +As the eggs were more likely to keep than the flesh of the animal, we +agreed to preserve it for our morning's meal, cooking only one, which we +divided amongst us. A couple we agreed would be sufficient for a hearty +meal; indeed, one was almost enough to satisfy a moderate appetite. +While we were eating it, we discussed the best plan for keeping our +eggs. + +"What do you say to trying to hatch some of them?" said Oliver. "We may +then have some poultry about us, as I suppose, if we were to begin when +the birds are first hatched, we might tame them, and then, in case of +necessity, we may kill them for food." + +There appeared to be no great difficulty in imitating the parents' way +of building. We therefore constructed a mound, similar in character to +the one we had discovered, and placed half-a-dozen eggs at the same +depth that we had found them. And, as far as we could recollect, in the +same position. The others were hung up in the air on the branch of a +tree in baskets, that they might be kept as cool as possible, hoping +thus that they would remain fit for food till they were exhausted. + +"What cause we have to be thankful!" said Oliver. "See tow bountifully +we are supplied with food; and the care thus taken of us by a kind +Providence should make us trust that we may some day be rescued from our +position, and restored to our friends." + + + +CHAPTER THIRTEEN. + +THE TREASURES OF OUR ISLAND. + +The next morning, as we took our way to the sago wood, our ears were +saluted by the loud cries of some of the birds of paradise; and looking +up, we saw a vast number of them collected on the tops of some lofty +trees in the forest, having immense heads of wide-spreading branches +with scanty foliage, though with large leaves. Suddenly the birds began +to move about in the most extraordinary manner, stretching out their +necks, raising their beautifully-tinted plumes, and elevating their +wings, which they kept in a continual state of vibration. Now they flew +from branch to branch backwards and forwards, so that the trees appeared +filled with waving plumes, and every variety of form and colour. "Why, +they are dancing in the air!" exclaimed Oliver; and truly it seemed as +if they were expressly performing a dance for our entertainment. The +wings appeared to be raised directly over the back. The head was +stretched out, bending downwards; and the long hinder feathers were +elevated and expanded, forming two superb golden fans, striped with deep +red at the base, and fading away into the pale brown tint of the body. +Their heads were yellow, their throat emerald-green--though even the +bright tints were scarcely perceptible amid the rich golden glory which +waved above them. They appeared to be of the size of crows, the bodies +being of a rich coffee brown. Their long gold and orange feathers, +which form their most conspicuous ornament, spring from the sides +beneath each wing; and I found afterwards, when I examined one of the +birds, that when in repose they are partly concealed by them. + +We could scarcely move from the spot, so delighted were we with the +beautiful appearance of these magnificent birds. Now and then, also, +superb butterflies of gorgeous colours flew by us; while here and there, +as the sunlight penetrated amongst the branches of the trees, we saw, +creeping along the ground or up the stems, numbers of glittering +beetles, of equally beautiful tints. + +At length, however, we repaired to our sago-tree. Macco used his +newly-formed axe with as much judgment as at first; we as before working +away at intervals with our knives. At length he exclaimed, "Me t'ink +tree fall now. You go to end of rope and haul, haul. Take care far +enough off; and I cut, cut." + +Macco again shouted; and Oliver and I hauling with all our might, we saw +the lofty tree bending forward. We ran back even further than was +necessary, and down it came with a crash upon the ground, which echoed +through the forest, and startled several creatures, which went flying or +leaping, it seemed to us, among the branches or over the ground. One, +however, in a little time came back again, and we saw a curious black +face looking down upon us. "A monkey or baboon!" I cried out. A +chattering cry was the answer, and the black face disappeared among the +branches. + +We could do little more towards preparing the sago that evening. On +passing through a more open part of the forest, our eyes were gladdened +by seeing some large fruit hanging from the top of some palm-trees. +"Cocoa-nut!--cocoa-nut!" cried Macco. Yes; there was the long-coveted +cocoa-nut; and apparently mature. Macco, as may be supposed, was very +quickly at the top of the tree, and engaged in throwing down the nuts. + +"Stay!" I cried out; "don't pick more than are necessary, and we may +have them fresh." + +We had soon torn off the fibrous covering, and knocked a hole in one of +the eyes. How deliciously cool and sweet did the juice inside them +taste! + +"That is refreshing!" exclaimed Oliver. "I am glad we have begun on the +sago-tree, or we might have been lazy, and not have taken the trouble to +cut it down." + +"Yes, indeed," I answered; "and remember the cocoa-nuts will only last +for a time, whereas the sago will keep as long as we require it." Here +was another addition to our store of provisions, for which we had truly +cause to be thankful. + +Next morning we set to work to cut off the leaves and leaf-stalks, and +we then took off a strip of bark from the upper part of the trunk. We +now had the pithy matter exposed, which in the upper part is of snowy +whiteness, and of the consistency of a hardish pear, with woody fibres +running through it, a quarter of an inch from each other. We had seen, +the pith removed by means of a club, with which it is pounded while +still in the trunk. Our next work, accordingly, was to form a couple of +clubs for the purpose. It was a difficult matter, however, to cut a +piece of hard wood suitable for our object. After hunting about for +some time, we could find nothing to suit us. At last it occurred to me +that we might load the end of a stout piece of bamboo, which might, at +all events, do better than nothing. We accordingly cut some pieces, and +going to the shore, fixed in the bottom of each a lump of coral rock, +which Macco managed to secure in a neat and at the same time thorough +manner. With these we commenced operations, and though the process was +slower than it might otherwise have been, we found that we could manage +to beat out a considerable quantity of sago pith. + +While Oliver and I were proceeding with this work, Macco who was far +more ingenious than we were, commenced the operation of the washing +machine. This he formed of the large sheathing bases of the leaves, in +the shape of a trough. The object is to strain the sago pith. With the +fibrous covering from the leaf-stalks of the cocoa-nuts he soon twisted +a net-like strainer. The trough, I should say, is deep in the centre +and very shallow at the end; thus the starch which is dissolved sinks +down to the bottom of the trough, while the water runs away from the +upper part. Macco made also some baskets out of the sheathing bases of +the leaves, in which we might carry the sago. + +We now set out with our materials to our spring. There was not as much +water as we should have desired, but still it seemed to come bubbling up +in sufficient quantity for our purpose, without fear of exhausting the +supply. Macco, having formed a number of trestles of pieces of bamboo +sticks, rested the trough between the forks, the straining place being +placed on higher trestles than the strainer in the centre, so that the +water might run down into the trough below. The strainer was now +stretched across the upper part of the trough, and putting in our sago, +Macco began to pour the water from the shell which he had brought for +the purpose. We eagerly watched the process. In a short time a good +deal of thick matter seemed to run off, leaving only refuse in the net. +This refuse we threw aside, and supplied its place with fresh sago. +This we continued doing till our trough was nearly full, and the water +being allowed to run off, we found a fine mass of sago starch with a +slightly red tinge. We now made this up into thick cylindrical masses, +as we had seen done before, and covered them up with the sago leaves. + +Truly thankful for our success, we carried off the sago we had thus +manufactured to our encampment. We agreed, however, before commencing +any other operation, to turn all the pith we had obtained into sago, as +we might not otherwise have time to manufacture a further supply. Our +difficulty was to cook it. We had seen it eaten boiled with water. It +then forms a thick glutinous mass, and salt is mixed with it to give it +flavour, as it is of a somewhat astringent taste. We tried boiling some +in one of our shells; but before the sago was sufficiently boiled the +shell caught fire. We, however, managed to eat it, and mixing it with +salt, found it palatable. We then determined to try and make some bread +of it. To do this, however, we had to build an oven. This, without +difficulty, we formed in the earth. We then filled it with hot embers. +Having pounded our sago in a shell, we mixed it with water, and made it +into small cakes. These we placed on stones in the oven. In our first +experiment we burned up our cakes, as we kept them too long in. We then +agreed that we would try and make a baking-pan, such as we had seen +formed. This is a square box made of clay, with several divisions, into +each of which a cake is placed sideways. The difficulty, however, was +to form this oven; and we agreed that we would try and find some clay +and manufacture one. At the next attempt we kept the cakes in a much +shorter time, and found them sufficiently palatable. We were occupied +for more than a week in manufacturing our sago. It was probably very +inferior to what is made by more experienced persons. At the same time +it was wholesome, and would be a great addition to the animal food we +were likely to procure. + +One evening, as we approached our hut, after our day's work was over, we +heard a noise inside. We approached noiselessly, with our bamboo spears +ready for use, thinking, probably, that wine animal had got inside. +Just as we were within ten yards of the entrance, out popped a large +black creature, which turned round chattering and grinning at us, and +then bolted off as fast as it could, with a lump of sago in its paws. +"Monkey! monkey!" cried Macco, giving chase with his spear. The +creature was, however, I saw, a baboon, from having no tail, or an +imperceptible tail if he had one, the part he turned towards us being +bare of hair, and of a ruddy hue. He was far too nimble, however, even +for Macco to overtake him, and up he sprang into a tree, going +chattering among the branches, dropping the sago, however, in his +flight. I recognised, as he turned round, the face I had seen watching +us when we were making the sago. + +We agreed that we must secure our provisions, or he, having discovered +our store, would perhaps return with many companions to pilfer it. I +heard afterwards that only one species of baboon is found thus far east, +probably introduced by Malay seamen, who constantly carry baboons and +monkeys on board their vessels. We agreed, indeed, that it was now time +to begin a hut, in which we could sit more comfortably during the +evening, and which would shelter us from the rains, which I knew were +likely to occur before long. The rich vegetation which covered the +island would not, I knew, exist, unless frequently watered by heavy +showers. + +We agreed to call our house Bamboo Villa. We first stuck into the +ground a number of stout bamboos, and then secured, at about six feet +from the ground, to the uprights, horizontally, some bamboos almost of +the same thickness. These formed the beams on which we rested our +floor. The floor was composed of the mid-ribs of the sago-palm, split +in two, and supported beneath by poles. The sides were of the same +material. Our work, the framework of which was of bamboo, was thatched +with the smaller mid-ribs, and with the leaves of the sago-palm foliage, +tied in bundles, side by side. These, however, being very thick, formed +a covering which kept out the heat of the sun as well as the rain, a +very important consideration in that climate. A ladder of bamboo +enabled us to reach the door of our house. + +In this abode we hoped better to preserve our provisions, and to be free +also from insects or any reptiles which might exist on the island. We +had frequently caught sight in the distance of creatures moving about +among the thickly-growing trees, but had been unable to tell what they +were. We had also seen movements amongst the dense mass of leaves which +covered the ground, and had supposed them to be lizards and snakes, or +other crawling things. + +As soon as our house was finished we manufactured a sago oven, which we +baked in the sun. It was, however, of a very fragile nature, and we +feared would not answer very well for our cakes--to use it, indeed, we +were obliged to increase its size. When all was ready, we prepared some +cakes. This we did by drying the sago thoroughly in the sun, then +pounding it in a shell into a fine powder. Keeping some of the powder +to sprinkle the oven with, we made the rest into cakes. Having got the +oven heated, we put in our baking-pan, with a piece of palm-leaf over +it, and then closed up the hole with stones and earth. In a short time +we again opened the mouth of the oven, when lo, and behold, our pan had +burst asunder, and though the cakes were pretty well done, pieces of +clay were sticking to them on every side. It took us some time to pick +them out before the cakes were at all fit to eat; indeed, an epicure +would certainly not have considered them palatable. What would we not +have given for a good pot in which to boil our water, and a well-made +pan for baking our cakes! + +"There is no use wishing for them," exclaimed Oliver; "we must make the +best use of the materials at hand." + +We determined not to be defeated, and our next pan was made of clay, and +strengthened with pieces of bamboo in the inside. We began baking it in +the sun, and then carried it to our oven, which was only slightly +heated. We then added more fuel, and closed it up. On opening it we +only let in a little air at a time, and this allowed it to cool slowly. +On taking it out, not a crack was perceptible. On examining it, when it +was thoroughly cool, we had hopes that it would answer better than its +predecessor. The next time we made some cakes we pounded some cocoa-nut +with them. We then heated our oven, and put in our pan full of cakes. +In about five or six minutes we again opened it, and drawing out the +pan, we saw the cakes well cooked, and the pan unbroken. + +We had been too busy to go hunting; but we determined, as soon as our +house was completed in every respect, to do so systematically. We hoped +to have no difficulty in procuring a cuscus occasionally, and as there +were evidently many birds on the island, to trap them or kill them in +some other way. We talked of forming cross-bows, and we hoped to find +some elastic wood for the purpose. Still, we had a longing for +vegetables. We found a delicate-looking plant, which had nothing +suspicious about it, for I knew the appearance of several of the noxious +plants. On digging down we discovered a root to it. Macco said he +thought that it was wholesome, and volunteered to try it. We agreed +that it would be better for one person to do so, and to take only a +little at a time, that, should it have any bad qualities, we might +discover them before serious injury was done to any of us. We +accordingly boiled some in a shell with some hot stones, and Macco, +taking a little, declared it very good. Next day he ate rather more of +it, and in a short time took a considerable quantity mixed with some +shell-fish, which we had just before procured. Its wholesome nature was +now satisfactorily ascertained, and we had thus another article of food +on which we could depend. + +Among the many beautiful objects in our way were the groups of bamboos. +Botanically, the bamboo is looked upon as grass, but, practically, it is +a tree, as it sometimes attains the height of seventy or eighty feet. +In many of the places we had visited we found the native huts built of +it. For this purpose the people split it open, and press it out flat. +To strengthen the walls, other perpendicular and horizontal pieces are +fixed to it. The masts of small vessels are made of it, as well as +spars, and drinking-cups and vessels of all sorts. The more savage +tribes still make their weapons of bamboo, as, when slightly burned, a +sharp edge like a knife can be given to it; indeed, the pointed end of a +bamboo makes a formidable spear, which an unarmed man would not wish to +encounter. + +I cannot give a full account of our residence on the island. We were +never without an ample supply of provisions, both vegetable and animal. +A fortnight had passed since we had buried the eggs in the mound, and +had almost forgotten all about them, when, as Oliver and I were seated +in our hut, we heard Macco shouting out, "Come!--see! see!" We hurried +out, and remarked a curious commotion on the top of the mound we had +thrown up. Presently, one head popped out from the earth, and then +another, and another, and a curious half-fledged bird emerged, and +pointing its head inland, began to run away towards the wood. Macco +made chase, and brought it back. We, in the meantime, seized the +remainder of the little creatures as they emerged from their curious +hatching-ground, and carried them off to the hut. They seemed very +unwilling to stay there, till we placed some sago flour and other food +before them. They instantly began pecking it up, as if they had been +long accustomed to feeding. Nothing seemed to satisfy them, and we were +surprised at the quantity of food they managed to swallow. I never saw +such independent little creatures. It was satisfactory to know that we +were not depriving an affectionate hen of her offspring. As we were +anxious to preserve them, we made a pen of bamboo sticks closely stuck +in the ground, in a circle of about a couple of yards in diameter. It +took us some time to do this. As soon as the pen was finished we put +the brush-turkeys--for such we supposed they were--inside it, throwing +in at the same time a supply of food. The little creatures ran round +and round, but finding they could not get out, began to peck away at the +food. Supposing that, as they took to the woods, they would require +some shelter, we threw in a quantity of leaves, and small branches, and +twigs. Under these, when they could eat no more, they went to roost, +apparently very well contented with their quarters. + +Well satisfied with our success, we searched for some time, but without +finding another mound; indeed, the birds which made them did not appear +to be very common in the island. However, we could not make much way +into the interior on account of the thick jungle, though here and there +were a few open glades through which we could pass along with tolerable +ease. We had reached one of these glades when we saw directly before us +a brown animal jumping along over the ground. "A kangaroo! a kangaroo!" +exclaimed Oliver. "It is so like the pictures of one." We, of course, +made chase, but the kangaroo--for a species of that animal it was--soon +caught sight of us. Greatly to our surprise, however, when it came to +the end of the glade, instead of forcing its way through the thicket, or +turning round to stand at bay, it began to climb up the nearest tree. +It did not climb very fast, however, and had we been somewhat nearer we +might have struck it with our spears. By the time we got up it had +climbed above our reach. I then remembered reading of a tree kangaroo +which is supplied with powerful claws on the fore-feet. Once up in the +tree, it did not appear to be much frightened at us, and we had time +more particularly to observe it. It had a hairy tail, much finer than +the ordinary kangaroo, and we observed as it went over the ground that +it had not used it as a support, as the Australian kangaroo does. + +Macco proposed climbing the tree to attack it, but we thought it would +be dangerous for him to make the attempt, as the creature might seize +him in its claws, and tear his skin. He laughed at the notion, and +remarked, "If he do dat, he tumble down. No, no; you let me alone. You +go away, I kill kangaroo!" + +Saying this, he made a circuit through the thick forest, so as to get +the tree between himself and the branch on which the kangaroo was +sitting. We, meantime, retired down the glade. As soon as the animal +saw that we were at a distance, he began tearing away the leaves from a +branch and eating them voraciously. Macco, hanging the spear about his +neck, climbed up a neighbouring tree, which was united to the one on +which the kangaroo was sitting by a strong band of ratan. Along this, +finding it secure, he cautiously climbed, till he gained a branch +directly above the kangaroo. We watched him anxiously, afraid to move +lest we should disturb the animal. He seemed to be considering whether +his spear was long enough to reach it. Then we saw him cautiously stoop +down over the branch. The moment the kangaroo stopped eating, he drew +back and remained still as death. When the animal again commenced +tearing off the twigs, he cautiously approached. At length he seemed +satisfied that he was in a good position, and raising his spear, he +darted it down directly on the animal's neck. It must have pierced the +spine, for the creature instantly dropped off the branch and lay without +moving on the ground. We ran up as fast as our legs could carry us, but +Macco was on the spot before us, and examining the creature. He seemed +satisfied that it was perfectly dead. It had a graceful, mild-looking +head, and, except in the points I have mentioned, was in all respects +like an ordinary kangaroo, though not so large as the animals I had read +of in Australia. It was indeed a prize to us, for we had not killed a +cuscus for some time, and had been living on shell-fish, sago, and +cocoa-nuts, with now and then a few turtle's eggs. Fastening the legs +of our prize round a piece of the universally useful bamboo, we bore it +off in triumph to our mansion, and very soon had some delicious steaks +cooking before our fire. + + + +CHAPTER FOURTEEN. + +CARRIED OFF BY SAVAGES. + +I do not know whether a more than usually substantial supper made us +sleep sounder than we were wont to do, but the sun had already risen +when, the next morning, I started up, hearing as I fancied some strange +noises near us. My two companions were still asleep on their bamboo +couches on either side of the hut. The noises seemed to me like human +voices. Oliver and Macco must have heard them also, for directly +afterwards they also started up, and looked about them with a somewhat +startled expression of countenance. + +We sprang to the door of the hut. On opening it, we saw directly below +it a number of dark-skinned savages, almost destitute of clothing, some +of them having huge black mop heads, while others had simply thick +woolly hair. From this I knew them at once, as well as from their +strongly-marked, ferocious features, to be Papuans, or inhabitants of +New Guinea. They seemed as much surprised at seeing us as we were at +seeing them, and shouted out to us in a language we of course could not +understand. By their signs, however, we knew that they were telling us +to come down to them. This, from their unprepossessing appearance, we +were not well-disposed to do. Probably they supposed we possessed +fire-arms, and were therefore unwilling to approach nearer. They had +just landed, we knew, from seeing two long, low canoes with high stems +and sterns rudely carved and surmounted by plumes of feathers. A row of +mother-of-pearl shells apparently ornamented each side of the gunwale. +The men were armed with bows and arrows and huge clubs. Some of them +also had spears in their hands, but we saw no guns among them. This was +satisfactory. However, from their numbers we knew too well that they +could easily overpower us, if they had evil intentions. + +Again they shouted to us, and we shouted in return, putting out our +hands, and making other signs to show that we desired to be friends. +They only answered by still louder shouts, some of them apparently +laughing at our appearance. They now began to approach, one party +coming up on one side, one on another, and a third in the centre. We +still held our post, hoping that they might not come to extremities. We +thought, too, that perhaps, seeing three people at the door, they might +suppose others were within, and not be aware of how far superior they +were in force to us. As they advanced they discovered our brush-turkey +pen, and, greatly to our distress, some of them instantly stooped over, +and began to seize the birds, and to fasten them by their legs round +their waists. Others rushed at the body of the kangaroo, which hung by +the legs to the branch of a tree, and immediately began cutting it up, +each man appropriating a portion. + +"I hope they will be content with robbing us, and go away," said Oliver. + +"I am afraid not," I answered. "They will soon find how few we are to +oppose them, and will not be content until they carry off everything we +possess, even if they do not kill us. They mean mischief, depend on +that." + +The savages having searched about, and finding nothing else on which to +lay their hands, approached still nearer our hut. + +"If they attack us we will sell our lives dearly," I said to Oliver. + +"I am afraid we must do so," he answered. "I wish to fight for your +sake, though for myself I scarcely think I should do so." + +Thinking that possibly, after all, they might go away without further +molesting us, we lifted up our ladder and shut the door. Scarcely had +we done so, than we felt the house violently shaken, and on looking out +once more I found that a number of men had got hold of the posts on +which it rested, and seemed attempting to shake it down. They shook, +and shook, and shook; but it was so strongly secured in the ground, that +their united strength could not pull it down. All the time they were +shouting and crying to each other, every now and then giving way to +hoarse laughter, which occasionally broke into shrieks of merriment. +"Bery good fun for dem, but bad for us," observed Macco, as the violent +shocks made us expect every instant to be hurled to the ground. At +length they stopped, and there was an ominous silence. We felt as +people do during the lull of a hurricane, when they know it will come +back with tenfold force. Presently we heard the savages crying out +louder than ever, and directly afterwards thin wreaths of smoke began to +ascend through the flooring. They were about, we dreaded, to burn us +out. Soon the crackling flames ascended. We had no help for it; so, +throwing open the door, we sprang to the ground. We were each of us +instantly surrounded by a number of savages. One black fellow, with a +huge head of frizzled-out hair, and a dark heavy club in his hand, +seized hold of me, and I thought he was about to dash my brains out with +his weapon. Others, in like manner caught my companions. I thought my +last moment had come, and expected every instant to see my friends +struck to the ground. No sooner had we jumped down than they began to +rake out the fire and to pull down the burning portions, though they +were only just in time to save the hut from destruction. Immediately a +number of them rushed up, and began to bring out our stores of sago and +dried mollusc, our cocoa-nuts, and other articles of food. They seemed +well pleased with their prize. These they quickly divided among +themselves. + +The big man with a mop head now gave certain orders to several of his +companions, who hurried off into the wood. They soon returned with some +fine pieces of ratan, with which they immediately bound our arms behind +us, and our legs so close together, that we could with difficulty walk. +This being done, they all sat down and began to consume our provisions, +a large portion of which they quickly devoured. On seeing water in one +of our shells, they made signs to Macco to ask where we got it from, and +ordered him to lead a party to the spot. Going to their canoes, they +returned with a number of long jars and small casks, made of the thick +ends of large bamboos. The savages had apparently touched at our island +for the sake of getting food or water. Having supplied themselves with +this necessary article, they unceremoniously dragged us on board their +canoes. Oliver and I were taken to one, and poor Macco to the other. +He looked very disconsolate when he saw that he was to be separated from +us. I confess I felt very uncomfortable at the thoughts of being in +their power, for I had heard that they were not only fierce and +treacherous, but addicted to cannibalism, if they were not regular +cannibals. Still Oliver and I agreed that we would endeavour to show no +signs of fear. They seemed very well satisfied with the provisions with +which our stores had supplied them. Before shoving off, however, a +party of them again landed, and went to the cocoa-nut grove, of the +produce of which they brought back a quantity. They now, getting out +their paddles, began to glide away from the island where we had spent so +many weeks. Looking back at it, we admired the numberless beauties it +possessed--beauties which no change of season in that latitude could +possibly mar. There was one enemy, however, which might quickly scatter +destruction around. It was likely to proceed from the conical mountain +in the centre of the island. Already there appeared to be a white smoke +ascending from the summit. + +"Perhaps, after all," said Oliver, "we are taken away in time to be +saved from destruction. See, our captors are watching the top of the +mountain; they too seem to think that something is likely to happen. +Let us be thankful, then, that we have been removed in time; for had the +mountain burst forth while we were on the island, we could not possibly +have escaped, if the lava or ashes had come down on our side of it." + +While he was speaking I was looking towards the mountain. Instead of +the volumes of smoke which had hitherto been issuing forth, there +spouted out a bright sheet of flame, which, expanding as it rose towards +the sky, spread around like a vast fan, arching over and forming a +canopy of fire above the island. Thus for an instant it hung suspended, +threatening destruction to the smiling landscape below it. At the same +moment sounds like the loudest peals of rolling thunder rent the air, +almost deafening us with their roar. Even our captors, not unaccustomed +to such a spectacle, stood aghast, clutching each other's arms, and +gazing with horror-stricken countenances at the mountain. "See, see!" +cried Oliver; "how mercifully we have been preserved!" + +Indeed we had; for down the mountain's side, half covering it, flowed a +river of burning liquid, setting fire to the trees and shrubs, the +conflagration spreading far and wide, fanned by the breeze among the +easily ignited timber, while from the sky above there rained down dense +showers of glowing stones and hot cinders, till the late green island +became enveloped in flame, amid which the tall palms waved to and fro, +as if struggling to escape from impending destruction. At the same +time, a shower of fine ashes began to fall on our heads. Thicker and +thicker they came, obscuring the atmosphere, till we could merely +distinguish the pyramid of fire with its fanlike summit, and the wide +circle of leaping flames which raged around it. In a short time the +canoe was thickly covered with ashes, which penetrated also through our +clothes, and filled our ears and nostrils, making even breathing +painful. The savages at length aroused themselves, and seizing their +paddles, began with desperate strokes to urge their canoe away from the +ill-fated island. + +"O Walter, let us return thanks to our merciful Father in Heaven, that +what we thought so great a misfortune has been the means of our +preservation," said Oliver; "and never let us mistrust the kind +providence with which he watches over us." + +We knelt down in the bottom of the canoe, and I joined Oliver in the +prayer he offered up, the savages looking at us with surprise, unable +probably to comprehend in the remotest degree what we were about. + +I should say that some time had been spent after the events I have +briefly described had taken place. We had got to a distance from the +burning island, and were once more in safety. Having become very +hungry, we made signs to our captors that we should like to have some +food. With a careless air they handed us some lumps of our own sago, +and some pieces of cocoa-nut. We were compelled to take it, uncooked as +it was; for though we showed by signs that we should like to have some +bread made of it, they laughed at our request, and seemed to tell us +that it was good enough for such white-skinned slaves as we were. + +These New Guinea men had apparently been on a voyage to the northward, +and were returning to their native land, which lay, we judged, somewhere +to the south. We ate our hard sago-cake, which we could scarcely have +got down without the aid of the cocoa-nut. We again made signs that we +should like an entire cocoa-nut, that we might drink the juice. They +pointed in return to the water alongside, and mockingly, by signs, +intimated that we might drink that. In vain we entreated that they +would give us some fresh water or a cocoa-nut. Our distress seemed to +amuse them amazingly; for both, the chief and his men indulged in most +uproarious shouts of laughter, rolling about as if they were thoroughly +tipsy. At length, however, when they had amused themselves sufficiently +at our expense, one of them threw a cocoa-nut, which hit Oliver on the +head. He could not help exhibiting some signs of suffering, which made +them again burst into fits of laughter; indeed, they appeared to be the +merriest fellows, though savage in their merriment, that I had ever met +with. The juice, however, which we got from the cocoa-nut, Oliver +declared, made ample amends for the treatment we had received. + +"I do not think they can intend to kill and eat us," he observed, "or +they would feed us better than they are doing. We must see how we can +best win their good graces. If we could but do something to prove that +we would be useful to them, we might obtain better treatment." + +"Very true," I answered; "I will do my best to help you, if you can +think of anything." + +We could distinguish Macco sitting near the stern of the other canoe by +the different shape of his head, as well as by the seaman's woollen +shirt he wore. He seemed to be sitting quietly, as if listening to the +conversation of those around him. However, it was not likely that he +could comprehend anything of their language. Hour after hour the +savages paddled on, till at length we approached some rocky islets, +towards which they steered. Here they landed, and lighting a fire, +rudely cooked the remainder of our kangaroo. Not till we petitioned +very hard did they condescend to give us any portion of it. At length, +however, they made signs that we might cut off what flesh we required, +and we eagerly took advantage of the permission they granted. At the +same time, finding a bamboo cask of water at hand, we soon drained its +contents, and afterwards felt very much refreshed. The meal over, they +again took to their canoes, and continued their voyage. How they could +manage to cook their food on a long voyage, I could not discover. +Oliver suggested that they perhaps lived on those occasions on cold +provisions; indeed, their sago-cakes would provide them with sufficient +food, if they ever did make long voyages, which, however, I suspected +they did not. + +At length, however, we got close in with the coast, which we took to be +that of New Guinea. On either side, as far as the eye could reach, it +was covered with tall forest trees and dense brushwood. They were +considerably taller than those on our island--some of the most lofty +being draped with festoons of the creeping ratans, which gave them a +peculiarly graceful appearance. The sands, unlike many of those of the +volcanic islands we had passed, were white and glittering, and the water +of the most transparent nature, so that, looking over the side, we could +see far down into the depths of the ocean. In the distant interior rose +up ranges of lofty mountains, appearing one beyond another, and +extending, till lost to view by distance, both to the north and south. +Altogether the country appeared magnificent in the extreme. Under other +circumstances I should have been delighted to visit it; but the idea of +having to live among such fierce-looking savages was terrible, +especially when we could not help thinking that if they did not kill and +eat us, they would at all events make us labour as slaves. + +Our captors, instead of landing, continued to proceed towards the south. +As night approached, they ran into a little sandy bay, where, hauling +up their canoes, which, notwithstanding their large size, were very +light, they all assembled on shore. We were now on that mysterious +coast of New Guinea. Macco was allowed to come near us. I asked him +whether he thought we could manage to run away while our captors were +asleep. + +"Dey run faster dan we," he answered, "and if dey catchy dey kill, and +if dey kill dey eat. No, no, Massa Walter; we stay and try and make +friends. I tell dem big ship come soon and bring cloth, and knives, and +hatchets, and all sorts of good t'ings for dem, if dey no hurt us." + +How Macco had contrived to explain this I could not understand, but he +seemed very confident that they had comprehended him. Some of the +party, armed with bows and arrows, started away into the woods, while +the others collected sticks and lighted a fire. The hunters soon +returned, bringing with them a tree kangaroo and a cuscus, with several +large bats. The latter creatures I had seen before, and heard them +called flying-foxes. They were very ugly, and one of them; which I took +up had a rank, powerful, foxy odour. One of the natives who saw me +thought I was going to eat it raw, I suppose, for he shouted out, and I +quickly dropped it. They immediately set to work to skin these +creatures, and cutting them up, roasted them on sticks before the fire. +Some rough sago, which they baked on the embers, was also produced. + +We sat apart from them, and they commenced their feast without intending +apparently to give us any. Macco, however, after waiting a few minutes, +observed, "Dis no do;" and getting up, approached the savage-looking +group. Pointing to his mouth, he quietly stooped down, and was carrying +off one of the bats. + +"No, no," I shouted; "bring us a piece of kangaroo or the other animal." + +The savages looked somewhat astonished at his audacity, but yet no one +prevented him. Throwing down the half-roasted bat, he placed several +pieces of the other meat on leaves, which served them as plates, and +came back to us with them in triumph. He then returned for some sago. +With this food we made a tolerably hearty meal, and certainly felt our +spirits a little the better for it. The savages then, again going into +the thicket, brought out a number of bamboos, with some tall ferns, with +which they constructed some rude huts, sufficient to hold all the party. +We, imitating their example, did the same, and commending ourselves to +Him who had hitherto so mercifully watched over us, lay down to sleep. + +By dawn the next morning the savages were on foot, and having consumed +the remains of their supper, began to shove off their boats. Macco +managed to get hold of a little more sago and meat, with which we made a +scanty breakfast. We were in hopes that they were going to leave us +behind, but they had no such intentions; and as soon as the boats were +in the water, their mop-headed chief made signs to us to go on board--an +order we obeyed with as good a grace as we could command. The canoes +paddled on the whole of the next day, the coast scenery being very +similar to what we had previously passed. Towards evening we entered a +large bay completely sheltered from the sea. On one side of it, towards +which they directed their course, we came in sight of what appeared to +be a village built out on the water. + +Their dwellings, if such they were, were curious, dilapidated edifices. +They stood on platforms supported by posts, placed apparently without +any attempt at regularity. Many of the posts were twisted and crooked, +and looked as if they were tumbling down. The houses were very low, the +roofs being in the shape of boats turned bottom upwards. They were +connected with the land by long rude bridges, which seemed as if they +could scarcely support the weight of a person going over them. As we +drew nearer, we saw that the fronts of these dwellings were ornamented +with rude carving, sometimes of the human figure, such as the grossest +savages alone could wish to exhibit. Under the roofs of the houses were +hung as decorations rows of human skulls; trophies, we concluded, of +their combats with neighbouring tribes. + +The canoes were received with loud shouts from the inhabitants of the +village, who came out on the platforms to welcome them, lowering down +some roughly made ladders to enable them to ascend. Alongside the +platforms were a number of canoes of various sizes, some capable only of +containing one person, with outriggers to prevent them going over. Our +captors made a sign to us to follow them, and we now had to stand in a +row and be inspected by their friends. We were arranged on the +platform, for the houses were far too low to allow of our standing +upright in them. + +Fierce as the savages looked, they were most of them remarkably fine +men, tall and athletic. The women, however, except a few who appeared +to be very young, were most unattractive. Their features were +strongly-marked, and their dress coarse and disgusting. It consisted of +stripes of palm-leaves, worn tightly round the body, and reaching to the +knees, and dirty in the extreme. Their hair, frizzled-out, was tied in +a huge bunch at the back of the head. We saw them, while they were +talking and looking at us, forking it out with large wooden forks, +having four or five prongs: indeed, an ordinary comb would have been of +little service in such a mass of cranial vegetation. The women wore +ear-rings and necklaces arranged in a variety of ways. Some of them had +two necklaces, made of white beads or kangaroo teeth, which looked well +on their dark glossy skins. The ear-rings were composed of thick silver +or copper wire, in hoops, the ends crossing each other. Some of them +had the ends of their necklaces attached to their ear-rings, and then +looped up to the chignon behind, which had a very elegant appearance, if +anything could look elegant on such unprepossessing dames. + +The men had a far greater number of ornaments than the women, most of +them composed of the teeth of small animals. They had finger-rings as +well as necklaces and ear-rings, and also bracelets. Some, too, wore +bands round the arm, just beneath the shoulder, with bunches of +bright-coloured feathers or hair attached to them. Others, also, wore +anklets and bands, made of shell or brass-wire, below the knee. All the +chiefs, and those who wished to be exquisites, carried a huge forked +comb, which they continually employed in passing through their hair, +much as I have seen people with large whiskers keep pulling at them when +they had nothing better to do. + +We only hoped that our captors had formed a better opinion of us than we +had of them. They appeared undecided what to do with us. At last, +however, the chief, whom we called Frizzlepate, made us a sign to enter +one of the houses, and pointed to a little box-like room, into which we +could just manage to creep. The partition walls of the house were +formed of a sort of thatch, and the only articles of furniture we saw +within were rude wooden plates and basins, with one or two metal +cooking-vessels apparently, and a number of baskets and mats. Their +weapons were spears, bows, and clubs. The mats were evidently used for +sleeping on. They were made of the broad leaves of the pandanus, sewn +together, with their usual neatness, in three layers. One end is +sewn-up, so that when used for sleeping it forms a kind of sack, serving +at the same time for mattress and coverlid. We saw them also used in +rainy weather, worn over the head, the sewn-up end being uppermost, +serving thus the purpose of umbrella and greatcoat. Most of the men +wore in their belts a chopping-knife and axe. Some of them had besides +smaller knives, and a skin pouch, with a bamboo case, containing +betel-root, tobacco, and lime. The mats, however, were certainly the +most useful articles in their possession. They could be folded up in a +very small space for travelling, both as a protection from rain and as +bedding at night: indeed, they were equal in most respects to the +Mackintosh rugs used by our officers in campaigning. + +We were expecting to go supperless to our cramped-up bed, when a woman, +with a more pleasing expression of countenance than most of those we had +seen, came to our room with a basket containing some plantains and yams, +with a few cooked fish. She signed to us to take the contents and give +her back the basket, with which she immediately disappeared. Anxiety +for the future would have kept us awake, had not our ears been assailed +by the loud chattering and laughter of the natives in the hut in which +we were located, as well as in those around us. Even in that small hut +there must have been a dozen or twenty people, which was not surprising, +if they were contented with the small space they had awarded us. + + + +CHAPTER FIFTEEN. + +OUR ADVENTURES IN NEW GUINEA. + +Next morning, at an early hour, the whole community was on foot. The +men came out, and sat themselves down on their platforms, where they +began to smoke very curious pipes, made of a single piece of wood, with +an upright stalk under the bowl, which either rested on the ground or on +their knees. The tube was at right angles with this, and the bowl +shaped like a cup on the top of the stalk, a knot of wood at the outer +end of the tube serving to balance it. The women were seen going along +the beach to the shore, or descending into the small canoes, we +concluded either to fish, or to collect limpets or other molluscs from +the rocks for food. Not knowing exactly what to do, we got up and were +about to follow them, when a shout from Prince Frizzlepate, as we now +called him (for he seemed to be the chief of this delectable community), +reached our ears. He made signs to us that we were to take two of the +canoes and go into the bay to fish, as the women were doing. + +"Dat bery good," observed Macco. "Me know how to catch more fish dan +dem." + +We found a number of lines, with hooks made of the bones of birds, hung +up in the house. When we offered to take them, Prince Frizzlepate +nodded his permission. Macco also borrowed one of their knives, with +which to cut some shell-fish from the rocks to serve as bait. We had +fortunately not consumed all our sago or fish; and these, hidden in our +pockets, we took with us, for our masters apparently had no intention of +providing us with food. We quickly got the bait, and, guided by Macco-- +he being in one of the canoes, and Oliver and I in the other--we paddled +off to a point near where the women were fishing. Soon after we let +down our lines, Macco hauled up a fine fish. He caught double as many +as Oliver and I together. + +We naturally talked of the possibility of making our escape in the +canoe; but where to go to was the difficulty. We saw also that we were +observed from the huts, a large canoe being apparently kept ready to +make chase should we attempt to paddle off. After a little time, we ate +the provisions we had brought with us, turning our backs towards the +shore as we did so, for fear our masters might observe it. We were +already beginning to practise some of the arts of slaves. Having caught +a good supply of fish, we paddled back towards the shore. + +"I vote we land on the beach, instead of going back to those dirty +huts," I observed. And Oliver agreed with me. Macco, however, seemed +rather doubtful that we should bring down on our heads the displeasure +of our masters. The women had landed some time before. Either the men +were sleeping, or they did not think it worth while to call us, and, +reaching the beach, we landed and hauled up our canoes. + +Oliver proposed that we should light a fire and cook some of our fish. +A flame was soon produced by Macco, in his usual way, with two pieces of +bamboo; and we soon had our fish cooking before it. Having finished our +meal, we walked a little way into the country. We had not gone far when +we observed a small hut, raised from the ground, somewhat like those on +the beach. Near it, leaning on a bank, we saw a woman who appeared very +like the kind person who had brought us our provisions on the previous +evening. She was stooping forward, with a small branch in her hand. On +getting nearer, we saw that she was playing with a little child, who was +seated in a large bivalve shell full of water. It made a magnificent +bath for the little black fellow, and it was larger even than the shells +we had found on our island, a magnificent, specimen of the _Tridacna +gigas_. The woman was younger and far pleasanter-looking than most of +the women in the huts. + +"Yes, I am sure it is her," said Oliver, when we approached. She seemed +somewhat startled at seeing us, and instinctively lifted her little boy +out of the bath, and held him, dripping as he was, in her arms. That +did not signify, however, as she was clothed in very scanty garments. +We stopped short, not further to alarm her; and then, recovering +herself, she signed to us that we might come nearer. She pointed to the +huts on the beach, and seemed to intimate that we had better go back, +lest the chief should be angry at our wandering about the shore without +his leave. She then patted us on our heads, which we took to signify +that she wished us well. Of this, indeed, from her previous kind +conduct, we had no doubt. + +"We will give her some of our fish," I said. "It will show her that we +are grateful to her for her kindness." + +Macco, hearing my proposal, ran back to the boat, and returning with +several fine fish, placed them at her feet. Having done this, we +hurried back to the canoe, and paddled away to the huts. On climbing up +the ladders, we found that the men had been sleeping, which had been the +reason, probably, we had been allowed so much liberty. As we were +bringing the fish up to the platform, the chief awoke, and seemed well +pleased with our success, for he nodded his head, and graciously gave +each of us a fish. + +For two or three days we were sent out in the same manner, and each time +Macco was successful. We, however, discussed all sorts of plans for +making our escape; for although we were not especially ill-treated, we +yet could not tell how soon the mood of our savage masters might change. + +I was very anxious to see something of the interior. An opportunity +arrived sooner than I had expected. Early one morning, the chief awoke +us, and signified that he wanted us to attend him on shore. It +appeared, that having found us so useful as fishermen, he expected that +we should be equally successful as hunters. Having put bows and arrows +into our hands, he signified that we should attend him. About a dozen +men were collected together, armed also with bows and arrows and spears. +On the ground were several baskets, and just as we were beginning to +march, some of the men lifted them up, and, without asking our leave, +strapped them on over our shoulders--an unmistakable hint that they +expected us to carry them. I, feeling indignant at this proceeding, let +the basket drop; on which the chief, casting an angry glance at me, gave +me a blow across the shoulder with his spear, which made me feel so +faint that I nearly fell to the ground. My companions wisely took the +hint, and, just as they were about to follow my example, re-secured the +baskets. I saw that there was no help for it; so, again lifting up +mine, I followed the party as fast as I could. + +"You see, Massa Walter," observed Macco, "dem can make us do what dey +like, so no use cry out. `Grin and bear it,' as Potto Jumbo say to me +bery often." + +As we passed through the forest we caught sight of numerous beautiful +birds flying among the trees, and countless numbers of lovely +butterflies flitting to and fro, and beetles crawling over the grass or +climbing the trunks of the trees. "What would not Mr Hooker give to be +here!" I could not help exclaiming. + +I was going to put my foot on what I thought a large leaf, when I saw it +suddenly rise and spring forward. A little way on I saw another +creature--for a creature it was--of the same description; and, looking +at it more narrowly, I saw that it was an enormous grasshopper. The +wing covers, which were fully nine inches across, were of a fine green +colour, looking exactly like one of the large shining leaves which hung +from the trees above. The thorax was covered by a large triangular +sheath of a horny nature. Its serrated edges, and a somewhat wavy +hollow surface, with a line down the centre, made it also look very like +a leaf. At a guess, for I could not measure it, I should say that it +was between two and three inches long. The body was short, but the legs +were very long and strongly spined. It did not move very fast, so that +I could examine it easily. Though only at a very short distance, I +could not have distinguished it from the number of fallen leaves among +which it moved. Overhead were numbers of cockatoos, parrots, and other +birds of gay plumage, while now and then we caught sight of a +brush-turkey running along rapidly over the ground. Many of the +butterflies we saw were of magnificent size, and all richly adorned with +the most brilliant colours. + +At length the savages stopped under some high trees with wide-spreading +branches, though thinly clothed with leaves. Several of them then +ascended, carrying with them bows, and a number of arrows with round +weighted heads, while each man also carried a large piece of +roughly-formed matting at his side. Ascending the trees, they stretched +out the matting across the branches, just above a convenient fork on +which they took their seats. In a short time, as the sun was tingeing +the lofty tops of the trees, we heard the well-known sound of "Wawk-- +wawk--wawk!--Wok--wok--wok!" Soon afterwards we caught sight of a +flight of the most magnificent birds of paradise assembled on the +branches, and immediately they began the curious dance we had before +seen, spreading out their brilliant feathers, which glittered like +masses of gold thread in the sunlight above our heads. The hunters +meantime lay hid under their palm-leaf shelter. Presently, one let fly +an arrow, which stunned a bird, and it fell to the ground. Another and +another arrow was shot, few failing to bring down a bird. The lovely +creatures, unconscious of the fate of their companions, continued their +dance, seeming too much interested in themselves to think of the rest. +At length an arrow whizzed by one of the birds, which it failed to +strike. This seemed to astonish the rest; and, looking about, it +discovered one of the hunters. Immediately, with loud cries, the whole +rose from the tree, and flew away with rapid wings from the spot. The +savages then got down the tree to secure their prizes. + +Satisfied with their success, they now took out some food, which they +commenced eating. Macco, as before, in spite of their angry looks, +carried off a small portion for us and himself. As soon as their meal +was hastily concluded, they began cutting off the wings and feet of the +birds. When the skin was taken off the body, a stout stick was run +through it, coming out at the mouth. Round this a number of leaves, +were stuffed, and the skin was then wrapped up in a palm-spathe. I saw +at once how it was that the legend of their having no wings or feet had +arisen. The beautiful flowing plumage appeared to great advantage, but +the body, by this process, was greatly reduced and shortened, and gave a +very erroneous idea of the real shape of the bird. While speaking of +the birds of paradise, I should like to describe the great variety which +exists. Those I have described are very different from the ordinary +bird of paradise, with which ladies were accustomed to ornament their +hats and bonnets. That is a very beautiful little bird, but not to be +compared to the Great Paradise bird, or the Red Paradise bird, or the +King Paradise bird, or, indeed, to several others which I saw brought +from various parts of New Guinea, or from the neighbouring islands. One +of the most curious and beautiful is the Red Paradise bird, which is +said to be only found in the island of Waigiou. In the same island, +another bird, called the Red Magnificent, is found. + +The birds having been prepared for travelling, the savages now roused +themselves, and signified to us that we must continue hunting. We kept +close to Macco, knowing that he was more likely to be successful than we +were. We urged him to try and get away from them, that we might be by +ourselves. + +"But we get lost; we no find our way back," he answered. + +"But I thought you were accustomed to your native forests, and that you +could easily find your way," I observed. + +"Dis forest not like my forest," he answered. "I dere know de signs. +Here bery different. I live here one year, two year, and den I find my +way about." + +"I thought you could find your way by instinct," I said, "through the +forest." + +"Macco not know what 'stinct mean," he answered. "Me know de signs on +de trees, de way de rivers run or de streams run, where de mountains +are, where de sun rise, where de sun set. Den know de way." + +However we managed, while our masters started off in one direction, to +take an opposite one; and before long, as we moved cautiously through +the wood, we caught sight of a cuscus. Macco was quickly up a tree, and +soon captured the poor beast. Not long after we came up with a tree +kangaroo, to which we gave chase. We caught him as we had done the +other on our island, and had now two animals to take to our masters. We +hung them by their feet over a bamboo, and carried them along in the +direction we believed would lead to the coast. We had gone some +distance when we began to doubt whether we were going right. The forest +was far too thick to allow us to get a glimpse of the sea, by which we +might have guided our steps. At length, fatigued with carrying our +heavy burden, we stopped to rest. On a piece of fallen timber on which +we sat, I observed some curious flies with slender bodies, and +wonderfully long legs, which raised their bodies high above the surface +on which they stood; but the remarkable thing about them was the large +horns which projected from below their eyes, very nearly as long as the +animals themselves, something in shape like the horns of a stag. Their +eyes were violet and green, and the bodies and legs yellowish brown, and +their horns black. We had been silent for some time, each of us +occupied in his own thoughts, when, looking up, we saw a long snouted +animal approaching slowly and rubbing his nose into the soft ground as +he advanced. "Pig, pig," cried Macco, starting up and giving chase, +spear in hand. The pig, however, was far too quick for him, more active +considerably than the cuscus or the tree kangaroo, and though Macco ran +fast, piggy, who knew the country, ran faster; and in a short time Macco +returned, somewhat crestfallen at his want of success. "If we kill +three animals dey tink we great hunters," he exclaimed. "We look for +another piggy, and try cachy." + +We now thought it time to continue our journey. We had not got far, +however, when we heard shouts behind us, and turning round, we saw a +number of black fellows, their countenances expressive of rage, pursuing +us with clubs uplifted. To fly through that jungle would have been +folly, so we stopped and faced the savages. I fully believed from their +gestures that our last moments had arrived. They were within a dozen +yards of us, and in another moment our brains would have been dashed out +on the ground, when a cry was heard coming from one side, and in an +instant afterwards a young woman burst through the thicket, and threw +herself between us and our enemies. We recognised her as the kind +person we had seen bathing her baby in the large shell. She held up a +branch between us and the men, and appeared to be expostulating +earnestly with them. She used much gesture and spoke with vehemence. +Gradually their countenances somewhat calmed, and their clubs, which had +been raised, slowly descended to the ground. As they stood leaning on +them she pointed to the animals we had killed. Macco had been watching +both parties attentively. + +"Dey tink we run away. She say no," he observed. "We take dem and give +dem to her." + +On this we lifted up the kangaroo and cuscus, which we had placed behind +the trunk of a tree, and exhibited them to the savages, laying them +afterwards at the feet of the young female; I cannot say our fair +friend, for she was almost as dark as a sloe berry. We then lifted them +up again, and inquired of her by signs what we were to do with them. +She told us in the same dumb language that we were to accompany her, and +pointing to the path up which we had come, she bade us go before, +walking herself between us and the men, as if to protect us from them. +We went on and on, and now found from the time we took to reach her hut, +that we must have been going inland instead of towards the village on +the sea-shore. This naturally made the savages suppose we were +attempting to run away. + +On arriving at the hut she again addressed the men, who thereon began to +cut up the animals. + +They carried away the whole of the cuscus and part of the kangaroo. The +other part we supposed she had claimed as her perquisite. She then made +signs to us that we were to remain. Who she was we could not tell, but +we concluded that she was a chief's daughter, or, at all events, a +person of great influence and probably of rank among them. As soon as +the men had gone, she lighted a fire and cooked the remaining part of +the kangaroo, placing a savoury piece before us on some palm-leaves, to +which she added some well-made cakes of sago, far superior in flavour to +those we had manufactured. + +She now signified to us that we were to build a hut for ourselves in +which to pass the night, and took us to a spot where we found an +abundance of bamboos, and the large palm leave? I have before +described. She seemed much amused at our awkwardness in putting up the +building, and quickly set to work to show us the way, so that in a short +time we had a comfortable little hut for a sleeping place. + +"I wish we knew her name!" observed Oliver. "I have often read of acts +like these, and of the way in which women have saved the lives of people +as, I am sure, she has done ours. They are the same all the world over. +We have now a proof of it." + +We were in hopes that after this we should be employed entirely by the +kind lady, for lady she was in her look and manner, though she had but +few garments and no ornaments. + +The next day, however, Prince Frizzlepate made his appearance, and +ordered us to go off fishing. She nodded to us as much as to tell us +that we had better do so, and accordingly we entered the canoes which we +had used before. We had even more than our usual success, and returned +with a number of fine fish. On landing we took up the finest to our +friend. + +"I have thought of a name for her," I exclaimed, as we walked along. "I +remember reading of a Princess Serena of some island in the Pacific, and +I doubt if she could have been more amiable than this lady; so I propose +we call her Princess Serena." + +Oliver agreed with me. Macco only grinned. Probably he saw nothing +like a princess about her--only a kind-hearted girl, who had taken +compassion on three unfortunate strangers. + +We presented our fish in due form to the princess, and she graciously +received them, being indeed highly pleased with the present. With the +remainder we returned to our masters. They received the fish as a +matter of course, not deigning in any way to thank us. Without asking +their leave we slipped back into our canoes, and paddled away towards +the hut of the princess. The men called after us, but we pretended not +to hear them, and were soon afterwards seated round a fire roasting +several fish we had lately caught. + +For several days we were employed in the same manner. At length, +however, the fish would not bite, or they had left the bay--at all +events, we caught but few. Each time we returned we were received with +scowling looks by our masters; and it was very evident that though their +disposition towards us had been far from amiable when we first +encountered them, it was now considerably worse. + + + +CHAPTER SIXTEEN. + +OUR PERILOUS ESCAPE. + +We had returned one evening from an unsuccessful fishing. When we +reached the hut we found the Princess Serena in an evident state of +agitation. Looking cautiously around, she made signs to us that some +one was about to kill us, lifting up her hands as if they were holding a +club for the purpose of breaking our heads. There was no mistaking the +signs. We inquired of her what we were to do. She stopped to consider, +first pointing to the canoes. Then she seemed to advise a different +plan. Hurrying into her house, she brought us out some bows, and a +considerable supply of arrows. She then went in, and returned with +three baskets, which she showed us were full of sago, as also some dried +fish. She then made signs to us to eat as much as we could, putting +some kangaroo meat and sago-cakes before us. + +We followed her advice. As soon as we had finished, going into her hut, +she returned with her child in her arms, wrapped up in a piece of +matting, which was secured round her waist, assisting to support the +little creature. She then beckoned to us to follow her. We did so in +Indian file, proceeding along the coast towards the south. As soon as +we had got well out of sight of the village, she led us along the beach +close to the water, where the tide would obliterate our footmarks. The +moon soon rose, and gave us ample light to see our way. It was a lovely +night. The water rippled brightly on the sand, while the moonbeams +played softly over the calm ocean. On the other side rose up the dark +forests with their curious tracery of creepers. Here and there our feet +struck against shells of rare beauty, such as would delight a collector +in England. Just then, however, we thought of little but making our way +as rapidly as we could from our captors. I asked Macco if he could make +out where the princess was leading us. + +"Not know," he answered. "S'pose to friends." + +"I suspect," observed Oliver, "that, from her appearance, she belongs to +some other tribe, and has been married to the chief of the people who +captured us, and that she is going to take us to her own relations." + +This seemed the most probable explanation of her conduct. + +"She can scarcely wish to lead us away, and then leave us to our own +devices," said I. "Perhaps she thinks we are such good hunters that we +should be able to support ourselves." + +We travelled on the whole night as rapidly as we could move, close to +the edge of the water, which, rising, soon covered the impress of our +feet. Just before the sun rose, a thick mist came over the land, +completely hiding all objects, except those in our immediate +neighbourhood. Still the princess led on. Daylight at length stole +over the world; but the mist yet hung down upon us as much as ever. Our +conductress at length stopped. She was evidently somewhat weary, and +although Macco offered to carry her child, she would not allow it out of +her arms. She now made signs that we had better rest, putting her head +upon her hands as if to go to sleep. We were too glad to follow her +advice, for having been on foot the whole of the previous day, we were +completely worn out, and could not have gone many miles further. In +spite of the exercise we had taken, the damp air made us feel very cold. +She observed that we shivered, and instantly leading the way into the +woods, took us to a place where we could cut a quantity of long leaves-- +a sort of fern, apparently, of gigantic size. With these, she +intimated, we could cover ourselves up while we slept, pointing to a +sheltered place under a bank which had been worn away into a sort of +cavern. + +I suppose we had slept some time, though we felt very unwilling to get +up when the princess roused us, and made us understand that we should +take some food, and then proceed on our journey. We, of course, obeyed +her implicitly, and we proceeded on as we had done during the night. +Several times, when we came to an elevation of any sort, she looked +back, examining the line of coast along which we had come, as if to +ascertain whether we were pursued. Then, again, she came down with a +look of satisfaction on her countenance, and proceeded on as before. It +was towards the afternoon when she again stopped, the ground before us +rising, and jutting out into the sea, forming a lofty headland. She now +led the way inland, and showed us another hollow, signifying by her +gestures that she wished us to occupy it. As we, however, felt anxious +to explore the country, we continued wandering about. This seemed to +cause her much annoyance. First she caught hold of Oliver and led him +back, and then me, and then ran after Macco. At length, observing that +we did not seem disposed to keep quiet, she came and took me by the +hand, and led me cautiously up towards the top of the height, looking +round on either side, and keeping as much as possible under cover. On +reaching the summit, she pointed down below, where I saw, in a sheltered +bay, another collection of huts somewhat similar to the one we had left. +This at once accounted for her unwillingness to allow us to wander +about, lest we should be seen by the inhabitants. I expressed my thanks +to her as well as I could, and at once returned to the cavern. + +She now, as before, made us collect a supply of fern leaves, as well as +a number of branches; and we having again taken some food, she covered +us up inside the cavern, fastening the branches in front, so as to +conceal the entrance, she herself going to a little distance, and +sitting down under a bank with her child. As we had had but little rest +the previous morning, we quickly fell asleep. + +The shades of night had again stolen over the world, when we heard the +gentle voice of our conductress calling us; and once more she set out, +we following her in Indian file as before. We made a circuit, +apparently to avoid the village, and then descended to the sea-shore. +All night long, indeed, we went on. The journey was almost a repetition +of that of the previous night. The moon was still shining brightly over +the waters, when Macco uttered an exclamation of surprise, and putting +his hand on my shoulder, cried out,--"O Massa Walter, look dere!" + +He pointed seaward, and there, just under the moonbeams, I caught sight +of a white object. I looked more and more earnestly. Yes, I was almost +convinced that it was the sail of a vessel. The shape of her canvas +convinced me that she must be European, and not one of the mat-sail +craft of those seas. Oliver thought I was right also. "Yes, yes!" +exclaimed Macco; "no doubt, dat brig!" + +Our conductress stopped when she heard our exclamations, and also looked +towards the sea. The vessel was standing towards the south, the +direction we were going. I observed that she walked, after this, more +slowly, as if her thoughts were engaged on some matter of importance. + +"Oh, if we could but manage to get off to her, or make some signal!" I +exclaimed. + +"I am afraid that will be very difficult," said Oliver. + +As may be supposed, our thoughts were occupied after this with all sorts +of plans for getting off to the vessel. The fog, however, which +constantly comes over the land before sunrise, concealed her entirely +from our sight. We rested, by the desire of the princess, among some +fallen trees in the forest, she having examined the place first, +apparently to ascertain if there were any snakes, or other creatures, to +hurt us. We, however, could scarcely go to sleep for thinking of how we +could reach the vessel we had seen. Still, sleep at length overcame us. + +We were awoke by the voice of the princess, evidently in a state of +great agitation. Pointing to the sea-shore, she led the way there. She +took us down to the beach of a small bay, in which a canoe was hauled +up. It was barely sufficient to hold two people, and would certainly +not contain three. + +"Jump in, Massa Walter--jump in, Oliver!" exclaimed Macco. "Shove off; +me find other canoe, and follow." + +Though it was broad daylight, the mist still hung over the ocean, and we +could not see to any distance. The princess urged us by her gestures to +follow the advice which Macco gave us. + +"But where is there another canoe?" I asked, not seeing one near. + +"Never mind, Massa Walter," he answered; "shove off--shove off, I say;" +and running the canoe down to the water, he forced us both into it, +putting a paddle into the hand of each. "Dere, dere, you go off; I come +off in 'noder canoe! Go, go! I say, go!" + +Hitherto we had been unable to ascertain the cause of the alarm +exhibited by the princess. At that moment we learned it too well, by +hearing some shouts in the distance. They became louder and louder, and +as they did so, her agitation increased. We endeavoured to thank her +for her kindness, but she seemed too anxious to get us off to take any +notice of our gestures. Trusting that we might discover the brig we had +seen on the previous night, we paddled away with might and main. My +heart misgave me, though, as to what would become of Macco. We saw him +still on the beach waving an adieu, till both his form and that of the +princess were almost hidden by the mist. The shouts increased in +loudness, and just then, glancing over our shoulders, we saw a number of +gigantic looking forms--gigantic they looked through the mist--rushing +down with uplifted clubs towards where our friends were standing. Life +was sweet to us; we could not help our friends, and we paddled away. A +shriek reached our ears, but the shadowy forms were no longer visible-- +indeed, the whole land was concealed by the mist. On we paddled for our +lives. Every instant we expected to be pursued, for though our canoe +was the only one we had seen, we could not help fearing that there must +be others in the neighbourhood, into which the savages would certainly +get, and come in chase of us. As far as we could judge, we were pulling +directly out to sea. The shouts had died away. They had assisted us +somewhat in directing our course through the mist. We again heard them; +they seemed to be approaching. + +"We are pursued," cried Oliver. + +"Then we must pull away faster," said I. + +Again louder and louder grew the shouts. Our hopes of escape began to +vanish. + +"I am afraid we shall again be made prisoners," I observed to Oliver. + +"Don't let us despair," he answered. "We have been preserved hitherto. +The same Power can still take care of us. See, see! What is that?" +Just then, the mist breaking, we saw appearing above it the topgallant +sails of a square-rigged vessel. + +"The brig, the brig!" I shouted. + +We paddled on with redoubled vigour. She was still at a considerable +distance. Behind us rose the fierce cries of the savages. The surface +of the water, which had hitherto been calm, now became somewhat +agitated. The mist rose. Before us appeared the brig, and turning +round our heads, we saw at almost an equal distance a couple of canoes. +On we dashed, shouting at the same time at the top of our voices. The +people on board the brig apparently heard us, for a boat was lowered. +The wind was moderate; but still a heavy surf rolled in on the shore. +At that moment the fragile canoe was lifted up by a sea, and then down +she came upon a bed of rocks, almost splitting in two. + +"On, on!" I cried to Oliver, throwing off my jacket; "we must swim for +it!" and seizing him by the arm, I helped him to wade across the reef, +and then plunging into the sea, we swam off towards the boat. Her crew +perceived our danger, and with sturdy strokes pulled towards us. A +glance I cast behind showed me that one of the canoes of the savages had +met with the same accident that we had, and several dark heads were seen +floating in the water, and getting fearfully near us. One of our +pursuers, I saw, held a club in his hand. Had I been alone, I might +easily have kept ahead of the savages, as we had so much the start of +them; but Oliver not being so good a swimmer as I was, made but slow +progress. The other canoe, avoiding the reef on which we had struck, +made for an opening in it, and was only a short distance behind the +swimmers. I looked up. Oh, how long the boat appeared to be coming! +Still she was coming; and I urged Oliver to persevere. He redoubled his +efforts. How grateful I felt when at length the boat reached us. I +looked up, and there I saw the countenance of Dick Tarbox, of Roger +Trew, and the dark features of Potto Jumbo, expanded by excitement in +the most wonderful manner. There also were several others of my +shipmates. Was it a dream, or was it a reality? For an instant I +thought the whole must be a strange dream. Still, no, it must be a +reality, I said to myself; and crying out, urged my friends to take +Oliver on board, I meantime treading water alongside. They lifted him +up, and had just time to stow him in the bottom of the boat, when the +savages were upon us. One fierce fellow was close to me with uplifted +dagger. Roger Trew knocked it out of his hand with his oar, which the +savage then seized. Another savage was coming on with his club raised +in one hand, while with the other he tried to catch the stem of the +boat, when Dick Tarbox came down on his cranium with the blade of an oar +with such force, that the savage sunk beneath the sea. The others, +meantime, began to let fly their arrows; but Tarbox, settling the other +man who had hold of Roger's oar, in the same way as he had done the +first, and I being taken on board, the boat pulled rapidly towards the +brig. + +I still could scarcely believe that I was not dreaming. "What!" I +exclaimed, looking up at Tarbox, "are you really alive, or is this all +fancy? I thought you were all lost when the mast went over." + +"It is no fancy, but we are all alive and jolly," answered Tarbox. +"Thank Heaven, Roger Trew and I, and a few others of us, were able to +cling on to the mast. We thought you had been lost; and thankful I am +to find that we were wrong about you, as you were about us." + +However, as may be supposed, there was no time to ask questions or get +answers. I was satisfied that I was really awake, and had +providentially escaped from the savages. The brig, for fear of the +reefs, had been unable to get nearer. Numerous other canoes were seen +coming off from the shore. The savages appeared determined to recapture +us; and, perhaps, finding that the brig did not fire, hoped to take her +also. Before, however, they could reach the boat, we were alongside. + +I quickly sprang up on deck, and there, with open arms, stood to welcome +me, my dear sister Emily. Grace and Mr Hooker were behind her. They +greeted me cordially. As may be supposed, they had many questions to +ask me, and so had I to ask them. The brig, I found, had been fitted up +by Mr Hooker and Captain Davenport. The captain, I was sorry to hear, +was unable to come in her, and Mrs Davenport had remained behind at +Ternate to nurse him. Mr Thudicumb had come in command, with those of +the crew of the _Bussorah Merchant_ who had been left on shore. + +The captain's object was to search for his lost ship. Mr Hooker had +the same object in view, as also to examine the various islands we were +likely to call at, for the sake of gaining information in natural +history. Emily had entreated to be allowed to come; and the captain, +after some hesitation, thinking that his daughter's health might be +benefited by the voyage, allowed her to accompany Grace. An old Dutch +woman, Frau Ursula she was called, who spoke a little English, and to +whom I was presently introduced, came as a sort of nurse, or governante. + +The savages meantime were approaching; and Mr Thudicumb and his men +were making preparations for their reception, getting all the arms on +board loaded, including a couple of small brass swivel guns and two +six-pounders, which we carried on our quarters for making signals. The +land-breeze, however, freshened considerably, just before the leading +canoes got within bow-shot. + +"Don't fire, Thudicumb, as long as we can help it," said Mr Hooker. "I +have no wish to injure these poor savages; and if we can avoid doing so, +it will be much better, both for ourselves and for any who may come +after us. I believe that many of the murders which have been committed +by the savages, on these and other coasts, have been caused by some +insult or injury, first inflicted by the white men, and they have simply +retaliated, fully believing themselves justified in so doing." + +The sails were trimmed, and away we stood from the coast. I seized a +glass, and tried to examine the shore, in the hope of seeing either our +kind protectress or Macco; but neither were visible, and it seemed too +likely that both had been killed by the savages. When I had time to +tell Mr Hooker about Macco, he proposed standing back to try and hear +something of him, and to bring him off if he had escaped. The savages, +finding they could not overtake us, at length pulled back to the shore. + +"And now, my good boys," said Mr Hooker, "you may as well rig +yourselves decently. You have been living so long among savages, that +you are scarcely aware of the uncivilised figure you cut." + +I had nearly forgotten my scanty garments in the excitement of what was +taking place. Mr Hookers shirts were certainly rather large for Oliver +or me; but he insisted on our taking one apiece, as also a pair of +duck-trowsers. "I have no doubt that Roger Trew, and one of the other +men, will cut a pair for you into proper dimensions by to-morrow," he +said, laughing, as he handed us the garments. Some spare jackets, which +more nearly fitted us, were found among the men's things; and we were +thus able to appear in the cabin in rather more civilised costume than +we had come off in, and be presented to the Frau. She was a somewhat +portly dame, with a most good-humoured countenance, her little round +blue eyes appearing to be always laughing, while her mouth was +constantly wreathed in what Mr Hooker used to call full-blown smiles. +She had kind, sympathising feelings, and wept heartily when she heard of +the fate of the Princess Serena, which we described to her. Emily and +Grace, too, were much moved by it, and very sorry to hear that the +faithful Macco had also too probably lost his life in his anxiety to +save ours. + +"I am so glad to see you, Massa Walter," said Potto Jumbo, as he shook +my hand when I went forward to the caboose, in which, in spite of its +small size, he appeared quite as happy as in the large one on board the +_Bussorah Merchant_; "only bery sorry to lose cook-mate. Poor Macco! +He bery good cook-mate!" + +"Yes, indeed; he was a very excellent and sensible fellow," I observed. +"I trust he may have escaped, and that we may get him on board again." + +I could not bear the idea of thinking that poor Macco had been murdered. +Potto Jumbo, however, said he had very little hopes on the subject, as +evidently, from the conduct of the savages, they were fierce, revengeful +fellows, and were certain to have wreaked their vengeance on those who +were still in their power. + +Next day, we again stood in towards the coast, with a white flag flying, +hoping that the savages might understand it. No canoes, however, came +off. In my eagerness to try and recover Macco, I volunteered to go off +in a boat; but to this Mr Thudicumb would not consent. He said he was +sure that the savages would pursue us; and that the only two boats we +had in the brig were too heavy to give us any chance of escape. I +scanned the coast with a telescope all day long, on the chance of seeing +some signal from the shore, but none appeared; and at length, with much +sorrow, I gave up all expectation of recovering poor Macco. + +The brig then made sail to the southward, to visit the Aru Islands, +which Mr Hooker was desirous of exploring. Some time passed before I +had an opportunity of asking Dick Tarbox how he and his companions had +escaped. + +"Why, you see, Master Walter," he said, "after supper that day, some of +us old hands thought of putting some biscuits and ham in our pockets, +though we did not remember them till we were beginning to get very +peckish. When the mast fell, we still clung to it, except two poor +fellows, who were washed off much at the time that you were; and as they +have not turned up, I am afraid they must have perished. The rest of us +clung on for dear life. As you remember, soon afterwards the sea went +down, and we were able to stand up on the mast and look about us. It +was now we recollected the food we had stuffed into our pockets, and +lucky it was that we had done so, or we should have been starved: as it +was, we nearly died of thirst. Still, though we had a hard matter to +get the food down, with our throats so dry, yet we did manage it, and +held on to dear life. We were, howsomedever, almost giving up, when we +caught sight of a sail coming over the water to us. She was a native +craft; but whether or not the people on board her might knock us on the +head, we could not tell. Still, anything was better than staying where +we were. We had not our choice, though, for the people aboard the prow +caught sight of us, and came up to the mast. They were pretty +peaceable-looking fellows, though their skins were brown enough. We +managed to make them understand that our ship had been cast away: +indeed, our mast showed them that; and we were not long in tumbling on +board, and making our salaams to an old chap, who seemed to be their +captain. He was rather vexed when he could not understand what we said, +or we understand what he said to us. However, he observed that we might +rig ourselves in mats while our clothes were drying, and had some dishes +of rice and smoked fish put before us. When the sea went down, they got +out their sweeps, and pulled round where they supposed the ship had +struck, in the hopes of getting something up from her; and there were +some fellows on board who seemed to be well up to diving. However, they +were not successful; and suddenly they got out their sweeps, and pulled +away to the northward. A strange sail which appeared some little way +off was, we supposed, the cause of their doing this. Probably they took +her for a pirate." + +"Very likely that was the craft we were on board," I observed. "It +would have been curious if we had come up with you." + +"Well, for your sakes, I am rather glad you did not," said the +boatswain. "In a little time, our friends, who seemed bound to a +distance, began to think that our room would be pleasanter than our +company. They had a strange cargo on board,--bales of that +nasty-looking stuff, the sea-slug, and birds' nests, and mother-of-pearl +shell, and I do not know how many other odd things. Two or three days +afterwards, coming in sight of an island, they quietly made signs to us +to get into a boat; and though we at first talked of showing fight, and +declaring we would do no such thing, yet at last we agreed, seeing we +had no arms to fight with except our fists, that it would be better to +obey. To make a long story short, we were shoved on shore on a desolate +island; we supposing that we were to find some houses, and people to +look after us, but not a human being or a hut could we discover. There +was water and there were cocoa-nuts; and as we had our knives, we had a +chance of getting some shell-fish, if we could not find anything else. +Now, as it happened, not one of us had been on a desolate island before; +and there we were, six stout fellows, very little better off than babes +in the wood. We had short commons, I can tell you, Master Walter. +There were birds enough, and some of them with gay feathers, but we +could not catch them; and there were animals, but they got away from us. +At first we thought we were not going to find any water; but we did +come up to a spring, which bubbled up out of the earth--the only one +that we could discover on the island. That kept our throats moist. We +had a hard job to get a light. We hunted about for tinder out of the +rotten trees; but, then, there was the flint to be found: and no flint +could we fall in with. You may be sure we hunted in our pockets, and +looked about with our noses on the ground wherever we went. At last, +what should we see but a bit of a broken tea-cup. At first I thought it +was a bit of shell. How it could have come there I do not know, except +it was thrown overboard from some Chinese craft and washed up there. +Well, that bit of china was of more use to us than its weight in gold. +Taking it in my hand, and beginning to strike it against the back of my +knife, what was my joy to see a spark fly from it. It was but one; but +one little spark was, I knew, enough to kindle a great fire. Well, we +dried our tinder in the sun, and then began to strike away with the +flint and china. Roger Trew took it in hand first, and struck and +struck away; but though the sparks came, not one could he make go down +to the tinder. At last I took it; and didn't I feel pleased when I saw +there was a spark resting on the tinder. We blew, not too hard, you may +depend on it, and blew and blew, and the spark began to grow larger and +larger, and the whole of the tinder was on fire. Did not we bring dried +leaves in a hurry!--and, blowing them, up there sprung a flame in no +time. We soon collected a whole load of sticks, and in a few minutes +there we had a fire blazing away. We felt inclined to join hands and +dance round it. We did not, though. We quickly got our shell-fish, and +began roasting them. We thought them very good, though they were not +much for keeping body and soul together. Well, we did prize that piece +of old china, and I kept it carefully in one pocket, with my knife in +the other; and we made up a big fire, almost enough to roast an ox, +though we had nothing but a few cockles to cook by it. However, the +food, such as it was, put a little more spirit into us, and we set out +to see what sort of a country we had been left on. It was not very +large; but we saw a number of parrots and parroquets up in the trees, +and many other birds, but we had not much chance of getting them. +Still, we all agreed we would do our best. + +"Well, we walked and walked along the shore, and now and then went +inland; but we could not make much way there, on account of the trees. +At last, looking up, I saw some tall palm-trees, and at the top of them +there were some cocoa-nuts. You may be sure we set to work to get up at +them; but it is pretty hard work climbing a cocoa-nut tree without +ropes, not like swarming up a mast. However, Roger Trew did haul +himself up; but then, you see, there are not many men who have got arms +like his, and they are better by half than legs for climbing trees. +That is why the monkeys have them so strong, I suppose. To be sure, +some of them have got tails to help them. Do you know, I have often +thought what convenient things tails would be to sailors, if they could +catch hold by them as monkeys do. Howsomedever, Roger got to the top at +last, and then he sent thundering down a dozen cocoa-nuts or more. Some +of our fellows thought they were to be eaten husk and all, and cried out +they did not think that would do them much good. At last we got them +broken open, and sucked away at the juice inside, which had begun to +turn almost into milk. They were more than ripe. It is said that young +cocoa-nuts have far more juice and are far better than the old ones. +Still, you may be sure, we were very glad to get these at any price; and +having found some trees, we had fair hopes of finding more. Still, +cocoa-nuts and shell-fish, though they may keep body and soul together, +after a time do little more than that; and we all became thinner and +thinner. I am not at all sure that we should have lived many weeks +longer, so thin and wretched did we get, when at last a sail appeared in +sight. Our hearts beat pretty quick when we thought that after all she +might not come near the island. Oh! how eagerly we watched her. Now +she seemed to be standing away; now, once more, she tacked, and stood +towards the island. There was a high rock near, running out into the +sea. We made our way to it; and one of our people tearing off his +shirt, we made it fast to it, to serve as a signal. You may be sure we +gave a shout of joy when up went a flag in return, and the brig stood +towards the island. She was no other than this little _Dugong_, as they +call her, and Mr Thudicumb, and your friend Mr Hooker, come to look +for us. We were all very glad to see each other; but we felt very sorry +when we thought that you and Oliver had been lost. And now, I'll tell +you, Master Walter, it was about the happiest moment in my life when I +got hold of you, and helped you into the boat safe from those savages." + + + +CHAPTER SEVENTEEN. + +THE ARU ISLANDS VISITED. + +Leaving the coast of New Guinea, the _Dugong_ stood across to the Aru +Islands, which Mr Hooker was anxious to visit. I may as well say that +the dugong is a large fish found in these waters, from ten to twelve +feet in length, of the whale species. They swim in flocks, often coming +into shallow water. + +The natives prize them for food. We speared one, and got it on board; +and we all agreed, when the fish was cooked, that we had seldom tasted a +more delicate dish. However, the look of the dugong is not attractive. +Mr Hooker told me that the female dugong is remarkable for the +affection which she has for her young, of which she produces only one at +a time. If the young dugong is speared, she will never leave it, but is +sure to be taken also. + +We approached the Aru Islands from the southward. The sea between them +and New Guinea is very shallow, considerably under fifty fathoms in many +places. There are about eighty of them, mostly very low, and forming a +chain about a hundred miles in length, and half that distance in width. +They belong to the Dutch. The inhabitants are very mixed. There is a +larger number of Papuans than any other race among the population. Two +or three native Christian schoolmasters have been sent over from Amboyna +to teach the inhabitants. We could just see these islands in the far +distance, when we found ourselves approaching a fleet of large native +boats at anchor. Two or three vessels were also at anchor near them. +With our glasses we could see a number of figures standing up in the +boats, and then suddenly disappearing overboard. Others were seen +climbing up over the sides. What they could be about I could not at +first guess. On pointing them out to Mr Hooker, however, he said at +once that they must be pearl-divers; and as the wind was very light, and +we passed close to them, we had an opportunity of observing their +proceedings. There appeared to be about a dozen men in each boat, half +of whom were evidently, from their want of dress, the divers, while two +other men we took to be the chief and an assistant. A large sugar-loaf +stone was let down overboard by a thick rope. A diver stepped on the +gunwale, holding on by the rope, and apparently placing his toe in a +loop or hole to keep his foot in its place. On the other foot a net was +fastened. With this apparatus the diver began to descend. Before, +however, his head reached the water I saw that he held his nose very +tightly with his hand. This was, I understood, to prevent the water +getting into his nostrils. We calculated that about four from each boat +were down at a time, and we judged that each man remained from two to +three minutes below the water. Up he came again at the end of that +time, apparently very little exhausted, although he must have been +making active exertions to collect the shells. After he had come to the +top, the net containing the oysters was drawn up, and in that time he +had collected from a hundred to a hundred and fifty. + +We watched them with great interest, and were anxious to procure some of +the oysters, but the chiefs would not sell them; indeed, they all belong +to merchants who have rented the fishing for the season. Some of the +men, we observed, suffered far more than others, and discharged water +from their mouths and ears and nostrils, and some even blood; but, +notwithstanding this, the same men were ready to go down again when +their turn came. We learned that most of them will make from forty to +fifty plunges in one day, and that a few of the most experienced and +strongest remain down nearly five minutes. Their greatest danger is +from the ground shark, which lies in wait at the bottom. However, some +of these men will face even the shark, with knives in their hands, and +come off victorious. To secure themselves still further, some of the +boats carry conjurers or priests on board, who, by their incantations, +are supposed to preserve them from the attacks of the shark. Of course, +if a diver is picked off by a shark, the conjurer asserts that he has +not properly obeyed his directions, and thus does not lose his credit. +The saw-fish is another of the diver's foes, more dangerous, because +more difficult to attack than the shark. + +The merchants have to keep a very strict look-out on the divers on their +return to the shore, as frequently when the oyster is in the boat, and +left alive undisturbed for some time, it opens its shell. A pearl may +then easily be discovered, and, by means of a piece of wood, the shell +be prevented from again closing till the diver has an opportunity of +picking out the prize. Sometimes they will even swallow the pearls to +conceal them. As soon as the boats arrive on the shore the oysters are +put in holes or pits dug in the ground to the depth of about two feet, +fenced carefully round to guard them from depredation. Mats are first +spread below them to prevent them touching the earth. Here the oysters +are left to die and rot. As soon as they have passed through a state of +putrefaction and become dry, they can be easily opened without the +danger of injuring the pearl, which might be the case if they were +opened when fresh. The shell is then carefully examined for pearls. +Sometimes one is found in the body of the mollusc itself, but it is +generally in the shell. We afterwards, on going on shore, had a +specimen of the horrid odour which arises from these pits, but the +people who are accustomed to it do not appear to suffer; indeed, we saw +people groping about on the sands where the oyster pits had existed, and +learned that they were seeking for stray oysters, frequently pearls of +some value being thus discovered. + +Emily and Grace, as well as Oliver and I, took great interest in +watching the proceedings I have described. I asked Mr Hooker how +pearls come to exist. + +"Oh, I have read somewhere," exclaimed Emily, "that they are produced by +a kind of dew which falls from heaven into the salt water, where the +oyster swallows it, when it hardens and forms the beautiful white object +we call a pearl." + +"A very poetical notion, Miss Emily," observed Mr Hooker; "but in +reality pearls are identical with the substance which we call +mother-of-pearl, which lines the shell of the oyster. It is, indeed, +the result of disease. When any substance intrudes into the shell the +animal puts forth a viscous liquor, which agglomerates and hardens till +the pearl is formed. It is said, indeed, in some places, that the +divers pierce the shells of the oysters, and thus increase the number of +pearls. It has also been discovered that oysters which have been +pierced by a certain small marine worm have invariably pearls within +them. The oyster, to defend itself from the worm, covers the hole with +a substance which becomes as hard as the shell, and brilliant as +mother-of-pearl." + +A breeze springing up towards evening, we proceeded on our voyage, +followed by the boats, which also shaped a course for the Aru Islands. +In the course of the next day we came in sight of a small rocky island +with high cliffs, off which we espied a couple of Chinese junks at +anchor. As the island was not much out of our course, we stood towards +it, keeping the lead going for fear of reefs. The water, however, was +deep close up to the rocks. The cliffs completely overhung the sea, and +we observed within them numerous hollows and caverns. On getting +nearer, we saw that several boats belonging to the junks were lying +directly under the cliffs. As the wind fell, we came to an anchor, for +the sea over which we were now sailing was so shallow, that we could +anchor in calm weather in almost any part of it. + +A boat was lowered, and Mr Hooker invited us to accompany him. As we +passed near the Chinese junk the crew hailed us, and Mr Hooker, who +understood a little Chinese, remarked that they seemed very angry with +us. + +"They think, probably, that we have come to search for edible birds' +nests, which they themselves are now collecting," he observed. + +"Edible birds' nests?" exclaimed Emily and Grace together. "Do you mean +to say, Mr Hooker, by that, that there are birds' nests fit to eat?" + +"The Chinese not only think them fit to eat, but esteem them great +delicacies," observed Mr Hooker. "These junks have come all the way +from China to collect them, and if they manage to get back without being +plundered by pirates, or sent to the bottom by storms, they will make an +enormous profit by the voyage." + +Mr Hooker hailed the junk in return, and told the men that they need +not be alarmed; that we did not come to interfere with them, but only +prompted by curiosity to see what they were about. As we got nearer we +saw the entrance to a cavern, into which we pulled. A far from pleasant +odour issued from it, while ahead there was an inky darkness, which the +keenest eye could not penetrate. As we proceeded, however, we observed +a bright light coming from the interior, which showed us a boat with a +couple of Chinese in her, one of whom was holding a torch; while another +man, by means of a ladder, was mounting up a narrow ledge of rock on the +side. Overhead huge bats flitted round us, while on every side the tiny +chirp of innumerable birds was taken up and echoed from seemingly a +thousand voices throughout the cavern. Above the head of the Chinese +appeared a number of nests, something in the shape of large deep spoons +without handles, split in half longitudinally, smaller than the ordinary +swallow's nest. They were placed, without any order apparently, on +every spot where a slight projection of the rock afforded a foundation. +The Chinese, like their friends on board the junk, began to abuse us for +coming to interfere with their occupation. Mr Hooker, however, soon +pacified them, and offered them some money for a few of the nests, that +we might examine them. This brought them at once into good humour, and +they very readily sold us a dozen or more of the nests, though I thought +the price for birds' nests a very high one. A number of birds like +swallows were flying in and out of the cavern. They had the flight of +swallows; indeed, Mr Hooker said they were a species of swallow. They +were about the size of robins or sparrows; their breasts white, their +wings grey, and their backs and the feathers of their tails shining +black. On examining the nests which we had purchased, we found that +they were composed of a gelatinous substance something like isinglass. + +"This is the substance," Mr Hooker told us, "that the Chinese make into +broth. They are packed, however, just as they are cut from the rock, +and carried to China. There they are cleansed from all extraneous +substances, and are then boiled or stewed, every particle of dirt being +thus more completely removed; and then, with a mixture of spices, they +make a transparent, delicate-looking jelly, although, without the +spices, they have little or no flavour." + +"But where can they obtain this jelly-like substance?" asked Emily. + +"I believe it is produced from a mollusc of some sort, on which the +birds feed. When they require to build their nests, they disgorge the +gelatinous portion for the purpose; and as this substance possesses the +nutritive qualities of animal matter, I have little doubt that it is +produced from these molluscs," said Mr Hooker. + +Not only within the cavern, but on all available and tolerably sheltered +spots outside, we saw a number of the sea-swallows' nests. We pulled +close under one cliff, where we could distinguish clearly a bird sitting +in its nest--we concluded on its eggs--and looking very much at its +ease. Another little bird was standing watching its nest. We supposed +therefore that its young had been hatched; and as they were in an +inaccessible part of the cliff, we hoped they would escape the +Chinaman's grasp. + +As we had given a good price for the first nests, the Chinese willingly +sold us another dozen, with which, wishing them a successful +bird's-nesting expedition, we returned on board the _Dugong_. The +Malays assert that the bird feeds upon insects and other minute +creatures floating on the surface of the sea; and on further examining +the nests, we perceived long filaments resembling very fine vermicelli, +coiled one part over the other, without any regularity, and glued +together by transverse rows of the same material. Mr Hooker told us +that the trade in birds' nests employs a large amount of capital and +men. However, the loss of life arising from accidents and exposure is +very great. It has been asserted that, on an average, two out of every +five men employed in bird's-nesting meet with a violent death. In China +a "_catty_" or one pound and a quarter English, of the best nests, sells +at about 9 pounds sterling. Their value depends chiefly upon their +translucent whiteness. Those which have not been lined or used by the +birds obtain the highest prices. + +Frau Ursula made a small dish of a few of the birds' nests, which, when +first put before us, were perfectly tasteless. When, however, she had +added certain seasoning, it was pronounced as delicate as any food could +be. The Chinese use them chiefly for thickening their soups and +ragouts. + +The sea-swallow is found along the northern coast of Australia, as well +as on the rocks and islands of the sea which we were now navigating. A +large number of Chinese junks come every year to procure the nests, +which are greatly prized in China. + +As we neared the Aru Islands we passed close to a number of boats at +anchor, the people from which were continually jumping overboard, +diving, and returning to the surface with some creatures in their hands. +As on the previous day, the wind was light, and we were able to +accompany Mr Hooker, and pulled off in the boat to see what they were +about. + +"What can they be getting?" I asked. + +"The creatures the natives are collecting are the _holothurians_, or +sea-cucumbers," answered the naturalist. "There are a great many +species of these creatures; but, I believe, those found on banks of +coral sand are the most valued." + +Emily and Grace, however, when they saw the creatures, could not help +expressing exclamations of disgust at their appearance. They were like +gigantic slugs, or long black bags with frills at the top. Mr Hooker +purchased a basket full of the creatures, which he wished to examine +more at his leisure. + +"But of what use can those ugly things be?" asked Emily, as we pulled +back to the vessel. + +"Our omnivorous friends the Chinese would be very much surprised at your +asking the question," answered Mr Hooker. "They look upon them as one +of their most delicate articles of food, though greatly inferior to the +birds' nests we found yesterday. I see it stated that from Macassar +alone these creatures are shipped to China to the value of 150,000 +pounds; and this is only a very small portion of those used, not only by +the Chinese, but the natives of many other parts of the shores of those +seas. When taken on shore, their intestines are removed, and they are +then boiled in sea-water: in some places with the leaves of the papaw, +and in others with the bark of the mangrove-tree, which gives them a +bright red colour. After they have been boiled, they are buried in the +ground till the next day, when they are spread out to dry in the sun. +They are now considered fit for shipment to China, to which the larger +number are sent. In some places, however, they are not buried, but +smoked over the fire on a framework formed of bamboo. The Chinese make +them into soups, sometimes boiling pieces of sugar-cane with them, which +is said to neutralise their rank flavour." + +Sailing round the north end of the group, we approached its capital, or +chief trading settlement, situated off the north-west end. It is called +Dobbo. Just as we came off it we sighted a Dutch man-of-war brig, and +stood towards her. The wind was light, and she had, apparently, +fishing-lines overboard. Mr Hooker hailed her, and asked her where she +was bound for. Her commander, who spoke English, replied, "For +Ternate." + +"How fortunate!" I exclaimed. "We can then write to Captain Davenport, +and tell him of our safety." + +The commander at once politely offered to convey a letter. "He might +however," he observed, "be some little time on the passage, as he was in +search of pirates, whose vessels had lately been heard of in those seas, +and had committed depredations on the islands under protection of the +Dutch." + +We all hurried down into the cabin to write our letters, as, of course, +I was anxious to give an account of what had occurred to my kind friend. +Emily wished to write to Mrs Davenport, as did also Grace to her +mother. As there was not much time, we described our adventures as +briefly as possible. Mr Hooker had proposed to proceed through the +Java Seas to Singapore; while Captain Davenport had arranged, should he +be able to obtain a vessel, to go there by way of the Sooloo +Archipelago, round the north of Borneo. On returning on deck we saw a +great commotion on board the brig--all the sailors rushing aft, and +hauling away at a rope overboard. In a short time the snout of a huge +fish appeared above the water, struggling violently, and it seemed very +likely he would break away. "A shark! a shark!" cried our men. I had +scarcely supposed so enormous a creature existed. He was fully +twenty-six feet long, and looked capable of swallowing not only a man's +leg, but the whole of his body at a gulp. It made me shudder at the +thought of falling overboard, and I felt thankful that while struggling +in the water no such monster had found me out. "O Walter! how +terrible!" exclaimed Emily. The same idea seemed to have crossed her +mind. One of the officers stood, harpoon in hand, ready to strike the +creature as he was drawn up under the vessel's counter. A "whip" was +immediately rigged, and the crew hauling away, the shark, in spite of +his struggles, was hoisted up on deck. Scarcely had he reached it, +however, than we saw the crew scattering right and left; and it looked +as if he had taken the deck from them, so violent were the lashes he +gave with his tail as he floundered up and down, and turned and twisted +on every side. At length the most daring of the men returned aft, armed +with capstan bars and hatchets; but it was not till after many blows, +and jumping and leaping to get out of the way of the monster's tail, +that he was seen to lie quiet on the deck. + +I then went in the boat with our despatches on board the brig. The +commander received me very politely, and undertook to deliver them. He +warned us to keep a sharp look-out for pirates, as our brig being only +slightly armed, they were very likely to attack us should we meet them. +He kindly offered me some slices of the shark; but I laughingly declined +the gift, saying that we were going on shore, where we might find plenty +of beef and mutton. He laughed, however, at that notion, and observed +that we were more likely to find pig and kangaroo, as beef and mutton +were articles unknown in that region. I bid him and his officers +farewell, and returned to the _Dugong_, I felt greatly relieved at the +thought that Captain Davenport would now hear of our safety, and hoped +before long to meet him and his kind wife at Singapore. I told Mr +Hooker that I had been offered some of the shark's flesh, but had +declined receiving it. + +"Had he presented a Chinese with the fins, he would have been +overwhelmed with gratitude, as they are considered almost as delicate +morsels as the edible birds' nests," said Mr Hooker. "The creature in +many parts is caught for the sake of his fins alone, which are sent to +China in large quantities, where they are used in the same way that the +birds' nests and tripang are employed, though they rank next to birds' +nests in value. They are of the same gelatinous consistency, and are +made into soups and ragouts." + +Dobbo, being exposed, to the sea-breezes, is healthy, and a good +anchorage is found close to it. The place presented an animated +appearance, as traders from all parts of the archipelago assemble there. +The buildings they inhabited were not, however, pretentious, being +composed of bamboo and reeds; while many of the traders considered +clothes somewhat superfluous. On the shore a number of prows were +hauled up and being refitted for sea. Caulkers were at work on some; +painters on others, who were covering them with a thick white lime +plaster, making them look very clean and bright. Sailmakers, who +looked, however, more like mat-makers, were at work in some places. The +tripang--black ugly lumps--was being exposed to the sun to be prepared +for loading. In another spot people were busy tying up bundles of +mother-of-pearl shell. Carpenters were engaged in squaring timber for +repairing vessels; while boats from the islands of Goram and Ceram were +unloading their cargoes of sago-cake, with which the traders supply +themselves for their homeward voyage. We were amused with the vast +number of different cockatoos, lories, and parrots, which were secured +by strings on bamboo perches in front of the numerous reed huts, all +chattering and talking together, as if carrying on some important +consultation; while beautiful metallic-green or white fruit-pigeons were +uttering their pleasing coos in all directions. These people are +evidently fond of tame creatures, for we saw several beautiful little +kangaroos hopping about, quite as tame and as elegant as fawns. Young +cassowaries also, striped with black and brown, ran about as tame as +barn-door fowls. This is a wingless bird, the body of which is about +double the size of that of a large turkey, but its long legs make it +five or six feet in height. It is covered with long, coarse, black, +hair-like feathers. The skin of the neck is bare, and is of a bright +blue and red. Instead of wings it has a group of horny black spines, +like porcupine quills. The species I have described is found in the +neighbourhood of the island of Ceram. Mr Hooker told us that it feeds +chiefly on fallen fruits, and on insects or Crustacea. The female lays +from three to five large eggs of a shagreen-green colour, upon a bed of +leaves. The male and female sit alternately for about a month upon +them. The articles we saw exposed for sale in the fair were chiefly +pearl shell and the tripang, known also as the _beche-de-mer_; as also +tortoise-shell, edible birds' nests, pearls, and birds of paradise, or +rather their stuffed skins. The Malay traders had brought for sale, or +to exchange with these articles, guns, swords, knives, choppers, +tobacco, plates and basins, handkerchiefs, _sarongs_, calicoes, and +arrack in bottles. Tea, coffee, sugar, and wine, were also to be seen; +and even fancy goods, such as china ornaments, pipes and purses; +umbrellas, razors, and looking-glasses; indeed, it is curious what a +number of articles are found in this out-of-the-way spot, and many of +them costing no more than they did in England. + +These articles are exchanged for English calico, crockery, cutlery, +fire-arms, gunpowder, gongs, and elephants' tusks. They not only buy +muskets, but small brass guns, on which they set a high value. They +also prize tobacco for chewing. We always slept on board, and the sound +of the Malays' songs came across the water to a late hour of the night. +The musical instruments we heard were tom-toms, Jews'-harps, and +frequently fiddles. The Malays are a merry, vivacious people, and fond +of several games. The most interesting was a game at football, which +was generally played in the evening. The ball is small, made of ratan, +hollow, elastic, and light. One of the players dances it for a short +time on his foot, sometimes on his arm or thigh, and then striking it +with the hollow of his foot, sends it flying high into the air. A +player from the opposite side rushes forward, catches it on his foot in +the same way, and returns it. The rule appeared to be that the ball +should never be touched by the hand, but that the arms, shoulder, or +knee may be employed. Far less satisfactory was their custom of +cock-fighting. Steel spurs are used, as they were formerly in civilised +England; and the spectators, who stand round in a ring, show their +savage character by their fearful yells and leaps as they see their +cocks likely to win or lose. + +We saw shells used here for every purpose. Some of the magnificent +volute shells were employed as baskets; while gigantic helmet shells, +suspended by ratan handles, formed the vessels in which fresh water was +brought from house to house. + +I was delighted to find that Mr Hooker had resolved to make an +excursion into the interior of the mainland for the sake of obtaining +some birds of paradise. As the fatigue might be too great for the young +ladies, they remained on board under charge of Frau Ursula; Oliver and I +only accompanying him, with two native hunters, a trustworthy guide, and +an interpreter who spoke Dutch. The natives of these islands, I should +say, are Papuans, and in some parts are said to be very savage. They +are expert archers, and are never seen without their bows and arrows. +They shoot pigs and kangaroos with them, as well as all sorts of birds. +We met some of the natives who came from the south islands, who were +even more savage in appearance and manners than the rest. They wore a +number of rude ornaments--one of comb, shaped like a horse-shoe, on +their foreheads, the ends resting on the temples. The end of this +ornament is fastened into a piece of wood, plated in front with tin; +above it waves a plume of feathers of a cock's tail. + +In the Aru Islands are found a number of birds of paradise, some, +indeed, of the most beautiful, which I will describe shortly. + + + +CHAPTER EIGHTEEN. + +A SEARCH FOR BIRDS OF PARADISE. + +I must give a very brief account of our excursion, which we had just +before projected. A native boat carried us across to the mainland, and +landing, we were amused with the number of sea-shells which we found on +the ground away from the beach. They were of a variety of shapes and +kinds, which had been taken possession of by those curious creatures, +the hermit crabs, who wander into the forest in search of food. +Sometimes, however, they become food themselves to huge spiders, and we +saw one monster carry away a fair-sized shell, and devour its unhappy +occupant. We came upon several little parties of hermit crabs, whom, +breaking through their custom, we found assembled round some delicate +morsel; but as soon as they heard us, away they scrambled as fast as +they could crawl. The spiders were huge spotted monsters, with bodies +two inches long, and legs in proportion. They form thick glutinous +threads across the path, which are very unpleasant to meet, and really +cost a great deal of trouble to get rid of. Sometimes, indeed, we ran +our faces directly against one of the monsters, though in most cases the +creature was as glad to get off as we were to get rid of him. We met +also numerous lizards, of various shades of green, grey, and brown, +every rotten trunk being alive with them, as they ran about seeking for +insects. Our native hunters had arrows with heads as large as a small +tea-cup, for the purpose of shooting the birds of paradise. + +Among the most beautiful vegetable productions are the tree-ferns. We +were never tired of admiring them, and Mr Hooker said they were +superior in size and beauty to any he had before seen. There were also +beautiful palms with slender smooth stems, perfectly straight, reaching +to the height of a hundred feet, and surmounted by a crown of gracefully +drooping leaves. + +Our men carried sleeping mats for us to wrap ourselves in at night, with +a small kettle for boiling our tea, and a pot for cooking our meat or +soup. When resting at night we quickly formed an impromptu hut of +boughs. I could not help wishing that my sister and Grace had been with +us, to admire the beautiful forests and magnificent birds we saw. +Rising in the morning, we witnessed another dance of the birds of +paradise in some trees close to us, and our native hunters shot several +of them. + +"It is strange," said Mr Hooker, "that the only inhabitants of this +region, where the most graceful of trees and the most beautiful of birds +in the universe exist, should be inhabited by races utterly incapable of +appreciating them." + +"Perhaps, sir, it may be that God has thus arranged it, that civilised +man should be led to the spot to make His name known among those +savages. Had it not been for these birds of paradise, perhaps these +very islands might not have been heard of." + +"Ah, Oliver, I like that idea. I think you are right," said Mr Hooker, +and he was silent for some minutes. I too was struck by it. + +"Yes, sir," said Oliver, "God has a reason for all His arrangements, and +I think it is allowable for us to conjecture what that reason may be; +but though we cannot find it out, we may be very sure the reason +exists." + +We had been walking on through the forest, when one of our hunters made +a sign to us to stop, and he advanced cautiously. We saw him raise his +bow and let fly an arrow. Down fell a small bird rather larger than a +thrush, the plumage as we saw it falling being of the most intense +cinnabar red with the softest and most lovely gloss. Mr Hooker ran +forward in the greatest state of agitation I had ever seen him exhibit, +and kneeling down, gradually lifted up the bird. Had he discovered a +nugget of gold of the same size, he could not have appeared more +delighted. The feathers of the head were short and velvety, and shaded +into a rich orange beneath. From the breast downwards the body was like +the softest white gloss silk, while across the breast a band of deep +metallic-green separated it from the red throat. Above each eye was a +round spot, also of metallic-green. The bill was yellow, and the feet +and legs were of a fine cobalt-blue, forming a striking contrast with +the other parts of the body. On each side of the breast, concealed +under the wings, were tufts of grey feathers, about two inches in +length, terminated by a broad band of deep emerald-green. These plumes +are raised, as in the other species we saw, into a pair of elegant fans +when the wings are elevated. Besides these beautiful ornaments, there +were in the middle of the tail two feathers like slender wires, about +five inches long, diverging into a double curve. The end of these wires +are webbed on the outer side, and covered with a fine metallic-green; so +that the bird appears to have two elegant glittering circles hanging +about five inches from the body, and the same distance apart. + +It was some time before our kind friend could recover himself. + +"Is it not beautiful? is it not beautiful?" he kept exclaiming as he +held it up, still kneeling on the ground and exhibiting its various +beauties. "Walter, I tell you that this is the most beautiful of the +eight thousand different kinds of birds which our beneficent Creator has +placed on this earth, to adorn it for the sake of us mortals. Not one +of them possesses these spiral-tipped tail wires nor these beautiful +breast fans. Then look at the colours. What art can in any way +approach them! This is the King Bird of Paradise--the _Paradisea +Regia_, we naturalists call it. Well worthy is it of the name." When +we stopped for the night, our attendants quickly built some leafy sheds, +into which we crept, wrapped up in our mats, after we had partaken of +our supper--consisting of a parrot pie, which we had brought with us, +and also of some sago biscuit, washed down with arrack and water. Our +guides would have preferred the spirit undiluted, as they are fond of +potent liquors as well as of strong-tasted food. At early morn, before +the sun rose, we heard the well-known cry of "Wawk--wawk--wawk!--Wok-- +wok--wok!" resounding through the forest, and continually changing its +direction. Looking up, we caught sight of nights of the great bird of +paradise, going to seek their breakfasts on the fruit-bearing trees. +Lories and parroquets soon afterwards flew off from their perches, +uttering shrill cries. King hunters croaked and barked; and cockatoos, +black and white, screamed loudly through the woods; while numerous +smaller birds, many also of the most lovely plumage, chirruped and +whistled as they saluted the dawn. Our hunters, one with a gun, the +other with a bow and arrows, started forth while we lighted our fire and +made other preparations for breakfast. One of them soon came back with +a large black bird having an enormous bill. Mr Hooker jumped up, +almost letting drop the saucepan which he held in his hand, in his +eagerness at the sight of the bird. + +"A superb black cockatoo!" he exclaimed. "This is indeed a prize." + +All thoughts of eating were abandoned, while he expatiated on the beauty +of the bird and its peculiar mode of living. Compared to its largely +developed head, which was ornamented with a superb crest, its body +appeared weak and small. It had long slender legs and large wings, its +head being armed with a sharp-pointed hooked bill of prodigious size and +strength. The plumage was quite black, and had over it the peculiar +powdery white secretion which characterises cockatoos. The cheeks were +bare, and of an intense blood-red colour. We had heard its voice the +evening before, which, unlike the harsh scream of the white cockatoo, is +that of a plaintive whistle. The tongue was a slender fleshy cylinder +of a deep red colour, terminated by a black horny plate, furred across, +and possessing prehensile power. We afterwards saw several of them, +mostly one at a time, though now and then we caught sight of two or +three together. They were flying slowly and noiselessly, and our hunter +told us that a very slight wound would kill them. + +"See here, Walter and Oliver; observe its powerful beak. This bird +lives upon the kernel of the kanary-nut. We passed several of those +lofty trees as we came along. This bill is evidently formed for the +purpose of eating this kanary-nut, which no other bird can do. +By-the-by, I picked up one. Here it is. See! it is so hard that a +heavy hammer alone can crack it." + +The outside of the nut Mr Hooker showed us was quite smooth, and of a +somewhat triangular shape. + +"However, the birds are hungry, and we will try and catch flight of one +of our black friends taking his breakfast, and see how he manages." + +We quickly discussed our breakfast, and immediately afterwards set off +in search of a kanary-tree. On one of the lower branches we were +fortunate enough to see a black cockatoo perched. He had just taken one +of the nuts end-ways into his bill, where he kept it firm by the +pressure of the tongue. He then cut a transverse notch, so Mr Hooker +declared, by the lateral sawing motion of the lower mandible. He next +took hold of the nut by his foot, and biting off a piece of a +neighbouring leaf, retained it in the deep notch of the upper mandible. +Again seizing the nut, which was prevented from slipping by the elastic +tissue of the leaf, he fixed the edge of the lower mandible in the +notch, and by a powerful nip broke off a piece of the shell. Once more +taking it in his claws, he inserted the very long and sharp point of his +bill and picked out the kernel, which he seized hold of, morsel by +morsel, with his curiously formed, extensible tongue. As no other bird +in existence can compete with him in eating these nuts, he has always an +abundance of food. Mr Hooker called this species the _Microglossum +aterrimum_. + +Soon afterwards, a native brought us a king-fisher with an enormously +long tail, such as no other king-fisher possesses. It was the +racket-tailed king-fisher. It had been caught sleeping in the hollow of +the rocky banks of a neighbouring stream. It had a red bill, and Mr +Hooker observed that he doubted whether it lived upon fish, for, from +the earth clinging to its beak, he suspected rather that it preys on +insects and minute shells which it picks up in the forests. Its shape +was very graceful, the plumage being of a brilliant blue and white. + +We caught also another cuscus, which Mr Hooker showed us was of the +marsupial order; that is, having a pouch in which it carries its young, +as does the kangaroo. There are several other marsupial animals in +these islands, such as are found also in Australia and New Guinea, where +alone they exist, some as small as mice. Though no mice exist in those +regions, these little animals are about as mischievous--entering into +houses, and eating their way through all sorts of materials, just in the +manner that mice do. I cannot attempt to describe the numerous other +birds which we shot or caught. Among them were many of brilliant +plumage--pigeons, little parroquets, and numerous other small birds, +similar to those found in Australia and New Guinea. + +We spent three or four days in a native house, at which, at a rental of +a few yards of cloth, some tobacco, and one or two other articles, we +engaged rooms. It was raised on a platform seven feet high on posts; +the walls were about four feet more, with a high pitched roof. The +floor was composed of split bamboo, and a part of the sloping roof could +be lifted and propped up, so as to admit light and air. Our +apartments--for I have dignified them by that name--were divided from +the rest of the house by a thatched partition. At one end of it was a +cooking-place, with a clay floor, and shells for crockery. Several +families occupied the other parts of the house, which was very +extensive. There were generally half-a-dozen or more visitors in +addition to the families. They led very easy idle lives, only working +when it was absolutely necessary for the sake of obtaining food; and +from morning till night the people were laughing, shouting, and talking +without cessation. Such screams of laughter, such loud shouts--the +women and children vying with the men--I have never elsewhere heard. +They seemed to live very well, as the men and boys are capital archers, +and never went out without their bows and arrows. With these they shot +all sorts of birds, and sometimes kangaroos and pigs. Besides this, +they had a variety of vegetables, although they grew no rice nor the +cocoa-nut tree. They had plantains, yams, and, above all, the +sugar-cane. They were continually eating it. It grows on the black +vegetable soil to a great height and thickness. At all times of the day +we found the people eating it, generally four or five together, each one +with a yard of cane in one hand, and a knife in the other, and a basket +between their legs. There they sat paring away at it, chewing, and +throwing the refuse into the basket. + +Mr Hooker was highly pleased with the collection of birds and insects +which he had made. Engaging the services of two more natives to carry +them, we returned to the boat, in which, in the course of a day's sail, +we reached the _Dugong_. + + + +CHAPTER NINETEEN. + +VOYAGE CONTINUED. + +Sailing from Dobbo, a number of our mop-headed friends accompanied us to +sea in their long canoes--curious, savage-looking boats, the bow and +stern rising up six or seven feet high, decorated with shells and waving +plumes of cassowary's feathers. They were all talking, laughing, and +shouting at once, and when they at length, after receiving a few +farewell presents, bid us good-bye, we felt as if we had passed out of a +tempest of noise into a calm, so apparently deep was the silence which +reigned round us. In two days, passing the Key Islands, the inhabitants +of which are very much like those of Aru, we arrived in sight of a lofty +volcano, from the summit of which wreaths of white smoke were even then +ascending. On approaching more closely, we saw that there were two +other mountains near it, clothed with vegetation to their very summits. +A fair breeze enabled us to enter the land-locked harbour of Banda. The +water below our keel was so transparent, that we could see, at a depth +of seven or eight fathoms, the smallest objects on the sand, and watch +the living corals at work. We sailed on through narrow channels, having +on one side lofty cliffs rising out of the sea. + +Besides three large islands, there are several others, which form what +are known as the Banda group. The largest is Lontar, or Great Banda--a +crescent-shaped island, about six miles long and a mile and a half wide. +Within the circle of which this island and two others joined to it form +an arc, lie three more, the highest and most remarkable of which is the +Grunong Api, or the Burning Mountain. It is an ever active volcano, +about two thousand three hundred feet in height. We passed close under +its base, and looking up, saw cloud-like masses of steam and sulphureous +acid gas rising from its summit. On the Lontar shore rose up +perpendicular crags from two to three hundred feet high, but everywhere +covered with the most luxuriant vegetation, the trees and shrubs having +their roots in the crevices, and hanging down in broad sheets of the +brightest green. As we sailed on we perceived lofty palms rising amid +the matted mass of vegetation, and from their crests hung long feathered +leaves, silently and gracefully oscillating in the light air which +filled our sails. + +On the top of one of the heights appeared the dazzling white walls of +Fort Belgica, with another fort below it; and along the shore on every +hand extended the chief village, called Neira, with rows of +wide-spreading trees shading the streets and bordering the bay. +Opposite the village were a number of prows from Ceram--strange-looking +vessels, high at the stem and low at the bow, having, instead of a +single mast, a tall tripod, which can be raised and lowered at pleasure. +There was a number of other craft--Bugis traders, mostly square topsail +schooners, but ill-fitted apparently to contend with the storms which +occasionally rage in those seas. Among the most beautiful trees was the +_lontar_ or _palmyra_ palm--_Borassus flabelliformis_. Mr Hooker told +us that its leaves were formerly used as parchment all over the +archipelago before the Chinese introduced paper. In some places, even +at the present time, it is used for that purpose. In every direction we +could see spreading out over the island a continuous forest of +nutmeg-trees, shaded by the lofty kanary-trees. The nutmeg-tree is from +twenty to five-and-twenty feet high, though sometimes its lofty sprays +are fifty feet high. A foot above the ground the trunk is from eight to +ten inches in diameter. The fruit before it is quite ripe greatly +resembles a peach. This, however, is only a fleshy outer rind-- +epicarp--which, as it ripens, opens into two equal parts, when within is +seen a spherical polished nut, surrounding an aril, the mace, which is +of a bright yellow colour. No fruit can then surpass it in beauty. The +people who pick it use a small basket at the end of a long bamboo, into +which it drops as they hook it off. The outer part, which we should +call the fruit, being removed, the mace is carefully taken off, and +dried on large shallow bamboo baskets in the sun. Its bright colour now +changes to a dark yellow. The black part seen within the vermilion mace +is a shell, and inside this is the nutmeg. When the mace is removed, +the nuts are spread out on shallow trays of open basket-work in a +drying-room. A slow fire is made beneath the floor, where the nuts +remain for three months. By this time the nutmeg has shrunk so much +that it rattles in its shell. The shell is then broken, and the nutmegs +are sorted and packed in casks for shipment. + +We took a stroll with Mr Hooker through the beautiful groves of +nutmeg-trees, which were heavily laden with fruit. It is picked twice +in the year, though some is obtained throughout the whole year. A +beautiful carpet of green grass is spread out beneath the trees, while +high above them tower the lofty kanary-trees, which stretch out their +gnarled arms as if to defend their more tender sisters committed to +their charge. At a distance, indeed, the nutmeg-trees are completely +hidden from view by the kanary-trees. The roots of these latter are +very curious, looking like enormous snakes with their heads caught in +the trunk of the tree. As we strolled through the forest, sheltered +from the direct rays of the sun by the thick foliage, we caught distant +views of the blue ocean sparkling in the sunlight, the white surf +breaking in masses of foam on the rocks beneath us, while at a distance +appeared the varied forms of the other islands. + +These groves of nutmegs are divided into what are called parks, +belonging to different proprietors, who are known as perkeniers. By far +the greater proportion of nutmegs used throughout the world are grown on +these small islands, though wild nutmegs are found in New Guinea and in +a few other places. As the nutmeg is among the most beautiful of +fruits, so are the trees superior to almost any other cultivated plant. +They are well-shaped, and have glossy leaves, bearing small yellowish +flowers. On examining the fruit, we compared it in size and colour to a +peach, only rather more oval. It is of a tough fleshy consistency till +it becomes ripe, when, as I have before said, it splits open and shows a +dark brown nut within covered with the crimson mace. We saw a most +beautiful bird flying among the trees; it was the Banda pigeon, which +feeds upon the nutmeg fruit. It digests the mace, but casts up the nut +with its seed uninjured. By this means it has undoubtedly carried the +seed to all parts of the group, and perhaps to other islands in the +neighbourhood. In one part of Lontar we heard that the mace, instead of +being red, is white--probably owing to some peculiarity of the soil. +The deer and pig are found in the islands, and also a species of cuscus. + +A proprietor, to whom Mr Hooker had an introduction, invited us to +climb the burning mountain; but after considering the matter, our friend +declined the honour, from hearing that the ascent was very difficult and +dangerous, and that we should gain very little more knowledge about it +than we should by gazing up at it from the base. + +While sleeping on shore, the house we occupied was one night so shaken +that we thought it would fall about our heads; but the inhabitants +seemed to take it as a thing of course, and we heard that nearly every +month an earthquake occurs. Several most disastrous eruptions of the +mountain have taken place, causing great destruction of life and havoc +among the plantations. + +The Portuguese were the first Europeans who took possession of the +Bandas. They were driven out by the Dutch, who exterminated the +aboriginal inhabitants, and then had to import slaves to cultivate the +plantations. Since slavery was abolished by Holland, convicts have been +sent there for the purpose; and now, people from various neighbouring +regions have been collected to perform the part of labourers. The +Bandas are not properly included in the Moluccas. The cultivation of +the clove-tree is now chiefly confined to Amboyna, and the surrounding +islands, to which we were now bound. + +A day's sail took us off Amboyna, the capital of the Moluccas. It is +one of the oldest European settlements in the East. The island is +divided into two parts by the sea, a narrow sandy isthmus alone joining +them. We sailed up the western inlet, the shores of which were lined by +groves of cocoa-nut palm-trees, furnishing food and shade to the natives +who dwell in the rude huts beneath them. We came to an anchor off the +town of Amboyna. In few places we visited was the forest vegetation +more luxuriant or beautiful than on this island. Ferns and palms of +graceful forms were seen everywhere; climbing ratans formed entangled +festoons pendent from every forest tree; while fine crimson lories and +brush-tongued turkeys, also of a bright crimson colour, flew in and out +amidst the foliage, forming a magnificent sight, especially when a flock +of the former settled down on some flowering tree, the nectar from which +the lories delight to suck. Amboyna is a large city for the East, +containing 14,000 people, about 8000 of whom are Europeans, with half +that number, perhaps, of Chinese and Arabs. Our great wish was to see a +clove plantation in full bearing. We found, however, that the +proprietors had discovered that there were more profitable means of +employing their ground and labour, and that cacao plantations were +superseding them. + +The two young ladies, with Frau Ursula, were able to accompany us. Our +road lay through a grove of palm-trees, and wound up a hill, till we +reached the plantations of young cacao-trees. They were covered with +long red cucumber-like fruit. The plants had been brought here from +Madagascar, where it was first discovered by the Spaniards. They are +great consumers of it in various forms. Chocolate comes from the +Spanish chocolate, which is composed of cacao pounded with Indian corn, +to which honey is sometimes added. The sugar-cane was also introduced, +as sugar assists in neutralising the bitter qualities of the cacao. I +need scarcely point out the difference between the cacao--often written +cocoa--plant and fruit, from which the now much used beverage is made, +and the lofty cocoa-nut palms with their well-known nuts full of juice. +In the woods we saw numbers of green parrots, which uttered their shrill +deafening screams as they darted to and fro through the thick foliage. + +Proceeding again along the beach, my sister and Grace, feeling thirsty, +asked for a draught of water, but neither stream nor fountain was in +sight. When one of our attendants heard what was inquired for, "Stop," +he said, "you shall have it." Directly afterwards, we saw him climb up +a cocoa-nut palm above our heads, whence he cut off some of the clusters +of large green fruit. Immediately descending, he struck off the end +with a hatchet, and presented each of us with a goblet of the freshest +and most sparkling water I ever tasted. We had before only found the +more mature fruit, after the liquid has assumed a milk-like appearance. + +A short way on, we saw the hill-side covered with myrtle-like trees, and +found that they were plantations of clove-trees. The clove-tree belongs +to the order of myrtles. The trunks of the full-grown trees were about +twelve inches in diameter. Their topmost branches were from forty to +fifty feet from the ground. However, we found some very small ones, +fully loaded with fruit. The clove is the flower bud, and it grows in +clusters at the end of the twigs. Our guide told us that the annual +yield of a good tree is about four pounds and a half. When the buds are +young, they are nearly white; when more mature, they change to a light +green, and ultimately to a bright red. They are then picked by the +hand, or beaten off with bamboos, on cloths spread under the trees. +They are simply dried in the sun for use, when their colour changes from +red to black. The leaves, the bark, and young twigs, have also a +peculiar aroma. It grows best on the high hillsides, on a volcanic +soil, or a loose sandy loam. Curiously enough, although cloves are used +in all parts of the world, the inhabitants of these islands do not eat +them. They employ them in making models of their prows and bamboo huts, +by running a small wire through them before they are dried. I remember +seeing a number of these models in the Great Exhibition in England, many +of them of very elaborate construction. When cloves were first +introduced into England, thirty shillings per pound was paid for them. +They are now cultivated in several other places, and consequently their +value in the Spice Islands has greatly fallen. + +As we returned home in the evening, we passed along a pathway lined by +rows of pine-apples, which had, like the cocoa-nut trees, been brought +from Tropical America. We also saw creatures leaping from branch to +branch. The servants caught some, when we found them to be flying +dragons; not such as Saint George fought with, but small lizards known +as the _Draco volans_. They were provided with broad folds in the skin, +along each side of the body, which enabled them not really to fly, but, +as a parachute would do, to sustain them in the air while they leap from +branch to branch. + +I was ahead of our party when I heard a loud hammering or tapping, and +creeping near, I saw a cocoa-nut, which had just fallen from a tree, and +an enormous crab working away at it. I stopped to watch him. He had +torn off the dry husk which covered the latter with his powerful claws, +just at the point where the three black scars are found marked. He was +now breaking the shell by hammering with one of his heavy claws. As +soon as this was done, he began to pick out the rich food, by means of +his pincer-like claws. Our servants as they came up chased and caught +him, tying up his claws, and saying that we should find it, when cooked, +one of the greatest delicacies in the place. + +We stopped for the night at the house of Mr Hooker's friend, a little +outside the town. Our beds were placed in a verandah, merely covered +with mats at night; our heads only guarded by mosquito curtains, though +we could hear the venomous insects buzzing outside. As I put my head on +the pillow before going to sleep, the sound of the low cooing of doves +came up out of the forest, while the tree frogs piped out their shrill +notes. + +Next day, when pulling along the narrow channel of the beautiful harbour +on our return to the brig, we gazed down over the side with astonishment +at the lovely spectacle the bottom of the sea afforded. It was thickly +covered with a mass of corals, actiniae, and other productions of the +ocean, of vast dimensions, of every possible form, and of the most +brilliant colours. In some places the depth, Mr Hooker said, was fifty +feet, and in others twenty, for the bottom was very uneven. Here +appeared some deep chasm, here a hill rose up, there a valley was seen, +here rocks of every possible shape, the whole covered with a forest of +living vegetables, as I may call them. + +"See, see!" cried Emily; "there swims a beautiful fish; there, another; +and there, another. Some are red; there is a yellow one; there is one +spotted and banded; there is another striped in the most curious manner. +See how leisurely they swim, as if admiring the beauty of their +country!" + +"Look there! What is that floating by us?" exclaimed Grace; "what a +lovely orange mass!" + +"See, there is another, of a beautiful rose colour!" said Emily. + +The creatures the girls were admiring were medusae, beautifully +transparent, which were floating along near the surface. We entreated +that the crew might stop rowing, that we might admire them at our +leisure; indeed, we could have gazed at the scene all day long, but I am +very sure, were I to make the attempt, I could not do justice to its +surpassing beauty and interest. There may be coral beds of equal +beauty, but in few places is the water so transparent as in the harbour +of Amboyna; while, from being sheltered from the violence of storms, +there are probably a larger number of marine productions, shells, and +fishes collected in it, than in almost any other spot. While we were +still gazing down into the ocean depths, a strange rumbling noise came +over the land. The trees seemed to rock from side to side, the +buildings shook, the frightened birds flew off from the shore, the land +seemed to rise and fall, and people were seen flying from their houses, +and rushing to their boats; others hurried away into the open country. + +"An earthquake!" exclaimed Mr Hooker. "They are pretty well accustomed +to it, though, and I trust no real damage may be done. However, should +it be more severe than usual, we will be ready to take off any poor +people who may wish to find refuge at sea." + +In a few seconds, however, all was quite quiet. The people returned on +shore, and some were seen hurrying back to buildings which had been the +most shaken, either to rescue friends who had been left behind, or to +carry off their household furniture, in case another shock should occur, +and bring their houses to the ground. + +Leaving this beautiful, though unstable island, we stood away to the +south-west, Mr Hooker purposing to visit a number of islands on our +passage to Macassar, after which he intended standing across to Java, or +perhaps visiting the south of Borneo before proceeding on to Singapore. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY. + +A MODERN CRUSOE'S ISLAND. + +Macassar, at the south-west end of Celebes, had been visited; a Dutch +town, very neat and clean, having covered drains down the streets which +carry away all impurities. On one side along the shore, forming a +straight street a mile in length, are a number of shops, warehouses, and +native bazaars; on the other, two shorter streets form the old Dutch +town, with most of the private houses of the Europeans. It is enclosed +by gates, with a fort at the southern end. Round the town extend +rice-fields, in the rainy season presenting a mass of the most vivid +green. Beyond, are numerous native villages embosomed in fruit-trees. + +We were occasionally on shore, and saw many objects of interest, but Mr +Hooker made a long excursion into the interior, of which he gave us an +account on his return. We caught sight of two of the animals peculiar +to Celebes. One of them was a curious baboon-like monkey, about the +size of a spaniel, and of a jet-black colour. It had the projecting +dog-like muzzle and overhanging brows of a baboon, with red callosities, +and a scarcely visible fleshy tail, about an inch long. A large band of +them visited the garden of the merchant at whose house we were stopping, +and were busily employed in carrying off the fruit, when they were +disturbed by the servants, who rushed out with guns and sticks to drive +them off. + +Next day we started with our friend into the neighbouring forest, in +chase of the _babirusa_ or pig-deer. After a long search, we came up +with one, to which, the dogs gave chase; and it being brought to bay, +was killed. It resembled a pig in general appearance, but had long +slender legs and curved tusks like horns. Those of the lower jaw are +very long and sharp, but the upper ones, instead of growing downwards as +those of a boar generally do, curve upwards out of bony sockets through +the skin on each side of the snout till they meet the eyes. Those of +the creature we killed, which was an old one, were nearly ten inches in +length. Our Dutch friend stated that they were so formed to guard its +eyes from the thorns and spines which it meets with whilst searching for +fallen fruits among the thickets of ratan and other spiny plants. Mr +Hooker, however, said he thought they had once been of use to the animal +in digging, but its mode of life having been somewhat changed, they had +grown up into their present curious form. Instead of digging for food +with its snout as other pigs do, it feeds on fallen fruits from various +trees. We saw also a number of butterflies, which Mr Hooker said were +peculiar to Celebes. Besides the babirusa, herds of wild pigs of large +size abound in the northern forests, and numerous jungle-fowl, +hornbills, and great fruit-pigeons. Buffaloes are generally employed on +the farms, and we drank buffalo milk, which was brought into the house +in bamboo buckets. It was as thick as cream and in order to keep it +fluid during the day it was diluted with water. + +Among the many curious trees we saw, was the sugar-palm, from which the +usual beverage of the country is made--called sagueir. It is as strong +as ordinary beer. The sugar makes a very nice sweetmeat, and Mr Hooker +said it put him very much in mind of the North American maple sugar. + +We were introduced also to a very curious animal, somewhat smaller than +a Shetland cow, called the sapi-utan. It has long straight horns, which +are ringed at the base and slope backwards over the neck. We were told +that it inhabits the mountains, and is never found where deer exist. +There seems a doubt whether it should be classed with the ox, buffalo, +or antelope. The head is black, with a white mark over each eye, one on +the cheek, and another on the throat. We saw also a couple of maleos, a +species of brush-turkey, allied to the _megapodi_ or mound-making birds +which we had met with in our island. They live also in the northern +part of Celebes, and come down to the shore in order to lay their eggs +in the black, hot, volcanic sand. It is a handsome bird, the plumage +glossy black and rosy white, with a helmeted head, and elevated tail. +Its walk is peculiarly stately. The sexes are very much alike. Two or +more birds will come down, and the female deposits a single egg in a +hole which the male assists her in making, about a foot deep in the +sand, and having covered it up, returns to the forest. At the end of +ten days or so she comes to the same spot and lays another egg. Each +can lay, it is said, six or eight eggs during the season. Frequently +two or three hens deposit their eggs in the same hole. The colour of +the shell is a pale brick-red. The eggs being thus deposited, the +parents take no further care of their offspring. The young birds, after +breaking their shell, work their way up through the sand, just as the +young megapodi do, and run off at once to the forest. A friend of Mr +Hooker's presented him with some, which had been carefully covered up, +and had just arrived. We took them on board the brig. The next +morning, when far out of sight of land, we heard a strange noise in the +cabin, and looking in, great was our surprise to see a covey of little +birds flying right across it. They had been hatched during the night, +and following the instincts of their nature, were making their way, as +they supposed, to their future forest home. We fed them on little bits +of chopped fruit, and such things as Mr Hooker thought would suit their +appetites. + +"But what can induce the parents thus to leave their eggs?" asked Emily. +"I thought it was the nature of creatures to look after their young." + +"If it was for their benefit, so it would have been," he answered; "but +I suspect that these large birds, requiring a considerable amount of +food, which consists entirely of fallen fruits, could only find it by +roaming over a wide extent of country. If, therefore, a large number +came down to this particular beach, which seems the only one fit for +hatching them during the breeding season, they would perish for want of +food. Providence, therefore, has so arranged that they should return to +the districts where they can find their food; whilst the young ones, not +requiring so much, are able to make their way as their strength will +allow in the same direction." + +We had a full-grown stuffed maleo on board. Its claws were sharp and +straight, and very different from those of the megapodi. The toes, +however, were strongly webbed at the base; the leg rather long, forming +a powerful instrument for scratching away the loose sand, which those +who have watched them say they throw up in a complete shower when +digging their holes. + +We had been standing on for some time to the west, a cast of the lead +showing us that we were in fifty fathoms--the shallow sea which +separates Borneo from Java and Sumatra. Our compass had never been very +trustworthy. An injury it had received had still further put it out of +order, while thick cloudy weather had prevented us from taking an +observation. Mr Hooker had also for some days been unwell. He had +caught a fever while we were at Macassar, the effects of which he began +to feel directly he came on board, and we were now very anxious about +him. Several of the men also had been ill for some time before we +reached Macassar. Two of them died. I will not stop to describe the +particulars of their funeral. We felt very sad as we committed them to +their ocean grave. Mr Hooker, who had studied medicine, was too ill to +visit the rest. He, however, got Mr Thudicumb and I to describe their +symptoms as far as we were able, and sent the medicine accordingly. As +soon as he was able to move he insisted upon being carried forward to +see the men, when, somewhat altering his treatment of them, they +appeared to be getting better. + +I was on deck one day, and Roger Trew was aloft, when he shouted out, +"Land ahead!" Not knowing exactly our position, we were glad that it +had been seen during the day. I ran aloft, and after a time I could +distinguish the land stretching away to the north and south, where it +seemed to terminate. We therefore concluded that it was an island. +This became a certainty as we stood on, as no land could be +distinguished beyond the two distant points we had discovered. We were +rather nearest the north end, and Mr Thudicumb determined therefore to +go round it. It was a land of dense forest, with here and there +mountainous points; high bold capes standing out into the ocean, +affording every possible variety of scenery. + +"Why, there must be a fort somewhere thereabouts," observed Mr +Thudicumb, who had been examining it through his glass. "I see a flag +flying!" + +There, sure enough, as we drew nearer, we discovered on the summit of a +bold rock, standing out into the sea, a flagstaff with a large flag +flying from it. What the flag was, we could not well make out, from its +somewhat battered condition. As we stood on, a bay opened out, the +headland I have spoken of forming the westernmost point. Mr Thudicumb +considered that it would afford sufficient shelter to us should we bring +up. He was anxious to do this, that we might go ashore and ascertain +whether any Europeans were living there. + +"Perhaps some people have been cast away," he observed, "and have +hoisted the flag as a signal to any passers-by." + +Mr Hooker was still too weak to go ashore without inconvenience. Mr +Thudicumb therefore ordered Dick Tarbox, myself, Roger Trew, and three +others, to go in the boat, well armed with muskets and pistols, and to +ascertain the state of the case. + +"Now, take care," said Mr Thudicumb, "that you are not led into an +ambush. Some of these islands are the dens of pirates, or savages, who +are no better, and still more treacherous. Keep a bright look-out on +either side as you advance, and see that you are able to get back to the +boat without any difficulty. If there is an European there, he is sure +to come down when he sees the boat pull in; so if you find no one at +first, you must be doubly careful not to be caught in a trap." + +Emily and Grace stood at the gangway as we pulled off. + +"Oh, do take care, Walter, that those horrid savages do not get hold of +you again!" exclaimed Emily. + +"Pray, do! pray, do!" added Grace. + +"Yes, Mynheer Walter, take care dat de savages don't eat you up; you now +grow so fat and big, you fine large morsel," exclaimed Frau Ursula, who +had no fear whatever of savages or pirates, being in most instances a +very dauntless and fearless person. + +I was glad she said this, as it assisted to quell the anxiety of Emily +and Grace. The brig lay about a quarter of a mile from the beach, Mr +Thudicumb being afraid to stand in nearer because of the reefs, of which +there appeared to be several under water, their dark heads projecting +here and there from the shore. I waved my cap and held up my musket as +we pulled in, to show them that we were in good spirits, and prepared to +make a bold fight, if it was necessary; though I must say I had no +expectations of meeting either savages or pirates. + +The flag, though tattered and patched, looked very like an English +ensign with the jack torn out of it. + +"Depend upon it, some Englishman is there," observed Tarbox. "What +object could any pirates or savages have in flying a flag from that +point?" + +We found the shore lined with black volcanic rocks, among which there +was some difficulty in landing. However, at length we discovered a +place between two ledges, into which we ran the boat. One of the men +remained to take charge of her, while the rest of us, landing, walked up +the beach. We soon came to the thick jungle, in which we could find no +opening. We therefore continued along the shore towards the point where +the flag was flying. Having gone some way, we found an opening on our +right. The underwood and branches had evidently been cut away by an +axe, and seemed to lead from the flagstaff rock towards some place in +the interior. Dick Tarbox leading the way, we advanced along the path, +keeping a look-out among the trunks of the trees on every side, lest any +treacherous enemies might be lurking there. The ground rose somewhat. +At length we emerged into the open space, where there were signs of rude +cultivation; and further on appeared a cottage raised on poles about +three feet from the ground, very similar to the building we had put up +in our island, but considerably larger. This, we concluded, must be the +habitation of the people who had erected the flagstaff. As we got +nearer to it, we were saluted by the loud voices of birds--a number of +the numerous tribes found in these regions. Such screeching, crying, +cooing, shrieking, and chattering, I had never before heard; while from +wooden cages on every side, or from under small huts of curious +construction, came forth the cries of all sorts of animals. Still, no +one appeared. Presently we heard a shot at a little distance, and +discovered a path leading to where it came from. Tarbox fired as a +signal, being sure, from what we saw in the cottage, that its occupant +was not likely to be evilly disposed towards us. As we went on, we saw, +coming through the open glade before us, a tall figure, with a gun in +his hand, followed by another carrying a basket, and several birds slung +over his shoulders. + +"A veritable Robinson Crusoe!" I exclaimed. + +The figure answered, indeed, in every respect, the description I had +seen of that far-famed adventurer. There was the pointed, palm-leaf +hat; the rough skin leggings; a belt round the waist, with hunting-knife +and all sorts of things stuck in it; boots of skin; and a gun in his +hand (though, I suspect, Robinson Crusoe must have used a bow and +arrow--at all events, he must have done so when his powder was +expended). The man behind him, too, was in all respects like his man +Friday; fully as dark-skinned, though perhaps with rather more clothing +than Friday was accustomed to wear, as his dress was similar to that of +the leading figure. + +"Hilloa, my friends! where do you come from?" he exclaimed, in a loud, +cheery voice. "What! have you found me out at last?" + +"Why, friend, we saw a flag flying from the point out there, and took it +for granted that somebody or other was here on shore wanting to be taken +off; and if you wish to come with us, we have directions to take you on +board our brig, which lies in the bay out there." + +"Yes, indeed, I do; for I have been waiting here long enough almost to +have lost all account of time," answered the tall man. "I have a pretty +large family, however; and unless your brig is a good-sized one, I doubt +whether you can carry us all." + +"What! have you got a wife and children living here?" asked Tarbox. "We +saw nothing of them as we came along." + +"No, no, no!" answered the stranger; "I have no wife; and as for my +children, I cannot say that you would consider them as such. Probably, +however, you heard the voices of my family as you passed my house." + +"Ho, ho! all those birds and beasts, you mean, friend!" said Tarbox. +"Well, as to that, as we have a gentleman on board, the owner of the +brig, who has a fancy that way, I do not think he will refuse to have as +many as the craft will hold. But it will take some little time, I +suspect, to build houses for them; for I suppose they are not tame +enough to be allowed to run at liberty about the decks?" + +"Not exactly," answered the stranger. "Some of them have rather +quarrelsome dispositions, and they would be apt to fall out with each +other, and perhaps with the crew. However, a considerable number are +turned into mummies, though they fill somewhat large cages altogether; +and as I have spent so much of my time in collecting them, I have no +intention of leaving them behind. If you can take them, I will go with +you; but if not, I must get you to send another vessel to bring me off. +The craft which brought me here must either have been lost in a typhoon +or destroyed by pirates, for she did not return at the time appointed; +and after waiting month after month, and year after year, I almost gave +up all hopes of again seeing a civilised man. I have had visitors, to +be sure, on the island; but I did not like their looks, as I thought +they were more likely to stick their krisses into me than to carry me +away to a civilised place; and therefore I had to keep out of sight. +Still, at last I began to regret not being able to exhibit my treasures +to my fellow-men capable of appreciating them; and so I rigged that +flagstaff you saw, and hoisted a flag as a signal to any passing vessel +to put in here. However, most craft, I suppose, keep either along +further to the southward, or else to the north of this island; and +though I have seen a few passing in the horizon, none have come near +enough to distinguish my signal." + +From the way the stranger spoke, I saw at once that he was a man of +superior education, in spite of his strange costume. + +"Perhaps, sir," I said, "you would like to come on board and see the +owner, Mr Hooker. I am sure he would be delighted to do what he can to +assist you." + +"Hooker!" he exclaimed. "Hooker, did you say, young man? Of course I +will. If he is the Hooker I know--and from what you say about him, I +have little doubt about the matter--I shall be delighted to see him; and +I am very sure he will do all he can to assist me.--Stay, however," he +said. "If you will wait a little while, I will accompany you. I must, +however, first feed my family, as I may be absent for some time, and +they are not accustomed to go without their provisions." + +The noise as we passed the house had been considerable. As the stranger +approached it, however, the cries with which his feathered and +four-footed friends greeted him were almost deafening. I might have +added, no-footed friends, for he had huge pythons, and snakes of all +sorts;--tigers, and other wild beasts; and birds, from long-legged +storks down to the smallest of the feathered tribes. He and his man +Friday were occupied some time in feeding all these numerous creatures, +according to their respective wants. They all appeared to know him, and +acknowledge him as their master; and he must have employed considerable +time in taming many of them. I will describe them by-and-by. + +At length the operation of feeding them was over, and he expressed +himself ready to accompany us to the boat. He addressed a few words to +his man, Tanda, he called him, adding, as he walked away,--"Don't fear, +my lad; I am not going to desert you.--He does not understand that, by +the by;" and, turning round again, he spoke to the man in a strange +language. He put up his hand to look at the brig. "Well," he said, as +he stepped into the boat, "I scarcely expected ever to see a European +vessel come near this island." + +All hands able to appear on deck were collected at the gangway to gaze +at us as we approached. They certainly did regard our companion with +looks of astonishment as he stepped up the side. + +"Mr Hooker is below, sir," I said. "I will let him know that you are +here." + +I ran down into the cabin, eager to give the intelligence to my friend. + +"He did not give his name," I answered; "but he said he was an old +friend of yours." + +"An old friend of mine out here? Can it possibly be--and yet I think it +must. Beg him to come down. Oh! how I wish I was able to go on shore +and help him to get off his valuables! Strange! that is strange!" I +heard him say as I left the cabin. + +I found the stranger in conversation with Emily and Grace, with whom he +seemed greatly interested. He was patting Emily's cheek, and looking +with an inquiring glance into her face, when I appeared. + +Mr Hooker endeavoured to rise from his chair when the stranger entered. + +"Is it possible?" he exclaimed, holding out both his hands. + +"Hooker," exclaimed the stranger, "I know you!" + +"And Sedgwick," answered the other, "in your somewhat out-of-the-way +garb, I know you still, my friend--my master in science--my instructor +in knowledge--" + +The two friends eagerly shook hands, the stranger sinking down into a +chair, and looking eagerly into Mr Hooker's face. + +"You will recover, never fear--you will recover," he exclaimed. "You +have had a touch of jungle fever; and if you can get on shore for a few +days, and live in the open air, instead of in this confined cabin, you +will quickly pick up your strength. But, Hooker, I had no idea you were +married. Are these young people on board your children? and the lady on +deck there, is she your wife?" + +"No, no, no," answered Mr Hooker. "The old Dutchwoman is the young +girls' governante. And it is extraordinary! Can you think who those +children are?" + +"Had I not seen the girl I might have been puzzled; for I cannot +conjecture what has brought them out here," and he turned round and +looked at me. "Yes; I recognise his father too.--Is your father out in +these parts?" he asked. + +"No, sir," I answered. "They are both dead." + +"Both dead, did you say? Your mother dead? For her sake I chiefly +longed to return to England; and she gone, boy! Do you know who I am? +I am your uncle! Did you ever hear of your uncle, Tom Sedgwick, the +naturalist?" + +"Indeed I have," I answered. "And I heard that he had gone away, long +ago, to the Eastern Seas, and was supposed to have lost his life." + +"That was but natural enough, as I did not appear," answered Mr +Sedgwick. "But it is very wonderful that you should have come to the +very place where I have been so long living apart from my +fellow-creatures. And your sister, what is her name?" + +I told him. + +"And the other little girl, is she a relation? for I have no difficulty +in distinguishing which is my niece." + +"No; she is Captain Davenport's daughter," I answered. + +"A nice, pretty little girl. But Emily--I must see Emily again." + +I ran to call her. She came down trembling; for she had often heard our +mother speak of our uncle, and for her sake had longed to see him. Mr +Sedgwick pressed her fondly in his arms. + +"Yes, you are the very image of your mother," he said, looking in her +face again and again. + +Thus, for some time, we sat talking of the past, rather than the +present. + +"Well, Hooker!" he exclaimed at last, "I wish you were on shore. We +must see how you are by to-morrow or next day; and, in the meantime, we +must get these young people and their worthy nurse to come to my house +and see my wonders. I can easily manage to find accommodation for them; +for I built it originally in the expectation of having some companions. +Walter, you will accompany them, as I suppose, Hooker, you can spare +him?" + +"I have no doubt my skipper can do without him," answered Mr Hooker; +"though, I can tell you, he is of no little importance on board, as he +acts the part of mate; and a very good seaman he is, too, for his age, +and the time he has been at sea." + +I asked Mr Hooker if Oliver could accompany us, as I knew he could be +spared. "And Merlin too. The old fellow will like a run on shore; and +you will let him come also," I said, turning to my uncle. + +"He looks too wise an animal to quarrel with any of my friends," he +observed; "and I shall be very glad to see him." + +Frau Ursula and the young ladies quickly got ready a few things to take +on shore. Evening was approaching. However, the old friends had a good +deal to talk about before we shoved off. In a short time, we were +pretty well at our ease with Mr Sedgwick; and the girls looked forward +with delight to the wonders they hoped to see on the island. + +We landed at a rather more convenient spot, which Mr Sedgwick pointed +out. Roger Trew, who had leave to remain on shore, assisted in carrying +up the beds for the ladies; while Oliver and I took charge of the other +articles they required. The boat then pulled back to the brig. The +moment Merlin landed he scampered off along the shore, bounding and +gambolling just like a young dog, so delighted did he appear to be able +to stretch his legs. He then came up to me, and licking my hand, +followed close at my heels. + +"I do not quite like the look of the weather," observed Mr Sedgwick, +glancing back at the sea. "I wish I had told them on board the brig to +get out another anchor; or it might have been safer, to be sure, to +stand out into the offing. Stay; there will be no harm in giving them a +caution." + +He went back to the beach and hailed; but the boat was already at a +considerable distance, and Tarbox did not appear to hear him. + +"Well, I hope it is all right," he observed. "I have often seen this +weather, and nothing has come of it. At the same time, it generally +looks like this just before a heavy gale; and this open bay is not a +good place for a vessel to be caught in when it blows hard." + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY ONE. + +SEDGWICK ISLAND AND ITS WONDERS. + +Our uncle introduced us to his house with evident pride. He and his man +Tanda had bestowed a great deal of pains on it. It was constructed +entirely after the Malay fashion--of wood, bamboo, and matting, though +raised higher off the ground than the Malays are accustomed to build +theirs. The floors were of split bamboo, sufficiently strong to bear a +person's weight, and yet giving a pleasant spring as we passed over +them. They were kept in their place by long strips of ratan, passed +transversely between them, much in the way of a cane-bottom chair. Over +these mats were spread--not so neatly made, perhaps, as those employed +by the wealthy Malays, but still very well done. The walls were made of +the palm-leaves which I have before described, fixed in panels, very +neat and pleasing to the eye, and perfectly weather-tight. The roof was +high pitched, and had broad overhanging eaves, giving it very much the +appearance of a Swiss cottage. A broad verandah ran round each side of +the house, the rooms opening into it. They were divided from each other +by thick mats stretched from the ceiling to the floor, and could be +lifted up at pleasure to allow the air to circulate in every direction. +It would have been impossible to build with the materials at hand an +abode better suited to the purpose. + +"Here, Frau, you and your young ladies shall occupy these two +apartments," said my uncle to Frau Ursula, who stood smiling from ear to +ear at the polite way in which he addressed her. "You shall have +bedsteads brought in directly; and I must leave you to arrange them, +while Tanda and I get supper ready. The lads here and the sailor will +no doubt assist us." + +Roger Trew, who had ascended the ladder with his bundle of bedding, +deposited it in the room my uncle pointed out, and forthwith commenced +unlashing it; and knowing that he would prove a better assistant to the +dame than Oliver and I should, we accompanied my uncle to what he called +his cooking-shed, at the back of the house. Here he had brought water +from a spring in the forest, and had made a drain towards the sea to +carry off the refuse. He had a variety of fish, flesh, and fowl in his +larder, which was in a cool place at the back of the house. + +I scarcely know what I shall describe first. The fruit was the most +attractive. There was the delicious mangostin--of a spherical form. +The outer part is a thick rough covering, and it has a white opaque +centre, an inch or more in diameter. Each of the four or five parts +into which it is divided, contains a small seed. The white part is what +is eaten. It has a slightly sweet taste, and a rich yet delicate and +peculiar flavour, which it is impossible to describe. Then there was +the rambutan--a globular fruit, an inch and a half in diameter. The +rind is of a light red, adorned with coarse scattered bristles. Within, +there is a semi-transparent pulp, of a slightly acid taste. Next there +was the elliptical shaped mango, containing a small stone of the same +form. The interior, when the tough outer skin was removed, consisted of +a soft, pulpy, fibrous mass, of a bright yellow. Another fruit +appeared, in the form of long clusters, about the size of a small bird's +egg. It was the duku. The outer coating was thin and leathery, and of +a dull yellow. In the inside were several long seeds, surrounded by a +transparent pulp, of a sweet and pleasantly acid taste. The durian, +however, my uncle told us, was among the most esteemed of all the fruits +in that region. It is spherical in form, six or eight inches in +diameter, and generally covered with many tubercles. The interior is +divided into several parts. On breaking the shell, we found in each +division a seed as large as a chestnut, surrounded by a pale yellow +substance, of the consistency of thick cream; but the odour was enough +at first to make me have no wish to eat it. It seemed to me like putrid +animal matter, and peculiarly strong. + +"You do not like the odour, Walter," observed my uncle. "Nor did I at +first, but I have now become so fond of the fruit, that I prefer it to +any other. But, after all, these fruits are not to be compared to those +of a tree growing just outside, at the back of my house--the far-famed +bread-fruit tree. Here, Tanda," and he spoke a few words to him. "Look +there, do you see it?" + +It was a tree upwards of forty feet high, with enormous sharply lobed +leaves, some of which were one foot wide and one and a half long. The +fruit which Tanda picked was of the form and size of a melon, and +attached by its stem directly to the trunk. + +"We must cut some, for it is the chief vegetable I have in season," said +my uncle, cutting it in slices, and handing it to Tanda to fry. "We +have some molasses to eat with it, produced from the sap of the +gomuti-palm." + +Closely allied to it is the Jack-fruit, which resembles the bread-fruit. +This latter, Mr Sedgwick told us, attains the weight of nearly +seventy-five pounds; so that even an Indian coolie can only carry one at +a time. The part, he showed us, which is generally eaten, is a soft +pulpy substance, enveloping each seed. The bread-fruit was baked +entirely in the hot embers. It tasted, I thought, very much like mashed +potatoes and milk. My uncle said he always compared it to Yorkshire +pudding. It was a little fibrous, perhaps, towards the centre, though +generally smooth, and somewhat of the consistence of yeast dumplings and +batter pudding. Tanda fried part of it in slices, and also made a curry +of another part. We had it also as a vegetable, with a gravy poured +over it, to eat with meat. Another dish was prepared with sugar and +milk, which we were surprised to see, and a treacly substance procured +from some sugar-canes grown in a plantation near the house. It made a +most delicious pudding. + +"You see, I have become somewhat of an epicure," observed my uncle; "but +indeed it has been one of my sources of amusement to see what delicious +dishes I could make out of the many bounties which Nature has spread +round me." + +We had also, for meat, some pork--part of it fresh and part cured--a +joint of venison, and a piece of beef from an animal with which I was +afterwards to become acquainted. + +I can scarcely describe the fish; but I know, among other things, there +was one of the enormous crabs which we saw at Amboyna. + +Our dinner was spread on a bamboo table, covered with mats, in what my +uncle called his grand hall! It put me in mind somewhat of an ancient +hall surrounded by trophies of the chase; partly also of a necromancer's +cavern, as from the ceiling hung curious stuffed animals, skulls, bones, +dried plants, and other objects of natural history, in what, I had no +doubt, seemed to the occupant perfect order, but which was somewhat +incomprehensible to us. When dish after dish was put on the table, Frau +Ursula lifted up her hands with astonishment. + +"You do live like a prince, Mr Sedgwick," she observed. "What kind +fairy sends you all these good things?" + +"I won them with my own arm, with the assistance of my faithful man +Tanda here--or, as these young people seem inclined to call him, Friday; +and I hope you will show your gratitude to the kind Providence which +gives them, by doing justice to them." + +As dish after dish was brought up, the astonishment of all the party +increased. + +"Surely, uncle, you must have some fairy cook to prepare all these good +things," said Emily. + +"I confess without the aid of Tanda they could not be produced," he +answered. "I am greatly helped by him, though occasionally I have given +a hint or a little assistance. And now let us drink each other's health +in this palm-wine," he said, producing a very nice-looking liquid from a +huge shell. + +Our plates, I should have said, were flat shells; while our cups were +made of bamboo, as were our knives and forks. + +"I must introduce you to my menagerie to-morrow morning," observed my +uncle. "There is not time to-night--indeed, some of my pets have +retired to their lairs or gone to roost. If you hear strange noises at +night, don't be alarmed; as possibly some of them may be inclined to +utter their natural cries during the night." + +Our conversation was altogether very lively; as we, of course, had a +great deal to tell our uncle, and were also greatly interested by the +account he gave of his expeditions, and the way in which he had lived on +the island since he had been deserted. Sometimes he had thought of +building a vessel and making his way to some civilised port; but the +want of proper tools for cutting down large timber, and his ignorance of +nautical affairs, deterred him. + +"I thought it was as well to leave well alone," he said. "I have here +plenty of provisions; and I thought I could study natural history, which +brought me here; and that, some time or other, some vessel would call +and take me away. Had you, Walter and Emily, not come, however, I +rather think my heart would have failed me even at the last moment, and +I could scarcely have made up my mind to quit my solitary home and the +style of life to which I have become accustomed." + +Our conversation was at length interrupted by a loud rattling peal of +thunder, which crashed over our heads as if the whole heavens above them +were rent in two. A blast swept over the forest, and we could hear the +trees cracking as they bent before the wind. The house shook to its +very foundation, and Emily and Grace trembled with alarm. + +"No, no, my dears; don't fear," exclaimed Frau Ursula. "This is nothing +to what I have heard in Ternate. There, one night, all the houses +tumbled down, and the mountain sent up stones and cinders, which came +rattling down on our heads." + +"There is another, though!" exclaimed Grace, clinging to the old lady's +arm. + +Scarcely had the second crash of thunder passed away, than down came the +rain, pattering on the roof and floor of the verandah. It seemed as if +a waterspout had broken over us. + +"I am thankful that you, my friends, are on shore," observed my uncle; +"but the brig--I feel anxious about her." He got up, and put on a thick +reed-made coat. "And here are some more," he observed, giving Oliver +and me one. "But no, Oliver, you stay with the ladies; and you too, +Walter." + +I entreated that I might accompany him. He gave Roger Trew a similar +covering, which completely sheltered us from the rain; and leaving Tanda +and Oliver in charge of the house, we hurried away towards the shore. +Although the gale had been blowing but a few minutes, already heavy seas +came rolling in and breaking in masses of foam upon the rocks. We could +see the brig, through the thickening gloom, at her anchors. + +"I trust she may hold her ground," said my uncle, as we watched her, +already rising and falling with quick jerks, as the seas rapidly passed +under her. "What say you?" he said, turning to Roger Trew. "Do you +think, if she made sail, she could beat out of this bay, for I fear +greatly that with the sea that rolls in here, when there is wind like +this, she will be unable to remain at anchor?" + +"I am very sure Mr Thudicumb will do his best to beat out of the bay," +answered Roger Trew. "I know that no seaman would like to be caught on +a lee-shore like this in such a gale; and if it lasts long, even though +the anchors do hold, it is likely enough to tear the stem out of her. +The brig is not a bad craft for fine weather sailing, but she is lightly +put together, and I wish that she was under weigh clear of the land, and +then I would not fear for her." + +"Oh, my friend, my friend," exclaimed my uncle, "would that you had been +safe on shore!" + +Scarcely had he spoken, when a flash of lightning, in a thick zig-zag +stream, darted from the clouds overhead, running along the ground close +to us, followed by the most deafening crash of thunder I ever heard. +For an instant our eyes were blinded. We could scarcely see each other, +much less observe any object out at sea. It was a minute or more before +we recovered our sight. + +"She is driving--she is driving!" exclaimed Roger Trew. "They are +trying to make sail on her, but it is too late! The sea struck her bows +just as she was paying off, and now here she comes bodily in towards the +shore." + +We were able, by shading our eyes, once more to look in the direction of +the brig. Too true were Roger's words, and we saw her helplessly +driving in towards the wild rocks near which we stood. + +"Is the water deep, sir?" asked Roger. "If so, she may drive in close +enough to get the people on shore before she goes to pieces." + +"I fear not," answered Mr Sedgwick. "Reefs run out in all directions, +and though, having no boat, I have been unable to sound round the +island, yet, from the way I have seen the water breaking, I fear that +there are reefs between us and her." + +"If we had a boat we might go off and get aboard her before she +strikes," exclaimed Roger. "Have not you a boat, sir? You would go, +would you not? Mr Walter here, I know, would." + +"Unhappily I have no boat," answered my uncle, in a tone almost of +despair. "The crew may, perchance, reach the shore; but my poor friend, +made weak from illness, will have but little chance of escaping with +life." + +"We will do our best, sir--we will do our best," answered Roger. "I +will try and swim off to her when she strikes, and before the sea +scatters her timbers; but it will be a tough job. I will not hide that +from myself or you, sir." + +"Here, Walter," said my uncle, "go and call Tanda, and tell him to bring +as much ratan as he and you can carry. He is a clever fellow, in some +respects, and his wits may help us." + +I was running off, when my uncle cried out-- + +"Stop, by-the-by, you may frighten the ladies, and he will not know what +you mean. I will go myself, and you remain and see what you and our +sailor friend here can do in the meantime, should the brig strike." + +My uncle hurried off to the house, and Roger and I, watching the brig, +proceeded a short distance along the shore to a point whence a reef of +rocks ran out, towards which it appeared to us that she was driving. +How fearfully sharp and rugged did those rocks seem! I had thought +little about them before; but now, when I feared that my friends were +going to be hurled against them, I wished they were rounder, and covered +with sea-weed, to which they might cling. We had each of us, as we left +the house, seized a long bamboo pole. With this Roger and I made our +way towards the point of a ledge of rock above water. Merlin, who had +come with us down to the beach, followed close at our heels, seeming +fully to understand the danger of our friends; for, as we stood watching +the brig, he stretched out his head and uttered strangely loud barks, +which seemed to have a tone of melancholy in them. + +Nearer and nearer came the brig. Part of the bay, under the protection +of the headland I spoke of, was rather more sheltered than it was +further on. This gave us some hopes of the vessel holding together till +the sea had sufficiently moderated to allow Mr Hooker to reach the +shore. The rain continued pouring in torrents, driving in our faces. +Often we could scarcely see the vessel. Then again a vivid flash of +lightning, followed by a crash of thunder, showed her to us as she +heeled over to the blast, driving slowly but surely towards the fatal +rocks. Sometimes with difficulty we could keep our footing on the reef. +I was anxiously looking for the return of my uncle and Tanda. Perhaps +Tanda might swim to her. I myself felt greatly inclined to make the +attempt, in spite of the sea rolling in. Now for an instant the rain +partially ceased, and shading our eyes, we could see the brig still +nearer than before. Then a huge sea came rolling in. She rose on its +crest, driven onwards with greater rapidity than before. Suddenly she +seemed to stop. The sea washed over her. + +"She has struck! she has struck!" cried Roger. + +Her masts, however, still stood; but we expected them every instant to +go. + +"Poor fellows! poor fellows!" cried Roger. "Master Walter, I have no +kith nor kin; I will try and get off to them; and if I am lost, you will +tell them that I wished to lend them a hand, but had not the power." + +"Stop!" I said; "here come my uncle and the black man, and they may +have some plan, without your being obliged to risk your life." + +"As to that, it is not worth thinking about," answered Roger; "but we +will see what they propose." + +In the meantime we endeavoured to ascertain what the people on board the +brig were going to do. The darkness, however, was so great, that we +could not distinguish anything going forward among them. There the brig +lay, however, hard and fast; the seas breaking now over one end, now +over the other, but not with such violence as we dreaded. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY TWO. + +WRECK OF THE DUGONG. + +The arrival of my uncle with his man, carrying a quantity of the light +ratan rope, gave us some hopes of being able to rescue our friends on +board the brig. + +"To be sure, this will float as easily as a cork," exclaimed Roger; "and +I see no reason why I should not tow the end off aboard the brig. You, +Tanda, pay it out as you see I want it." + +Again my uncle warned him of the danger. + +"Very true, sir," he answered, fastening the end round his waist; "but, +you see, if we seamen had to stop every time we saw danger, we should +very soon have to go ashore and take to nursing babies. No, sir; my +notion is that the thing is to be done. It may fail; but if it +succeeds, why, we may manage to get most of those poor fellows safe on +shore." + +While we were speaking, the dog gave another loud howl, as if to make a +signal to those on board; and we fancied it could not fail to be heard +even above the roar of the breakers, although our voices could scarcely +have reached them. It was heard at all events by the rest of our party; +for directly afterwards the two girls and Oliver were seen coming down +from the house in spite of the pelting rain, covered up in mat cloaks. +The Frau followed behind, entreating them to return. + +"Oh, you will be wet; you will be washed away!" she cried out. "Come +back! come back! What is the matter?" + +"We were afraid something dreadful had occurred," said Emily, as she +reached the inner end of the rocks. + +I entreated her and Grace not to come further, lest the seas, which +occasionally washed up, might sweep them away. Oliver, however, +clambered along to where we were. + +"I may be of some use," he said. "Let me do what I can." + +"Well, then, help to pay out this rope, Oliver," said Roger Trew, who +was securing the end round his own waist, having thrown off his jacket +and shoes, retaining only his trowsers, which he fastened round his +waist. "No time to be lost!" he added. "You pray for me, Walter. It +will be a difficult job, but it ought to be done, and so it must!" + +Saying this, he plunged in, and bravely buffeting the sea which broke in +showers round us, was in a short time free of the surf. He was not +alone, however. Merlin, uttering a loud bark, plunged in directly +afterwards, and soon overtook him, swimming by his side, as if wishing +to afford him support or companionship. Away they went, we gradually +paying out the light buoyant rope, which floated in a way no ordinary +rope would have done. + +"I am afraid," said Mr Sedgwick, "that its strength is scarcely +sufficient to enable those on board to pass over it to the shore." + +"No, sir," I said; "but if we can haul in a stouter rope by means of it, +the same end will be accomplished." + +In a short time we could no longer distinguish Roger and Merlin; but we +knew by the way the rope continued to be dragged out that they were +still making progress. Now, however, the rope seemed to stop. We knew +that it could not yet have reached the vessel. After a time we felt it +again drawn on. Again there was a time of great suspense. It made but +little progress. Still we felt that it was drawn out, and that was all +that could be said. How eagerly we looked towards the vessel, and +examined the whole of the intervening space! Presently we saw an object +floating on the water. Now it sank, now it appeared on the foaming +crest of a sea which came rushing towards the shore. "Help! help!" +exclaimed a voice. "Lend a hand!" + +Passing a piece of the remaining rope round my waist, I begged my uncle +and Oliver to hold it, while Tanda paid out the cable, of which but a +small part now only remained. I rushed forward as the person was borne +onward towards the rock. Stretching out my hand, I caught him as the +next sea was about to sweep him up into the bay on one side, where he +would have been dashed on the sharp rocks which lined it. I threw +myself back, my uncle and Oliver hauling in the rope, when I found I had +Roger Trew by the hand. + +"I could not do it!" he exclaimed; "but there is another who will +succeed, or I am much mistaken. Merlin saw how it would be, I have a +notion, from the first; and when I found I must give in or go to the +bottom, I just threw him the bight of the rope. He seized it in his +mouth, and swam on as well as if he was in smooth water, and I let the +sea bring me back again. If Merlin does not succeed, I will have +another try at it, though; but I think he will." + +While he was speaking a jerk was given, apparently at the other end of +the rope. Directly afterwards we heard Tanda utter an exclamation of +dismay. + +"It is gone!" cried Mr Sedgwick. "The end is gone!" + +"Then I'll have it!" exclaimed Roger, plunging into the water as the end +of the rope glided by at a little distance. + +So quick was he that he caught it; and though he was carried to another +point of the rock, a few yards from where we were standing, he was able +once more to climb up and regain a safe position. With the quickness of +a practised seaman he carried it up to a point, where he made the end +fast in such a way that it was not likely again to slip. + +We now all stood anxiously watching to see what would next occur. We +could do no more, unless we found the end of our rope slackening, as a +sign that another had been fastened to it. We should then haul away on +it. The minutes seemed hours as we stood on the shore anxiously looking +out towards the brig. Bits of timber came floating on shore; now a +piece of a broken spar; now parts of the bulwarks. We were afraid that +ere long the brig would begin to break up. Meantime Frau Ursula had +been urging the girls to go back to the house; but they were too deeply +interested in what was taking place to listen to her entreaties. They +thought not of the pelting rain; they thought not of the driving spray +or furious wind. Their hearts were with our friends on board--with Mr +Hooker, kind Mr Thudicumb, honest Dick Tarbox, and the faithful Potto +Jumbo. Presently we saw a round object floating towards us. + +"It is a man's head!" cried Oliver. "Let me go this time." + +"No, no," I answered; "I am not at all tired from my other swim, and I +will try and help him." + +I was getting ready to plunge in, in spite of Oliver's entreaties, when, +on looking again, a flash of lightning at the moment lighting up the top +of the wave, we saw the head of Merlin as he bravely swam towards us. +We rushed into the water to help him, lest the send of the sea might +have driven him against the rock before he had gained a footing. +Instead of shaking himself, as a dog generally does, as soon as he was +clear of the water, he stood perfectly still. We then saw that he had +got a bottle round his neck. + +"A letter from Hooker; I am sure of it!" said Mr Sedgwick. "It will +give us important information. We cannot read it here, however. Come, +young ladies, I must take you up to the house, and comfort the Frau's +heart. She is afraid you will catch ague or fever, or cold at all +events; and she has reason for her fears--so come along." + +Very unwillingly the two girls left the scene; Emily entreating me, as +she went away, not to run any more risks of being drowned. Curiously +enough, Merlin, having performed his duty, accompanied Mr Sedgwick and +the girls up to the house. In a short time Mr Sedgwick returned, +saying, that the note was from Mr Hooker, to the effect that he hoped +the vessel would hold together till the hurricane was over, as she gave +no signs of breaking up, while there was a sufficient space free of +water below, to afford shelter to all who remained on board. "I am +sorry to say," he added, "that several of the crew have attempted to +swim on shore. Two of them we saw lost before they had gone many +fathoms from the ship; but we hope the others have arrived safely. We, +however, will make a hawser fast to the rope you sent us by that noble +creature Merlin, that in case we are mistaken about the brig holding +together, we may have a better prospect of saving our lives." + +On hearing this we again went to the end of the point, and found that we +could haul in upon the rope; and by the resistance it made, it was +evident that a hawser had been secured to it. It was very heavy work; +but at length, by our united efforts, we got the hawser secured to a +point of the rock. We had now a communication with our poor brig, but +we trembled to think of the danger to which Mr Hooker would be exposed +should he attempt to make use of it in his present weak health. + +"A short time ago he would have come along that rope without the +slightest difficulty," observed Oliver; "but now I am afraid that, were +he to make the attempt, he could scarcely resist the strength of the +waves, and would be washed off." + +"I am afraid so too, Oliver," said Roger Trew. "Sooner than he should +do that, I would go out and try to help him ashore." + +Attached to the end of the hawser, I should observe, we found a light +rope. This was evidently sent that we might get another stout one on +shore. We found on trying it that we were right in our conjecture, and +hauling away as before, we got a second strong rope united to the vessel +and the land. Mr Sedgwick now wanted us to go back to the house, but +we could not think of leaving the shore till our friends were in safety. +He himself said that he would remain to watch, should any change take +place. It was an anxious time, for instead of decreasing, the wind was +blowing even harder than before. It seemed a wonder that the _Dugong_ +could stand so much battering. Still, we could dimly see her through +the gloom, her masts yet standing, though heeling over towards the land. +Every now and then a huge sea swept over the larger portion of the +wreck; and numerous pieces of plank thrown on the rocks showed us that +already her bulwarks at all events were giving way. + +"I suspect that Dick Tarbox and the others will not desert Mr Hooker; +and they are afraid of his suffering should he attempt to come ashore," +I observed to Roger Trew. + +"That is it, Master Walter," he answered. "Depend on it they will not +leave him till they are washed out of the ship. I should like to go on +board and see how they are getting on." + +I urged him, however, not to make the attempt. + +"It is far more easy for them to come to us than for you to go on +board," I observed. "Let us wait patiently; perhaps as the night +advances the gale will abate." + +Still the wind blew as hard as ever. At length, just as Mr Sedgwick +had gone back to the house to look after the girls and Frau Ursula, a +shout reached our ears. We hurried to the point of the rock, and there +we saw what looked like a huge piece of wreck being driven towards us. + +"I am afraid the brig is breaking up," I observed. "Poor Mr Hooker! +What can we do to help him?" + +We tried to pierce the gloom to ascertain who was on the wreck. By +degrees we saw that, instead of a piece of wreck, it was a small boat. +Those in her were holding on to the hawsers. Now she rose, now she +fell, as the waves passed under her. We could scarcely understand how +she could live in that tossing sea, with the weight of several people on +board. At length she seemed to stop, and turned round broadside to us. + +"She must go over," shouted Roger. "Look out; help them as they come +ashore." + +She was at that time near enough for us to see two persons leap +overboard; one, it seemed, holding on to the other. They approached. +Again a voice shouted "Look out!" Roger Trew ran to the point of the +rock, holding on to the rope, and stretching over into the sea. We +could now distinguish the two men. Nearer and nearer they came. + +"Give me your hand, Cooky, give me your hand," cried Roger, stretching +out his arm; and then I saw that Potto Jumbo was working along the +hawser, with Mr Hooker secured by a rope to his back. The dawn was +just breaking. The cry of some sea-fowl as they passed sounded +ominously in our ears. Even then I feared that Potto Jumbo would lose +his hold, or that Mr Hooker, weak from his illness, might be torn away +by the fury of the sea. I ran forward with another rope, the end of +which Oliver held, and just as Roger caught hold of Potto Jumbo's hand, +and was dragging him up, I grasped him by the arm. Mr Hooker seemed +almost exhausted, and could not utter a word. With the help of Oliver +and Tanda we at length got them up on the rock, though not till Potto +Jumbo had severely hurt his legs against the sharp points. + +"Heaven be praised, it is done! You all right soon, Mr Hooker," +exclaimed Potto Jumbo, as he committed his charge to our hands. + +The boat meantime was slowly drifting in, in spite of the efforts of two +men on board to hold her; one indeed appeared to have been hurt, and +able to exert but little strength. Who they were we could not then see, +but I hoped that my old friend Dick Tarbox had escaped. + +"Is the boatswain one of them?" I asked of Potto Jumbo. + +"Yes, massa, yes," answered Potto; "and t'other Mr Thudicumb. But help +dem, help dem; no mind me. I take care of Mr Hooker; Mr Thudicumb no +help himself." + +It was time indeed for us to exert all our strength, for the boat was +now being driven helplessly towards the rock; and it seemed but too +probable, should she strike it, that those in her would be thrown out, +and very likely swept off by the sea: indeed, they were in a more +dangerous position than had they held on alone to the rope. There was +on one side of the rock a sort of gulf, which ran up some way towards +the beach. Should the boat strike the point, she would very likely be +dashed to pieces, but if we could manage to get hold of her as she drove +by on one side, we might, I knew, rescue our friends and save her. This +thought passed rapidly through my mind. The rest of our party saw what +was likely to happen as well as I did, and together we eagerly stood +waiting for the boat to reach us. + +On she came. Mr Thudicumb managed to crawl to the helm, while Dick +Tarbox stood in the bows. Another sea came roaring in. The boatswain +held a rope in his hand. I almost shrieked with terror as I saw the +boat, as I thought, coming towards the point; but the mate, moving the +helm, she grazed by it, and the next instant Tarbox hove the rope. We +caught it, and hauling on together as we ran along, drew the boat's head +for an instant in towards us. Tarbox leaped out and seized the rope. +Potto, who had placed his burden on a secure part of the rock, joined +us. The following sea almost filled the boat, but we dragged her bows +in, though as we did so she came with a fearful crash against the rock. +Tarbox then leaping back, seized the mate, and with almost superhuman +strength dragged him out over the side on to the rock, while we hauled +the boat up half out of the water. + +"You are safe, Mr Thudicumb, you are safe!" exclaimed Tarbox to the +mate, who scarcely seemed aware of what had happened. + +While Oliver, Roger Trew, and Tanda attended to the boat, Potto Jumbo +again lifted up Mr Hooker, and Tarbox and I assisted Mr Thudicumb +along over the ledge towards the shore. + +"Are there any others left on board?" asked Roger Trew. "If there are, +we will pull back and try to bring them on shore." + +"No one, no one," answered the boatswain; "all left before we did, +more's the pity. They would not stop, in spite of all we could say to +them." + +We were soon met by Mr Sedgwick, who had returned from the house. He +cordially welcomed his old friend, moved almost to tears by the +condition in which he saw him. + +"Rouse up, Hooker, my dear fellow!" he exclaimed. "You will soon have a +roof over your head and a dry bed to lie in and willing hands to take +care of you." + +We soon got the party up to the house, when Frau Ursula and the girls +began eagerly to busy themselves in arranging the beds for the two sick +men. Mr Thudicumb had been hurt by the falling of a spar, and our +uncle, who fortunately possessed considerable surgical knowledge, at +once attended to his injuries. + +Daylight had now returned, and as the sun rose the gale began to abate. +Mr Hooker and the mate were put to bed in my uncle's room, his own +couch accommodating one, and a mattress composed of mats serving as a +bed for the other. The rest of the party were now assembled in what my +uncle called his hall. + +"And now, my good Frau, you and the young ladies must go to your roost. +As you have been night-birds, you must sleep in the day, and we will +look after these good fellows, who, I daresay, will not be sorry to take +some of the remains of our feast of last night." + +"No, indeed, sir, we shall not," said Dick Tarbox; "for the truth is, we +have been far too anxious to think of grub, in the first place; and it +was a hard matter to get at any, in the second." + +It was amusing to see the eagerness with which the shipwrecked men set +to work upon the provisions placed before them. + +"The sooner you get off those wet clothes of yours the better," observed +my uncle; "and though we are not very rich in garments here, we can +supply you with mat petticoats and a shirt apiece while your things are +drying." + +In a few minutes we all appeared dressed in the costume thus furnished, +and certainly we looked more like savages than civilised people as we +sat round the board. + +"Now, lads, there is one thing I think we ought to do," said Dick +Tarbox, "and that is, thank Heaven for bringing us ashore in safety, and +giving us such good quarters. If we had been driven on a coast not far +from here, I suspect we should have found very different treatment. The +chances are our heads would have been off our shoulders before we had +been many hours in the company of the natives, and very likely, instead +of enjoying a good supper like this--or a breakfast, we ought to call +it--we should have been served up as a feast to the savages." + +Our meal over, Tanda brought in a further supply of mats, in which we +all wrapped ourselves, and were very soon fast asleep, I was awoke by +hearing my uncle's voice calling to Tanda, and looking up, I saw that +they were placing another meal on the table. Our clothes were then +brought to us. + +"There, lads," said my uncle, "you are now more fit than you were to +appear before the ladies; and as they are on foot, I will bring them +into the hall. I am glad also to say both Mr Hooker and the mate are +very much better for their rest, and I hope in a few days they will be +themselves again." + +The first few hours we spent on the island appeared to me like a dream. +I had been so tired on the night of the wreck, that scarcely was one +meal over than I was asleep again, and only woke up to see a fresh +repast prepared for us. As soon as I was somewhat recovered, I hurried +out, with Tarbox and Potto Jumbo, to the shore to see what had become of +the wreck. I gave a shout of joy when I saw that her masts were still +standing, though she had been driven so high up on the rock that it was +very evident that we should not be able to get her off again. The boat +still lay where Roger Trew and Oliver had hauled her up. We hurried +down to examine her. A hole had been torn in her bottom, rendering her +unfit for use. + +"Never fear," said the boatswain, on examining her. "We may soon repair +this damage and be able to get off to the wreck in her. I hope we shall +find many things on board of use to us, even though we cannot get the +old barky afloat again." + +The next thing to be done, therefore, was to repair the boat. We +hurried back to the house to see if Mr Sedgwick was able to assist us. +As soon as he heard the nature of the injury, he produced some planks +and nails exactly suited for our purpose. + +"I cannot supply you with pitch," he said, "but there are several gums +in the island which will answer the object, and here are copper nails +enough, if you use them with economy." + +We of course at once set to work, and quickly patched up the little +boat. At first I had a vague idea that she might enable us to get off +to some civilised place, but on seeing her once more in the water, I +felt that that would be hopeless, as she could only hold three or four +persons at the utmost in smooth water. + +When Emily and Grace heard that we were going off to the vessel, they +entreated us to be cautious. + +"I do so dread the sea," said Emily. "I should be very thankful if I +thought I had not again to cross it." + +"But you would not like to live in this island for ever," observed Mr +Sedgwick. "You will soon be wishing yourself back in the old country, +as I have done, I can assure you, very often." + +Oliver and I, with Tarbox and Roger Trew, had arranged to go off in the +boat. The oars had fortunately been thrown on shore. Although one of +them was broken, two had been preserved uninjured. I did my best to +reassure my sister and Grace, and they and the Frau came down to see us +off. Tarbox and Oliver pulled, while I steered, and away we went over +the now blue sea towards the wreck. + +As we drew near we saw the fearful injuries she had received. + +A coral rock had forced itself completely through her side; and had she +not been thrown high up on the reef, she must inevitably have sunk, as +the water flowed in and out with the tide. It was now fortunately low +water, and by getting on to the reef, which appeared above the surface, +having made our boat secure, we were able to scramble on board. +Everything with the exception of the masts had been swept from the deck, +while the hold was still nearly full of water. In the cabin, however, +we found a variety of useful articles, besides a good supply of +provisions. All sorts of things, however, had been thrown out of their +places, and lay scattered about the wreck. Having collected, however, +as many things as we could carry, we were about to return with them to +the boat. + +"Stay," said the boatswain, "we have forgotten the arms. See, here are +four muskets against this bulkhead, and Mr Hooker's fowling-pieces. If +we could get some ammunition, we should be able to defend ourselves in +case any of the piratical fellows in this neighbourhood should find us +out and pay us a visit." + +We were almost giving up the search for ammunition in despair, when we +discovered a couple of tins of powder in one of the lockers, evidently +placed there by Mr Thudicumb for immediate use. The powder, +fortunately, from having been carefully packed in tins, had escaped +injury. + +We now, laden with our prizes, got back to the boat, and without much +difficulty steered clear of the surf to the shore. We were received on +landing by Frau Ursula and the two girls, who had been standing for a +long time anxiously watching the boat, afraid that some accident had +happened. They now assisted us in landing our goods, and carrying them +up to the house. + +"We must not live idle lives here," said Emily, laughing; "and as we +have no fancy work, we cannot employ our time better than in making +ourselves useful." + +I saw the Frau eagerly examining the articles we had brought on shore. + +"What! you no think of our clothes?" she exclaimed at length. "You +leave the frocks, and gowns, and shoes, and all the little girls' +things? Oh, you thoughtless men!" + +We felt ourselves rebuked. + +"Well, we must go back at once, Frau," I answered. "I confess that we +ought to have recollected that you would require clothing, and that +mat-made garments, however suited to the climate, are not so becoming as +those you had on board. We will go back and fetch them." + +"Oh no, no!" exclaimed Grace. "It is already late, and you have had a +long row to-day--some accident may be happening." + +"Not much fear of that, miss," observed Tarbox. "You shall have your +duds, even though we had twice as far to pull for them. Just take care +that no one shakes his pipe over those tins there," he observed, +pointing to the cases of powder. "They might chance to send the house +flying up over the trees, and the unfortunate smoker with it." + +We had by this time landed all the articles we had brought on shore. +They were somewhat miscellaneous, but all likely to prove useful. +Besides the fire-arms and ammunition, we had found some cases of +preserved meat and hams, a cask of biscuit, some tins of pepper and salt +and mustard, a case of wine, a cask of pork, a box of cigars, and a +couple of Mr Hooker's cases. We thought it would do his heart good to +see them; and I knew they were among those he valued most for their +contents. + +"That was indeed thoughtful of you," observed Emily, when she saw the +cases. + +"It was not I who thought of them," I answered; "it was Oliver. He said +he thought it would cheer up Mr Hooker to know that some of his things +had been saved; and we must try and get some more on shore if we can." + +"Oh yes, yes!" exclaimed both the girls together. "Bring his treasures +rather than ours. Many of them, probably, he cannot replace; and we can +dress, I daresay, in mats, or the cloth I have seen made out of the +paper mulberry-tree." + +"Well, well, young ladies," said Tarbox. "We can find room, I daresay, +in the boat for your light things, as well as Mr Hooker's chests; so I +hope, if we can get hold of the things, you will not have to rig up in +any outlandish fashion." + +He said this as we were shoving off the boat with our oars; and now, +sitting down, we again pulled out towards the wreck. + +"The gentleman on shore says he has lived here for several years," said +Oliver. "All that time no vessel has called off here. Now, if we are +to get away, would it not be better if we were to try and build one +large enough for the purpose, so that we may quit the island whenever it +is thought best?" + +"You are right, Oliver," said Tarbox. "If we can get hold of the +carpenter's tools, and ropes and spars enough, with blocks and sails, we +may build a craft out of the wreck, or of the wood we can cut down in +the island. It does not take so long to dry as it does in Old England." + +Roger Trew agreed with Tarbox, and so did I, that we ought to make the +attempt, and thanked Oliver for his suggestion. We determined, +therefore, at once to secure as much rope and as many blocks as we might +want, as well as sailcloth or sails and spars. + +"I have heard talk of a man out in the Pacific Islands who built a +vessel with far less means than we have got," observed Tarbox. "He was +a missionary gentleman, though he knew well how to work at a forge, as +well as to use his saw and hammer. To the best of my recollection, he +had only got a file and a saw and an old anchor to begin with. He first +taught the natives how to assist him, and then set to work to cut down +the trees and to saw them into planks. He next put up a forge, and made +the bellows, and manufactured nails and pins, and all the work he +wanted." + +"Oh yes, I have read of him," said Oliver. "He was Mr Williams, the +missionary. He built the vessel, I think, at Raratonga, when he was +left there by himself, without another European to help him. She was +called the _Messenger of Peace_, and he sailed many thousand miles +afterwards on board her in his missionary voyages. If Mr Williams--who +had no knowledge of ship-building except such as he obtained from +observation of the vessels he visited--could do so, we, at all events, +ought to be able to build a craft capable of carrying us to Singapore, +even though we may not secure much more from the wreck." + +"There is one thing we want, and that is iron," observed Tarbox; "and +rope and blocks, and provisions, too. It would take us some time to put +such a craft together." + +"All I know is," said Oliver, "that Mr Williams had but the iron part +of an anchor, a pick-axe, and a few garden tools, with some iron hoops. +His vessel was from about sixty to seventy tons, and from the time he +cut the keel until she was launched not more than four months had +passed. Besides the bellows and forge, he made a lathe, and indeed +manufactured everything that was required. His sails were composed of +fine mats, woven by the natives; and the rope was manufactured from the +hemp which grew on the island. In the same way he found substitutes for +oakum, pitch, and paint, and everything he required." + +"He you speak of must have been a very wonderful man," observed Tarbox. +"I consider that a man who could do what he did is fit to be Prime +Minister. Why, he would have made the Thames Tunnel, if he had tried." + +"Very likely he would," said Oliver; "but God wanted him for His work, +and that was to go out to those islands to the east of us in the +Pacific, and to convert the natives to Christianity." + +By this time we had regained the wreck. Our first search was for the +clothing of the Frau and the young ladies. We managed to get up a trunk +which contained a portion of them, though the water had got in, and had +greatly spoiled the contents. We fished about for some time, and then +got up another box, which had suffered in the same way. + +"It cannot be helped," observed Tarbox. "We will not be particular how +the old lady and little girls look; and the clothes will soon dry-- +that's one good thing. The sun is not idle out in these parts." + +Our next hunt was for the carpenter's tools. When I say that half the +deck was under water, it may be supposed that there were very few things +which had escaped soaking. Fortunately the carpenter had stowed many of +his things away in a locker on the upper side of the vessel. These we +secured, and then searched for his chest, which we knew contained some +more of the necessary tools. + +"Poor fellow! if he had stuck by us instead of attempting to swim on +shore, he would have been here to lend us a hand," observed Tarbox. + +Oliver was very busy hunting about. Of course, we had thrown off our +jackets, and retained only our trowsers. We did not mind, therefore, +plunging into the water, now and then diving down in the hopes of +getting hold of something. At length Oliver cried out that he felt the +handle of a chest, which he thought must be the carpenter's. We soon +got a hook and rope, and hauled it up, when with much satisfaction we +found he was right. It was somewhat heavy, and we doubted if we should +get it into the boat. At last Oliver suggested that we should open it, +and carry some of the tools separately, so as to lighten it. This we +did; and by the time we had got a few coils of rope on board, and some +blocks, our boat was heavily laden. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY THREE. + +OUR FIRST EXCURSION IN THE ISLAND. + +On our arrival at the beach, we found that the indefatigable Frau and +her young companions had carried up all the articles to the house. On +seeing us return, they had again come down, with Potto Jumbo, to help +us. The Frau, lifting a coil of rope, put it round her neck, +exclaiming, "Ah! I have one fine necklace--I carry this;" and off she +set, with a bag of biscuit at her back. The girls each loaded +themselves with blocks and ropes, while we carried up the chests and +heavier articles. + +Great was Mr Hooker's delight when he saw his beloved cases arrive. + +"What! you have saved these?" he exclaimed, lifting up his hands, and +gazing at them with affection. "I am indeed indebted to you. I little +thought any one else appreciated them as I do. But it shows you are +true lovers of science, that you value such treasures as these--not as +ordinary persons value them, but as men of science look at them--at +their true worth. Thank you, my friends--thank you;" and he shook us +all warmly by the hand. + +I really believe that the restoration of his collections contributed +greatly to his recovery. + +The next day we were employed in the same way--in getting on shore as +many of the stores as we could fish up from the wreck. Mr Sedgwick was +well pleased at the appearance of the case of wine. + +"It is just what my patients want," he observed; "and though I can +manufacture palm-wine and arrack, they will not answer the purpose +nearly so well. Indeed, the arrack is poisonous stuff at the best." + +For some days both Mr Hooker and the mate appeared to hang between life +and death. Our uncle, I saw, was very anxious about them, and seldom +absent from their room. When he went away, the good Frau took his +place. When absent, however, he was still engaged in their service, as +he was either concocting medicines or cooking dishes to suit their +taste. + +"Potto Jumbo is a very good sea-cook," he observed to me, "but not quite +capable of producing a dish fit for an invalid; and as to my Dyak, +Tanda, his ideas are somewhat limited in that way." + +The weather continued fine, and the vessel hung together; but the +boatswain was of opinion that should another gale come on, she would +quickly go to pieces. + +"Though we might get some of her timbers and planks, they would be +sorely battered by getting knocked on the rocks," he observed; "and to +my mind it would be better if we could get them ripped off at once. It +will be a pretty tough job; but it is to be done." + +I proposed the matter to Mr Sedgwick, but he rather doubted our +capability of performing the operation. He could not help us, as he was +required to attend to our friends, while his man had to look after the +plantations and animals, and indeed had ample work. He thought that +fresh planks from the trees in the forest would be of more use than the +broken ones we might get from the vessel. We, indeed, were prevented +from returning to her for some days, on account of a strong wind setting +in directly on the shore, which created so much surf that we were unable +to pass through it in our small boat. + +Mr Thudicumb was to be our master-builder. He had more acquaintance +with ship-building than any of us--indeed, probably than all the party +put together; but he was yet too ill even to superintend the +undertaking. We hoped, however, that in the course of a week or two he +would be sufficiently recovered to set us to work. At present, indeed, +he could scarcely even give his thoughts to the subject. + +I proposed that we should employ the time in exploring the island. Mr +Sedgwick had never gone to any great distance from the spot where he had +located himself. He had been unable to do so, as directly he began to +collect his menagerie it was necessary for him to remain to attend to +his animals. He was also unwilling to go far from the coast, lest, a +vessel passing, he might lose the opportunity of getting on board her. +This had kept him week after week, and month after month, within a few +miles of the shore. He was now, however, very glad to make the proposed +expedition. + +Mr Hooker and the mate were sufficiently recovered to move about the +house and to take short walks in the neighbourhood. The girls were both +very anxious to go also, but the Frau strongly objected to their doing +so. + +"Suppose we meet snakes, or wild beasts, or savages?" she asked. "Oh +no, no, Frauline Emily and Grace. You must stop and take care of Mr +Hooker and poor Mr Thudicumb. What they do without you?" + +We were much amused at the Frau's anxiety, because we suspected that she +supposed if they went she would have to go also, and for this she had no +fancy. She was a very good nurse, and a very good cook; but she took +little interest in beautiful scenery or in natural history. + +"We will take very good care of the young ladies if you like to remain +behind," said our uncle. "We can easily make some litters to carry +them, should they be tired, and we will leave you to assist in +garrisoning our castle." + +"Oh, but I not like to lose sight of them," she answered; and indeed she +was afraid that they might meet with some accident, or suffer from the +hardships of the journey. + +They, however, pleaded their cause so well, that at length it was +arranged they were to go with us. + +"I have read that Lady Raffles accompanied her husband, Sir Stamford, in +many of his excursions through Sumatra and other islands of these seas, +and I do not see why we should be afraid of any of the hardships which +she had to go through," observed Emily. + +We now busied ourselves in making preparations for our journey. Our +party consisted of our uncle as leader, Oliver and I, Dick Tarbox, Roger +Trew, and Potto Jumbo. Merlin evidently understood that we were going +on an expedition, and wagged his tail and looked up in my face as if to +ask if he might accompany us. First he went to one, and then to +another, making the same request. + +"If you can spare him, Hooker, we will take him," observed my uncle. +"He seems so well trained, that I think he will not range too widely and +disturb our game." + +"Speak to him, and he will do whatever you tell him," said Mr Hooker; +and so Merlin was added to our party. + +We promised the Frau that should the difficulties we might meet with be +too great for the girls to encounter, we would at once return, and +leaving them, set off again by ourselves. We each of us earned a +fowling-piece, an axe, and a knife, with flint and steel, and a bag of +sago-cake, prepared as have before described. We felt very sure that we +could provide ourselves with an ample supply of animal food, as also +vegetables, wherever we might go. Nature has been lavishly bountiful in +that region in her supply of food for the wants of man; indeed, there +are no parts of the world where a little labour will produce such an +abundance of all the necessaries of life as in most of the islands of +that archipelago. + +Several streams ran down from the neighbouring mountains fertilising the +land, and, in the intervals, cocoa-nut trees grew, with fruit now +sufficiently ripe to afford a delicious draught of cool liquid whenever +we might want it. + +We rose before daybreak to breakfast, that we might commence our journey +in the cool of the morning. Our friends collected in the verandah to +wish us good-bye. Mr Hooker, however, seemed very unhappy at being +unable to accompany us. + +"Cheer up, friends," said our uncle. "We shall be back, probably, in +two or three days; and having stretched our legs, we shall be the better +able to make another excursion, and I hope by that time you will be of +the party." + +My uncle led, axe in hand, to clear away any creepers or underwood which +might impede our progress. The girls, with Oliver and I on either hand, +followed, while the three men, with their guns ready for use, brought up +the rear. The views were, however, confined, in consequence of the +thickness of the forest and the somewhat level nature of the country; +but in the distance we could see mountains rising, with intervening +hills, which showed us that there was some climbing in prospect. +Nothing could exceed the beauty of the woods, or the great variety of +strange trees and plants which met our sight in every direction. Among +the most beautiful and curious were the orchids. One especially +arrested our attention. It had large yellow clusters of flowers hanging +down from some of the lower branches of the trees, so that it was more +than usually conspicuous. Our uncle called it the _Vanda Lowii_. Many +of its strange pendent flower-spikes almost reached the ground. Each +was about six or eight feet long, with large, handsome flowers three +inches across, varying in colour from orange to red, with deep +purple-red spots. Some, indeed, were even longer than that; and we +counted on one thirty-six flowers arranged in a spiral way upon a +slender, thread-like stalk. + +A shout from one of the men a short distance behind made us stop. + +"Why, that is a rum-looking creature!" exclaimed Dick Tarbox. + +"Dat?--dat one big frog with wing!" cried Potto Jumbo, with a loud +laugh. + +We turned round, and just at the same moment a companion probably of the +first that had been seen seemed to be flying in a slanting direction +from the bough of a high tree into a small pool which we had noticed as +we passed. Potto sprang forward, and caught it just as it was reaching +the water. It was a curious-looking creature, certainly. The back and +limbs were of a dark shining green colour, while the under surface and +inner toes were yellow. The body was about four inches long, while the +webs of each hind foot, when fully stretched out, covered a surface of +not less than four square inches. Its toes were peculiarly long, and +fully webbed to their extremity, so that, when expanded, they presented +a surface to the air considerably larger than the whole of the body, +which was also capable of being filled out by wind. + +"Ah, this is a real flying-frog!" observed our uncle. + +However, it was altogether a very curious creature. We were anxious to +preserve it to show to Mr Hooker. It was accordingly consigned to +Roger Trew's bag, our uncle saying that he would preserve it when we +stopped to rest. + +The tree-ferns also were very graceful, of various heights and forms, +from eight to fifteen feet high, their tall leaves waving over in the +most picturesque manner. + +"We shall soon have a stream to cross," said my uncle, "which I consider +the boundary of my domain. However, as I have made excursions a short +distance beyond it, I have built a bridge that I might get across +without difficulty. You must, however, string up your nerves, as, +probably, you have seldom passed over such a structure. It is exactly +such as I have seen built by the Dyaks in Borneo." + +On getting to the banks of the stream it was evident that without a boat +or a bridge we should be unable to cross. We now, however, saw the +means my uncle had contrived. The bridge was made entirely of bamboo. +A number of stout pieces crossed each other like the letter X, fixed in +the bank on either side, and rising a few feet above it. They were then +firmly bound together, as also to a long bamboo of the largest size +which rested on them, and formed the only pathway over which we had to +cross. Another long bamboo, raised three feet above the other on either +side, formed the hand-rails. It was, however, supported also by ratans, +which led from some overhanging trees above it, while other bamboos were +stuck into the banks, and leaning outward over the stream, formed +diagonal supports. + +"Come, Emily and Grace," said my uncle. "If you find that I get across +safely, you need have no fear; and I repaired it completely but a few +days ago, little thinking how soon it was to be crossed by any one +else." + +When my uncle had got about half-way across the stream, I began to +tremble for his safety. The bamboo seemed to me to be creaking and +cracking, and every instant I expected it to give way. However, he +appeared perfectly at his ease, and walking calmly on, soon reached the +other bank in safety. + +"Shall I go next, Emily, or will you?" I asked. + +"Oh no, no," said Emily; "Grace and I will go," and bravely she led the +way. + +Grace was a little more timid, but followed her closely, and they too +reached the opposite bank. When the rest of the party came over, they +said they had seen a large bird on the bank of the stream flying near +the decayed trunk of a huge tree. + +"Whereabouts is it?" exclaimed my uncle with great eagerness. + +"Dere, dere!" said Potto Jumbo, whose eyes in these thick woods were +evidently sharper than those of his companions, who might, however, have +been able to see further than he could on the ocean. + +We crept carefully along the bank. It was a huge bird of dark plumage, +with a vast bill, and a curious sort of cap on its head. It had +something in its mouth, with which it went to a hole in the tree I have +described. My uncle, telling us to remain quiet, crept nearer and +fired. The bird fell with a loud flop into the stream. + +"After him!" I said to Merlin, as the bird was floating down. + +Merlin dashed forward, and springing in, approached the bird, who, +however, was only wounded, and began to show battle with his formidable +bill. Merlin wisely kept out of his reach, for a peck of that bill +would soon have taken out one of his eyes. The bird, at length, +however, became exhausted, and then Merlin sprang on him, and seizing +him by the neck, quickly dragged him to the shore. + +"It is a magnificent hornbill!" exclaimed our uncle--"_Buceros +bicornis_." + +Merlin had killed the bird in bringing it on shore, and it now lay +stretched out before us. My uncle eagerly went forward to the tree, and +looking up about fifteen feet from the ground, we saw a small hole +surrounded by mud. Directly afterwards, out came the white end of a +beak, which seemed to gape as if expecting to have some food put into +it. We were silent for an instant, and then heard the harsh croaking of +a bird, which seemed to come from the interior of the tree. How to get +at it, however, was the question. + +"We will soon be up there," said Tarbox. "I have seen the way the black +fellows get up a tree, and I think we can do the same." + +He soon cut down some bamboos, which, cutting into pieces about a foot +and a half in length, he drove into the tree, we all assisting him. He +then secured some upright bamboos to the pieces which had thus been +stuck in one above another. As soon as he had stuck them in as high as +he could reach, he mounted on the first, and then put in some more above +his head, and thus in a very short time got up to a level with the hole. + +"I have no fancy, though, for having my eyes picked out, which they +might very quickly be if the creature inside has got as big a beak as +the one you killed, sir," he observed. + +He accordingly got somewhat higher up. He then with his axe began to +knock away the mud, and in a short time cleared out a large hole, when +not only the beak but the head of a bird similar to the one which had +been killed was poked out. + +Dick seized it by the neck in spite of its furious struggles, and giving +it a swing, threw it down to the ground, where the rest of us pounced +upon it, when it commenced uttering the most tremendously loud, hoarse +screaming I ever heard. + +"There is something else in the nest, though!" he exclaimed; and putting +in his hand he drew out an extraordinary little lump of vitality, which, +however, was evidently a young bird. "I will bring it down to its +mother," he said; "for if I threw it, the poor little creature would be +killed." + +Holding the creature in one hand with as much care as if it had been a +young child, he descended with the other. It was a bird as large as a +pigeon, but without a single feather on any part of its body. It was +wonderfully plump and soft, with a skin almost transparent, so that it +looked more like a bag of jelly than any living thing, with a head and +feet and commencement of wings stuck on to it. The little creature +seemed in no way frightened, but opened its mouth as if expecting to be +fed. We brought it to its mother, who immediately recognised it, and +when we handed her a piece of fruit she took it and gave a portion to +her offspring, who lifted up its beak to receive it. + +"Oh, I will carry it!" cried Grace. "I should not like the poor little +thing to be hurt." + +Grace had a kind heart, and was always ready to sympathise with any one +in distress. We accordingly made a basket of palm-leaves, and Dick +again ascended the tree to bring out the lining of the nest. This we +put into the basket, and the bird was placed upon it. The mother again +began to scream loudly when we took away its young. + +"Come, old lady, I'll carry you," said Roger Trew, lifting up the hen +hornbill; but the bird fought so desperately that he was glad to put her +down again. "We must tie your legs and put your nose in a bag, ma'am," +said Roger, "or you will be doing some one a mischief." + +A larger basket was therefore made, into which we put the old bird, +fastening in its head at the same time. Mr Sedgwick was highly +delighted with his prize. He had always wished to get one of these +birds; but had failed to find them, though he had seen them at a +distance, and therefore knew that they were in the island. He was aware +of this habit of the male bird of plastering up his mate with her egg, +and bringing her food while it was being hatched. Several other +hornbills act in the same way. + +We continued our journey for some time along the banks of the stream, +which sparkled brightly as it made its way through the forest. Then we +began gradually to ascend the mountains we had seen in the distance. +Nothing could exceed the beauty of the forest trees amid which we were +making our way--lofty palms, and the wonderful screw-palm, tall +cocoa-nut palms, and a number of trees of the same description. Here +and there also were groups of bamboos; and in many places ratans grew, +hanging from tree to tree. Now and then we met with beautiful flowers +and flowering shrubs, but they were not so common as we expected. Their +size and brilliancy, however, made amends for their scarcity. Among +them were some creepers, having crimson and yellow flowers; others were +of a rich purple colour. Among the most beautiful was one which Mr +Sedgwick called an _anonaceous_ tree: it was about thirty feet high, and +its slender trunk was covered with large star-like crimson flowers, +which surrounded it like a garland, and Grace and Emily declared they +thought some one had come on purpose to adorn it. In one spot a number +of these trees grew all together, producing a most beautiful and +brilliant effect; others were immense trees with furrowed stems; and now +and then we came to a magnificent fig-tree, which was altogether unlike +any tree I had ever seen. It seemed as if its trunk had been divided +into hundreds of small stems and roots. The most curious, however, was +one which had its base eighty feet up from the ground, while that rested +on a wonderful pyramid of roots which, shooting downwards, spread out on +every side, while the branches started off and rose again to a vast +height above the stem. Then, again, from its branches hung down a +variety of creepers, like the shrouds of a vessel, to keep it apparently +from being blown away by a tornado. + +I cannot attempt to describe all the beautiful butterflies we saw. Now +and then Mr Sedgwick made chase after one. Once he returned with one, +which he considered a valuable prize. The ground colour of its wings +was a rich shining black, the lower wings being of a delicate grey with +white, and bordered by a row of large spots of the most brilliant +satin-like yellow. The body was marked with shade spots of white, +yellow, and fiery orange, while the head and thorax were intense black. +The under sides of the lower wings were of soft white, the marginal +spots being half black and half yellow. + +Scarcely had this one been caught, than he gave chase to another +superb-looking one, of a rich purple, variously tinged with ash colour, +a broad bar of deep orange running across the fore wings. Away it flew, +and we ran after to assist him, when it seemed to drop among some dried +leaves, and there it totally disappeared. What had become of it, we +could not tell, when suddenly, almost from before our eyes, it rose +again in the air, and gave us another chase, till it again disappeared +as before. At length we saw Mr Sedgwick fall almost prostrate, with +his net over the leaves; and then what appeared to be a dry leaf +suddenly rose and turned into a large butterfly. It was, however, under +his net, and was quickly made his prisoner. We soon discovered the +curious arrangement by which the creature is enabled to escape capture. +The end of the upper wings terminated in a fine point, just as is the +case with the leaves of many tropical shrubs. The lower wings were more +obtuse, and lengthened out into a short thin tail. Between these two +points ran a dark curved line, representing the mid rib of a leaf, while +the other marks were radiated exactly like the lateral fans of leaves; +indeed, the wings of the creature when closed were so like a leaf, that +it was scarcely possible to distinguish it from those amidst which it +had pitched. + +As we rose higher and higher in this mountainous region towards which we +were bending our steps, gigantic ferns became more numerous. Among them +were most curious pitcher-plants. They took the form of half-climbing +shrubs, their pitchers, of various sizes and forms, hanging in numbers +from their leaves. Every ridge was now crowned with gigantic ferns, +which reminded us of the descriptions of the antediluvian world, when +ferns appear to have been the chief vegetation which covered the surface +of the globe.--I will not mention our dinner. + +It was now time to encamp for the night. Our first care was to make +arrangements for the accommodation of the young ladies. We had an +abundance of materials at hand, and soon cut down branches and leaves +sufficient to make a very comfortable bower in which they might rest. A +fire was then lighted, and similar bowers, though of less careful +construction, were erected for the rest of the party. Our uncle +arranged that one of the party should remain on watch. + +"I cannot tell what sort of creatures inhabit these wilds," he observed; +"but I have every reason to believe that many of those that range over +Borneo and Sumatra are to be found here. They have probably been +prevented coming to my territory by the river which separates it from +the rest of the island; but I have seen traces of the rhinoceros, and +trees broken down in a way elephants alone could accomplish. Wild boars +I have shot; and tigers and huge serpents, I have reason to believe, are +to be found in some parts of the island." + +"How delightful!" I exclaimed; but then I recollected the danger to +which Emily and Grace might be exposed. I said something to that +effect. + +"We must keep a careful watch," he answered; "and in truth I believe +that generally wild animals are more afraid of man than man need he of +them, if he is on his guard." + +I did not wish to frighten the girls, and therefore did not talk to them +of these things. As I lay down to waistcoat, I could not help thinking +of the various fierce creatures we might possibly meet with, and in my +dreams I was engaged in desperate encounters with all those my uncle had +mentioned, and not a few others--such as have no existence except in the +imagination. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY FOUR. + +EXCURSION CONTINUED--FEARFUL ENCOUNTER WITH A MONSTER. + +I was the first inhabitant of our hut awake. Daylight was just +breaking; and going out silently, not wishing to disturb the rest of the +party, I looked round me. Potto Jumbo, who had the morning watch, was +sitting by the fire; a few branches of trees stuck in the ground forming +a sufficient shelter from the night dews. He was leaning against them, +and had evidently fallen asleep, for the fire was almost out. I stood +for some minutes contemplating the strange scene. Surrounding us on +every side were the curious trees I have before described, festooned +with creepers. Here and there the bright flowers of some orchidaceous +plant ornamented their summits, or hung down from their boughs. I +thought to myself, if any natives are in the island, how easily we might +have been surprised; or if tigers lurk in its thickets, how easily one +of our party might be picked off. + +Presently Potto Jumbo sprang to his feet with a loud shout. He must +have been dreaming, and supposed that one of the animals I was thinking +of was approaching. His shout was echoed, it seemed, by a thousand +shrill voices; and looking up, I saw the whole of the trees surrounding +us alive with creatures--some trumpeting, some screeching, and others +making prolonged shrill whistlings; and from the high branches, like a +flock of birds, down came some forty or fifty monkeys, striking the tops +of the brushwood to which they clung, either with hands or tails, and +then off they went with the speed of arrows through the jungle. There +seemed to be several descriptions. Some were small creatures of a slate +colour; others of a light yellow, with long arms and long tails. The +noise they made quickly roused Emily and Grace, as well as the rest of +the party, who sprang out of their bowers, watching the proceedings of +our neighbours. Some made tremendous leaps from one branch of a tree to +another, a little lower down. First went one bold leader, taking a jump +towards a tree which it seemed scarcely possible he could reach. Then +the others followed, with more or less trepidation. Some seemed afraid +to take a leap till their companions began to move off, when, for fear +of being left alone, they threw themselves frantically into the air, +while two or three came crashing through the slender branches down to +the ground. + +"Oh, do catch one of those pretty creatures for us!" said Emily and +Grace. + +Oliver and I ran forward to catch them; but they were not too much hurt +to defend themselves; and one of them bit me so severely in the hand, +that I was glad to let him go; while the rest, picking themselves up, +hopped off at a rate which would have made pursuit useless. + +"I am very sorry," I said to Grace, "to lose the monkey; though I do not +think he would have proved a very amiable pet. However, I hope to be +more fortunate another time." + +My uncle laughed heartily at me, while he put some salve on my finger +and bound it up, the pain quickly subsiding under his treatment. + +We soon had our coffee-pot boiling, and we took our breakfast before +commencing our day's walk. The girls declared themselves fully able to +proceed. While we were sitting on the ground, I perceived a movement in +the boughs, and saw that the monkeys were coming back to have a further +look at us; and presently the boughs above our heads were filled with +curious prying black, grey, and yellow faces. I pointed them out to +Grace and Emily. + +"If we could but entice some of them to come down, perhaps we might +capture one for you," I observed. + +"Oh no, no; pray do not attempt it," said Grace, "or you will get +another bite. I thought they were such good-natured little creatures +that they would hurt no one." + +"Nor would they, young lady, if left alone," said my uncle. "However, I +have some tame ones at home, and you shall choose the most docile when +we return as your especial property. We must give them another +steeple-chase, however," he whispered; and suddenly starting up, he +uttered a loud cry and clapped his hands. + +Again the wood was full of living creatures, and away they went as +before, swinging from bough to bough, with the aid of their long tails, +in the most wonderful manner. We saw several further off on one side, +who moved in a different manner from the rest. + +"Those are apes," said our uncle, pointing them out. "I have one in my +collection which I will show you. It is the _Siamang syndactyla_." + +It was moving much slower than the monkeys, keeping lower down in the +underwood, but still it moved rapidly by means of its long arms. It +appeared to be about three feet high, while its arms were between five +and six feet across, and by them it was swinging itself along among the +trees at a rapid rate. Although at first I thought I could catch one, I +soon found that it could escape me as well as the monkeys had done. + +We now packed up to proceed on our journey. I should like to describe +more particularly some of the trees of the wonderful forest through +which we passed. In the lowlands near the shore were groves of +cocoa-nut palms, of which I have already spoken. Near them was the +curious pandanus or screw-pine. My uncle said he always called it a +trunk with branches growing at both ends. There were two species of it. +The one we saw had fragrant flowers. Its leaves are manufactured into +mats and baskets. Its fruit is of a spherical form, from four to six +inches in diameter, the surface being exactly divided by projections of +a pointed, pyramidal shape. I have already described the bamboos. As +we proceeded higher up we found ourselves among lofty fig-trees. Here +the number of orchidaceous plants greatly increased, hanging down from +the boughs of nearly all the trees, clinging to them so closely that +they often appeared to belong to the tree. The ferns, too, were in +great variety; among them were many curious pitcher-plants. Thirsty +from our walk, we were looking about for water, when my uncle went up to +one of these remarkable productions of nature. Each pitcher contained +about half a pint of water. Some were full of insects, but in others it +was perfectly limpid, and thankfully we drank it off. Though it was not +so cool as the juice of the cocoa-nut, still it served to quench our +thirst. Thus we found how God has so bountifully provided this region +with the greatest necessary of life, guarding with a thick shell the +produce of the palm on the lower lands, and allowing the cool breeze of +the mountains to temper the water collected in the cups of the +pitcher-plant. + +Instead of ascending the mountain--a task which the young ladies at all +events could not accomplish--we proceeded round it, towards a +curious-looking rock which rose up on one side. We made our way without +much difficulty to the gap, when we found ourselves on the summit of a +cliff, and looking down into a wonderful circular basin surrounded +entirely by precipitous rocks, while another gap beyond seemed to open +into a smaller lake at a lower elevation. It had apparently been the +crater of a volcano--so my uncle thought. The sides of the higher lake +were nearly three hundred feet high, we calculated, and covered in most +places with trees and shrubs. A beach or broad ledge extended round one +side as far as the further gap, on which we hoped we should have ample +space for walking and viewing the wonders of the lake. Our ambition was +now to reach the water, and we looked about on every side to discover +some practicable path by which we might gain it. After hunting about, +we found a way down the side of the mountain by which we hoped we could +accomplish our object. + +The jungle through which we had to force our way, however, was +wonderfully thorny. The creepers were thorny, even the bamboos were +thorny, while shrubs grew in a zig-zag and jagged fashion, forming an +inextricable tangle, through which it was difficult to cut our way. +Beautiful birds flitted in and out among the shrubs--grass-green doves, +large black cockatoos, golden orioles, and king-crows--their varied and +brilliant colours flashing brightly as they darted forth here and there +in the sunlight from out of the dark shade. The most beautiful, +perhaps, were the golden orioles, which my uncle afterwards told me are +often classed with the birds of paradise, and are sometimes placed in +the same genus as the regent bird of Australia. These, however, might +not have been the true golden oriole, because that bird is very rare, +and is an inhabitant of the mainland of New Guinea, though also found on +the island of Salwatty. We observed their nests cleverly suspended +between the horizontal forks of the outer branches of lofty trees, where +they are not likely to be reached by the larger serpents which prey on +birds. The paradise oriole has the throat, tail, and part of the wings +and back of a jet-black hue, but the rest of the body is of a brilliant +yellow colour, with the exception of the neck, which is covered by long +feathers of a deep orange, reaching some way down the back, somewhat as +do the hackles of a game-cock. The birds we now saw, though not exactly +like those I have mentioned, were still very beautiful, and I believe +rare. I cannot, however, attempt to describe but faintly the lovely +birds and insects we met with in our expedition. + +Just then even our uncle could pay but little attention to them, for we +all had to use our axes with untiring energy before we could make any +progress. At length, however, perseverance overcame all difficulties, +and we cut a narrow path through the thick belt which surrounded the +mountain. We then found ourselves beneath a lofty cliff, which, we +concluded, formed one side of the lake, and circling round it, we +reached what we at once guessed was the lower lake, where the cliffs +were of less height and far more broken. Emily and Grace sat down on +the top, while the rest of us began to make a path by which we might +descend to the level of the water. It was not a very easy task. +Sometimes Dick Tarbox, who led the way, had to be lowered down by a rope +to a ledge below us, cutting away the shrubs which impeded his progress, +leaving only certain stumps in the rock which would assist those who +followed. In some places he had to clear away the grass and earth to +allow of a firm footing; in others, he drove in pieces of bamboo, to +serve as supports to the hands or feet in our descent. At last he +reached the beach, and we all eagerly followed him. The lower lake was +very curious and beautiful, but we had an idea, from the glimpse we had +had of the inner one, that that was still more so. + +"The young ladies would be disappointed at not seeing this!" exclaimed +Oliver; "and I am sure that they would be able to come down. May I go +up and fetch them?" + +"We must go and lend them a hand, though," said Dick Tarbox, beginning +to ascend. + +I also went, while the rest of the party proceeded some way along the +beach towards the upper lake. We found the ascent far more easy than we +expected--indeed, it seemed as if the girls would have no great +difficulty in coming down. As we neared the top we heard them cry out, +and saw them standing by in an attitude of terror, looking towards the +jungle on the outer side of the lake. + +"Oh, come, come!" exclaimed Emily. "We saw a savage just now peering +among the trees! There he is! there he is! even now looking at us!" + +We hurried to their side. "Savage he is, miss," said Dick Tarbox; "but +he is not a human savage, I think. He is one of those big man-apes I +have heard tell of, though I never yet set eyes on one. I don't think, +however, he will venture up to where we are." + +I looked in the direction the girls were pointing, and there I saw a +large orang-outan some fifty feet below us. He kept dauntlessly gazing +up at us, as if doubting whether he should venture to approach. He was +a big hairy monster, with a black coat and a light-coloured face, with +enormous feet and hands, almost the height of a man. His face, as we +saw him, had a particularly savage expression, and he was evidently a +formidable enemy to encounter. Our shouts brought back the rest of the +party, who climbed up with their guns, for we had left ours at the foot +of the cliff. + +"A mias! a huge mias!" exclaimed my uncle, as he saw the orang-outan, +levelling his fowling-piece, Potto following his example. The mias was +standing holding on by a branch of a tree, as if about to ascend. At +the report of the fire-arms he hauled himself up to a branch, much as a +sailor would do, and deliberately walked along the bough, evidently +uninjured by the shots, which, if they had not missed altogether, could +have but slightly wounded him. Some of the trees, with large luscious +fruit, had evidently tempted him to come up to this hilly region, as the +mias seldom leaves the flat ground, where he spends the night. +Ascending from the bough, he caught hold of a branch of a tree which +crossed it by one of his long arms, and flung himself on to it with +great deliberation. He did not appear to jump, or spring, or in any way +to hurry himself, but we saw him then go to the end of another branch +and catch hold of an opposing bough. He then grasped them together with +both hands, and finding the other sufficiently strong to support him, +deliberately swung himself on to it; thus on he went among the lofty +summits of the trees, till he was lost to sight. + +It was some time before Emily and Grace could get rid of their fright +sufficiently to begin their descent. They had now plenty of people to +assist them, and ropes fastened round their waists to prevent the risk +of accidents. They soon reached the level of the water. We then +proceeded towards the gap. Here we were again stopped for some time, +finding a way by which we might ascend the cliffy sides. However, the +shrubs and the broken under-cliffs enabled us at length to climb up, +passing close to the waterfall formed between the two. The whole party +uttered an exclamation of surprise and delight when we entered within +the circle of the inner lake. The sides were covered with the most +beautiful and luxuriant vegetation. Jungle trees of every description +jutted out from the crevices of the rocks, their trunks and branches +bearing an endless variety of beautiful creepers in brilliant blossom, +hanging down in festoons to the very water's edge. Over our heads, +disturbed at our appearance, flew a number of pigeons and other birds of +beautiful plumage, backwards and forwards. The water was intensely +blue, and beautifully clear. + +"I should not be surprised but what this is one of the lakes I have +heard speak of which has no bottom," observed Dick Tarbox. "They say +that water-spirits and monsters of all sorts live in some of them. I do +not know what they would think at our coming among them." + +"I have heard of lakes without bottoms, but I have always found, on +fathoming them, that they were not so deep as was supposed," observed my +uncle. "I should like to try this one. It may be very deep, but I +suspect that it is much shallower than from the top of these cliffs down +to where we stand. What should you say, boatswain, if the rope you hold +in your hand, with a stone fastened to it, would reach the bottom and +give you some feet to spare?" + +"Well, sir, you know better than I do; but I should be surprised if by +fastening all the ropes we have together we found soundings." + +At last it was agreed that we should build a raft and try. We had ample +materials; for in one corner was a large grove of bamboos, and plenty of +other light wood trees growing about. We soon cut down some of the +larger bamboos, with ratan to secure the cross pieces, and had an amply +buoyant raft to carry one person out into the centre. I begged that I +might go on it, but Dick Tarbox said he would make the expedition. He +soon had a paddle formed out of bamboo, and sitting down on his somewhat +frail bark, away he went, with a coil of rope before him, to which a +stone was attached, into the middle of the lake. We all watched him +eagerly as he let down the stone, when lo, and behold, long before the +rope had run out, the stone had reached the bottom. + +"There must be a rock out here!" he exclaimed. "It cannot be so shallow +as this." Again he pulled up his stone, and pulled away between the +centre and the shore. "Soundings again!" he cried; "and rather less +than in the middle. I cannot make it out." + +He now paddled round and round the lake, dropping the stone every now +and then, and at length came round to the spot where he had embarked. + +"You are satisfied now," said Mr Sedgwick. "I have generally found it +to be the case that lakes which are reputed fathomless are like this +one." + +We all in turns had a paddle on the lake, and as the raft was found +large enough to support fully a couple of men, Emily and Grace got on +it, and I acted as their boatman. We took the circuit of the lake, +while they admired the beautiful scenery I have already described. Our +uncle meantime was hunting about for birds and butterflies. The gap, +when we were on the opposite side, had a curious appearance, being like +a large gateway, fully one hundred feet in height, though broken and +ruinous. The creepers also were seen to great advantage, some of them +falling in the most beautiful luxuriance from the very summits of the +surrounding heights down to the water's edge, many of them covered the +whole length with brilliant flowers. + +"What a delightful place for a pic-nic!" exclaimed Emily. + +"True, young lady," answered Mr Sedgwick; "and as all our meals are +pic-nics, I propose that we halt here and make our dinner. We have +water in abundance, and our provisions at our backs." + +A fire was at once kindled, the kettle which Potto carried at his back +unslung, and our various provisions produced. Not many birds had +hitherto been shot, and our larder was therefore but ill supplied. + +"I forgot all about eating!" exclaimed Mr Sedgwick; "but stay; we will +soon have some birds for the pot." + +Saying this, he proceeded along to the lower lake. The sound of his +fowling-piece, as he fired several times, reverberated strangely among +the rocks, making the birds fly to and fro in alarm at the unusual +sound. Never before perhaps had fire-arms been discharged in that +romantic region, but instinct told them that it boded them no good. In +a short time he returned with several pigeons and a couple of +parroquets. It seemed almost a sin to deprive such beautiful birds of +their plumage; but Potto Jumbo, influenced by no such notions, quickly +had them plucked and prepared for roasting. They were then stuck on +skewers, and in woodland fashion placed on forked sticks before the +fire. They were pronounced excellent, and quite as tender as if they +had been kept for a long time; indeed, in that hot climate the only way +to have them tender is to pluck and cook them before they have time to +grow cold. We had brought a supply of fruit, which we had plucked on +our way, as well as sago-bread and other articles, which altogether gave +us a luxurious repast. No spot could have been more lovely than that +where we sat. The bank was covered with soft, almost velvety grass, +being shaded constantly from the noonday sun, and the air felt cool, +though soft. I had just opened a durian, which I was handing to Grace +and Emily, who had got over their repugnance to the smell, and now +pronounced it the most delicious of fruits. One declared it had the +fragrance of pine-apple, another of the richest melon with cream and +strawberries, and the consistency of liquid blanc-mange, or more +correctly, perhaps, hasty pudding. Our uncle had lighted his pipe, and +lay back on the soft grass enjoying the scene. The three men, seated at +a little distance, followed his example. + +"What a delightful spot this would be to fix our abode on, if compelled +for ever to remain on this island," said Emily. + +"Oh, do not talk of remaining!" exclaimed Grace. "Beautiful it is, and +very thankful I am to be with you, but I cannot help thinking of my +father and mother, and how anxious they will be when the _Dugong_ does +not arrive as they expect at Singapore. Oh, it will break my mother's +heart, if she thinks any accident has happened to us. They will not +know what has occurred, and they will think perhaps that we have been +cut off by pirates, or that the vessel has gone down, in a hurricane, or +has been driven ashore among savages." + +Oliver and I tried to cheer her up. "Some vessel will surely appear off +here before long," I observed; "or if not, when Mr Thudicumb gets well +we must set to work and build a cutter sufficiently large to carry us +all away." + +While I was speaking, I heard a strange noise above our heads, and +looking up, I saw in the trees directly over us a dozen or more +long-armed monkeys, yellow-skinned fellows, with flesh-coloured faces. +Down they had come from branch to branch from the cliff above us. +Presently one made a spring, and seized hold of a fruit which Grace had +just taken. She screamed with alarm, as well she might. Oliver dashed +forward to seize the monkey, but before we could catch it, it had sprung +up again towards the nearest bough, and again hand over hand up the +branches, till he was far out of our reach. There he and his companions +sat, eating away at the fruit; but they soon quarrelled among +themselves, and the greater portion of it fell from their paws to the +ground. We could not help laughing at the audacity of the creatures. +Potto Jumbo especially was heartily amused, and lay back on the grass +shaking his sides with laughter. The girls' faces, too, indicative of +astonishment and dismay, amused me excessively. + +"Well, those are thieves," cried Dick Tarbox. "It is the first time, I +have a notion, they have ever seen a human face, and I suppose they take +us to be big apes or monkeys like themselves." + +The creatures seemed in no way alarmed at our gestures, nor did they +appear to fear the gun which Mr Sedgwick levelled at them. He lowered +it again, however. + +"No," he said; "they do not know better; and as we do not want to eat +them, it would be downright cruelty to kill the creatures." + +I was very glad of this, for I should have been sorry to have had any of +them hurt. The case would have been very different had my uncle wanted +one as a specimen. He then seemed to have no regard for the life of any +animals he required. He apparently considered that the honour he did +the creature by preserving it was ample amends for putting it to death. + +It was now time for us to recommence our return journey. + +"But shall we have to pass through the country of those dreadful apes?" +exclaimed Grace. "Surely if a number of them were to come together, +they might attack us." + +"No fear of that, young lady," said Mr Sedgwick. "They will seldom +injure any one unless they themselves are attacked, though the big +fellow you saw would be a formidable antagonist to any one unsupported." + +I thought so too, and was very thankful that we had come up in time. We +were making our way towards the shores of the lower lake, Mr Sedgwick +leading; but on this occasion we young people lingered behind. I was +walking with Grace; Oliver and Emily were a short distance behind us. +Emily had brought her sketch-book, which she had used in taking views +from the inner lake. Presently Oliver came running after us to say that +she wished to take a view of the gap, and bid us wait a few minutes for +her while she hastily sketched it. I went on to the party ahead to beg +them also to stop, or, at all events, when they had found the way, to +wait till we had come up to them. I had almost got back to where I had +left Grace, when I heard a loud scream, and I saw a huge black monster-- +so he seemed to me--drop from the branch of a tree near to where my +sister was standing. Oliver quickly ran forward and threw himself +between her and the creature, which I now saw was a huge mias, very like +the one we had before seen. Oliver had his gun in his hand, and +presenting it at the animal's head, he drew the trigger, but it failed +to go off, and the mias closed upon him. One grip of the fierce +creature's powerful mouth would, it seemed, have been sufficient to +deprive him of life. Oliver had lifted up his gun with the other hand. +The creature seized the weapon. What was my horror the next moment to +see it rising on its hind legs, and bending forward, fix its teeth into +Oliver's arm, which he had raised to defend his head. Meantime Merlin, +who had been with the rest of the party, came bounding back, and +attacked with his powerful jaws the leg of the mias. The creature for +an instant let go Oliver's arm. + +"Fly, Miss Emily! fly!" he cried out. "Never mind me." + +"But I do! I do!" exclaimed Emily; "I cannot have you hurt for my +sake." + +"Fly! fly!" again cried Oliver. + +While this was going on Grace was shrieking loudly, and I shouting out +to our friends to come to Oliver's assistance, while I ran forward to +give him what aid I could. I did not of course stop to consider the +danger I also was in, as the beast would have probably seized us both, +had I got within his grasp. I also cried out to Emily to fly. I saw +that not only her safety depended on her doing so, but that of Oliver, +for he would not move till she was at a distance from the orang-outan. +Meantime the rest of our party were hurrying up to our support. Oliver +sprang back to avoid the creature's hand-like claws, which he stretched +out towards him. Never had I seen anything so ferocious as those +powerful paws and the grinning row of teeth exhibited as he ran forward +to attack us, regardless for the moment of Merlin, who was now in +greater danger than we were. The mias still held the gun in his claws. +While he again advanced towards Oliver, I levelled my fowling-piece and +fired. The ball with which it was loaded, however, although it +certainly passed through the creature's neck, only increased his fury, +without apparently greatly injuring him. Oliver's danger was fearful. +Already the creature was within a couple of yards of him, in spite of +the impediment which Merlin offered. I had no time to load again, +though I attempted to do so as I retreated, shouting at the top of my +voice, and urging Oliver to do the same, in the hope that we might +frighten the huge ape. He, however, was in no way alarmed by our shouts +and cries. He still advanced, holding the musket. Already, if he was +to stretch out one of his long arms, he might again grasp Oliver and +draw him towards him. Oh, what would I not have given for a loaded gun +at that moment! In vain I attempted to load mine while I stepped +backward. Oliver was attempting to escape; but just then his heel +caught in the root of a tree, which grew at the base of the cliff, and +down he fell, rolling in the sand. His fate appeared to be sealed. I +cried out in terror and alarm. The mias, uttering a shout of mocking +laughter, seemed prepared to throw himself on his victim. At that +instant, as he changed the gun from one hand to the other, apparently +intending to get rid of Merlin before he attacked Oliver, it suddenly +exploded, bursting into twenty fragments, and wounding him severely in +the hands, face, and chest. He uttered a loud scream of anger, but +still advanced. Suddenly, when I thought that my friend's life would be +in an instant more taken from him, the creature fell back to the ground, +where he lay struggling violently, biting the earth and tearing it up +with his claws, while Merlin, evading his clutches, attacked him +wherever he could get a gripe, without risk of being seized, and +prevented him probably from again rising. + +"Oh, he is killed! he is killed!" cried Emily, who had hitherto stood +terror-stricken, running to Oliver and kneeling down by him. She heard +the report, and probably thought that he had been wounded by the gun. + +"No, no, Miss Emily; do not be alarmed, I am not much hurt," said +Oliver, trying to lift himself up. "The creature only tore my flesh, +and I have sprained my foot in falling. I have been mercifully +preserved." + +For some time, however, Emily could scarcely be convinced of the fact. +There lay the monstrous mias, still struggling violently, while Merlin +pertinaciously hung on to him. I had now reached Oliver, and assisted +Emily in supporting him, while we put a safer distance between the +creature and ourselves. Grace, who was far more timid than Emily, had +stood transfixed, as it were, to the ground, unable to advance or fly. +The rest of the party now came up, and a blow from Dick's hatchet +deprived the mias of life. + +"I suppose he good for dinner," observed Potto Jumbo, surveying him. "I +cut steak out of him before we go away." + +"Out on you for a cannibal!" exclaimed Tarbox, with a look of horror. +"I would as soon think of eating a nigger boy." + +"No, no, Massa Tarbox," answered Potto, in an indignant tone. "Nigger +boy got soul. Dis," and he gave the brute a kick with his foot, "just +like hog or cow." + +"You may spare yourself the trouble of cutting a steak out of him," said +Roger Trew. "I do not think any of us would make up our minds to eat +him, whatever he may be." + +"If it was not so far off, I should have liked the skin, though," said +Mr Sedgwick. "However, we will hang him up in a tree, and some day I +may have his skeleton, when the ants have picked it clean." + +Under his direction the men now got some ratan, with which they +surrounded the body of the monster, and then, in a sort of framework, +they hoisted him up to the stoutest branch of a tree which they could +manage to reach. We left him there, for all the world, as Roger Trew +observed, like a pirate hanging in chains, and then began our homeward +march with greater speed than before, to make amends for the time we had +lost. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY FIVE. + +TERMINATION OF OUR EXCURSION. + +We made our way along the shores of the lower lake till we came out by +the side of a beautiful cascade, which fell down over the cliff into a +river below us, whence the water flowed away, we concluded, towards the +sea; but the dense forest prevented us seeing the course it took. The +lower lake I have been describing was raised but a little way above the +level of the country. The height of the cascade was fifty feet; and, +giving another fifty for the fall of the river, we supposed that we were +not much more than one hundred feet above the sea. My uncle, having +examined his compass, now settled, as far as he was able, the course we +were to take. The river would be our guide, we saw, for a considerable +distance; indeed, the stream we crossed by the bamboo bridge was +evidently a portion of it. Turning back, we saw, rising above us, the +lofty mountain, a shoulder of which we had crossed. We were now better +able to judge of its height. Numerous other lofty hills rose on either +side of it--mostly bare of trees--some almost black, others of a shining +white, which might have been mistaken at a distance for snow; while, +from the centre of the cone, wreaths of smoke circled upwards to the +sky, giving unmistakable signs of its volcanic character. Our uncle +looked at it earnestly. + +"It seems to me to be sending forth denser smoke than I have hitherto +observed," I heard him remark to Dick Tarbox. "I hope it is not going +to play us any trick." + +"Maybe a little more tobacco has been put into the pipe," observed the +boatswain, in return; "and the old gentleman, whoever he is, who is +smoking it, is having a harder pull than usual." + +"I hope so; but I had rather he had put off his smoking for a few weeks +longer, till we are clear of the place," said my uncle, turning round. + +I remembered the fearful danger Oliver and I had escaped when carried +off by the Papuans from our island; and I prayed that we might be again +preserved from a similar catastrophe. We had made no great progress +when it was time to encamp. + +"I must charge you, my friends," said Mr Sedgwick, "whoever is on the +watch at night, to keep a bright look-out. The orang-outans are our +least formidable enemies, for it is seldom that they will attack a +person, as the one did we have just encountered; but tigers are far more +daring; and if we were to allow the fire to get low, we should run a +great risk of a visit from one of them." + +We had still an hour or two of daylight. We were all somewhat tired +with our long climb: the girls especially required rest. We immediately +set to work to form our encampment, making huts, as we had done on the +previous nights. Having collected a good supply of dried leaves, we +spread mats over them inside the young ladies' bower, to which they +retired to rest while supper was preparing. We had still some birds +remaining; but my uncle took his gun, saying that he would try to shoot +a few more for our meal, and I begged to be allowed to accompany him. + +"You will not have much difficulty in providing our supper," I observed, +"considering the number of birds flying about in all directions." + +The woods were indeed full of sounds of all sorts. I fancied that among +them I could distinguish the voices of wild beasts. + +"Hark!" I said. "Surely that must be a lion! It is just like the cry +I have heard they often give." + +My uncle laughed. + +"No, indeed," he said. "The voices you hear are those of pigeons." + +I could scarcely suppose, however, that he was right, so loud and +booming was the sound which came from the woods. + +"Oh, what beautiful apples are those?" I observed, as I looked up at a +tree in which a number of various birds were collected, among which were +several white cockatoos. "I should like to carry some back to the +camp." + +The fruit we were looking at was round, with a smooth shining skin of a +golden orange colour, which might rival in appearance the golden apples +of the Hesperides. + +"Let them remain where they hang," he answered. "Whoever might attempt +to eat them would certainly be made very ill, if they did not die. +Those beautiful apples possess the most poisonous properties of any +fruit in these regions. They are what we naturalists call +_Apocynaceae_. The birds, however, eat those rosy seeds which you see +displayed from the ripe fruit, which has burst open.--But stay! There's +a fellow; I must have him." He raised his gun, and brought down a fine +jungle cock, which Merlin, who had accompanied us, instantly ran forward +to catch. He brought it to us, highly pleased with his performance. +"He, at all events, will afford a supper for a couple of us, hungry as +we may be," said my uncle. "This fellow, or his ancestors rather, is +the grandfather of all our domestic poultry in England. They have lost +a good deal of their beauty, to be sure, by civilisation, though they +may have improved in size and egg-laying powers." + +I was fortunate in shooting a couple of great green fruit-pigeons +directly afterwards; indeed, in a short time we had as many birds as +would supply us for supper and breakfast. We were passing through a +wood which consisted chiefly of the great palm, which my uncle said the +Malays call the _gubbong_. The trees were in various conditions. Some +were simply in leaf, others had flowers on them, others fruit, while +many were dead, apparently ready to fall. The leaves were large and +fan-shaped, and I remarked that those which had flowers were destitute +of leaves; indeed, I could scarcely have supposed that they were the +same trees. The full-grown trees had lofty cylindrical stems, and were +mostly two hundred feet in height, and two or three feet in diameter. +The flowers were on the summit, in the form of a huge terminal spike. +On the top of this was the fruit, consisting of masses of smooth round +balls, of a green colour, and about an inch in diameter. My uncle told +me that each tree only flowers once in its life; and that when the fruit +ripens the tree dies, though it remains standing a year or two before it +falls to the ground. It was on a branch of one of these trees that I +saw the pigeons, where they had settled after feeding on the fruit. + +We had gone a little way after I had last fired, when, as we were +standing under a tree looking for another shot, a shower of the fruit I +have described came falling down thickly about our heads. We quickly +ran from under it, when, looking up, my uncle shouted loudly, and +immediately a loud chattering was heard, and away scampered a whole +tribe of monkeys, making an enormous rustling as they leaped among the +dead palm-leaves. One would have fancied that some huge beast was +rushing through the wood, so loud was the noise. + +It was now time to turn back to the camp. My uncle was a little in +advance. He had just fired at a couple of birds, one of which he had +brought to the ground, when I saw him start back with an expression of +alarm which I had never before heard him utter. Merlin, who was near +me, stood still for a moment in an unusual way, poking his head out +somewhat like a pointer; and there I saw on the ground, not ten paces +from my uncle, a huge snake, with head erect, as if about to make a +spring. I well knew that it must be of a venomous character from the +exclamation that I heard. Merlin instinctively seemed to think the +same. I dreaded lest it should make its spring. In an instant it might +do so. I trembled lest I should miss it. I might run the risk also, in +firing, of hitting my uncle. I would gladly have rushed forward in his +defence. In another instant its envenomed fangs might be fixed in his +body. I levelled my fowling-piece, and took a steady aim. I fired! As +I did so, Merlin rushed forward with a bound. I thought I saw through +the smoke the snake in the air. My uncle had sprung on one side, +lifting his gun by the muzzle. "I am safe!" he shouted out. "Walter, +you did it well!" + +The snake had sprung, but, wounded by the shot, had failed to reach its +object, and had been struck to the ground by the butt of the gun. I did +not suppose from what I had seen of my uncle that he could be so +agitated as he now was. He knew, he told me, the venomous nature of the +serpent, and that had it struck him, he should probably have been dead +in the course of a few minutes. + +"You saved my life by your coolness, my boy," he said. "I believe this +serpent is rare in the island, for I have never seen one like it; and it +is far more dangerous than the larger python, of which there are many. +They can swallow a deer whole, but seldom attack human beings. They +would take our friend Merlin down in a gulp; but he probably has +sagacity enough to keep out of their way, so you need not be alarmed on +his account." + +I begged that I might carry the serpent as a trophy to the camp. To do +so I coiled it round a stick, and secured it with a piece of thin ratan. +As I walked along, Merlin every now and then came up sniffing behind +me, and seemed very much inclined to have a bite at it. We saw several +more jungle cocks on our way. They were very like the common game-cock, +but the voice was much shorter, and more abrupt. The Malays call it the +_bekeko_. We had reached an open space, when we saw running before us a +couple of the most magnificent peacocks. Their tails, spread out as +they ran along, were fully seven feet in length. They had been feeding +apparently on the ground, till they were frightened at our approach. +Having the snake over my shoulder, I could not fire. My uncle raised +his gun, but recollected that he had not loaded. He stopped to do so, +when the birds, running on rapidly for a short distance, rose obliquely +in the air, and, to my surprise, flew over some lofty trees before them +and disappeared. I could scarcely have supposed that birds with such +large appendages could have risen thus easily. It was a magnificent +sight, as they spread out their spangled tails to aid them in their +flight. + +At length we reached the camp, where Potto Jumbo had already prepared +part of the supper, and was eagerly waiting our return to cook the game +we might bring. The tea was boiling in our kettle, and we sat down to +our repast, while he plucked and cooked the remainder. Emily and Grace +came out of their bower, and officiated at our rural tea-table. Tarbox +and Roger Trew arrived directly afterwards. They had gone on an +excursion down the river, and reported that they had seen a large animal +bounding through the underwood. They had not got a clear sight of it; +but, from the account they gave, my uncle pronounced it to be a tiger. + +"I must again warn you, my friends, to be on the alert," he observed. +"The scent of our cooking may attract him here; but unless he is very +hungry, I do not think he will venture among us." + +All the party were eager to examine the snake which I had brought in. +Emily and Grace, however, shuddered when they saw it, and still more so +when they heard the risk to which Mr Sedgwick had been exposed. He +again complimented me on the coolness I had displayed when firing at the +animal. + +Before leaving the camp, we had persuaded Oliver to lie down. My uncle +examined his arm, and bathed it in the cool water which we brought from +the river. + +"You are in good health, or it might have been a serious affair," he +observed. "However, I hope, after a night's rest, you will be able to +proceed on the journey." + +Oliver said nothing, but I saw by the expression of his countenance that +he was suffering a good deal of pain; indeed, it seemed surprising, when +I looked at his slight arm, and thought of the big jaws of the mias, +that it had not been bitten through. As may be supposed, after the +warning we had received, we kept up a blazing fire all night, and +instead of one watchman, we had two, always awake--either Roger Trew and +I, or the boatswain and Potto Jumbo. All night long our ears were +assailed with strange sounds--the croaking of frogs, the shrieks of +night-birds, and the terror-inspiring cries of beasts of prey. I went +to sleep with them still ringing in my ears, and when I awoke, the same +sounds were heard. I had been seated on the ground for some time, +carefully making up the fire, when a loud rustling among the dried +leaves and shrubs at a little distance reached my ears. I started up, +fowling-piece in hand, and telling Roger Trew to be on his guard, +advanced carefully towards the spot whence the sound had proceeded. I +was standing near the camp, behind Emily and Grace's hut, when I saw the +head of a huge creature with glaring eyes fixed on me. Still I did not +like to arouse my friends. I kept my hand, however, on the trigger, +ready to fire should it advance, for it seemed as if it was about to +make a spring towards me. There I stood gazing at the animal, with the +animal gazing at me, and wondering, probably, what sort of a creature I +was. I doubted whether it would be wise to fire; for though my gun was +loaded with ball, I might possibly miss it, when it was likely to become +more furious than if let alone. I cast one glance behind me at our +leafy village, towards which I slowly retreated. As soon as I got near +enough for Roger Trew to hear me, I asked him to accompany me to the +spot where I had been, that we might be sure what the creature was. He +was soon by my side. + +"Why, a tiger, to be sure!" he exclaimed, levelling his musket. + +He fired, and there was a loud rustling among the trees, as if some +large creature were bounding through them. I caught a glimpse of it, +and fired. In an instant the whole camp was alarmed. The girls looked +out of their bower with scared looks, wondering what had happened, while +my uncle and Dick Tarbox came out with their guns in their hands. + +"I thought it would be so," said the former; "but you have done well to +keep the creature at a distance. However, he is perhaps not far off, +and we may before long have another shot at him." + +We had some difficulty in persuading the girls to return to their bower +after this, while my uncle and Roger Trew insisted on remaining on watch +for the remainder of the night. We added fresh fuel to our fire, and +loaded and frequently fired our muskets, and kept, as may be supposed, a +very strict watch. Next morning we found some hair of the creature in +the spot where he had been observed clinging to the bushes, while drops +of blood were seen for some distance in the direction he had taken. + +At an early hour we proceeded on our road to the house. The banks of +the river were very picturesque, though there was not much water in it. +It was, however, my uncle supposed, the only full stream in the island. +He had discovered the beds of several others, which remained perfectly +dry. We were eagerly looking out in the hope of seeing another mias, my +uncle being as anxious as any one. He had some time before, he told us, +captured a couple; but one of them had managed to escape, and the other, +left alone, had pined for his mate, while he evidently resented the +close captivity to which he was subjected. Proceeding down the banks of +the river, we came to a part where, though not much increased in width, +it was evidently deeper, with two or three calm pools, over which the +trees threw their boughs, clearly reflected on the smooth surface. At +the lower end of one of the pools I caught sight of what appeared to be +a log floating on the water. Presently I saw it moving against the +stream. "There must be a powerful eddy there," I thought. I pointed it +out to Mr Sedgwick. After looking at it for an instant, he made a sign +to the rest of the party to keep back. We were all collected together +behind a bush, through the branches of which we could observe the banks +of the river below us. Presently there was a rustling in the underwood +in the direction we were looking, and we caught sight of a huge +orang-outan making his way down to the water. Some fruit-bearing tree +hung over it, in the branches of which he took his seat, and began to +eat away at his leisure, letting the husks and rind fall into the water, +and now and then a whole fruit. The log, so it still seemed, was coming +close under where the baboon was seated, and remained stationary. The +orang-outan apparently took no notice of the object in the water. + +"If we were nearer, we should see a pair of wicked eyes looking up out +of the end of that log," whispered my uncle, "with some rows of +formidable teeth, and a huge mouth below it." + +"What! is that log a crocodile?" I asked. + +"No doubt about it," was the answer. "The creature expects to make its +dinner off the mias; but from what I have heard, the mias will be too +clever to be caught by it. But we will see." + +After a time, the mias, having eaten as much food as he required, +descended the tree towards the edge of the water, holding on to a branch +with one of his powerful hands, while he stooped down to spoon out the +water with the other. By an almost imperceptible motion the crocodile +approached; but the mias, although he appeared to be only intent on +quenching his thirst, had evidently a corner of his eye resting on the +seemingly harmless log. The crocodile thought it was sure of its prey, +and opening its huge jaws, attempted to seize the mias. The latter, +however, swung himself quickly up the tree with his arms, and remained +looking down on the crocodile within a few feet of its jaws. Then +quietly stooping down, he held out a hand within as many inches of his +enemy's nose. This, evidently, excited the crocodile's desire to get +hold of him, and the amphibious monster began to climb up the bank of +the river. The mias waited quietly till it was within two feet of him, +and then swung himself along a short distance above it from bough to +bough, stopping again when the crocodile had got securely up the bank. +As the crocodile got near him, he proceeded on a little further; and +thus he went on till he had allured the monster to a considerable +distance from the stream. What he was going to do we could not +conjecture; indeed, so daring had the mias become, that it seemed very +likely, after all, he would fall into the crocodile's jaws. Suddenly, +however, we saw him climb up a tree to some distance, and run along a +branch which hung directly over where the crocodile was crawling. Then +suddenly he flung himself off the branch right on the animal's back, and +with his powerful fists began belabouring away at its head and eyes. It +seemed, from the movements of the crocodile, that it was already +blinded. In vain it snapped its enormous jaws--the loud sound, as its +huge teeth met each other, reverberating through the woods. The mias +had not the slightest difficulty in keeping his position on the scaly +monster's back, as its movements were far too slow to throw him off. He +continued belabouring it with his fists till it ceased to move. Then, +as the upper jaw was lifted up, he seized it in his powerful grasp, and +placing his feet upon its neck, with a power which his lever-like +position and prodigious strength made irresistible, he literally tore +back the monster's jaw. Having done this, he sprang up a tree, and +awaited the result of the injuries he had inflicted. The creature was, +however, not completely dead; but though it struggled violently and +moved its tail about, its once formidable jaw had lost its means of +doing harm. After sitting there a little time we saw him, as if content +with his triumph, move off through the forest among the lofty branches +of the trees, swinging himself from one to the other with an ease which +gave almost grace to his movements. + +"The fellow deserves his victory. We will not attempt to shoot him," +said Mr Sedgwick. + +Indeed, I suspect by that time he might easily have escaped our bullets, +had we attempted to kill him. We now hurried out from our shelter, +eager to see the injuries which the mias had inflicted on his +antagonist. There it lay, utterly helpless, and we could stand by and +examine its huge proportions and strong coat of armour without danger. +Its struggles became fainter and fainter, and in a short time it seemed +perfectly still and dead. Knowing the strength of the crocodile, it +gave us a good idea of the immense power of muscle exercised by the +mias; and Oliver said it made him feel doubly grateful that he had +escaped from the creature which had so nearly killed him. His hurts +still gave him pain. We stopped every now and then that a cooling +lotion might be applied to them, and he got over the ground as well as +the rest of us. + +Our return journey gave us rather more anxiety than we had felt on the +previous days. The knowledge that there were wild beasts on the island +kept us constantly on the alert; but, for my part, I dreaded those huge +serpents more than anything else. They none of them gave signs of their +approach, as the rattlesnake of America does, while several were of a +most venomous description. + +We had been going along, keeping a bright look-out on either side, when, +being ahead as usual, my uncle looking out for game, I saw a number of +birds flying round and round a tree in a curious fashion. I was on the +point of levelling my gun and firing, when I thought I would refrain, +that I might ascertain what they were about. My uncle just then came +up, having observed the same unusual movement of the birds. Most of +them were wood-pigeons. + +"Look up there," said my uncle in a whisper. "Do you see that seeming +branch, and the huge lifeless creeper clinging to the trunk?" + +I earnestly watched the object he pointed at, when I perceived that what +I took to be the stump of a branch was in reality the head of a huge +serpent, whose body was coiled round the tree. The birds came nearer +and nearer. One beautiful pigeon was standing on a bough directly above +the serpent's head, while others of gay plumage flitted round and round, +evidently brought there by some fascinating power it was exerting. The +upper part of its body was not coiled round the tree, but simply pressed +against it, so that in an instant it could reach to a considerable +distance. We watched without uttering a sound, and suddenly its tongue +projected from its mouth, and, quick as lightning, it darted forward its +head and seized the beautiful pigeon on the nearest branch. So rapid +was the movement, that I thought the bird had fallen to the ground; but, +as we looked, we saw by the swelling in the creature's throat that it +had secured its prey. Again it drew back into its former position, +where it remained perfectly motionless; while the other birds came +nearer and nearer, and one at length took the place of its unfortunate +fellow which had been captured. After a little time the first bird was +swallowed, and another caught in the same manner. I was anxious to +shoot the serpent. I fired, but missed, I suppose, for the creature did +not move. My uncle then took aim at its head. He killed it apparently; +but instead of falling down, it remained coiled up, the head as it fell +catching in the fork of a branch, which held it securely. There it +hung, and we were unable to reach it to ascertain more particularly the +species to which it belonged. The birds, frightened by the report, flew +away. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY SIX. + +AN EXPEDITION ALONG THE COAST--PIRATES APPEAR. + +The nature of the ground had led us somewhat out of the course for the +house. We now struck across the country, hoping to reach it, the ground +being less covered with trees and underwood. We had gone for some +distance, when we saw before us a high mound. It could not be called a +mountain, but it was of considerable elevation, and of a conical shape, +with a flat top. My uncle believed that it had been formed by volcanic +action, though now being covered with brushwood and herbage and a few +tall trees, it was evident that it had been thrown up some time. We +climbed to the top of it, expecting to find a view of the sea beyond; +but the trees which clothed the base were too lofty to allow us to see +to any great distance. Here and there, however, there was a small gap, +through which we caught a glimpse of the ocean. + +"This would make a fine place for a fort, if any of those pirate fellows +come this way," observed Dick Tarbox as I was standing near him. "I +would undertake to fortify it against all comers, if we had a little +time to make ready. I have seen some work of that sort in my younger +days, when I served aboard a man-of-war; and it would require daring +fellows to get inside such a place as we could make it, if we defended +it with the spirit which I know we should. Why, bless you, Walter, the +young ladies and the old Frau would load our muskets for us, and we +might blaze away till we had picked off every Malay who might attempt to +get up the hill." + +"But why do you think pirates are likely to come here?" I asked. + +"As to that, they are cruising about in these seas, and are as likely to +come here as to any other place, if they think they can get anything by +coming. Your uncle did wisely to build his house in the forest out of +sight, or he would have been carried off long ago; and as they have not +been here for some time, it is the more likely that they will come +soon." + +There was a hollow in the centre of the cone which had probably formed +the mouth of the old volcano, if volcano it had been, thus making a rim +or bank all the way round; and on the top of this Tarbox proposed +erecting palisades, and a stage, from which we might fire. By making +hollows in the earth where we might store our goods and provisions, and +where the ladies might remain free from the risk of shot, our fort would +be perfect. My uncle overheard our conversation. "I hope there is +little risk of such an event," he observed carelessly. The wood below +us was so thick, that it seemed scarcely possible we could penetrate it. +However, we were compelled to get there some way or other, or we should +have had to go back the way we had come. While hunting about, we found +what appeared to be the bed of a stream, though perfectly dry. My +uncle, on examining it, said he was sure it led in the direction we +wished to go. After proceeding a little way, we found that it was +entirely free of trees or shrubs. The bottom was covered with stones, +rounded by the once boiling torrent which poured down from the high +ground during the rainy season. They were, however, not spheres, but +disk-shaped fragments of slate, very thin, the sharp corners rounded off +by the water. Here and there, too, we found boulders of opaque, +milk-white quartz. Generally the bed was level, but occasionally there +were holes where the torrent had been wont to rest in its course towards +the ocean. We proceeded along it at a far more rapid rate than we had +hitherto been able to move. The shadows which came across our path had +been growing longer and longer, when my uncle recognised some trees +which grew in the neighbourhood of the house. We had once more to use +our axes, and by exerting them actively, we cut our way through to the +path which he had formed. It was almost dusk when we saw the high +pointed roof of the house before us. Our shouts brought out the +inmates, the Frau leading the way, though not accustomed to running. +She clasped Emily and Grace in her arms, bursting into tears when she +saw them. + +"Oh! so glad you come back!" she exclaimed. "We so frightened that you +have been carried away by de pirates!" + +What she could mean we could scarcely understand, nor was Tanda at first +very explicit. Mr Hooker, however, after our greetings were over, told +us that as Tanda had been on the sea-shore, collecting shell-fish as a +variety to their repast, he had seen, at no great distance from the +land, several prows, which, from their build and general appearance, he +was sure were those of Sooloo rovers, or perhaps pirates from the coast +of Borneo. He had just arrived with the alarming intelligence, and he +was afraid they were coming to land on the island. The fading light +would scarcely enable us to discover them, for though a few minutes +before it had been broad daylight, darkness comes on so rapidly in that +latitude, that day, as it were, leaps into night in the course of a few +minutes. We hurried down, however, to the beach; but when we got there, +we could only distinguish in the far distance some shadowy forms, which +might have been the piratical vessels. Which way they were steering, +however, the most practised eyes among us could not discover, and +directly afterwards they were totally hid from sight. We returned to +the house to consult what was to be done. + +"If you would take my advice, gentlemen," said Mr Thudicumb, "you will +have provisions done up, and arms and ammunition ready for a quick +march, and anything else that you consider most valuable to carry away. +We will then station a look-out down on the beach, or at the end of +Flagstaff Rock, to give us early notice of the approach of the enemy. +If they come, they are pretty sure to find this house out; and, if they +get hold of us, to knock us on the head or cut our throats. As, +however, you have explored the interior of the country, we shall know in +what direction to go, and we shall be able to have the start of them, +and may therefore get away into a safe place, where they cannot find us. +Probably they will be content with such booty as they can find here-- +though there is not much to their taste--and will, after a time, take +themselves off." + +Mr Thudicumb's advice was considered good, and my uncle and Mr Hooker +agreed to adopt it. + +"If they do come, though, what a grievous pity it would be to have all +our collection destroyed," said Mr Hooker. "Is there no place where we +can stow them in safety?" + +"We may hide them away, certainly," answered my uncle; "but the pirates +are pretty sure to ferret them out, thinking that some treasure is +within; and though they may not carry them away, they will break open +the cases, and then the contents will very soon be destroyed." + +"Still we must give them a chance of safety," said Mr Hooker; "and +after we have made the arrangements for our flight, we must see what can +be done with them." + +The poor Frau was in a state of great agitation and alarm, but Emily and +Grace were very far from frightened. + +"We will help you to fight the pirates, if they come," said Emily; "and +with so many brave men, I am sure we shall beat them off." + +"And you must teach me to load a musket," said Grace. "I think I know +how to do it, but I am not quite certain. I hope, however, they will +run away before we have to fire at them. I don't like the thought of +your having to kill people. It is very dreadful!" + +Before we sat down to supper all arrangements were made. The girls were +excessively busy. Each had made up a large package of various articles +which they thought it would be necessary to carry--provisions and other +things. It was arranged that two men should go down to the beach at a +time to watch. Tanda and Dick Tarbox agreed to go first, and Potto +Jumbo and Roger Trew were to take the second part of the night. + +"I think, however, you need not trouble yourselves, my friends," said +Mr Sedgwick, "for they will scarcely attempt to approach this coast in +the dark. There are but few places that I have visited in the +neighbourhood where boats could come ashore without risk, and they would +scarcely find them out, unless with daylight." + +This remark somewhat comforted the Frau, and we had supper before Tanda +and Tarbox started. Mr Hooker and the mate had much recovered. The +former was in much better spirits than he had been since he landed. +Altogether we had a very pleasant meal, and no one would have supposed, +seeing us seated round the table, that a piratical fleet was in the +neighbourhood, likely to attack us. + +After Tarbox and Tanda had set off, however, the spirits of the party +began to flag. No one cared to go to bed, as we did not know at what +moment we might be roused up. As the night drew on we became more and +more anxious. It was indeed a trying time, for even should they not +land at night, it was too probable that they would be down upon us +before daybreak. Still we could not help anxiously waiting for that +time. The hours appeared very long. Now and then I fell off to sleep, +and was awoke either by the noises of the animals in my uncle's +menagerie, or by some strange sounds from the neighbouring forests--the +voices of night-birds or beasts of prey. At last the two men who had +taken the first watch came back, reporting that they had seen nothing; +then Potto Jumbo, who had been lying down snoring loudly, started up, +and with Roger Trew went down to the shore. The second part of the +night appeared even longer than the first. Still I knew that it would +have an end. At length the streaks of early dawn appeared in the +eastern sky. The usual sounds of returning day came up from the forest. +The birds began to sing their cheerful notes, and ere long the sunbeams +lighted up the topmost branches of the lofty trees above our abode. +Just then the black and Roger Trew returned. "Hurrah, hurrah!" sung out +the black, "dey all sail away, and no come here!" Roger corroborated +his companion's statement; and Oliver and I, running down to the shore, +caught a glimpse of the pirates' sails, if pirates they were, just +sinking below the horizon. It was some time, however, before Frau +Ursula's mind could be tranquillised. She insisted that if they were in +the neighbourhood they would very likely return. + +"Why do you think they will come here, good Frau?" said Mr Hooker. +"They are not likely to be aware that anybody is on this island, and +their object is to attack well-laden traders or towns, where booty can +be obtained. Even if they knew of our existence, we have little here to +tempt them." + +It was, however, but too probable that had they caught sight of the +wreck, a large portion of which was still above water, they would have +come in, and we might have suffered severely, had they not either +carried us off as captives or put us to death. We had therefore great +reason to be thankful that they had passed by without visiting the +island. + +Mr Thudicumb, though still not well enough to begin building the +vessel, assisted us in repairing the boat. I was anxious to go out and +fish; for having gained a good deal of experience with poor Macco, I was +in hopes of being able to supply the table with the result of my +industry. We had fortunately brought some fishing-lines and hooks. I +proposed manufacturing some lobster-baskets such as I had seen used, in +the hope of catching lobsters or crabs. We had plenty of materials in +the smaller creepers, some of which were of a tough fibre; and Roger +Trew, like many more sailors, understood basket-work. We were therefore +not long in manufacturing a dozen pots, which we baited with pieces of +pork. I should have said that my uncle had domesticated several pigs +which he had caught young, and which ran about in the neighbourhood of +the house, without any wish apparently to stray further. Roger Trew, +Oliver, and I made the first expedition, while the rest of the party +were making preparations for the vessel. It was not settled, however, +where she was to be built. We agreed, however, that in the +neighbourhood of the house it would be very inconvenient to launch her. +Our first expedition was very successful, and we brought home a good +supply of fish. The next day we carried out our lobster-pots, to try +our fortune with them. Before returning home after fishing we pulled +along the coast, when we saw at a distance a lofty cliff, with a number +of large birds flying about it. Some went off to a great distance, and +did not, as far as we could see, return. The report we gave of these, +on our return, made Mr Sedgwick desirous of accompanying us on our next +expedition. + +"They must be, I suspect, from your account of them, Walter, cormorants, +or rather that species of them known as the frigate-bird." + +No one is so eager as a naturalist when in search of a specimen, and we +soon saw that Mr Sedgwick would be far more pleased if we took him +round to the cliff, than should we catch a boat-load of fish. + +"Suppose then, sir, that we start the first thing for the cliff, and we +can then return and land you if you do not wish to remain for the +fishing," I observed. + +"A very good idea, Walter," he answered. "You and Roger Trew can go, +then, to manage the boat, and I will take my rifle. It is difficult to +approach those birds near enough to shoot one, and I have long wished to +obtain some specimens in full feather." + +It was arranged, therefore, that the next morning we should start +directly after breakfast. As, however, there was time during that +evening, we carried out our lobster-pots, and placed them in a long row +on a rocky bed, where we had every hope that lobsters would be found, +and we agreed to take them up on our return. We hurried over breakfast, +as Mr Sedgwick was eager to be off, and we then pulled away along the +shore, looking into the various indentations and bays as we passed, in +the hope of finding a spot where our proposed vessel might be launched, +and which might at the same time serve as a harbour. It was very +important to find a small harbour of some sort, where we might fit her +out after she was afloat. We had not gone far when we came to a point +with a reef running almost at right angles with it, which served as a +breakwater. Inside was a sandy beach. + +"Why, that is just the place we are looking for, Walter," observed Mr +Sedgwick. "See! we shall find, I think, an entrance at the other end of +this reef; and if so, nothing can be more perfect." + +We eagerly pulled round the reef, sounding as we went with our oars, and +had the satisfaction of finding that there was ample water for such a +vessel as we proposed to build. We could see the forest coming close +down to the water's edge, and affording an ample supply of timber. We +should therefore have but a little way to carry it. We agreed to take +Mr Thudicumb there the following day, and if he agreed with us, to lose +no further time in laying the keel for our vessel. A little further on +we came in sight of the cliff on which we had seen the birds. No sooner +did we point them out to Mr Sedgwick than he exclaimed-- + +"Yes; those, from their flight, must be frigate-birds. No ordinary +_cormorant_ would fly as they do. They have come there to breed; for it +is seldom, except on that occasion, that those wonderful birds ever +visit the land. What extraordinary power of wing they possess! It is +said that they are never seen to swim or to repose upon the waters. I +certainly have never seen them except on the wing." + +There was a stiffish breeze, which had created a little sea; and it +seemed doubtful, although Mr Sedgwick was a good shot, whether he would +be steady enough to hit one of the birds he so much desired. We pulled +on, however, keeping as close as we could venture under the cliff, so as +to be concealed from their sight till we got near them. Roger Trew took +the two oars, while I sat at the helm to steer the boat more steadily. +My uncle stood up, rifle in hand, eagerly waiting till we got within +range of the birds. However, they were so eagerly engaged in preparing +the homes for their future young that they scarcely appeared to notice +our approach, but kept flying about round the cliff as they had done the +day before when we first saw them. At length one of the magnificent +birds came within range of my uncle's rifle. Though his nerves were as +well strung as those of most men, I fancied his hands trembled in his +eagerness to obtain his prize. He recovered himself, however, in a +moment, and, balancing his feet at the bottom of the tossing boat, +fired. An instant afterwards a vast mass began to descend, at first +slowly, then it passed rapidly through the air like a huge piece of snow +cast before an avalanche, and down it came with a loud thud into the +water. + +"Pull! pull!" he cried; and Roger Trew exerting his arms, we were soon +up to the bird. It was still alive, though unable to impel itself +through the water or to rise. It stretched out its beak towards us, but +all power had gone; and as my uncle eagerly seized it, and drew it into +the boat, it ceased to struggle. The shot had alarmed the other birds, +some of whom were seen to soar high up into the air. Up, up they went, +till they became mere specks in the blue sky, then disappeared +altogether. Others, however, retained their position round the rock, +flying about in a startled manner, apparently unable to ascertain the +cause of the loud sound they had heard. Meantime Mr Sedgwick again +loaded, and a second bird was brought down. He offered a great deal +more resistance, but a blow from Roger Trew's oar quickly settled him. +My uncle was highly delighted with his success. The second shot had put +all the birds to flight, and it did not appear likely that a third would +be killed. We therefore put the boat's head round, and pulled along the +shore homewards. + +On our way back Mr Sedgwick expatiated on the powers and beauty of the +frigate-bird. "See," he observed, "these feathers are not of that +coarse and downy texture peculiar to aquatic birds; indeed, its graceful +form and all the internal arrangements seem especially adapted--I was +almost going to say for eternal flight. See these wings, twelve feet +from tip to tip. Observe this forked tail, these short legs, the thighs +not more than an inch in length. Unless perched on some rocky pinnacle, +it is unable to take flight. Neither, you will observe, is it adapted +for living on the waves. See its feet; they are unlike those of +water-fowl, being but partially webbed. Now, when I come to show you +the interior of the creature, you will see with what surprising +arrangements it is furnished for flight without fatigue in the loftiest +regions of the air, where it can even sleep without the danger of +descending. See beneath its throat this large pouch; it communicates +with the lungs, and also with the hollow and wonderfully light bone-work +of its skeleton. When it wishes, therefore, to rest in air, it first +spreads out its mighty wings, which are almost sufficient to float its +light body. It then fills its enormous pouch with air, from whence it +is forced into all its bones, and even into the cavities between the +flesh and the skin. Now this air enters cold, but in a short time, from +the heat of the bird's circulation, which is greater than that of other +animals, it becomes rarified, and will consequently swell out both the +pouch and every cavity I have spoken of, thus giving the bird a +wonderful buoyancy, even in the highest regions of the atmosphere. We +saw how high those birds went just now, but they probably have gone far +higher. In the same way, when the weather is stormy near the earth, the +frigate-bird rises into the higher and calmer regions, where, with +outspread wing, it remains suspended, motionless, and at rest. There it +might remain for days together, unless compelled by hunger to descend. +When this is the case, it expels the rarified air from its body and +pouch, and drops swiftly towards the ocean. It never, however, dives, +or even swims, but as it comes within a few feet of the waves, it +instantly brings itself to a stop, and skimming along, catches the +flying-fish with its hawk-like bill or talons, holding its neck and feet +in a horizontal direction, striking the upper column of air with its +wings, and then raising and closing them against each other above its +back." + +On seeing this wonderful bird I could easily believe the accounts my +uncle gave me. I remembered, when on board the _Bussorah Merchant_, +seeing some tropic birds, which, like the frigate-bird, can ascend to a +vast height. One appeared out of the blue sky, when, descending +suddenly towards the ship like a falling star, it checked its course, +and hovering for a while over our masts, darted away with its two long +projecting tail-feathers streaming in the air towards a shoal of +flying-fish, which had just then risen from the water. It caught one, +and again ascended in the most graceful way towards the blue heavens, to +enjoy its repast. + +The Chinese, my uncle told me, train the common cormorant to fish for +them, the birds being taught to return with their prey to the boat in +which their master sits, when they receive a small fish as their reward. +As, however, the bird might help itself, and refuse to work for an +employer, the cunning Chinese fastens a band round its throat +sufficiently tight to prevent it from swallowing the fish, but not to +impede its free action in other respects. The hungry bird, therefore, +very gladly returns to the boat to have this inconvenient appendage +removed, in order that it may enjoy its limited repast, considering that +"half a loaf is better than no bread." My uncle showed me on our return +a sketch, which will explain the mode of proceeding even better than my +verbal description. + +We were still talking of these wonderful birds, when we came near where +we had placed our lobster-pots. They must have been on the edge of the +bank, for we found that two or three had been carried away into deep +water. However, we caught sight of their floats at some distance. +Having drawn up the first we put down, several of which had large +lobsters, or fish and crabs, with various other creatures in them, we +pulled away to recover the rest. Two were empty. + +"I suppose it is scarcely worth while hauling up the other one," I +observed. + +"We shall lose it if we do not, though there is no great chance of it +having anything within it," answered Roger Trew. + +However, as we began to haul it up, we discovered by the feel that it +had something in it. As we got it up to the side, Roger Trew remarked +that it was after all only a squid, probably, or some nasty creature of +that sort. + +"Haul it in! haul it in, and let me look at it!" exclaimed Mr Sedgwick. + +"Wonderfully beautiful!" he exclaimed. "What a prize!" And as if he +were handling the most delicate piece of mechanism, he carefully lifted +the basket into the boat. + +"What is it?" I asked. "What can it be?" + +"What is it!" exclaimed my uncle. "It is worth coming all the way from +England to obtain, and living out here many years. Why, this is a +perfect nautilus!" With the greatest care he drew out the fragile shell +with the creature inside. "See," he said, "it belongs to the genus +_Cephalapoda_. It is one of the _Polythalamous_, or many-chambered +shells." + +"Well, I should call it a big snail of rather a curious shape," observed +Roger Trew. + +However, as far as the shape was concerned, it more approached a horn +with the end curled up and placed in the mouth. My uncle said he was +rather doubtful that, when alive, the nautilus did float on the water. +However, he confessed that many naturalists assert that it does so, as +do certainly the people of the coast near which it is found. He told me +that possibly this idea had arisen because the shell, when empty, swims +on the surface. The creature, when at the bottom, crawls along like any +other snail. Sometimes it dies and falls out, when the shell rises to +the surface by means of the gases generated in its chambers; and thus +they are seen floating on the waves. Others say, however, that the +animal itself with the shell, putting out its head and all its +tentacles, spreads them upon the water with the poop of the shell above +it. The light part of the shell rising above the waves is taken for the +sail with which it is said to move over the surface. Numbers are seen +together after a storm, by which it is supposed that they congregate +also at the bottom in troops. They certainly do not sail for any length +of time; but having taken in all their tentacles, they turn over their +boat, and thus once more descend to the bottom. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY SEVEN. + +OUR HILL-FORT. + +It was amusing to see the two naturalists eagerly examining the nautilus +when we brought it in. + +"Walter, you have rendered science an important service!" exclaimed Mr +Hooker. "So difficult is this creature to be obtained, that I know of +one only that has ever been brought to England, now preserved in the +Royal College of Surgeons." + +Immediately a jar of arrack, which my uncle had brewed for the sake of +preserving his specimens--certainly not for drinking--was produced, and +the nautilus was carefully embalmed within it. + +"If you can obtain another, which we can dissect, you will have rendered +Mr Hooker and me the greatest possible service," he exclaimed +enthusiastically. "Us, did I say!--the whole scientific world at large. +You will deserve to become a member of all the societies of Europe--the +most honourable distinction which a man of any age might desire to +obtain." + +Of course we undertook to manufacture a further number of fish-pots, and +to place them out in deep water, where we might have a chance of +catching another of these creatures. We measured the hole they would +require for entering, and discovered that out of the number we had made, +the one which had caught the nautilus was the only one with a hole +sufficiently large to allow it to enter. + +"But surely, uncle, the nautilus has sails by which it glides over the +water," said Emily, as she was examining the creature. + +"In the imagination of the poets only, my niece," he answered. "The +shells often float from their excessive lightness, in consequence of the +air contained in certain chambers within them. It is then often swept +away by wind or tide to some neighbouring shore. Thus large numbers of +the shells are found thrown up on the beach. The animal, however, when +alive, floats occasionally with its shell on the surface; but I doubt +much whether it has any power of locomotion beyond that which the wind +or current gives it." + +"How disappointing!" exclaimed Emily and Grace together. "We always +thought that it had tiny sails, which it spread to the breeze; and +pictured it to ourselves skimming on the calm surface, and delighting in +its freedom and rapidity of movement." + +"There is, no doubt, an abundance of wonders in Nature, young ladies," +said Mr Hooker, "but a more intimate acquaintance with the habits of +animals will often dispel some of the common ideas which have been +connected with them, albeit in many instances held for centuries. For +instance, till within a very late period people believed that the +upas-tree, which grows in Java, possessed such noxious qualities that it +destroyed all vegetable life in the neighbourhood. The sap is, +undoubtedly, a poison; but I believe people may sleep under its boughs +without receiving the slightest injury, though perhaps, were any of the +sap to fall from the tree and to enter a wound, it would prove fatal. +Once upon a time people believed that the barnacles which are found +attached to ships' bottoms, or pieces of timber long floating on the +ocean, turned into geese, and the barnacle-goose was so called because +it was supposed to have its origin in that common mollusc, the +barnacle." + +Mr Thudicumb had more than once to suggest to the two enthusiastic +naturalists that we should lose no further time in commencing the +building of our vessel, for although we had no great reason to complain +of our position, yet the mate was anxious to let his friends know that +he was safe, as also Captain and Mrs Davenport that their daughter and +the rest of us were still alive. The sea was now so calm that we had +plenty of occupation in going backwards and forwards to the wreck. Mr +Thudicumb, who was at length able to accompany us, suggested that a raft +should be made, by which means we might bring a larger quantity of +stores on shore at a time. All hands were thus actively employed. +Tanda had to attend to affairs on shore, the Frau and the two girls +assisting him in household matters. The two naturalists were engaged +all day long in collecting and arranging their specimens, while the +three other men, under the command of the mate, with Oliver and I, were +preparing for the building of the vessel. + +It must be understood that all the timber and the heavy things were +towed round to the bay I have before described, which we now called Hope +Harbour--the _Hope_ being the name we proposed giving our vessel. +Oliver and I, with Roger Trew, generally managed the boat, while the +others remained on board tearing up the planks, and collecting such +articles as they could fish up from the bottom. + +We had just returned on board one forenoon, when, on scrambling up on +the deck, we found our friends in a state of great agitation. "See +dere!" exclaimed Potto Jumbo, who was the first person we met. "What do +you say to dat?" There, standing in towards the island, though still at +a considerable distance, were several mat-sailed vessels, which had +certainly a great resemblance to the piratical craft we had before seen. +Mr Thudicumb had been examining them with his glass, and had great +fears that they were pirates. + +"We must get on shore as fast as we can," he said, "and prepare our +friends. If they come here, we must try and seek for safety in the +interior. I know these fellows too well. It would be madness to trust +to their mercy; and I am afraid, if they once get sight of the wreck, +they are sure to overhaul her. It is fortunate we have got most of the +things on shore;--but we must lose no time." + +As the boat could not carry the whole party, Mr Thudicumb and Tarbox +remained on board, sending Potto Jumbo with Oliver and I on shore, while +Roger Trew was to return with the boat for them. We pulled away as fast +as we could lay our backs to the oars, and as soon as we landed we +hurried up to the house. We were anxious not to alarm the young ladies +and the good Frau, and therefore as we came in sight of it we walked +rather more steadily. Fortunately our uncle and Mr Hooker were within +doors, engaged in their usual work. I hastened up to them and told them +what we had seen. + +"I must go down and judge with my own eyes," said my uncle. "Their +fears probably have made our friends imagine that these vessels in sight +have a piratical look. After all, possibly, they are only a fleet of +harmless traders, bound for the south part of Borneo, or perhaps up to +Sumatra, or the Malay Peninsula." + +"However, in case of accidents, brother Sedgwick, we may as well get our +valuables into a place of safety," observed Mr Hooker, quietly. + +I accompanied my uncle back to the beach, as we agreed we would not tell +the Frau or her charges what we had seen. My uncle had a spy-glass with +him. After examining the vessels, which were still at a considerable +distance, he shut it up with a slam. + +"There is no doubt about it," he exclaimed. "Those, if I mistake not, +are Sooloo pirates, and bloodthirsty villains they are. I wish our +friends were on shore; but we must hurry back to the house, and get our +valuables packed up as fast as we can. I do not think they will follow +us far inland; but if they do, we must be prepared for them." + +"Had we not better at once hasten to the hill we fixed upon, and begin +to fortify it," I asked. "They are not likely to make their way there +in a hurry, and we shall probably have time to put it into a fair state +of defence." + +"The best thing we can do, Walter," he answered. "I only hope the good +Frau will not go into fits with alarm; and as we will take the way by +which we came the other day--along our torrent road--we shall at all +events have a good start of our invaders." + +By this time we had reached the house. I found that Oliver had +gradually broken the news to my sister and Grace, as well as to the +Frau, and they were now all prepared for whatever might be arranged. +They were already indeed busily employed in making up bundles of such +things as were likely to be most required. Mr Hooker was now all life +and spirits. + +"The first thing we require, remember, is a good supply of provisions +and ammunition. Those are the chief necessaries. Water we cannot +carry, but I hope we may find it on the hill. At all events, let us +take care to have some pitchers to contain it. Then some cooking +apparatus, seeing we cannot eat our provisions raw. Then we shall +require some bedding for you young ladies. We can rough it well enough +on the ground." + +We had made some progress in our preparations, when Mr Thudicumb and +Dick Tarbox arrived. With their assistance we got on still more +rapidly. Roger Trew had remained on the beach to watch the movements of +the supposed pirates. The boxes of collections were at once carried to +a place of concealment which had been arranged, and a few other articles +which were likely to excite the cupidity of the pirates. All things +were now ready for commencing our march, but we were unwilling to begin +it till we ascertained that we were really likely to be attacked. We +were still in hopes that the pirates might pass by, or land on some +other part of the coast where they were not likely to find any traces +which might lead them to the house. + +"Quick, quick! haste away!" cried a voice, and Roger Trew was seen +running up as fast as his legs could carry him to the house. "The +pirates have seen the wreck, and are pulling in fast towards it," he +exclaimed. + +We were all now in rapid movement. Mr Sedgwick led the way, as knowing +the country best; followed by the Frau and the two girls, with Oliver +and I to assist them. Mr Hooker came next, carrying his gun, and as +much ammunition and provisions as he could strap on to his back. The +two coloured men and Roger Trew came next, well armed; Mr Thudicumb and +Dick Tarbox bringing up the rear, with Merlin, who seemed to consider +that the post of danger and honour. Several of the tamer animals had +been let loose, and now followed us, a buffalo and babirusa following +behind, two deer keeping close to Emily and Grace, whose especial +favourites they were. Several monkeys flung themselves along the +branches over our heads, to the great astonishment of their kindred whom +they met on the road. Several tame jungle cocks and hens ran in and out +among our feet. Indeed, so attached had all the more tameable animals +become to our uncle, that they would follow at his call, wherever he +went. We had representatives, therefore, of a large number of the +creatures inhabiting those regions. As soon as we reached the highroad +I have described along the rocky but dry stream, we halted, to conceal +as much as possible the place where we entered it from view, by placing +boughs at the entrance and strewing the ground thickly with leaves, +retreating backwards as we did so. This done, we again moved forward at +a rapid rate. The men could not march more easily, in reality, than the +weaker members of our party, as they were all heavily laden. We had +gone some way, when Mr Sedgwick thought of despatching Tanda as a scout +to bring us information of what the Malays were about. We should thus +run less risk of being taken by surprise. Our road was far from even, +or such as would have suited delicately-nurtured people, but fortunately +even the girls had become accustomed to rough walking, and made no +complaint of the difficulties. Now and then we had to descend into a +hollow, now to scramble over some huge boulders. More than once, +scorpions, centipedes, snakes, and other reptiles, started up from under +the rocks. We each of us, I should have said, carried pieces of ratan +in our hands, which against such enemies proved useful weapons, as a +well-aimed blow with a ratan at even a large snake will turn it aside. +Our numbers, also, kept the larger serpents and beasts of prey at a +distance. + +We had still some way further to go, before we could reach our proposed +fort, when we who were in advance heard a loud rustling in the underwood +near us. We called to Mr Sedgwick. He turned round and peered in +among the trees. Nothing could be seen. "Perhaps Merlin will find the +creature, whatever it is." I called Merlin up, and he instantly +understood what he was to do. My uncle was unwilling to fire, lest the +sound of the shot might be heard by the pirates. He told the men, +however, to be ready to use their bamboo spears, which might keep even a +tiger at bay. Suddenly Merlin began to bark furiously. Now he darted +forward, now he retreated. There was evidently some animal concealed +there. "Shout!" cried my uncle; "that may possibly rouse it." We did +so, when Merlin having pushed aside some boughs, we saw lurking among +them a huge tiger. The creature was apparently alarmed at seeing so +many enemies, and unaccustomed to the sound of the dog's voice, could +not make out what it was. The underwood, also, was so thick that he was +entangled among it, and could not make his usual spring. + +"I am sorely tempted to fire," exclaimed Mr Hooker. + +"Do not till it is absolutely necessary," said my uncle. + +The animal was moving slowly along, apparently trying to hide itself, as +a cat does when in search of its prey. Presently it caught sight of +several of our party with their formidable looking spears pointed +towards it. It seemed for once to consider discretion the better part +of valour, and an open space appearing on one side, we had the +satisfaction of seeing it creep more rapidly, and then bound away into +the distant part of the forest. + +We had no other adventure of importance till we reached the foot of the +hill, up which we wound our way. At the steeper part, however, Oliver +and I, as well as the girls and the Frau, found it impossible to carry +our burdens. "Put them down, young people," said Dick Tarbox, "and we +will come back for them. You get up yourselves." At length we reached +the top, and piled our goods in the centre. + +"The first thing to be done is to clear away some of this brushwood," +said Mr Thudicumb. "Were it not that we might point out where we are +to the enemy, the quickest way would be by burning it." + +However, the men with their axes soon cleared off a sufficient space on +which we might build our huts; and this done, they set to work cutting +down thick stakes to form our proposed palisade. At this Oliver and I, +as well as Mr Hooker and our uncle, worked away, the Frau, Emily, and +Grace carrying them up as we cut them, and placing them ready to be +driven into the ground. For some distance round the hill the rocks were +so precipitous, that we had no fear of being attacked on those sides. +We therefore first fortified the part where the slope was more gradual; +and we hoped that, should our ammunition last, we might be able to keep +a large number at bay. We continued working on in spite of fatigue, the +Frau and her assistants bringing us a draught of water, or a piece of +sago-cake to recruit our strength. Thus in a short time we had a +considerable number of stakes ready for use. Mr Thudicumb and the +other men now began driving them in, while the two gentlemen, with +Oliver and I, continued cutting more stakes. + +By this time we were anxiously looking out for the appearance of Tanda. +Already some progress had been made with the fortifications, and Mr +Thudicumb expressed his opinion that even should the pirates appear at +once, they would afford us great assistance in keeping them at bay. The +remainder of our stakes were now brought up, and we were still driving +them in, when, the sun setting, darkness began to steal over the forest. + +"And all this time we have not thought of a shelter for you, young +ladies!" said Mr Hooker. "That must be our next consideration." + +We accordingly hastened down the hill, and brought up a quantity of the +huge palm-leaves which I have before described, as well as a number of +bamboos, and with these we soon erected a hut sufficient to accommodate +the Frau and the girls. For ourselves, we agreed that, as we should +have to work all night, it mattered nothing our having no shelter. We +found, indeed, the night air, in that elevated spot, thoroughly dry, +cool, and refreshing; so that, in spite of the labour we had already +gone through, we were well able to continue it. Having at length driven +in the stakes all round, we commenced an embankment. The outer crust of +the soil looked hard and dry enough; but we soon found, on digging down, +that it was sufficiently soft to enable us to get our spades into it +without difficulty. + +"What can have become of Tanda?" said Mr Sedgwick. + +"I hope the tiger has not carried him off," I could not help saying. + +"No fear of that," was the answer. "The tiger is not likely to return +to the spot from whence we drove him, and Tanda has so quick an ear that +he would easily get out of the creature's way. It is more likely that +he has ventured too near the pirates, and been captured." + +"I am afraid, then, that he will betray us to them," observed Mr +Thudicumb. + +"I think not," answered our uncle. "He is a faithful fellow, and I +believe that he would rather be torn in pieces than do so." + +These remarks were made while we were taking a few mouthfuls of food, +and resting for an instant from our toils. Just then the sound of a +voice reached our ears. Mr Sedgwick shouted in return. + +"All right," he said, "here comes Tanda;" and directly afterwards a +human form was seen climbing the side of the hill. He stopped, and +again uttered an exclamation as he approached the fortification. + +"He thinks it is the work of magic," answered Mr Sedgwick, "and +scarcely likes to enter the circle." Mr Sedgwick then spoke a few more +words to Tanda, who now came forward with greater confidence. We had +left a small opening on one side for going in and out, and by this Tanda +entered the fort. An earnest conversation ensued between him and his +master, who explained that the pirates, after proceeding some way along +the coast, had caught sight of the wreck; that they had pulled close up +to it, and then gone on board. They had also visited Flagstaff Rock, +and hauled down the flag, of which they had taken possession. They had +been till dark engaged in plundering the wreck. Not finding, however, +any good landing-place, they had pulled away along the shore, happily in +the opposite direction to that where our vessel was building. Tanda had +then followed them. Having anchored their prows in the sheltered bay, +they had, as is their custom, landed and encamped. He had left them all +busily engaged cooking and eating their food, so that there was no fear +of their moving that night. It was but too probable, however, that they +would return to the wreck on the following morning. We could only hope +that there would be too much sea on the rocks to enable them to land +near the house. + +This information was satisfactory, and we agreed that the probabilities +of their attacking us were less than we had supposed. We accordingly +lay down to rest for a short time, till the return of daylight should +enable us the better to recommence our labours. Two of our party, +however, stood assemblies during the remainder of the night, to give +timely notice of the approach of the enemy, should the pirates have +discovered us. + +As soon as it was daylight Tanda again went out to watch their +proceedings, taking some sago and a little cocoa, to enable him to +remain out as long as necessary without returning. We, having +breakfasted, recommenced our labours, and at length had finished the +fort to the satisfaction of Mr Thudicumb. We had now, however, to dig +some pits, in one of which the ladies might be sheltered should we be +attacked, while in the other we might stow our ammunition. + +"But we are ready to run every risk you do," said Emily, when she +understood what we were about. + +We however persuaded her that it would be much more to our satisfaction +to know that the Frau and they were in safety, should bullets be flying +about. "Besides, Miss Emily, if any of us are wounded, we must look to +you to attend to us," said Oliver. + +She gave a glance up at Oliver's face. "Oh, I pray that may not be," +she observed. "How dreadful to think that, although we have done no one +any harm, we run a risk of having to fight those savage men." + +The tops of the trees came so short a distance above our hill, that Mr +Thudicumb thought, by erecting a post in the centre, we might have a +good look-out over the sea. The idea was so excellent, that we +accordingly at once went down the hill to obtain a tall and straight +tree for the purpose. A little way down the hill were some beautiful +cotton-trees. Although the trunk of the largest was not more than +twelve inches in diameter, it rose to a height of thirty feet, which we +thought would be sufficient for our purpose. The bark was of light +olive-green, remarkably smooth and fair. The limbs shot out in whirls, +at right angles to the trunk; and as they were separated by a +considerable space, they would form, we agreed, steps by which to mount +to the top. These trees appeared to great advantage, rising out of the +thick jungle amidst which they grew. The fruit, I may as well observe, +is a pod, and the fibrous substance within it greatly resembles cotton. +I do not know whether it can be used for the same purpose; but Mr +Hooker and our uncle employed it for stuffing the birds they killed. We +soon had one of these trees down, and fixed in the centre of the fort. +We stayed it up by ropes, while another rope hanging from the top +enabled us to ascend without difficulty. Our rope, I should say, was +formed from the fibre of the gomiti or sagaru palm-tree. The large +petioles of this tree spread out at the base into broad fibrous sheets, +which enclose the trunk. It is from this material that the natives of +these regions manufacture the coir-rope. It is a very coarse, rough +style of rope, for the fibres soon break, and projecting in every +direction, make it difficult to handle. We had an abundance of this +palm growing on the hill-side, as it prefers higher land than the +cocoa-nut. Its most valuable property is, being almost indestructible +in water. Among the fibres there are some coarser ones, with which the +Dyaks of Borneo manufacture arrows for their blow-pipes, and +occasionally the Malays use them for pins. Interwoven with them is a +mass of small fibre almost as soft as cotton. This, from its +combustible nature, is used as tinder. From the tree, also, a +refreshing beverage is extracted. The flower part is cut off with a +knife, when the sap which issues is gathered in a bamboo cup. It is now +of a slightly acid and bitter taste, resembling the thin part of +butter-milk. When this is allowed to ferment, it becomes what the +natives call tuak--a very intoxicating beverage, of which they are very +fond. The seeds grow in such large bunches, that one alone is as much +as two men can carry. The envelopes of these seeds contain a poisonous +juice, in which the natives dip their arrows. + +Well, as I was saying, we manufactured a supply of this rope for our +look-out post. As soon as it was erected, Roger Trew climbed to the +top. + +"Capital!" he exclaimed. "There is the sea away on two sides of us, +though as to the pirates, I can see nothing of them. Maybe they are +near the wreck, and that's too close in to be seen." + +We thought that perhaps by erecting a higher post we might obtain a +better view; but when Mr Thudicumb went up, he calculated that the +trees were far too high near the shore to enable us to do this. We all +in succession went up to have a look at the blue sea; but it was then +agreed that the post might possibly be seen by our enemies, and we +therefore at once lowered it, but kept it ready to set up again in case +of need. We had been so much occupied in preparing our fort, that we +had thought little of eating or drinking. + +"What we do for water?" exclaimed the Frau, bringing a large shell into +our midst. "This is the last we have got!" + +"I must blame myself for my forgetfulness," exclaimed Mr Sedgwick. "We +ought to have lost no time in searching for water. If one of you will +come with a spade, we will go out at once to look for it, while the rest +continue at the work in the fort." + +I volunteered to accompany my uncle. "But we may require a stronger +digger than you are, Walter," he said, and fixed on Roger Trew. + +Roger, throwing his spade over his shoulder in navvy fashion, answered, +"I am ready, sir." + +"Well, you can come too then," said my uncle to me. "You may bring your +gun, though, in case of necessity. We must remember not to fire if it +can be helped." + +As only one iron spade could be spared, my uncle and I armed ourselves +with a couple which we had formed out of bamboo, and which might assist +Roger should we have to dig deep. We took our way down the hill, and as +we looked up we agreed that our fort presented a very satisfactory +appearance, and that, probably, should we be discovered, the enemy would +be wary before they attacked us; indeed, they would very likely suppose +from its appearance that our numbers were far greater than they were in +reality. As those people fight for plunder, and never for glory or mere +victory, they would, we hoped, take their departure without attempting +an assault. This cheered our spirits. We had arranged that should +Tanda return with any important news, we were to be instantly summoned, +though as the fort should we proceed into the forest, would be +completely hid, from our sight, it would be necessary for some one to be +sent after us. Oliver agreed to come. My uncle examined the ground as +we proceeded, now telling Roger to dig a hole here, now there; but no +water was found. He therefore said that it would be of no use digging +more, as the hill was evidently of volcanic origin, and no water would +be contained within it. + +"Let us go on further, however," he observed. "If a stream does not +flow there, at all events a spring may be found." + +The ground as we advanced grew softer, and the herbage greener and +greener. + +"Stay," he said; "I think some animal must be there! We will advance +cautiously." + +As we proceeded my uncle signed us to stop, and looking along the +boughs, a huge black creature appeared before us, digging his snout into +the ground. + +"That's a huge pig," whispered Roger to me. + +"A pig, man!" answered my uncle. "That is no less a creature than a +rhinoceros!" + +We watched it for some time, afraid of moving lest we might draw its +attention towards us. Sometimes these creatures are savage, and will +attack man. At length, however, it began to move off in an opposite +direction to where we were posted. + +"A rifle-ball would do little to stop that fellow," said my uncle; "but +we may possibly yet capture him, and I should like to obtain his +skeleton, though I may not add him to my menagerie." + +"But we have come to search for water," I suggested. + +"To be sure we have," answered my uncle. "I was forgetting that. Here, +at this very spot, I am sure we shall find it without having to dig very +deep." + +Roger Trew instantly dug his spade into the ground, and began +energetically throwing up the earth. It grew softer and softer as he +proceeded, I helping him with my bamboo. My uncle had meantime cut down +a tall bamboo, the end of which he sharpened, and he now came back and +forced it into the ground. Drawing it up, the end was perfectly wet. +"This is encouraging!" he exclaimed; and Roger and I now setting to work +with greater energy, at length a little whitish-looking liquid came +welling up. A larger quantity appeared as we dug deeper and deeper, and +at length we had an ample supply to fill the shell we had brought for +that purpose. It was somewhat like dirty milk; but my uncle said it was +wholesome, and if allowed to settle, that it would become perfectly +clear. After resting a little the upper part became purer, and from +this we thankfully quenched our thirst. As our well was at a +considerable distance from the fort, it would be necessary to carry up a +supply, for should we be besieged, it might be difficult to reach it. + +"Now," said my uncle, "as our friends are not absolutely suffering from +thirst, we may as well try and catch the rhinoceros." + +"What! make chase after it?" asked Roger. + +"No; the creature is sure to come back here, and we will make a trap." + +"A hard job to make one strong enough to catch that brute," answered +Roger. + +"Very little strength is required," said my uncle. "With your spade and +my axe we can quickly make it. Here, let me set to work and dig!" + +Roger, however, would not hear of that, and he and I commenced under my +uncle's directions, who aided us in digging a pit about the size of the +rhinoceros, the earth around being somewhat soft and slimy. In the +meantime the water in our well had not only bubbled up, but settled +down, and was perfectly sweet and clear. Under Mr Sedgwick's +directions, we covered over the pit with boughs and leaves, so that the +hollow below was not visible. + +"The next time Mr Rhinoceros comes this way, he will find himself +prevented from proceeding on his journey," observed my uncle. "I have +seen the creature caught in a pit like this, and I have little doubt +that ours will succeed." + +We now filled the shells we had brought with water, and slinging them on +a bamboo, proceeded back to the fort. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY EIGHT. + +ATTACKED BY PIRATES. + +The party who had remained in the fort had made good progress in +strengthening it, and we now felt ourselves prepared for the pirates' +reception. + +"We shall have no difficulty in beating them back," I observed to Mr +Thudicumb, "with a fort like this for our protection." + +"I hope not, Walter," he answered; "but they are fierce and desperate +fellows, and they may use means for our destruction which we little +expect. Still it is our duty to be prepared and to fight to the last. +We can do no more!" + +"But if they conquer us what will Emily and Grace and the poor Frau do?" + +"We must leave that in God's hands, Walter," answered the mate. "We +must fight like men, and not yield while life remains. If we are all +killed, he will take care of the helpless ones who are trusting in him." + +Tanda at this time had not returned, and we were once more afraid that +he had been caught by the pirates. At length my uncle's anxiety to +ascertain what was going on made him resolve to set out to try and get +sufficiently near them to watch their movements. I begged to accompany +him. + +"If you do, you must promise one thing--to keep behind me; and should I +be captured, to make your escape, and carry back news to the camp of +what has occurred," he observed. + +I of course willingly gave the promise he desired. While we were +speaking, we saw, rising in the distance, a thin column of smoke. It +rose higher and higher in the sky. All those in the fort gazed +anxiously towards it. + +"They have discovered the house, and set it on fire," observed Mr +Hooker. "Oh, what treasures they are destroying--the ignorant savages! +and yet, I am afraid, under similar circumstances our own countrymen +would not behave much better. They are not likely to appreciate such +treasures more than these dark-skinned Asiatics." + +"I am not quite so certain that that is the house on fire," observed Mr +Sedgwick, after watching the smoke for some time. "I should not be at +all surprised if it was the brig that is burning. The smoke, in this +clear atmosphere, is seen a long way off; and though my house would burn +rapidly enough, I scarcely think it would send up such dense volumes as +are now ascending to the blue sky. What do you think, Mr Thudicumb? +It appears to me that the smoke is somewhat to the right of the house, +and further off?" + +"I have been watching it attentively," said the mate, "and I agree with +you, sir." + +"Still, as the wind is off shore, and there will be no surf in our bay, +I am afraid the fellows will very likely land there; and if so, it will +not be long before they discover the house," observed Mr Sedgwick. +"However, come along, Walter, and we will try to ascertain the true +state of the case." + +My uncle, charging our friends to be on the alert, set off down the +hill, rifle in hand; and I, bidding farewell to Emily and Grace, +followed him. I soon caught him up, and we made our way along our +torrent road. We calculated that we should have ample time to get into +the neighbourhood of the house and return to the fort before dark. I +could not help recollecting the tiger we had seen on our way up, and the +numerous serpents which I knew were crawling about in all directions. +My uncle, however, seemed utterly indifferent to them. We had got to +the end of our torrent road, and were working our way through the +jungle, when the sound of human voices reached our ears. On this, +instead of going straight forward, my uncle turned to the right towards +the sea. I followed him, literally crawling on hands and feet, +something in the fashion of the monkeys, from bough to bough amid the +thick entanglement of the forest; sometimes close down to the ground, +though not often more than a few feet above it. I could not help having +a fear that in those places there often lurked the fearful python; while +some dark pools over which we crawled might, I thought it more than +possible, harbour a hermit alligator or some other monster. + +We had gone some distance, moving as noiselessly as possible, when my +uncle stopped and looked eagerly forward, keeping his body concealed +behind a bough. I imitated his example. Our worst anticipations were +realised. In the distance I could see the brig burning furiously, while +alongside the rocks lay several long prows with swivel guns in their +bows, and their general appearance betokening them to be, what we +supposed, pirates of Sooloo. A number of their crew were on the beach, +while others, in a compact body, were making their way up the road in +the direction of the house. They were fierce-looking fellows, armed +with krisses and swords as well as spears and long bows. They were +shouting to each other, and evidently expected, from the appearance of +the road, that they were approaching some village which they hoped to +sack. We watched them for some time. Fortunately they were making so +much noise that they were not likely to hear us, even should they pass +quite near. My uncle, therefore, turning round, led by the way we had +come. I found that he was approaching as near the house as the thick +brushwood would allow. I shall not easily forget the shout of savage +delight the pirates set up when they came in sight of our peaceful +abode. They instantly rushed forward, sending a shower of arrows before +them, and shrieking at the top of their voices. It was somewhat trying +to my companion's temper to see them rushing up the steps of the house +and along the verandah into the rooms. I was glad we had left Merlin +behind us, for he would probably not have restrained himself, but would +have rushed forward and betrayed our whereabouts. My uncle did not move +from the spot, but continued to peer out from among the bushes. The +pirates who had first reached the house were seen going in and out at +all the doors like a troop of monkeys. They now came to the verandah +and shouted out to the others. They were evidently disappointed at +finding no one within. I could not help feeling pleased, however, that +they were not likely to find anything which they would look upon as +valuable, however much the articles might be prized by the owners. In a +short time those who had been on the beach came up, and now they all +rushed in together, and we could hear them shouting to each other as +they ran about seeking for booty. Their shouts of satisfaction were +soon changed to cries of disappointment and rage, as they found that +everything they prized had been carried off. Some of the provisions, +however, which had been left behind were at length discovered; and +before long they found their way to the menagerie. This seemed to +astonish them not a little. Several of the creatures, however, having +been left without food, were howling piteously. At last I caught sight +of a fellow rubbing away with two pieces of bamboo, and I knew well +enough that he was striking a light. Another brought some dried boughs, +and they soon had a torch twisted up and blazing away. Uttering a shout +of triumph, one of them rushed up the steps of the house with a blazing +torch, and ran round it, setting fire to the light wood-work and thatch. +It rapidly caught, and the flames darting out in all directions, the +whole house was soon furiously blazing away. Some of the men who had +been inside rushed out, reeling as if they were drunk, and I guessed +that they had got hold of some of the arrack which had been kept for +preserving specimens. They now began to dance round the house, shouting +and shrieking as if in delight at the destruction they had wrought. +Some of them, however, were hid from our view by the building, so that +we could not see what they were about. Presently their shrieks and +cries seemed to increase, and we saw those from the other side of the +building scampering away as fast as their legs could carry them, +apparently in a panic. The rest followed. Away they went, each man +tumbling over the other, and caring only for his own safety. I really +think that at that moment, had our whole party been together, we might +have rushed out and cut them to pieces. I heard my uncle utter a low +chuckle of laughter, and presently there issued from behind the building +his huge python, hissing furiously, and making its way at a rapid rate +along the ground, as if in pursuit of the pirates. + +"The fellows have set his cage on fire, and the creature has made his +escape from the flames," said my uncle. "He is wisely rushing to the +nearest water to cool himself, and I suspect he thinks less of attacking +them than of soothing his wounds." + +The python, however, as he was speaking, began to move slower and +slower. He evidently had considerable difficulty in working his way +over the ground. Presently his head, hitherto erect, sunk down, and he +lay stretched out at his full length apparently dead. + +"It will be as well," said my uncle, "to make our way back to the fort, +for these fellows will soon recover from their panic, and will suspect +that the owners of the house are not far off. We cannot remain long +concealed from them, for if they once begin to search about, they will +soon discover the path to our river road." + +We accordingly hurried back to the fort. We found that Tanda had +arrived before us. The whole party were in a great state of alarm, for +he had made signs that the pirates had landed, and they also had seen +the smoke from the burning house. They also dreaded from his signs that +we had fallen into their power. I was glad to find that some deep caves +had been dug, in which Emily and her companions could find shelter. The +provisions had also been stored in them. All our arms were loaded. A +number of bamboo stakes had likewise been formed, their points +projecting out between the palisades to prevent the pirates from +climbing over them. Our return quickly restored the spirits of the +party. Emily threw herself into my arms and burst into tears, and Grace +followed her example. + +We had now a time of great anxiety. In spite of it, however, I was very +glad when Mr Thudicumb proposed that we should pipe to supper. + +"I never knew people fight so well on empty stomachs as on full ones; +and as we may have sharp work before the morning, it will be wise if we +fall to while we can," he remarked. + +I found that during our absence Roger Trew had led the way to the well, +and brought up an ample supply of water to last us for some time. Thus +our fort was pretty well stored; and even should the pirates lay siege +to it, we might be able to hold out for some time. + +"By-the-by, Mr Walter," observed Roger, "the last time I came up, I saw +that the boughs had given way over the pit we dug; but I was in too +great a hurry to look in. I have a notion, however, that something or +other has been caught, and whether it is that great brute with a horn on +his nose, or some other creature, I cannot say." + +As darkness came on, we assembled in the largest cavern which had been +dug, in order that the light might not betray us. Here we found that +without danger--as the flame would be hid, and the smoke would, of +course, not be seen--we might light a fire and boil water, and cook our +food, which was a great luxury. Two of the party kept on watch while +the rest of us assembled to supper. The sentries were accompanied by +Merlin, who was a host in himself, as his quick ear was more likely to +catch the sound of approaching footsteps than any one among us. We +were, however, allowed to enjoy our meal in peace, and we, most of us +tired out, lay down to rest, while our watch was set as usual. Often +during the night I fancied I heard the cries of the Malays rushing up +the hill, and I started up to find that I had been dreaming. Hour after +hour passed by, Mr Thudicumb would not let me go on guard, as he said I +was already tired out. I slept on and on, and at length daylight +streamed in through the entrance of the rustic hut in which I had passed +the night. Emily and Grace were on foot, and soon afterwards Frau +Ursula made her appearance at the entrance of their bower. "No pirate +come," she observed. "I hope they go away, and not find us out." I +heartily hoped so also; but, at the same time, had it not been for the +girls, I own I should rather have liked to have had a brush with the +pirates, so confident did I feel that we could beat them off. Oliver +soon joined us. He looked somewhat pale, I fancied. + +"I have not slept at all," he whispered to me. "I have been praying +that we may be protected from those fearful men. It would be so +dreadful to have to fight them. Before they could be driven off, so +many would be killed; and Walter, I confess I cannot bear the thoughts +of destroying our fellow-creatures." + +"I do not wish it either," I said; "but if they come, they must take the +consequences." + +I was sure that, notwithstanding his feelings, no one would fight more +bravely than Oliver. Those who had been on watch during the night, now +got up, and the whole party assembled in the centre of our fort. + +"Gentlemen," said Mr Thudicumb, "on board the _Bussorah Merchant_ we +always used to have morning prayers when the weather permitted, and, +with your leave, we will have them now. We have plenty to pray for, and +much to be thankful for. We should be thankful we have escaped the +dangers from which so many of our fellow-creatures have suffered, and +that we are all alive and well; and we need to pray that a stronger arm +than ours may fight for us, should we be attacked by those fierce and +ignorant savages." + +"Very right," said Mr Hooker, "and I am sure all will agree with you." + +Mr Sedgwick, however, made no remark. He had never said anything +against religion; but I had observed, since we first found him, that he +did not appear to be in any way under its influence. However, as he did +not object, Mr Thudicumb forthwith produced a Bible which he had found +in the cabin of the brig uninjured. He now read a portion of Scripture, +and then offered up an earnest prayer for our deliverance. I know I for +one felt more cheerful after it, and so I am sure did Emily and Grace, +while a tear stood in Oliver's eye. He had entered more than any of us, +with all his heart, into the simple prayer of the untutored sailor. +Watch was, of course, kept meantime by one of the party, and we then in +good spirits went to breakfast, having lighted our fire as before in the +pit, making as small a one as possible, so as not to allow the smoke to +be seen at a distance. + +Once more Tanda went out as a scout to try and ascertain what the +pirates were about. Soon after he had gone, we were aroused by a loud +squeaking which seemed to come from the wood at the bottom of the hill. +It sounded exactly like the cry of a pig. Oliver and I offered to go +down and ascertain what it was. I was starting without any arms, and +had got to the gate, when it occurred to me that I might as well take a +fowling-piece. I ran back for it, and Oliver and I then set forward +down the hill. The squeaking sound increased for a little time, and +then ceased. We had, however, marked the place from whence it had come. +We were making our way through the forest, when Oliver seized my arm. + +"Stop, Walter," he exclaimed; "not a step further! See, see!" There, +at the foot of a large tree, with its tail coiled round an upper branch, +its body circling the trunk, was a huge python. Our uncle's pet, +compared to it, was a mere pigmy. It was pressing with its enormous +body a large pig, which, with its huge mouth wide open, it was preparing +to swallow. So eager was it that it did not observe us. We stood +transfixed with a feeling akin to horror, lest any movement might +disturb it. We knew that we should be much safer should it once get the +unfortunate pig within its jaws. Greatly to my relief, it now darted +down upon the pig, taking the head within its mouth, and gradually it +began to suck in the body. We watched it without moving or speaking. +In a short time, more than half the quadruped had disappeared, and I now +knew, from the formation of the animal's teeth, that no power could draw +it out again, and that thus, till it had entirely swallowed it, we were +safe. Now was the time, therefore, to beat our retreat, and we hurried +back to the fort with an account of what we had seen. + +"We must prevent the creature from causing further mischief," said Mr +Hooker, seizing an axe. "When it has digested the pig, it may pay us a +visit, and may be a more awkward enemy to deal with than even the +pirates. Now, if we make haste, he is at our mercy." + +Potto Jumbo begged that he might accompany us, and Oliver and he and I, +with the two gentlemen, each armed with an axe and a long bamboo spear, +hurried back to where we had seen the python. As we reached it the hind +legs of the pig were just disappearing within its jaws. "Now is the +time for the attack," cried Mr Sedgwick, rushing forward with his axe +and dealing the animal a blow behind the neck. It instantly uncoiled +its powerful tail and attempted to seize its enemy. It seemed as if it +could have crushed him with one blow against the tree, but he gave a +spring and just escaped it. At the same instant Potto Jumbo sprang in +and struck the tail, which instantly flew back and again encircled the +tree. The monster now tried to lift up his head to make a spring +towards us, but the pig prevented it from opening its jaws, though the +force with which it projected its enormous head was sufficient to have +knocked down the strongest man and killed him on the spot. Mr Hooker +was on the watch, and received it on the point of his spear, which +transfixed its throat, and must have gone through the pig's body at the +same time. Still his spine was uninjured, and there was great danger in +getting within the coils of its body. Potto Jumbo, however, kept +watching the tail, which was again unwound from the branch of the tree. +"You cut, cut at the back while I hold," he cried out, seizing the very +end of the tail. He threw himself out so as to stretch out the animal. +Oliver and I, who had been waiting our opportunity, rushed in, and dealt +it several severe blows with our hatchets. Potto pulled away at the +same time. "No fear now," he cried out; "one more cut and he die!" +Once more we rushed in with our hatchets. No sooner did we deal the +blows than the creature lay stretched out apparently quite dead. + +"We have settled him," said Mr Sedgwick. "And now let us measure his +length." + +He paced along the body, which lay stretched out on the ground, and we +found it to be fully twenty-five feet long. + +"An unpleasant creature to encounter in a morning's ramble," observed +Mr Hooker. "But how have you managed to escape these reptiles, +Sedgwick?" he asked. + +"Simply, I suppose, because they prefer pork to man," he answered; "and +as we have the same taste, we may as well get piggy out of his maw." + +To do so was impossible without cutting off the serpent's head. This we +accomplished with our hatchets. However, the appearance of the pig when +we got it out was far from tempting, and as we had a supply of food in +the fort, we agreed to let it remain where it was. We had been so +interested in this encounter that we had almost forgotten the position +in which we were placed. A shout from Mr Thudicumb, however, quickly +recalled us, and we hurried up to the fort. Tanda had just arrived. + +"He is in a state of great agitation, sir," said Mr Thudicumb, as Mr +Sedgwick appeared, "but what he says I cannot make out." + +Tanda and his master exchanged a few words. + +"Friends," said Mr Sedgwick, "the pirates are approaching. They have +found their way up the river road, and will be here in a short time. +Once more I must urge you to fight to the last. I know them well. +Should we yield, a fearful death or painful captivity would be our lot." + +"We are all aware of that, sir," said Mr Thudicumb; "and I can answer +for all hands that none will fail in their duty." + +The bank round the more gentle slope of the hill had been raised +sufficiently to protect our bodies, so that by keeping close to it, no +shot--should the enemy have fire-arms--could hit us. All the muskets +were laid carefully loaded against the bank, and the Frau and the girls, +who had been practising loading for some time, took their places in +hollows which had been formed on purpose, where they might load without +risk, as soon as the guns were handed to them. We all now stood at our +posts anxiously watching for the approach of the enemy. At length we +saw some dark-skinned faces appearing amid the brushwood, and directly +afterwards some thirty or more wild-looking savages rushed through it +and began to ascend the hill. They stopped for an instant on seeing the +formidable preparations made for their reception, while, of course, they +could not tell how many people were within the stockades ready to fire +on them. At length one of their chiefs apparently came to the front, +and waving his curved sword, seemed to urge them to follow him. On he +came, a humpbacked savage-looking fellow. Even at that distance I +fancied I could distinguish his hideous features. More than once he +went back, and seemed shouting to his followers to keep up with him; and +with wonderful agility, considering his form, he toiled up the hill. + +"Mr Hooker, you are the best shot among us, please to pick off that +fellow," said Mr Thudicumb. "If it were not for him, I do not think +the fellows would have come on." + +The hunchback still continued to advance, his long arms and claw-like +fingers assisting him up the steeper places. Again he stopped and +appeared to be swearing at his men for not coming faster. He was now +within range. I could not help looking on one side to watch Mr Hooker +as he stood perfectly calm with his musket covering the pirate chief. +Little did the man think that a musket in the hands of an unerring shot +was pointed at him. The pirates, finding no opposition as yet, now came +on more readily, and soon another body of an equal number appeared +behind them, coming from the woods. I could by this time clearly see +the countenance of the pirate. He was an old man, with two or more ugly +gashes about the face, showing that he had not followed his profession +with impunity. The pirates, uttering fierce cries, were now rushing on. + +"I must stop that fellow's career, at all events," said Mr Hooker, +levelling his piece. He fired. The old pirate stood up for an instant +on a rock which he had just reached, waving his sword above his head, +and then fell backwards over the men who were coming up behind him. The +Frau instantly seized the gun, and began reloading it. The pirates, who +had been quickly advancing, now appeared to waver. + +"If we had a dozen more fellows with us, we would quickly sally out and +put them to flight!" exclaimed Mr Thudicumb. + +"But as we are only nine in all, not counting de ladies and Merlin, and +dem fellows fight like wild beasts, we hab hard job to drive dem back," +said Potto Jumbo. "Still we fight while we got drop blood in de veins. +Merlin fight wid teeth dough; you see dat! Hurrah, boys!" and Potto +took aim at another Malay leader who now occupied the position of the +first. + +Merlin was fully as eager for the fight as any one, and rushed backwards +and forwards, poking his snout between the palisades wherever there was +an opening, and barking furiously. + +"I wish we had another python to let loose on them, uncle," I said to +Mr Sedgwick, near whom I was standing. "It might have a useful +effect." + +"Ah, yes; we should not have killed the other fellow, Walter," he +observed. "But, to be sure, it would have been a difficult matter to +capture him, and still more so to make him take the right course when we +let him loose again." + +The pirates, fortunately, had but very few fire-arms among them, and +they evidently depended on a hand to hand combat to overcome us. The +larger body had now gained a more exposed part of the hill, and began to +ascend quicker than before. We therefore, taking good aim, had to fire +as rapidly as possible. No time for speaking now. Thanks to the skill +with which the Frau and the young ladies loaded the muskets, we were +able to keep up a constant fusillade, which must have made it appear +that we had far more men within the fort than was really the case. To +keep up the deception, we ran from side to side, thus extending the +length of our line, now firing out through one opening, now through +another. + +"Do not throw a shot away," Mr Thudicumb continued saying. "Fix on +your man before you fire." + +I had never seen a shot fired in anger; but I own my blood quickly got +up, and I no longer felt the slightest compunction in killing our +enemies. Even Oliver, so gentle and tender-hearted, played his part +well, and I believe every shot he fired took effect. In my eagerness I +missed once or twice; but seeing the importance of following the mate's +advice, I endeavoured to restrain my excitement and take steady aim +before I pulled the trigger. Still our ferocious enemies so far +outnumbered us, that if they once got up to the palisades, even though +many might be killed, a superior force would be able to climb up and +overpower us. They were within a dozen yards when, greatly to my +dismay, I saw another strong body emerging from the wood, and with loud +shouts rushing up the hill to join their companions. I began for the +first time to think that all would be lost. My heart sank as I +contemplated the dreadful fate of the two poor girls. What would become +of them and the good Frau when we were all killed? for killed I fully +believed we all should be. Still, as yet, none of us were hurt, +although their arrows flew thickly over our heads, and they had begun to +throw their darts at us. Four or five, armed with muskets, now +advanced, and also began firing away--their shot pinging against the +palisades. We had far more to dread from them than from the arrows, I +fancied. As they got nearer, however, several arrows came through the +openings, and I heard a bullet whistle close to my ear. It was the +first time I had heard such a sound, but I knew it well, and could not +avoid bobbing my head, though the shot had passed me. Mr Thudicumb and +Dick Tarbox, however, never flinched the whole time. Uttering loud +shouts and shrieks, the fresh body of men now joined their companions, +while the first continued to shower arrows and darts and to send their +bullets among us. I saw Oliver suddenly fall. An arrow had struck him +on the shoulder. + +"It is nothing," he called out; "it is nothing," and endeavoured to draw +the weapon from his wound. + +Frau Ursula saw what had occurred, as she was at that moment handing up +a musket, and springing up, carried him down into their cave. The +dreadful thought came across me that the arrows were poisoned. I could +not, however, leave my post to inquire. His fate might be that of any +one of us the next instant. I could only wish that all were as prepared +to meet death as I knew he was. Directly afterwards I saw my uncle +stagger. A bullet had struck him; but recovering himself, he cried, +"Never mind, lads! A mere graze;" and instantly again fired. The +muskets came from below loaded, less quickly than before. I guessed the +reason--that the Frau or the girls were attending to poor Oliver. Again +a flight of arrows came flying over and through the palisades, some +sticking in them, when I felt one pass through my cap, and, as I +thought, wound my head. I could not help having the fearful dread that +the poison would quickly enter my veins, and expected every instant to +drop. Still there was but little time for thought, and I resolved to +fight away with my companions to the last. A few minutes more of life +were of but little value, and I now fully expected that, in spite of the +determined way in which we were defending our fort, it would be stormed +at last. Directly afterwards the Malays, showering their missiles upon +us, with loud shouts and shrieks rushed on. Some caught hold of the +palisades, and attempted to pull them down; others began to climb over +them. Some forced their hands through the openings to seize the bamboo +spears as we thrust them out at our enemies. I caught sight of a number +of pirates making their way to one side where the fort was undefended. +Nothing now, it seemed to me, could prevent them from getting in; but +when I shouted out, Potto Jumbo joined me, and we rushed to the spot. +Just then a loud shouting was heard coming up from the bottom of the +hill. I could distinguish through the opening, for the space was clear +where we then were, several pirates turning their heads. The shouting +increased. Some ran down the hill, the others turned and followed, and +those who had been climbing up the palisades dropped to the ground, and +then, as if seized by a sudden panic, rushed down the hill +helter-skelter, eager to avoid the shot which we sent after them. We +could scarcely believe what had occurred. + +"Heaven be praised!" said Mr Thudicumb. "We are saved, and I do not +think they will come back again." + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY NINE. + +BUILDING OF THE "HOPE." + +What had thus suddenly made the Malays take to flight remained a +mystery. Forgetting my own wound, my first impulse was to run down and +see after Oliver. I met Emily, who threw herself into my arms. + +"He is better, he is better!" she exclaimed. "The good Frau has, I +believe, saved his life." + +"We are all saved, my dear sister," I said. "The enemy have taken to +flight, and we hope will not come back again." + +"And he will be saved--he will not die," she again said, leading me to +where Oliver was lying on a bed of leaves. + +The Frau had torn off his jacket and shirt, and I found that, like Queen +Eleanor, who saved her husband's life, she had been sucking the poison, +if there was any, from the wound, and was now carefully bathing it. + +"I do not think I am much hurt," said Oliver, looking up as I entered. +"The good Frau has tended me so kindly and carefully, that I am sure I +shall soon get better." + +When the Frau had finished with Oliver, I begged her to look at my head, +and, greatly to my relief, I found that the point of the arrow had not +entered the flesh; the pain was caused by the shaft, which had passed +over my head, only carrying away some of the hair. While the Frau was +making the examination, Emily and Grace stood trembling, watching the +result. Emily now threw herself on my neck and burst into tears, while +little Grace took my hand, and exclaimed,--"I am so thankful! I am so +thankful that neither you nor Oliver are likely to suffer." + +"And now, my kind Frau," said Mr Sedgwick, coming down, "perhaps you +will look at my little hurt. You are the best doctor of the party, and +it strikes me that I have a bullet somewhere in my shoulder." + +"Well, then, you lie down there," she said, placing him on the ground, +and kneeling down by his side after he had taken off his coat and shirt. +"Let me see. Yes, here is the hole the bullet came through." + +I looked, when, to my surprise, I saw a little blue mark, scarcely +larger than a pea, and could not believe that a bullet had passed into +it. + +"Yes, it come in there," she continued; "I see. Hillo! here it is, +though;" and she touched a large lump which appeared just behind the +shoulder. "Oh, I got knife. Now you no squeak out, sir;" and taking a +sharp knife from her pocket, she made a cut across the flesh, when out +popped the bullet almost into the mouth of the faithful Tanda, who had +followed his master, and was eagerly watching the operation. An +abundant supply of cool water was then applied, and plasters put on. +"There, you stay quiet a little, sir, and you soon get well," she said; +"but stay, I want to pull out the bit of shirt that go in--not much, +though." Indeed, the hole in the shirt was not much larger than that in +the flesh; but still it was evident that some portion had been torn +away. My uncle could hardly refrain from crying out as the Frau probed +the wound. She, however, succeeded in finding the piece of cotton. +Fortunately the jacket had flown open at the moment, so that nothing +else had gone in. "There, you healthy man; you be well in a few days-- +no fear," she said. + +Seldom has a desperate battle been fought with so few casualties on one +side, though, to be sure, a third of our party might have been put down +as wounded. We had reason to be thankful; but still I could not help +dreading that the Malays might return. Mr Sedgwick was about to +despatch Tanda, when Mr Thudicumb proposed that we should hoist our +post, and endeavour to ascertain what was the cause of their flight. By +means of the coir-rope we had prepared, it was soon hoisted up, and +stepped in its place more securely now than at first, because there was +no necessity for again lowering it. Roger Trew was very speedily at the +top. + +"Hurrah!" he shouted; "hurrah! The prows are shoving off to sea, +pulling away like mad! Yes, there's the reason too--a large +square-rigged, white-sailed vessel coming round the point. By her look, +too, she is English; and they know pretty well that if they were to be +caught by her, their day of pirating would be over. Hurrah! hurrah!" + +As may be supposed, we were all eager to mount to the top of the post, +and have a look at the stranger. Mr Thudicumb with his spy-glass +followed Roger. + +"Yes, there is no doubt about it. She is a British man-of-war; and I +daresay she has been cruising in search of these very fellows. They are +all off, though; yes--five, six, eight prows, making their way to the +eastward. She will see our flagstaff on the rock, I hope, and send in +here. But I forgot; the pirates carried that away." + +Thus he continued making his observations. We all stood eagerly round +him, though the ocean was hid from us. + +"She has caught sight of the prows," he exclaimed, "and is making more +sail. They are, however, well to windward of her, and I am afraid she +will have a hard job to catch them up. Perhaps she will make a tack in +here; and if so, she will see us." + +"Would it not be as well to hoist a signal on the Flagstaff Rock, to +supply the place of the flag carried off?" observed Mr Hooker. + +"Of course, of course," was the answer; "and the sooner we do so the +better." + +As we knew that the house had been burned down, and no accommodation was +to be found on the shore, it was agreed that the ladies, with Oliver and +Potto Jumbo, Mr Sedgwick and Tanda, should remain at the fort, in case +any stray Malays might have failed to get off. It was important also to +drag away the dead bodies as soon as possible. In a very few hours they +would render the fort scarcely bearable; besides which they would be +certain to attract beasts of prey. Tanda and Potto Jumbo undertook to +perform this unpleasant work, and to bury them in some soft ground at +the bottom of the hill. The rest of us then set off to the sea-shore, +carrying a large sheet which had been saved from the wreck to act as a +signal. + +"And Hooker, my dear fellow--Hooker," exclaimed my uncle, as we were +starting, "do let me know as soon as possible if our treasures have +escaped; it would be heartbreaking to lose them. Send up Walter as soon +as possible. The knowledge that they are safe would bring me round +quicker than anything else, and recompense me for what we have gone +through." + +"Depend on me," answered his brother naturalist. "I hope it will be all +right; though probably, had the pirates not found their way to the fort, +they would have discovered our stores." + +We now hurried down the hill, and made the best of our way along our +river road to the shore. As we passed the spot where the house had +stood, a heap of cinders alone remained, still smouldering. It was +surprising, indeed, that the trees had escaped. Had they caught fire, a +large portion of the forest, if not the whole of the woods on the +island, might have been burned. We were thankful we had escaped such a +fearful calamity. On our way we found the apparently dead body of a +pirate. I was going up to him, when Mr Thudicumb called me back. + +"Stay, stay, Walter!" he cried. "If he is not dead, he may take his +revenge on you, even though at the last gasp." + +I drew back just in time, for I thought I saw the man's eye move. Dick +Tarbox came on the next moment, when the seemingly dead Malay started +up, and made a rush at me, with his sharp kriss in his hand. But the +exertion was too much for him: just as he reached me he fell back, his +wound bursting out afresh, and the next instant he gave a gasp, and was +dead. It showed the desperate character of the men with whom we had had +to contend, and increased our gratitude that we had escaped falling into +their hands. Two more we found close to the beach, who had been left +behind by their companions in their hurry to embark. One was already +dead; the other, though badly wounded, still breathed. We approached +him cautiously. Roger Trew was on the point of lifting up his musket to +give him his quietus, when Mr Hooker called to him. + +"He knows no better, poor wretch!" he said. "If he were our greatest +enemy, we should do our best to save him; only let us take away from him +the power of doing mischief." + +"You are right, sir; I forgot that," said Roger Trew. + +The pirate's kriss was in his hand, but his arm was too weak to lift it. +We removed his weapon, when Mr Hooker addressed some words to him, +which made the pirate open his eyes wide with astonishment. + +"I have told him we will not hurt him," said our friend, "and if we can +do him any good, we will. I do not think he quite believes us; but +here, fortunately, I have brought some water. He is suffering from +thirst; lift up his head, and I will pour a few drops down his throat." + +This was done; and Mr Hooker--asking me to watch the man, after we had +placed him higher up on the beach--giving me his flask, hurried off with +the rest of the party to the Flagstaff Rock. + +I confess I was somewhat disappointed, as I thought I should be able to +get a better view of the movements of the English ship from thence. I +continued, however, to apply the flask to the man's mouth, he every now +and then making signs that he was suffering from thirst. I looked out +seaward, where I could still see the ship, and she seemed to me to be +standing towards the shore. How eagerly my heart beat with the thoughts +of being once more on board, and on my way to a civilised land! Not +that I was weary of my stay on the island; but I knew how anxious +Captain and Mrs Davenport must be about their daughter: and she, too, +poor girl, was pining sadly for them. + +I lost sight of the party for some time, till at length I saw them +clambering up on a point of the rock where our flagstaff stood. It was +still there, though the flag had been carried away. Presently I saw +Roger Trew mounting to the top to re-reeve the halliards; and then up +went the huge white cloth, which flew out in the breeze against the +dark-green foliage of the forest. That surely must be seen, I thought. +The party stood round it, keeping their telescopes fixed on the distant +ship. Presently I saw that some movement was taking place on board. +Alas! the ship was tacking, and away she stood from the island. Perhaps +she will tack again, and once more stand in for the shore, I thought. +With difficulty could I take my eyes off her, to attend to the wounded +Malay. His low voice asking for water again drew my attention to him. +Although his brow was low and his eyes somewhat close together and +turned inwards, the expression of his countenance was not so bad as that +of many of his people; and I thought even that he gave a smile of +gratitude as I occasionally let a few drops of water trickle down his +throat. + +The ship stood on and on. Once more she tacked, and my hopes revived. +She was, however, by this time a considerable distance along the coast, +and I could scarcely hope that our signal had been seen. I had been +keeping my eyes on her for some time, without turning my head, when I +heard voices, and looking round, I saw Mr Hooker and his party coming +towards me. + +"No chance of getting off this time, I am afraid," said Mr Thudicumb. +"We shall have to build our vessel, and the sooner we set about it the +better." + +"We must, however, put a house over our heads in the meantime," said Mr +Hooker. "This poor fellow, too, if we are to be instrumental in +preserving his life, must be cared for." + +"Of course, sir," said Roger Trew. "We will have a hut up for him in no +time; and then, as it will be better to be near the shore instead of +remaining on the hill, we must get one set up for the young ladies and +the old Frau." + +"Very right, my lad," said Mr Hooker. "But now, while you attend to +the wounded man, Walter and I will go and look for our treasures, and +ascertain whether they have escaped discovery by the pirates." + +How eagerly Mr Hooker, whom I followed, looked round him on every side +as we proceeded to the hiding-place, lest he should discover any signs +of its having been visited! + +"Alack! alack! I am afraid some of them have been here," he said. "Oh, +what mischief they may have done!" + +We reached a hollow under the bank of a dry stream. Alas! the boughs +had been pulled away, and it was very evident that it had been entered. +The first thing we came upon was the jar which had contained the +nautilus: it was open and empty. The arrack had been carried off, and +the mollusc lay, entirely destroyed, on one side. + +"This is sad--very sad! Oh, what a loss!" exclaimed Mr Hooker. "I +hope we may discover that no worse mischief has been done." + +We went in, almost falling over a case which had been opened. Mr +Hooker examined it anxiously. It had not been disturbed, but after +being opened, the top had been allowed to fall down again. The other +cases were in the place where we left them. We now examined them. Mr +Hooker uttered a shout of joy as he found that all had escaped. It was +evident that the Malays had intended carrying off the cases, but had +been frightened away before they could accomplish their object. + +"Now, Walter, run up to your uncle with the good news," exclaimed Mr +Hooker. "He said it would restore him, and I am sure it will. But do +not go without your fowling-piece, though. We have had examples of the +savage creatures to be met with in the woods." + +I hurried along as fast as my legs would let me. I knew the delight the +announcement would give my uncle. I took the path we had so often +followed; keeping, as may be supposed, a bright look-out on either side, +lest I might encounter a wild beast or serpent. Emily saw me coming, +for she was on the watch, and ran down the hill to meet me. She gave a +good account of Oliver. + +"I am so thankful," she said; "he does not seem to have suffered from +that fearful arrow. I little knew at the time what a risk you were all +running; but I now see how mercifully we have been preserved." + +Our uncle had been sleeping, but he started up when he heard me speaking +in the fort. + +"And our treasures, have they escaped, Walter? Are my collections all +safe?" he asked eagerly. + +I told him that all his things had been uninjured, and that one case +only of Mr Hooker's had suffered, besides the nautilus. + +"Nautilus, did you say? Has that been destroyed? Oh, those atrocious +villains! That prize on which I set such value! Well, Walter, you must +try and catch me another; you cannot render me a greater service. Alas! +alas! that I should have lost that one, and all for the sake of the +arrack in which it was preserved!" + +I assured him that I would do my best to try and catch another, as I was +certain would also our companions. + +"If poor Macco had been with us, I should have had more hope," I said. +"I never met a more expert fisherman, and I am sure he would have +devised some means, though we might fail." + +He seemed to take much less to heart the information that the English +ship had passed by; indeed, I suspect he was very unwilling to leave the +island till he had re-collected more of the specimens which had been +left in the house and destroyed. As yet we could not tell whether the +pirates had discovered our store of timber for building the vessel, as +we had not had time to visit the bay; nor, indeed, whether the boat had +escaped their sharp eyes. That had been hidden among the rocks at some +distance from the place where we usually landed, and might possibly, we +hoped, not have been seen. + +Late in the evening the rest of the party returned. They had given up +all hopes of again seeing the vessel, and they came to ask Mr Sedgwick +whether he would like to be carried down to the sea-shore. + +"Certainly, certainly," he answered; "though I think I can walk. The +lad here--Oliver--must be carried; and if I fail, I will get you to help +me. But the sooner we commence building a house the better. I suppose +some time must pass before the vessel can be got afloat, and we can be +comfortable in the meantime Tanda here, who helped me to put up the +other house, will be of great assistance; and with so many hands, we can +soon get it ready." + +I forgot to mention the creatures which had accompanied us into the +fort: we had to pull down some of our stockade to let them out. And +now, much in the order in which we had arrived, we returned to the site +of the house; near which we found our friends had put up very +comfortable huts for the reception of Mr Sedgwick and Oliver, and the +ladies. + +It was night by the time we arrived. Our two-footed and four-footed +friends seemed delighted to get back to their old location, and began +feeding away eagerly, there being an abundance of provender suited to +their tastes scattered about. + +"Up, lads, up!" I heard my uncle shouting out next morning. The sound +made me open my eyes. "Up, lads, up! We have work to do: a house to +put up, and a vessel to build; provisions to collect, and stores to +prepare." + +All hands of our little community were soon on foot. + +"Yah! yah! yah!" I heard the Frau cry out. "I will prepare breakfast. +You men go and work. Yah!" + +With axes, knives, and saws, most of us started for the nearest bamboo +grove, and were soon cutting and hacking away, bringing down the huge +stalks and clearing them of their leaves. Oliver and I, however, went +in search of the boat, promising to join them. We eagerly hastened to +the spot where we had left it, scarcely, however, expecting to find, it +safe. It had escaped discovery, and we returned with the satisfactory +information. + +As the stalks of the bamboos were cut down, they were formed into +bundles of a size which we could manage to drag over the ground to the +site of the house. Two of the party, under the direction of my uncle, +dug the holes where the uprights were to be inserted. Mr Hooker and I +undertook to drag the bundles. When we arrived with the first, we found +the Frau, aided by the girls, busily employed in roasting and boiling +before a huge fire which she had kindled. Oliver was still unable to do +any work. He therefore remained at the camp--as I may call it--in the +careful hands of the kind Frau; she or one of the girls being constantly +at his side, either with some cooling beverage, or with some delicacy +which they thought might tempt his appetite. At a little distance, in +the shade of some boughs, lay the wounded Malay. I saw his eyes fixed +on the girls with an expression of wonder. He probably had never seen +any beings so fair and graceful before. I could not help fancying that +he must have supposed them angels from another world; but whether or not +I was right, I have my doubts. When, however, one of them took him a +cup of tea which the Frau had just brewed, he received it with an +expression of countenance which I thought betokened gratitude. + +When a number of people are working together with a will properly +directed, it is extraordinary how rapidly work can be got through. We +had a considerable number of the uprights in their places before we sat +down to breakfast. We were not long about our meal, as we were +determined to finish what was necessary to be done as soon as possible. +Having cut down a sufficient supply of bamboos, we next proceeded to +fell several sago-palms, for the purpose of obtaining the leaf-stems for +the walls and partitions, while from the trunks we intended to make a +supply of sago for our voyage. By the evening we had made wonderful +progress with the house, and retired to our temporary huts, satisfied +that we had done a good day's work. + +Fitting the leaf-stems into frames occupied a longer time; but as +neatness was not our object, it was done rapidly. Thus in about four +days we had a very respectable house over our heads, capable of holding +all the party. My uncle sighed as he looked about it, though, and +thought of the treasures his former abode had contained. We now brought +back his and Mr Hooker's collections, and stored them in a division +which we called the museum. + +"The next thing we have to do is to grow some corn for our consumption," +said our uncle. + +"Grow corn?" I asked. "Why, I did not suppose that we were to remain +here a year till it came up." + +He laughed. "A couple of months, or little more, after it is put into +the ground, will be sufficient to produce the ripe corn," he answered. + +I expressed some incredulity, for I fancied that he was laughing at me. + +"Set to work and scrape up the ground, for it is scarcely necessary to +dig it very deep. We will put in the corn, and you will see that my +prediction will be fulfilled. Fortunately, I saved a quantity of seed, +which I placed with my collections in concealment," he said. + +From house-building all hands set to work to cultivate the ground, and +we quickly had a large space cleared for the reception of the seed, +which, although not a native of that clime, flourishes, as it does +throughout the greater portion of the American continent, whatever may +be the latitude. + +By this time my uncle had almost recovered from his wound, and Oliver +and the Malay were much better and able to move about. Both my uncle +and Mr Hooker could converse with the Malay. They found him a very +intelligent fellow. He told them that his name was Ali, that he had +followed various occupations, but that, having gambled away all his +property, he had as a last resource taken to piracy. Among other +things, he had been a bee-hunter, and seemed to possess a great +knowledge of those wonderful insects. He boasted also of his skill as a +fisherman. Constantly listening to us as we talked, he soon began to +pick up a great many words of English. He was thus able to understand +things said to him, though he could not make any very clear reply. + +Mr Thudicumb now once more urged the importance of commencing our +proposed vessel. I rather think that the two naturalists were in no +hurry to get away from the island, as they were both of them anxious to +replace the objects of natural history which had been destroyed by the +pirates. However, they could not refuse to comply with Mr Thudicumb's +request, and we therefore set forth with tools to the bay where we had +collected the materials, which, it will be remembered, we called Hope +Harbour. Fortunately, the pirates had not discovered it, or they would +probably have burned our wood. The timber and planks which had been +brought on shore did not appear very promising; at first, indeed, I +thought it would be impossible to make a vessel out of them. + +"Perseverance will overcome difficulties," observed Mr Thudicumb. +"Never fear, Walter. With our axes and saws we shall be able in time to +smooth away these planks and fit the ribs to the new craft. However, +the first thing to be done is to get the keel laid, and for that purpose +we must have one of the longest and straightest trees we can find." + +There was a clear road from the bay up into the interior, and while one +party prepared the spot where the vessel was to be built, levelling the +ground, and fixing logs on which the keel was to be placed, under Mr +Thudicumb's directions another started to select the timber. We were +not long before we came to a tall tree, fully eighty feet in height, and +as straight as an arrow. + +"That will do admirably for us," said Mr Thudicumb; "for though our +vessel must not be so long, we shall require the thicker part for the +purpose." + +Tarbox, Roger Trew, and Potto Jumbo set to work to fell the tree, the +forest loudly resounding with the blows of their axes. I must not +occupy too much time in describing how the tree was felled, the branches +cut off, and squared into shape. We then, fastening some ratans round +it, dragged it on rollers to the bed which had been prepared, and thus +in due form laid the keel of the _Hope_. Mr Thudicumb, with pencil and +paper, had drawn a plan of the proposed vessel. + +"We will give her a good floor," he said, "though she may be rather long +for her beam; but a long vessel is better suited to the seas we may have +to go through. We will rig her as a cutter or yawl perhaps." + +Day after day we repaired to the bay; but to my eye our progress was but +slow indeed, as every timber had to be reformed, and the old bolts taken +out of them, as well as out of the planks. It was a long business. +With the exception of Mr Thudicumb and Tarbox, we were all +inexperienced carpenters. At last, indeed, Mr Thudicumb proposed that +he and Tarbox and Roger Trew, with Potto Jumbo, should devote themselves +to building the vessel, while the rest of us either went fishing, or +assisted Mr Sedgwick and Mr Hooker in collecting objects of natural +history, or in manufacturing sago, or in making other articles which +would be required for the voyage or present use. + +We set to work to make our sago, much in the way I have before +described. We had got through the pith of a couple of trees, when one +day Ali made us understand that he had seen some bees at a distance, and +that he was sure we might procure some honey, if we would assist him in +obtaining it. The Frau pricked up her ears at the sound. + +"Oh yes, yes!" she exclaimed; "it will be great thing with sago-bread. +You go, Ali; go!" + +It was arranged that Mr Hooker, with Oliver and I, should accompany Ali +in his search. We started, therefore, accompanied by Merlin. Ali +supplied himself with a couple of large cloths. He also, as he went +along, cut some creepers, one a stout one, and another, of considerable +length, very fine. These he begged us to carry. With our guns as +usual, we took our way through the forest. I had often remarked that he +seemed very uncomfortable, as if there was something he wanted very +much. As we were proceeding, we came to several tall, slender, and +extremely graceful palms. The trunks were from six to eight inches only +in diameter, though the sheath of green leaves that sprang from their +summits was nearly forty feet from the ground. They were indeed elegant +trees. Mr Hooker, when he saw them, said they were the pinang, or +betel-nut palm--_Areca catechu_. We found the nuts growing from a stalk +hanging down in the centre, forming a loose conical cluster. Ali no +sooner set eyes on them, than he climbed one of the trees, and brought +down a bunch of the nuts. He put several of them into the bag he +carried by his side, and we proceeded some distance, till we came to a +stony place, when he instantly, selecting two large stones, pounded some +nuts. They were ripe, each about the size of a small chicken's egg, the +skin of a brightish yellow. Within was a husk, similar to the husk of a +cocoa-nut. Within this again was a small spherical nut, not unlike a +nutmeg, and somewhat hard and tough. Having picked some leaves, he took +one of them, and produced from his pocket a small piece of lime about +the size of a pea. This he mixed with some of the nut, and enclosed in +the leaf. He then took the roll between his thumb and forefinger, and +rubbed it violently against the front of his gums, his teeth being +closed and his lips open. After this, he began to chew it for some +time, and then held it between his lips and teeth, a portion protruding +from his mouth. Nothing could be more disagreeable than the result, for +immediately a profusion of a red brick-coloured saliva poured out from +each corner, dropping to the ground as if his mouth was bleeding. He +seemed, however, highly satisfied, and continued on at a brisk pace. +Soon, however, he spoke a few words to Mr Hooker, who forthwith +produced from his pocket a tobacco-bag. The eyes of the Malay glistened +with delight as he saw it; and as soon as Mr Hooker gave him a small +portion of the tobacco, cut very fine, he put it in with the betel, +leaving long threads, like pieces of oakum, hanging out on either side +of his mouth, not improving his appearance; and on again he went, +chewing the mass with evident delight. + +Mr Hooker was not at all surprised. He told me that not only the men +but the women indulge in the same unpleasant habit. When a number of +them meet to chat, the various articles are produced from a box at hand, +and a high urn-shaped receptacle of brass is placed in the middle of the +circle, into which each dame or damsel may discharge the surplus saliva +from her mouth. When a guest comes in, the _siri_ box is immediately +presented, that the mouth may be filled before commencing conversation. + +In a short time a bee was seen flying before us; and immediately Ali +hurried on at a rapid rate, till we came under a tall, straight tree, +with a very smooth bark, and without a branch for at least eighty feet +from the ground. On one of the long outspreading branches I saw a +couple of large combs hanging down, of a black colour. After watching +it for a minute, there was a slight movement on the outside, and I +discovered that it was covered with bees. Ali now produced a small +bundle of resinous wood, which he had brought with him to serve as a +torch, and giving it to me to hold, lighted the end. He then fastened +one of the cloths round his loins, and another over his head, neck, and +body, leaving, however, his face, arms, and legs without covering. The +thin coil of rope he had brought he secured to his girdle, while he +formed round the tree a circle of tough creepers, inside of which he +placed his body. He now secured his torch to the end of another piece +of ratan, eight or ten yards long, with his chopping-knife fastened by a +short rope. Having done this, he began to ascend the tree, throwing his +ratan band a short distance above him, leaning back at the same time and +placing his feet against the trunk. It appeared to us who looked on +that every instant he would perform a somersault, and come down head +first, with a great risk of breaking his neck; but he seemed to have no +fear of that sort. Up he went. After ascending a few feet, and getting +a firm hold with his bare feet, he again threw up the creeper; and thus +he went on and on. If there was any unevenness in the trunk, he took +immediate advantage of it by either placing his foot upon it or catching +the creeper above it. At length he got within about ten feet of the +bough on which the bees hung. He then lifted the torch, swinging it +towards the bees, so that the smoke ascended between him and them. He +next in a wonderful manner mounted on the bough; and we could not help +dreading that the bees would attack him and sting him to death. He, +however, brought the torch nearer and nearer to them; and in a short +time the cones, which before had been black with bees, were completely +deserted, and their natural white colour appeared. The insects, instead +of flying towards him, formed a dense mass above his head, where they +seemed to hover as if contemplating an attack. Some, braver than the +rest, occasionally flew towards him; but he, with perfect coolness, +brushed them away, allowing the smoke to circle round above his head, +thus keeping them at a distance from his face. At length he got close +to the cone, and, with one stroke of his knife, cut it from the bough, +when, fastening the end of the rope round it, he lowered it down to us. +Proceeding along the bough, he cut the other cone away in the same +manner, when the bees, angry at being deprived of their habitation, +food, and their young, began to dart down towards us. He, of course, +had enough to do to think of himself, and continued waving the torch +about his body, while he returned by the same way he had gone up, though +at a somewhat more rapid rate. + +Meantime the bees had begun to swarm about our heads. Poor Merlin was +furiously attacked, and I saw him driving his nose among the leaves, in +the vain endeavour to get rid of them. Defeated by the pertinacious +insects, he rushed howling away through the forest. We, having secured +the cones, followed at full speed, the bees pursuing us, and every now +and then giving a disagreeable sting at our ears, face, and hands. We +knocked them off as they approached as well as we could. Though we were +glad we had got the honey, we agreed that we had paid somewhat dearly +for it. However, our blood was in good order, and the pain soon wore +off. We had not only got some delicious honey for our friends, but some +wax, which was of considerable value. We agreed, however, that the next +time we went bee-hunting we would each of us carry a torch for our +defence. + +"Ali says there are many more cones in the island, and it is a pity not +to take them," said Mr Hooker. We were therefore ready to proceed, +provided we could find torches. Ali made us a sign to follow him, and +soon afterwards, on the side of a hill which we were passing, he pointed +out some tall trees. On approaching them we found that from the trunks +masses of a sort of gum had exuded. + +"Those are dammar trees," observed Mr Hooker. "It burns readily, and +the natives of these regions use it for torches; indeed, in some places +it serves them instead of candles." + +We found not only small lumps, but some weighing upwards of fifteen +pounds. Some were hanging on to the trunk; others had fallen, and were +partly buried in the ground near the roots. Ali took some of these +lumps, and, putting them on a piece of rock, with the blunt end of his +axe reduced them to powder. He then cut some palm-leaves, which he +formed into tubes about a yard long, and these tubes he filled with the +resin, binding them tightly round with small creepers. He presented one +to each of us, and then signified that if we followed him he would find +more bees' nests, and that we should thus have the means of defending +ourselves. + +"But poor Merlin, what can he do?" I could not help asking. + +"We must defend him then," said Mr Hooker; "and Ali must make another +tube to be at his service." + +Another was quickly manufactured, and we then proceeded on carefully to +discover the nests. In a short time we came to another tree with no +less than four cones hanging to one of the branches. In spite of the +injuries he had received (for he had not escaped altogether free), Ali +prepared to ascend the tree. He made his preparations as before; and it +was wonderful to see the composure with which he occasionally swung the +torches towards the creatures while ascending, or waved it slowly above +his head when he got on the bough. Four more fine cones rewarded him +for his enterprise. The bees descended as before, but we received them +with the smoke from our dammar torches, which helped considerably to +keep them off. Now and then, however, one bold fellow would rush in +between the wreaths of smoke and inflict a disagreeable sting; and we +had difficult work to defend Merlin's nose and tail at the same time. +Mr Hooker, however, stood stock still, merely letting his torch burn +quietly; and though some of the bees settled on him, they seemed to +consider that they could do him no harm, and again flew off in pursuit +of Oliver, Merlin, and I, as we ran away from them. + +We now commenced our return homewards, laden with our honey cones and a +supply of dammar. We were proceeding across a space rather more open +than usual, when we saw a creature run up the trunk of a tree and fly +obliquely from it towards the ground, near the foot of another, up which +it immediately commenced its ascent. I should have supposed it to be a +huge bat, had I not seen it climbing as it did. Ali immediately made +chase; and as the creature did not move very fast, he succeeded in +overtaking it before it had got to any great distance up the stem. He +gave it a tremendous blow on the head, when it fell to the ground, and +we thought it had been killed; but as we reached it, it gradually began +to move off, running along like any ordinary quadruped. We caught it +just as it was about to ascend another tree, when again it received +several heavy blows. Even then, however, it seemed not to be dead. Ali +coming up, pinned it to the ground with a forked stick. We then saw +that it was a creature about the size of a cat, and that it had broad +membranes, extending completely round its body to the extremities of the +toes, as also to the end of its tail. This was of considerable length, +and by the way it curled round a stick we placed near it we found that +it was prehensile. The creature we now saw had a young one clinging to +its breast, a miserable little wrinkled, hairless monster, and +apparently as yet unable to see. Its fur was beautifully soft, almost +like velvet. The little one had escaped injury; indeed, the mother was +evidently still alive. + +Mr Hooker at once recognised it as a flying lemur, the learned name for +which is _Galeo-pithecus_. Ali having covered up its head, undertook to +carry it home, as Mr Hooker hoped it would recover. + +"Your uncle will be delighted to have it in his menagerie," said Mr +Hooker; "and I believe that, unless we cut the creature's head off, +nothing will deprive it of life. So I have no doubt that it will be in +good health again by to-morrow morning." + +We had not got far after this adventure when I heard a curious noise +close to us, which I thought must proceed from some bird. It sounded +like "Tokay, tokay;" almost, indeed, like a human voice. I drew Mr +Hooker's attention to it. He also thought it must be some bird, till +Ali coming up at once informed him that it was a lizard, and that he had +often heard the creatures thus talk. What it said, he declared he could +not tell, but he was very positive that it did talk some language. +Perhaps some day a person who did understand it might come that way. + +As may be supposed, we were cordially welcomed on our return, especially +by the Frau, who was highly delighted with the honey and wax which we +brought her. + +"Oh! now you shall have honey for your breakfasts, and wax candles when +you sit in the house to read or stuff the birds and beasts; though I +cannot tell what use they are after you have taken the meat out of them, +or wherefore you get so many skins, and pack them up in the boxes," she +remarked. + +The Frau was no naturalist. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY. + +WALTER DISAPPEARS--NARRATIVE CONTINUED BY EMILY. + +I had not forgotten my uncle's wish to obtain another nautilus, but the +weather had prevented us going on the water for some days. It having +again moderated, I consulted Ali, through Mr Hooker, on the subject, +and got him to explain what we proposed doing. We could not, however, +make him understand clearly what we wanted. That morning he, Oliver, +and I, with Potto Jumbo, went down to the beach to procure shell-fish. +We had been some time on the rocks, when I saw an object floating in +towards the shore. As it drew nearer, I discovered to my satisfaction +that it was the empty shell of a nautilus. In my eagerness I was about +to throw off my clothes and jump in to fetch it, when Potto Jumbo drew +me back. "Take care, Massa Walter," he said; "shark about here! Never +swim out in open place like dis." I, however, pointed out the shell to +Ali, and tried to make him understand that it was that of which we were +in search. He seemed to fancy that I wanted him to swim off for it, +and, thoughtless about the sharks, he was on the point of doing so. +Potto stopped him also, and by waiting patiently, the nautilus shell +gradually floated in towards us, and seizing it eagerly, I returned with +it to the house. Mr Hooker had now no difficulty in explaining to Ali +that it was the creature in its shell which he so much desired, and Ali +told him that he had great hopes of capturing one. + +That evening Ali, Dick Tarbox, and I, went out to fish in our boat in +the line of cliffs near which my uncle had shot the frigate-birds. +First, however, we pulled out some way, and laid down our fish-pots at a +spot where Ali seemed to think it was possible we might capture one of +the much-wished-for nautili. It was at this place Ali made us +understand that we were more likely to catch fish than any other. He +came prepared with hooks, which he himself had manufactured from +brass-wire, some of which had been found in the wreck. He had attached +about a fathom of wire to each hook, at the upper end of which the line +was fastened; this was in order to prevent the sharp teeth of the fish +cutting the line. He had caught a few fish in a hand net for bait. +Having anchored our boat by a stone sufficient to hold her, we lowered +down our lines. To each hook a sort of sling of palm-leaf was fastened, +and in this sling was a small stone, so arranged that on reaching the +bottom it fell out. We very soon got bites, and Ali was the first to +haul up a fine large fish. Immediately afterwards I got one, and Tarbox +before long caught another. In the meantime, however, Ali hauled up a +couple; indeed, to each of ours he managed somehow or other to get two. +Their names I do not remember, but I know I never had better sport in my +life. Gradually the rocks above our heads grew higher and higher in the +gloom of approaching night, which seemed to soften the faint outlines of +the landscape, and to increase the size of the objects round us. A +little way from us was an opening in the cliffs, beyond which we could +see the dark forest. From it there issued various sounds, which seemed +to echo backwards and forwards among the rocks. Among them we could +distinguish the moaning cries of monkeys--one seeming to be calling to +the other for help in piteous tones. The effect was curious, and had a +peculiarly melancholy sound; indeed we might easily have supposed them +to be the cries of captive slaves, or perhaps a more fanciful person +might describe them as disembodied spirits in some haunted island. +Meanwhile the night wind, sighing through the lofty trees, came moaning +down towards us. At length darkness compelled us to give up our sport, +and, with an abundant supply of fish, we pulled slowly back towards our +usual landing-place, where, having unladen our boat, we hauled her up to +a safe spot above high-water mark. + +I felt an unusual melancholy steal over me, why I cannot tell, while, by +the light of a lamp fed by cocoa-nut oil manufactured by my uncle and +his factotum Tanda, I sat writing these lines of my journal:--"To-morrow +morning Ali and I are going off in the hopes of obtaining a nautilus, +and he feels confident that we shall get one, probably at a reef which +he knows of at some distance, almost out of sight of the island. It is +so far off that, had he not mentioned it, we should not have been aware +of its existence." + +EMILY'S JOURNAL. + +Only yesterday, my dear brother Walter asked me to assist him in writing +his journal from his dictation, begging me to put in any remarks of my +own. Little did I think at the time that the whole would be my work. I +obey his wishes, though sick at heart and full of anxiety. Yesterday +morning he and Ali went off in the boat to fish, saying that they were +sure of bringing back a nautilus, which our uncle and Mr Hooker so long +to possess; but a whole day has passed, and they have not returned. +They were seen to be pulling out to sea further than they have ever +before gone. They had been some time absent, and we were expecting +their return, when a fearful squall, such as has not occurred since the +time when the brig was lost, broke over the island. Mr Thudicumb and +the kind old boatswain tried to persuade me that I need not be alarmed, +but I cannot help feeling most fearful anxiety. The boat is so small, +and not at all calculated to contend with a heavy sea. And then that +Malay Ali--ought he to have been trusted? I have heard that the Malays +are dreadfully treacherous, and he may have taken this opportunity of +getting away to join his own people. I could not have thought that he +had been so heartless and cruel as to injure Walter, and yet I know it +is possible. Poor dear Grace can scarcely lift up her head; she has +been in tears all day, and Oliver feels it dreadfully. If we had +another boat we might go and search for him, and Oliver has been trying +to persuade Mr Thudicumb and the rest to build one; but he says it +would take a long time to do so, as no timber is ready for the purpose. +It would, indeed, take almost as much time to build a boat as it would +to finish the vessel, and he thinks that it is more important to do +that. Our uncle and Mr Hooker are very anxious, I see, notwithstanding +all they say. This morning before daybreak a strange rumbling noise was +heard, and we felt the house shake, and several articles which had been +placed carelessly on shelves fell down. On running out into the +verandah, a bright light was seen towards the mountains in the interior, +caused by flames issuing from a high peak, above which black wreaths of +smoke ascended to the sky. Mr Hooker says that although there might be +an eruption of the mountain, yet, as we are a long way from it, we +should have every prospect of escaping injury. I am nearly certain that +they said this to calm our alarm, for, unintentional, I heard them +talking together, when Mr Hooker observed he did not like the look of +things; that we are living at the mouth of a broad ravine, and that if +any large stream of lava were to come down, it would very likely take +our direction. + +"That is what I am afraid of," said my uncle; "but as we have no means +of avoiding it, it would be a pity to put the idea into the minds of the +rest." + +"Don't you think that we ought to have a large raft built?" Mr Hooker +observed. "If the lava were to come down, we might get upon that and +escape being burned, for the whole forest would quickly be in a blaze." + +Our uncle said he would consult Mr Thudicumb; but he thought it would +take a considerable time to build a raft of sufficient size, and that +the time might be better employed in getting on with the vessel. They +therefore, it appears, have determined to proceed with that. + +"But our collections--our cases--what shall we do with them?" said Mr +Hooker. + +"Well, my dear Hooker," answered my uncle, "though I would willingly +risk my own life for the sake of attempting to save them, yet I feel we +ought not to imperil the lives of these young people or the others with +us. It is sad enough to have lost young Walter, and I am afraid he is +lost. That fellow Ali is a genuine Malay; had he been a Dyak, I should +have had more confidence, although he might have been a heathen, or a +head hunter, or a cannibal to boot. But those Malays, half Mohammedan +and half idolaters, are very untrustworthy." + +Oh, how my heart sank when I heard these words. I wish that I had not +been compelled to listen to them; it shows too clearly what they think. +Oliver, though suffering himself, tries to console me. He tells me that +I must trust in God, and go on trusting, whatever happens; that I must +not suppose, even though Walter should be lost, that we have been +deserted by God; and that we may depend upon it, that he has allowed it +to happen for the best: at the same time, that he may have many ways of +preserving Walter, however great the dangers he may have to go through, +and of restoring him to us. Poor Frau Ursula, after she has been +looking at the mountain, wrings her hands, and wishes that she had never +come to this island. She left Ternate for fear of the burning mountain +there, and now she finds herself in a similar position of danger. +However, to do her justice, she tries to wear a smiling countenance when +she speaks to Grace and me. We are left almost alone at the house, as +the rest of the party are assisting at ship-building. Tanda only comes +occasionally to feed the animals, and to bring us fruit and vegetables +from the garden. We volunteered to go and assist also, as we could at +all events carry the wood, and hold the planks while the others were +nailing them on; but though they thanked us, they said there were enough +hands employed. I believe, however, that only two or three are good +workmen, and I suppose that we should be in the way. + +Two more anxious days have passed by, and dear, dear Walter has not come +back. We go down constantly to the sea-shore to watch for his boat, but +it does not appear. I took Mr Hooker's spy-glass, and Grace and I +spent many hours on Flagstaff Rock, looking out over the ocean. First I +took the glass, then she took it; and so we continued, as if looking +would bring him back, till our eyes ached with gazing on the shining +water: indeed, Ursula says we must not do it again, or we might bring on +blindness, which would be very dreadful. If it were not for Oliver I +think we should break down altogether, but he has such a calm, pious, +hopeful spirit. He assures me, and I know he speaks the truth, that he +yet hopes that Walter will return, or, at all events, that he has not +lost his life, and that we may find him some day or other. He has +persuaded our uncle to let him read the Bible to the party before they +go out to work, and he does so now every morning; and then he offers up +a beautiful prayer for our safety, and returns thanks for the care with +which we have hitherto been watched over by our merciful God. + +Again to-day we wished to go to the rock, when Ursula took the spy-glass +from my hands, and said that we might go, but that we must not take it +with us; that it could not help Walter to come back, and that we should +see him without it as well as with it. We had been sitting there for +some time when Oliver joined us. He said that my uncle had sent him to +attend upon us, as he thought we ought not to be left to brood over our +anxiety by ourselves. Merlin accompanied him; and he says that in +future we must not go without Merlin. I suspect that there was some +other reason, because Oliver came with a gun. Perhaps some wild beasts +may have been seen lurking about in the neighbourhood, and they are +afraid the creatures may find us out. Oliver brought a book in his +pocket, which he took out and read to us. He reads beautifully, with a +gentle, yet clear musical voice. His mother taught him, and he says +that she is a well-educated woman, and a very excellent reader. It is a +valuable gift--for I think it is a gift, although it is one which may be +greatly improved by study and practice. Two or three times I stopped +him, however, for I thought I saw an object in the distance which I took +to be a boat. Oh, how my heart beat! But when Oliver looked--and his +eyes are keener than mine--he assured me that there was nothing, and +that it must have been fancy. Again and again I deceived myself in the +same way, and so did Grace. Once I felt sure that I saw a boat--she +said she saw something too; but we waited and waited, and Oliver read +on, and yet the object, if object there was, did not approach nearer. +Again I declared I saw a boat. Oliver looked up, and shading his eyes, +gazed in the direction in which I pointed. + +"You are mistaken, Miss Emily," he answered quietly. "I wish you were +not. You caught sight of a mass of sea-weed, and your imagination made +it appear to your sight what it is not." + +Saying this, he again sat down, and continued reading. Tanda had +manufactured some large parasols of palm-leaves, which sheltered us from +the sun, or we could not have sat out on the rocks. Oliver had come +without one of these, and we thoughtlessly allowed him to sit on with +the hot sun burning down on his back. On a sudden, as I was looking at +him I saw him turn very pale, and before I could spring to his side to +support him, he sunk fainting on the rock. Only then I thought of the +cause of his illness, and, holding up his head, placed the parasol above +him, while Grace ran down with his hat, and brought it up full of water. +The sea-water, however, was very warm. Though we sprinkled his face +with it, it did but little to revive him. Oh, what would I not have +given for some cold fresh water to pour down his throat! As I leaned +over him I was afraid that he would not revive; he looked so deadly +pale, and scarcely breathed. I entreated Grace to run to the house, and +bring the Frau, with a shell of fresh water; and I thought that perhaps +together we might carry Oliver back. Grace set off, followed by Merlin, +who evidently seemed to understand that something had to be done. Oh, +how anxious I felt for poor Oliver. I am sure that I would have given +my own life to save his. He was dear Walter's friend. I am sure Walter +loved him as a brother; indeed, he is well worthy of such regard. No +one also could be more attached to us. I took my bonnet and fanned his +cheek with one hand, while I held the palm-formed parasol over his head +with the other. Still he did not revive. I dreaded lest he should have +received a sun-stroke, which I knew to be a very dangerous thing. It +was very, very thoughtless of us to allow him thus to be exposed, but we +had been so accustomed to see everybody out in the hot sun that we did +not think about it, and used our parasols more for the sake of +preventing our faces being burned than from any fear of danger. + +How anxiously I awaited the return of Grace and Ursula! Every now and +then I looked up, hoping to see them, but of course I had to watch +Oliver, in the hope that he might begin to revive. I could not help +occasionally, too, glancing seaward in search of Walter's boat. I +thought I saw a slight movement in Oliver's eyes. I was gazing down +upon his face when I heard a strange noise coming from the forest. I +looked up, but could see nothing. I thought I must have been mistaken. +Again the sounds reached my ears, and then, turning my eyes in the +direction whence they came, I saw, appearing among the boughs of a tall +tree, a hideous countenance. I had not forgotten the appearance of the +monster we had seen at the lake. A second look convinced me that it was +the face of a huge orang-outan. I trembled lest he should discover +Oliver and me. He was at some distance, however, and evidently employed +in eating fruit, as I saw a shower of husks and leaves falling down +beneath him to the ground. Still I could not help dreading that his +eyes were fixed on us. If he were alone, I hoped that there was less +danger; but if accompanied by his wife and young ones, I knew that there +was great risk, should he see us, of his attacking us, lest we might +hurt them. Though anxious to watch Oliver, I could scarcely withdraw my +eyes from the hideous monster, who, as he moved along the bough, now +appeared full in sight. The sounds made me dread, too, that he was not +alone; and presently I saw on another bough a smaller creature, and +then, what I dreaded much, another large one among the boughs on the +same tree. Still, as long as they remained on the boughs, I knew I had +less reason to dread danger. + +How long Ursula and Grace seemed in coming! I fancied they would have +been with me in a much shorter time. At last I caught sight of Grace +running along the shore round a point of rock, and when she saw me she +signed that Ursula was following. A new alarm now seized me lest the +orang-outan should see her as she passed by, and descend the tree in +chase. I thought of Oliver's gun, which lay near; but though I knew how +to fire, I had never taken aim at an object, and I had little hope of +shooting the mias. I was afraid, too, of crying out, lest that might +also attract him; indeed, had I done so, Grace would probably not have +known what to do, and was very likely to be pursued. I watched the tree +with greater anxiety even than before, but the mias continued busily +employed in plucking fruit and handing it to the young one; as I +supposed, teaching him how to open it, and take the best parts. My +heart beat as if it would break, so anxious did I become. Oh, how +thankful I felt when Grace at length reached me with the shell of water. + +"I could not help spilling some of it," she said, as she put it to +Oliver's lips. "I am sure it will do him good. See! see! he is already +opening his eyes." + +He did so, but closed them again. We poured a few drops down his +throat, and then bathed his forehead and head; and in the meantime +Ursula was approaching. She could never move conveniently very fast, +and she was now evidently out of breath from running. This made her +perhaps more inclined to cry out, to let us know that she was coming. +Supposing the mias had not seen her, I dreaded lest her voice should +attract its attention. That it had done so there was soon no doubt, for +I saw him leaning over the bough, and looking eagerly about. Not till +then did I tell Grace what I had seen. + +"Oh dear! what shall we do?" she exclaimed. "It will seize poor Ursula, +I am sure. See! see! it is already swinging itself down from the bough! +Yes--there--it has almost reached the ground! Shall we let Ursula know +of her danger, though I am afraid she will faint if she catches sight of +the creature, she has such a dread of them?" + +"No; say nothing: she is too far on to run back again, and it will be +better for her to get on the rock, and she may reach it before the mias +can do so." + +"But if she does not, I must fire!" exclaimed Grace, seizing Oliver's +gun. "I am not afraid of doing that." + +"But you cannot take good aim," I said. "It will be better not till the +last extremity." + +"No; I will only do so if the mias gets near Ursula," she answered, +taking up the gun, however, and advancing steadily along the rock. + +I had never seen her exhibit so much coolness and courage; indeed, I did +not think that she possessed them. Ursula had stopped at that moment +for want of breath, and the mias also seemed to be sitting on a lower +branch which he had reached, gazing towards us, as if considering +whether the person he saw was coming to attack him. Happily all this +time Ursula was not aware of her danger. Having recovered herself a +little, she again began to hurry on towards the rock. Hoping that, as +the mias stopped when she stopped, it might do so again, I now shouted +out to her. The creature turned a quick glance towards us, and +discovered, as it might suppose, that it had two enemies instead of one. +"Quick! quick, Ursula! quick!" now shouted Grace, pointing to the mias. +The poor Frau showed by her gestures how frightened she was. Still she +managed to run on, while the mias continued descending the tree. +Before, however, it had reached the ground she had got up to the rock, +at no great distance from Grace. + +"Run! run!" cried Grace; "get safely on to the rock, good Frau, and I +will defend you." + +"No, no, my child," answered the Frau. "It is for me to fight. Give me +the gun. I know how to use it. You run back to Emily and Oliver. +Here, take this shell of water, though. I will fire the gun, I say." + +She almost snatched the weapon out of the hand of Grace, who came on +towards us with the water. I saw that the Frau was taking aim at the +mias, and was considering whether she could hit it at so great a +distance. I was afraid that she would not, and entreated her not to +fire. + +"No, no, my child," she shouted out; "I will wait till he come nearer." + +Our position was truly a dreadful one, for the creature might in a few +minutes have destroyed the good Frau, and then come and attacked us if +it had been so disposed. We were now once more quiet, and this induced +the mias to remain stationary. I wondered why Merlin had not come. I +thought that he might have assisted us at all events; at the same time +it was too probable that should he attack the creature, he would be +speedily worsted. + +We now again applied more water to Oliver's brow, and gave him a few +more drops to drink. The effect was satisfactory; and not only did he +open his eyes, but his lips began to move, and a slight colour came back +to his cheeks. At length I heard him speaking, but in so low a voice +that I had to put my ear to his mouth. + +"What is it all about?" he asked; "what has happened?" + +"Do not be anxious, dear Oliver," I said. "The sun was very hot, and +you fainted." I did not like to tell him of our alarm about the mias. + +"But I shall soon be well," he answered. "It is very hot here. I think +I could reach the shade of some tree, where it would be cooler." + +"Oh no, no; you must not move," I cried out. "We are safer here." + +The exertion of speaking, however, was evidently very great, and with a +gentle sigh he again leaned back. Of course, with that horrid creature +near us, I would not have ventured towards the forest, even had he been +better able to move. + +The mias had all the time been watching us, and perhaps, from seeing so +many people together, it thought we were about to attack it. Now, to +our horror, we saw it reach the ground and stand upright, holding on by +one of the boughs, and grinning savagely at us, so we fancied. The Frau +took the gun. "I'll fire! I'll kill him!" she cried out. "He must not +come near to hurt you young people." There was a firmness in her tone I +had seldom heard. She felt herself to be our protectress, and was +prepared to do battle in our behalf. Oliver heard her speak. + +"What is it?" he asked in a faint voice. + +"Oh, there is a horrid mias near us, and the Frau has taken your gun to +shoot it," answered Grace. + +"She cannot aim properly! Let me fire. Don't fire--don't fire, Frau!" +he said, attempting to rise. He was, however, too weak, and again sunk +back on the rock, supported by Grace and me. + +With horror we saw the mias let go the bough and begin to walk towards +us on all fours. It advanced towards where a thick shrub grew, when +again catching hold of a bough, it raised itself up on its hind legs. +"Now I'll fire!" cried the Frau. I was afraid even then that had it +been much nearer she would not have hit it, or at all events wounded it +mortally, and I knew that it would become more savage. I cried out to +her to stop till it was nearer, but at that instant she pulled the +trigger. She had missed, we feared, for the mias, uttering a savage +cry, again moved towards us. + +"Load again; load again!" Grace and I cried out. + +"Bring the gun to me, pray," said Oliver; "I will load it. I can do +that." He felt for his ammunition, which was at his side, but the Frau +took it from him. + +"I'll load," she said, beginning to do so. All this time the mias was +advancing. Now and then it turned its head, however, as if to watch +what had become of its family, and this delayed its progress. The Frau, +having had experience of loading at the fort, was soon again ready. +Kneeling down, she raised the fowling-piece to her shoulder. The mias +was still standing upright. At the instant she fired we saw it fall. + +"It is hit--it is hit!" cried Grace. + +"I have killed the creature!" exclaimed the Frau. + +But no, it had merely fallen to its usual walking position, and was once +more approaching us. There appeared no longer time for her to load. +All hope of escaping the savage monster abandoned us. The Frau, +however, grasped the gun, evidently intending to do battle. At that +instant Merlin's loud bark was heard, and we saw him tearing along over +the sand towards us. The mias stopped to look at him, seeming to think +him a more dangerous antagonist than were we three females and our sick +companion. Merlin caught sight of the mias, and bounded towards him. I +now began to fear for our four-footed friend, for I knew the power of +the creature, and how one grasp of its strong hands would in an instant +destroy the dog. Just, however, before Merlin reached it, loud shouts +were heard, and we saw coming round the point of the rock several of our +friends with guns in their hands, evidently understanding that we were +in danger. Mr Tarbox, the boatswain, led the way, followed by Mr +Hooker and Potto Jumbo. The mias now turned round and moved towards the +dog, but Merlin was too sagacious to allow himself to be caught, and +when almost within the creature's reach he bounded on one side, and then +wheeled off, still barking, with the evident intention of drawing it +away from us. How thankful I felt when I saw him do so, for his purpose +was answered. The creature followed him, making springs which at each +bound almost brought it up to him; but on every occasion the dog nimbly +avoided it, till he had brought it within range of the boatswain's +musket. The mias, exasperated by disappointment, made two or three +successive springs towards the dog, which brought it still nearer to our +friends. The boatswain fired, when the creature seemed to discover, for +the first time, how near it was to its enemies. The ball took effect +upon its shoulder. We saw it stand upright, stretching out its huge +arms as if to grasp hold of them and tear them to pieces; but at that +instant Mr Hooker stopped and levelled his gun, and the savage monster +rolled over on the sand. Still it was not dead, and we were even yet +afraid our friends might be injured; but the boatswain stopping, +reloaded his gun, and Potto Jumbo rushing in with a spear thrust it at +the creature. There was another report, and we knew that we were +perfectly safe. + +How thankful I felt that we had escaped, for I cannot describe +thoroughly how fearfully alarmed we were. There is something so +dreadful in the appearance of those huge baboons. Our friends arriving, +proposed carrying Oliver into the shade; but we told them that we had +seen another mias and a young one, on which Mr Hooker and the boatswain +set off in search of the creatures, while Potto Jumbo lifted up Oliver +in his powerful arms, almost as if he had been a child, and carried him +off to the edge of the forest, where we could all be sufficiently shaded +from the hot rays of the sun. Potto Jumbo then set off to join Mr +Hooker and the boatswain. Oliver now quickly recovered, and after +taking another draught of water, declared that he was able to walk home. +We persuaded him, however, to wait till the return of our friends. In +a short time we saw them coming through the forest, dragging a prisoner +between them. It appeared to be a largish monkey. It was evident it +was in no way pleased at being taken prisoner, for it turned its head +round now on one side, now on the other, attempting to bite its captors, +but we saw that its snout had been muzzled. + +"We have brought a prize for my friend's menagerie," exclaimed Mr +Hooker. "Here is a young mias, and I hope to tame and civilise it, +though at present its manners are far from cultivated. We killed the +mother, who now hangs to the bough of a tree. Potto Jumbo soon +afterwards caught the young gentleman by a noose round the neck." + +By this time Oliver, having greatly recovered, was able, with the +assistance of the Frau and Potto Jumbo, to set off for the house. I was +anxious to remain that I might continue watching for Walter, but the +Frau and Mr Hooker would on no account allow me to do so, and at last I +yielded to their wishes and accompanied them home. We reached it +without further adventure, having to stop, however, several times to +rest Oliver, who was far weaker than he had supposed. The fright and +excitement we had gone through made Grace and me very ill; and all night +long I was dreaming that we were pursued by the hideous monster, from +whom we in vain endeavoured to escape. + +By the morning, however, we had much recovered. Our small captive +showed its ferocious nature by trying to bite and scratch every one who +approached it. It caught Tanda by the arm when taking it some food, and +not till it had received several blows on the head would it let go. It +was then shut up in a strong cage; but the following morning was found +dead, after having made a vain attempt to force its way out. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY ONE. + +MR. SEDGWICK'S UNFORTUNATE EXPEDITION. + +My uncle and Mr Hooker are very, very kind; they do all they can to +keep up my spirits, though I see they are very anxious about Walter-- +indeed, how could they be otherwise? Oliver was much better in the +morning, though he was still suffering from the effects of the +sun-stroke, which might have proved fatal; and Mr Sedgwick will not +allow him to leave the house, or in any way to exert himself. Some of +the party go down constantly to the rock and look out for Walter; but +when each comes back he gives the same answer, "No boat in sight." Both +the gentlemen do their best to interest me in other matters, so as to +take off my thoughts from Walter. My uncle reminded me that I had not +been for some time to the plantation, which is at a considerable +distance from the house. He took Grace and me there this afternoon. + +"There, young ladies," he observed, pointing to some of the tall stalks +with beautiful leaves surrounding them. "A month ago these were little +yellow seeds of maize. See how rapidly the germ within them has been +developed. See! already there are some ears which we will carry home to +cook; and in another month's time they will be ripe, and fit for making +into bread." + +There was a large plantation of them. We cut off a number of the heads +which grew on the side of the stalk, several on one. Each head +consisted of a long piece of pith, to which the grain was thickly +attached, the whole sheathed in broad oblong leaves, which protect them +from injury, till the seed is perfectly hard and ripe. Here also was a +plantation of sugar-cane. They also were tall, graceful, reed-like +plants, and were nearly ripe. + +Tanda was working in the plantation--or garden, shall I call it? My +uncle told him to bring home a quantity of the canes, and he began +cutting them at once. He cut off the tops, and left them and the root +on the ground. I thought I could have carried a number, but I found a +single cane heavy, so loaded was it with juice. + +In another part of the ground there was a plantation of rice. It was on +the lowest level, where it could be well irrigated by a stream which ran +near. The rice grew on the top of each blade, the head alone being cut +off. The rice, before the husk is taken off, is called paddy, and +rice-fields are therefore generally called paddy fields. + +Among other productions of the garden are several bushes which produce +the red pepper. They are covered with fruit of all sizes. Some of them +are small and green, and some which are fully grown and ripe are of a +bright pink colour. These are now fit for gathering, and after being +dried are ready for use. It is called lombok by the Malays. They +always carry about a quantity of it, and use it at every meal. One +small plot was devoted to the cultivation of tobacco. That also was +almost ready for use, and my uncle said we should have a good supply for +the voyage. The leaves, as soon as they have grown to a sufficient +size, are plucked off, and the petiole and part of the midrib are cut +away. The leaves are then cut transversely into strips about +one-sixteenth of an inch wide. These are then hung up to dry in the +sun, and have very much the appearance of bunches of oakum. It is in +this state ready for smoking in pipes. When employed for making cigars, +the leaves are not cut, but dried more carefully in their whole state. +Neither tobacco nor maize are natives of this region, but were brought +from the New World two hundred years ago. + +In the evening Tanda arrived with the bundles of sugar-cane. +Fortunately the machine which my uncle had invented for crushing them +was at some distance from the house, and had escaped destruction. It +was sufficient for the object, though rather roughly made. After the +juice had been pressed out it was boiled, and allowed to run into a +number of pots, where it was to cool and crystallise. It was then of a +dark brown colour. While so doing, a quantity of clay and water, of +about the consistency of cream, was poured over it. The effect of the +water filtering through was to purify the crystals and make them almost +white. My uncle told us that it was discovered that the clay would +produce this effect by a native, who observed that when birds stepped on +the brown sugar with their muddy feet, wherever their claws had been +placed it became curiously white. When the finer part of the juice had +been pressed out, the remainder, which is thick brown molasses, is +allowed to ferment with a little rice. Palm-wine is afterwards added, +and from this compound arrack, the common spirit of the East, is +distilled. My uncle manufactured it for the sake of preserving his +specimens; but he said he considered it one of the most destructive +stimulants which can be taken into the human body, especially in this +hot country. + +We had all gone to bed last night, and I believe everybody was asleep, +when Grace and I were awoke by a curious sensation, as if our beds were +being rocked. We sat up and began talking to each other, both having +experienced the same feeling. Again the movement began, at first _very_ +gently, and then rapidly increasing till the whole house seemed to be +moving up and down, like a ship at sea, while all the timbers creaked +and cracked as if it were about to fall to pieces. + +"What is the matter? What is it?" cried Frau Ursula, starting up. "Oh +dear! oh dear! there's an earthquake!" and she sprang from her bed. +"Come! fly, girls, fly! The house will come down!" she screamed out. + +Her voice awakened those in the other rooms who were still asleep. +"Don't be alarmed!" I heard my uncle saying. "A marble palace would be +thrown to the ground long before this house will be. We are as safe +here as anywhere." + +Scarcely had he spoken, however, when several crashes were heard in +succession, and the house shook so much that I felt almost sea-sick. In +spite of my uncle's exhortation, the Frau hastily threw on her clothes, +and we, imitating her example, followed her down the steps, where we +were speedily joined by the rest of the inmates. There were strange +noises in the forest, and it seemed as if the trees were knocking +together, while the animals round us uttered unusual cries. My uncle +and Tanda were the only people who remained inside. He again cried to +us to come back, and at length the Frau was persuaded to return. He had +struck a light, and enabled us to see our way. + +"There, go to bed again," he said; "a few bottles and cases only have +been tumbled down, and no harm has been done." + +It was some time, however, after we had gone to our room, before we +could again go to sleep. It seemed to me that we had scarcely been +asleep many minutes before we felt another shock, very nearly as violent +as the first. We again started up, and my uncle's voice was once more +heard, urging us all to remain quiet, and not expose ourselves to the +damp night air. This time we obeyed him, though the Frau sitting up +wrung her hands, wishing herself in some region where earthquakes were +not experienced, and burning mountains were not to be seen. Neither +Grace nor I could sleep for the remainder of the night; and I found that +Oliver had been kept awake. + +The next morning, when we met at breakfast, we looked somewhat pale, I +suspect. My uncle was inclined to banter us, and told us that we should +not mind such things, as he had felt several since he had been on the +island, and no harm had come from them. I saw him, however, soon after +that looking somewhat anxiously, I thought, up at the mountain, from +which wreaths of smoke were ascending somewhat thicker than usual; and I +heard him urging Mr Thudicumb to hasten on with the vessel. "Tanda and +I will prepare stores as fast as we can," he observed. The +ship-builders hurried off with their tools, but he and Tanda and Oliver +remained behind. They afterwards set off to what we call Cocoa-nut +Grove, as a large number of cocoa-nuts grow there. Tanda led one of the +buffaloes with huge panniers on his back. After a time they returned, +having procured a number of cocoa-nuts. They were very different from +the cocoa-nuts we had been some time before eating, far more like those +I had been accustomed to see in England. When the nut is young the +shell is soft, and of a pale green colour. It shortly afterwards, when +the shell is formed, turns to a light yellow, and on the other side is a +thin layer of so soft a consistency, that it can easily be cut with a +spoon. In this condition it is always eaten by the natives. When it +grows older, the outside assumes a wood colour. The husk becomes dry, +and the hard shell is surrounded within by a thick, tough oily +substance, and, indeed, just as we see it in England. The natives look +upon it in this condition as very indigestible, and seldom eat it. It +is of value, however, for the oil which it now contains. Such were the +nuts which Tanda brought to the house. We all set to work to break the +nuts and to scrape out the interior substance with knives. When this +was done, it was put into a large pan and boiled over the fire. After a +time the oil was separated from the pulp, and floated on the top. We +then, under my uncle's directions, skimmed it off, and poured it into +bowls and bottles. It was now fit for use--a very sweet, pure oil. As +our pan was not very large, it took some time to make a quantity. We +wanted some for present use, but the chief object was to have a supply +for our lamps on board the vessel. This oil, my uncle said, is +generally used throughout the archipelago for lamps; indeed, it is +almost the only substance used for lighting. + +We were so busily employed during the day, that we almost forgot all +about the earthquake. There was one thing, however, we did not forget; +for, in spite of occupation, my thoughts were constantly recurring to +Walter. As soon as our work was over, we ran down to the beach, +accompanied by Oliver, who carried his gun for our defence, lest another +mias might appear. In vain we scanned the horizon. No sail appeared, +no object which we could even mistake for the boat, and with sad hearts +we returned to the house. The sun had just set. As we were coming +along the path to the house, we saw some large creatures moving about in +the air with a peculiar motion unlike birds. Going a little way we saw +two more, and then another couple appeared. Oliver raised his gun and +fired, when down fell a huge creature which looked like a quadruped with +wings. Though unable to fly, it began to defend itself bravely, and +Oliver had to give it several severe blows before he could venture to +touch it. "It will be a prize to Mr Sedgwick, whatever it is," he +observed, fastening a line round the animal's neck. He dragged it up to +the house, and when we brought it up to the light we found that it was a +huge bat. The Frau, when she saw it, declared that it was a flying-fox. +Mr Sedgwick, however, said it was really a bat, and when he measured +it he found that is was four feet six inches from tip to tip of its +wings. Oliver said it looked quite like an antediluvian animal. Mr +Hooker said he had often seen them; that one day he found one hanging to +the bough of a tree with its head downwards. He fired several shots +before the creature would release its crooked claws from the bough to +which it held. Tanda proposed skinning and cooking it, saying it was +good to eat. However, Grace and I begged that we might not be asked to +sup upon it, as the appearance of the animal was far from tempting. Mr +Hooker called the creature Oliver had shot a _Pteropus_. + +Although, through the industry of my uncle and Tanda, we were well +supplied with vegetable food, we were greatly in want of meat. He +therefore invited Oliver to accompany him on an expedition to shoot wild +ducks on a lagoon at some distance. He advised us, during their +absence, to keep within sight of the house, or at all events not to go +far from it. Ursula begged that Merlin should remain with us. + +"Yes, yes," said my uncle: "he might act as a retriever for us; at the +same time, I dare say, we can do without him, and he will serve as your +guard, and a very faithful one he seems to be." + +I do not know why, but I felt rather anxious about my uncle and Oliver +when they set out. I could not help thinking of the serpents and wild +beasts they might encounter. They were going also to a district where +crocodiles abounded. I was more anxious because they despised the +crocodiles, and said they were stupid creatures, and would never hurt +any one who was on his guard; and that only animals when very thirsty +and drinking, or people incautiously bathing, were ever caught. As soon +as they were gone, we set to work with our various duties in the house. +I have not described them, but we had plenty to do, and wished to employ +ourselves usefully. After that, Grace and I agreed to go down to the +beach in the vain hope--I am almost compelled to acknowledge that it is +so--that Walter might be returning. I can now understand how those who +have lost some dear one at sea go to the shore day after day and month +after month, hoping against hope, that they might return. When I am +away from the beach, I am constantly wishing to return to it, and often +in the house I look down the pathway leading to the shore, fancying that +possibly I might see Walter coming up it. Oh, what joy it would be to +my heart! My dear, dear brother!--the only person in the world nearly +related to me, whom I know well and love thoroughly. Our uncle is very +kind, but I as yet do not know him well, and he is odd in some things. +Oliver truly acts the part of a brother, and I am sure loves me as a +sister, and I value his regard. Merlin seemed also to watch the horizon +as anxiously as we did. I am sure he knows that Walter is away, and is +also looking for him. + +We watched and watched, till the sun, sinking low in the horizon, warned +us that we must go back and prepare supper for our friends. The +ship-builders would soon be coming back, and we hoped that my uncle and +Oliver would also be coming home. Again we cast one lingering look +towards the horizon, but there was no break in its clear, well-marked +line. We found the Frau somewhat anxious about us. "I do always think +of that horrid mias, for though Merlin would fight for you, yet the +creature would kill the dog with one grip of his big hands," she +observed. We had got the table spread, and the Frau was putting some +dishes on it, when Mr Hooker and the rest arrived from Hope Harbour. +They had seen nothing of my uncle and Oliver. Why had they not come +back? I remembered my forebodings in the morning, and again began to +fear that some accident had happened to them. Mr Hooker, however, said +he thought they would have been led, by their anxiety to obtain game, +further than they intended; and as all the party were very hungry, they +commenced supper without waiting for them. Grace and I sat down, but +could eat nothing. Oliver had scarcely recovered his strength, and I +was afraid that he might have been seized with the same sort of attack +as he was a short time ago. It grew darker and darker, and very rapidly +night came down upon us. Still no sign of the missing ones. Mr Tarbox +proposed going out to search for them with torches. Roger Trew and +Potto Jumbo agreed to accompany him. A supply of dammar torches was +soon manufactured, and each carrying a bundle on his back, with one in +one hand and a gun in the other, they sallied forth. As long as they +could find their way, there would be less danger moving through the +forest at night with torches than in the day-time, as savage beasts and +snakes avoid the light, and only harmless moths and bats fly against it. +In my eagerness I should have liked to have gone with them, but they +would not hear of it. Merlin, however, having performed his duty in +watching over us, when he saw them going out, quickly followed, and of +course he was likely to be of use in searching for the lost ones. Mr +Hooker and the mate were not so strong as they were before their +illness, and were therefore easily persuaded to stay behind. They tried +to keep up my spirits, and reminded me that my uncle was so well +acquainted with the country, that he was not likely to have got into any +danger himself, or to have allowed his companions to do so. + +Often Grace and I ran out to the verandah to watch for them, hoping to +see the bright light of the torches re-appearing along the path. How my +heart bounded when at length I heard a shout and saw a gleam of light in +the distance! It grew brighter and brighter, and then I could make out +several people carrying torches. I tried to count them. I saw three, +and then a fourth figure. There ought to have been six. I could +distinguish my uncle from his tall figure and peculiar dress. Then it +seemed to me as if they were carrying something between them. In vain I +looked for Oliver, whom I should have known by his being shorter than +the rest. We ran down the steps to welcome them, and inquired what had +happened. + +"Don't be alarmed, Miss Emily," I heard Roger Trew, who came first, +exclaim. "Your uncle is all right, but Oliver--" Oh, how my heart sank. +"Well, he has been somewhat hurt. He will come round, though; don't be +afraid, miss. Poor Tanda, it has been a bad job for him." + +Before I could make any more inquiries, the rest of the party, who bore +Oliver among them, arrived, and he was carried up the steps. I ran to +his side. He could speak but faintly. My uncle seemed very much out of +spirits, as his faithful Tanda had lost his life. + +"I do not know which of us may go next," he observed. "Oliver has had a +narrow escape, let me tell you; and he deserved to escape, for a very +bold thing he did. He is a brave lad. It would have been a pity to +lose him." + +"But what has happened? What has happened?" exclaimed the Frau. "Why +Oliver again ill?" + +"You shall hear all about it by-and-by, Frau. But here, give Oliver +some food, he requires it, for even I am almost faint for want of my +supper." + +The Frau attended to Oliver's wants, and my uncle sat down to the +supper-table and began eating away without speaking further. He was not +a man of many words, and when anything had annoyed him, I observed that +he was more silent even than usual. As I did not think Oliver was in a +fit state to speak, I resolved to bridle my curiosity till the next day. +Food and a night's rest greatly restored Oliver, and he was up next +morning at the usual hour. He then gave me a short account of what had +happened:-- + +"Instead of taking our usual course across the bamboo bridge," he +observed, "we struck away to the right to explore a part of the country +Mr Sedgwick had not visited. We caught sight of several wild +creatures, and among others a mias which led us a long chase, and even +then managed to climb up into his nest in a tall tree where we could not +reach him. You see, Emily, these creatures build nests for themselves +and their young ones, and indeed, from what Tanda told Mr Sedgwick, I +believe they build one every night when they go to sleep in the boughs +of a large tree. Certainly this one seemed to have no inclination to +attack us, and I could easily believe that they would not generally do +so, unless alarmed and afraid of being attacked themselves. After a +little time we reached a most curious spot, all around destitute of +vegetation. The ground rose towards it, and in the centre was a +miniature conical hill, out of which there bubbled a stream of water +running down on one side of it. Mr Sedgwick hurried forward to examine +this curious spring, and on tasting the water, he took some grease out +of his wallet to wash his hands in the fountain. Immediately he +produced a thick lather, and shouted out to me to come near and wash my +hands if so disposed, as he had discovered a veritable soap-spring. +[Note. There is a soap-spring of this description in Timor, an island +our friends did not visit.] I proposed that as the spot was at no great +distance, we should mark it, so as to be able to repair there to wash +our clothes, preparatory to our voyage. Mr Sedgwick said he had no +doubt it contained a large quantity of alkali and iodine, which had been +the cause of the destruction of the surrounding vegetation. Not far off +were some beautiful clear springs, which possessed none of these +qualities. We drank the water from the latter, which tasted thoroughly +pure, and was beautifully clear. Above them rose several lofty +banyan-trees, their numberless stems forming cool arbours which tempted +us greatly to rest there, and I could not help wishing that you had +accompanied us thus far. I think, had Mr Sedgwick discovered it +before, he would have built his house in the neighbourhood. How +delighted Walter would have been with the picturesque beauty of the +scene. Going on for some way over a variety of hills, we descended to a +beautiful lake, where we soon discovered a flock of brown ducks. On +getting down, however, to the edge, we found a border so marshy that we +could not get a good shot at them. On the side where we were was a band +of dead trees. We proceeded along the lake, through the tall, +sharp-edged grass, till we got exactly opposite the spot where the flock +had settled. They could not see us, as we were thoroughly sheltered by +the grass and trunks of trees; at the same time it was difficult to +shoot them on account of the trees which intervened. We kept as close +as we could, expecting them every instant to take to flight, when Mr +Sedgwick sprang up, and I followed his example. We both fired at the +same time. Although a number of the ducks flew away, six or seven at +least remained floating on the water. Had Merlin been with us, we +thought we should soon have had them; but now, how to get them out was +the question. I proposed swimming off for them, but Mr Sedgwick said +that after my illness I ought not to make the attempt, and then Tanda +offered to go. `Very well,' said Mr Sedgwick; `you, Oliver, stay and +take care of the guns, and Tanda and I will go.' Accordingly, throwing +off his clothes, he and Tanda began to wade through the mud and reeds. +It appeared dangerous work, as the mud was very soft and the reeds very +tall, and often they were hid from sight. I had never felt so anxious +before. Presently I saw them emerge from the reeds and begin to swim +towards the ducks. Some of them not having been killed outright, had +floated to a distance from the others. Towards these Tanda made his +way, while Mr Sedgwick swam towards the four which were still floating. +He was already bringing them back, when, to my horror, I saw between +him and Tanda a huge snout appear above the surface. I knew it to be +that of a crocodile. I trembled for the fate of our kind friend. +Tanda, I thought, would be safe, as he was near the shore. Could I save +Mr Sedgwick? Whether Tanda saw the crocodile or not, I do not know; +but he had already seized the ducks, and had once more plunged into the +water, swimming towards his master. Mr Sedgwick struck out boldly. He +had caught sight of the creature, but it did not unnerve his arm, nor +would he let go his ducks. I heard his voice shouting. `Fire!' I +thought he said. Putting the other guns down, I immediately loaded with +ball, knowing that shot would be utterly useless. I approached the edge +of the lake, and fired at the monster's head, feeling that the lives of +my companions might depend on my aim. The ball struck the monster, but +I saw it bound off into the water. The creature sank, and I dreaded to +see it come up near our friend. The next instant, what was my horror to +observe it rise again, and with open jaws rush at Tanda. The brave +fellow shouted out and thrust the ducks forward, hoping, apparently, to +draw back in time to escape those terrible jaws; but the monster was a +large one and hungry, and so great was his impetus that it seemed almost +as if not an instant had passed before the upper part of the unfortunate +Tanda's body was seized and he was dragged to the bottom of the pond. +Not a shriek escaped him; not a sound was heard. + +"Great as was my horror, I still had presence of mind again to load, to +be prepared to assist Mr Sedgwick, should it be necessary. I scarcely +think he saw what had occurred, and with powerful strokes he made his +way towards the bank. Even when he had reached the sedges, I knew that +he might not be safe, as those terrible monsters could easily follow +him. To assist him, however, I kept shouting at the top of my voice, +holding my gun ready to fire should one appear. At length he made his +way across the sedges, and landed on the bank, holding up the birds, and +exclaiming with a laugh, `We have done well! I hope Tanda has been +equally successful!' Sad was the change which came over his countenance +when I told him what had occurred. Not till then did I know how anxious +I had been. The sun all the time was burning down on my head, and a +sudden sickness overpowered me. I knew no more till I found myself in +the shade of the banyan-trees, near the cool fountain I have described. +Mr Sedgwick was sitting near me, and looking very sad. He felt greatly +the loss of Tanda, and, I believe, thought that I also was dying. The +cool air of evening, and the water with which Mr Sedgwick had liberally +bathed my head, had revived me. It had been a great exertion to him +carrying me thus far, and he seemed to doubt whether he could manage to +convey me to the house. However, he at length took me up, but he was +very nearly overcome, I suspect, when we were met by our friends." + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY TWO. + +THE "HOPE" SAILS IN SEARCH OF WALTER. + +Several days have passed since I last wrote in dear Walter's journal. +Mr Sedgwick seems scarcely yet to have got over the loss of Tanda; +indeed he was his right hand man. Still he works away very hard by +himself in arranging the stores for our voyage, and the Frau and Emily +and I help him as much as we possibly can. We have a good supply of +sago-cake. We went out and helped him to gather in the maize, which is +now ripe--having enormous ears. We have busied ourselves in separating +the grains. Then we have paddy. We assisted in cutting it, but we +could not make much progress; and Potto Jumbo devoted a couple of days +to that work, so that we have now enough. We find great difficulty, +however, in beating off the hull in a large mortar. We had seen Tanda +do it, when not a grain was driven out; but when we attempted it, we +sent them flying out in all directions. However, by placing a cloth +with a hole in it, for the handle to go through, over the mouth, we +managed to get on better, and prepared in the course of a few days a +good supply. At a little distance from the house grew a grove of a +species of banana which my uncle planted. He called it the _Musa +textilis_. It was about fifteen feet high. From the fibrous stem of +this plant the manilla hemp is manufactured. It was now cut down, and +by being beaten thoroughly the fibres were drawn out, and our uncle and +Potto Jumbo set to work to manufacture rope from it for rigging the +vessel, as they did not consider there had been a sufficient supply of +rope saved from the brig. + +We had been anxious to go and see the vessel, and one day we set off +with the ship-builders at an early hour. Our surprise was very great to +find her perfectly ready for launching. Her masts and spars and rigging +lay under a shed on one side, and it seemed as if it would only be +necessary to put her in the water, and get the stores on board, to sail +away. But sail where? That was the question. Should I have any +satisfaction in sailing away without first looking for Walter? Would +our uncle consent to do this? The uncertainty took away some of the +satisfaction I should otherwise have felt. + +The whole of the party now collected, when Mr Thudicumb announced that +the launch was that morning to take place. Hopes and tackle had been +arranged and secured to the rocks to assist in hauling her off, and I +was told that I was to throw a bottle of arrack at her bows, and to name +her. Having no bottle, I found that the arrack had been put into a +small gourd. It was hung from the bows, against which I was told to +swing it. No sooner had I done so, wishing the _Hope_ a prosperous +existence, than she began to glide off towards the water. Quicker and +quicker she went, and it seemed to me that she would slip away out to +sea; but ropes restrained her, and in another instant she floated calmly +in the bay. Loud cheers broke from our small company, and Roger Trew, +who had remained on board, waved his hat, and danced a hornpipe in his +glee at the success of their undertaking. + +All things are ready for the voyage. The _Hope_ is to be rigged as a +cutter. The seams have been filled in with dammar; and though no paint +has been used, she appears to great advantage with the natural colour of +the wood. I thought we were all to go in her at once; but it is +considered better that she should first make a trial trip in search of +Walter. I was very anxious to go; but my uncle says he cannot allow me, +and that Grace and I, with the Frau and Oliver, must remain on the +island. Her crew, therefore, will consist of Mr Thudicumb as +commander, Dick Tarbox, Roger Trew, and Potto Jumbo as crew, with Mr +Hooker as passenger. He wishes to go, both on account of his anxiety to +find Walter, and also, as they will visit a number of islands and reefs +in their search, he expects to find numerous objects of natural history. + +We were busily employed for several days in carrying down stores to Hope +Harbour; even the water had to be carried a considerable distance. It +is contained in large pieces of bamboo, which can be stored securely in +the hold, as there are no casks in which to put it. Then they have +sago, rice, and Indian corn, and young cocoa-nuts and bananas, mangoes, +and several other roots and fruits. Among the most valuable are the +bread-fruit, just now ripe, the trees of which my uncle planted when he +first came to the island. He had also grown some tea-plants, and among +our other occupations I forgot to mention, was preparing the leaves +according to the Chinese mode. The beverage does not taste very strong, +but it has a nice flavour, and will answer its purpose very well. The +cocoa-nut oil which we manufactured is also contained in pieces of +bamboo. Our sugar is not very white, and would not be considered highly +refined, but it is sweet and nice, and Grace and the Frau consider it a +very delicious sweetmeat. The vessel is thus stored with the +necessaries of life. I hope she may sail well. She is decked +completely over, with three compartments for cabins. When we all sail +we are to have the centre, the men are to be forward, and the gentlemen +aft, with a small cabin for Mr Thudicumb in the fore part of the +vessel. There are large lockers on either side for stores, some of +which are to be placed in the hold, but only those which will not suffer +from being wet, as it is thought likely that the vessel will leak +somewhat, perhaps, in consequence of the want of skill on the part of +the workmen. However, each one says he has done his task to the best of +his ability, and can do no more. My uncle and Oliver retain two of the +best fire-arms, and the rest are to be put on board the vessel, in case +they should fall in with pirates, or land on any part of the coast where +savages exist. We are to go down to-morrow morning to see them off. +Oh, how earnestly will my prayers ascend for their safety, and that they +may find dear Walter! + +The _Hope_ has sailed. We went down to Hope Harbour early in the +morning, having breakfasted by lamp-light, and as soon as all had gone +on board the anchor was weighed. It was like a Malay anchor, made of +wood, and a huge stone to keep it down. Favoured by the land-breeze, +the _Hope_ glided out of the harbour. Oliver said she appeared to sit +beautifully on the water, and he thought she would be a fine sea-boat. +Amid cheers and tears and prayers--oh, how earnestly I prayed, and I am +sure so did Oliver and Grace--we saw her sail away from the land. We +hastened homeward, that we might get a last look of her from Flagstaff +Rock. The _Hope_, instead of proceeding out to sea, was now standing +along shore. How pretty and light she looked as she glided by. We +continued waving an adieu, but I do not think those on board could have +seen us; indeed, we could only just distinguish them as they stood on +the deck. Away, away she sailed towards the east. She went in that +direction because Mr Thudicumb believed, from the way the wind blew +when dear Walter was carried away from the land, that he would have been +driven to some place in that direction. The wind was light, so that she +continued in sight for a long time. We could not tear ourselves away +from the spot. How well was she called the _Hope_; for our hope was +strong that she would find him of whom she was in search. Gradually she +became smaller and smaller, and less distinct; and now her hull was +entirely hid from view, and we could see only the white canvas above the +ocean. At length that began to descend in the horizon, and a small +white speck alone was visible, gradually decreasing in size till it +disappeared altogether. I could not help regretting that we were not +all on board, but those who knew better than I do decided it otherwise, +and so I do my best to silence my regrets. It is a good thing, too, +that we have Oliver with us. He exerts himself not so much to keep up +our spirits, as to show us how we ought to think and feel; and he proves +clearly that as God knows best what should be done, we should bow humbly +to his will, whatever may occur. What a blessing it is to know that God +watches over us, and arranges our affairs for us better than we can for +ourselves, if we show a readiness to submit to his will. It would, +however, be a hard trial should the vessel return without having found +Walter. My uncle is kinder than ever. He seems to understand how +anxious I am, and continues to try and find employment for us. We have +a number of curious birds to feed, and some poultry which escaped the +Malays having been found, we take care of them, as also several animals +which require being attended to. + +Among the most precious and beautiful were several birds of paradise, +prized above all others in the collection. The first I will mention was +called the superb bird of paradise. The plumage was black, though, as +the sun shone on it, the neck showed a rich bronze tinge, while the head +appeared to be covered with scales of a brilliant metallic-green and +blue. Over its breast was a shield of somewhat stiff feathers, with a +rich satiny gloss and of a bluish-green tint, while from the back of the +neck rose a shield--in form like that on the breast, but considerably +larger and longer--of a rich black, tinged with purple and bronze. It +would be difficult to do justice by a verbal description to the beauty +of that little gem of a bird, when, animated, it expanded its shields +and stood quivering on its perch. I often thought how much more +beautiful must be the appearance of numbers collected together in their +native woods in the interior of New Guinea, from whence this one was +brought. The feet of our little pet were yellow, and it had a black +bill. We fed it on fruits, especially small ripe figs, and also on +insects, such as grasshoppers, locusts, and cockroaches, with +occasionally caterpillars. + +Another of our pets was called the six-shafted or golden bird of +paradise. It was not less curious than the former. The plumage, though +black in the shade, glows in the sun with bronze and purple, and on the +throat and breast are broad feathers of a rich golden hue, exhibiting in +a bright light green and blue tints. The back of the head is adorned +with the most brilliant feathers, shining as if composed of emeralds and +topazes; in front is a white satin-like spot, and from the sides spring +six slender feathers, thin as wires, with small oval webs at the +extremities. As if the beautiful creature was not sufficiently adorned, +on each side of the breast rise masses of soft feathers, which greatly +increase its apparent bulk when fully elevated, and almost hide its +wings. + +Walter in his journal has already described several other birds of +paradise. Our uncle calculates that there are eighteen known species, +all remarkable for their beauty, and the curious arrangements and colour +of their plumage. + +Poor Tanda used to look after them, and now Oliver and Grace and I have +undertaken the task as far as we are able. + +We had for a long time given up watching for Walter. The _Hope_ might +find him, but it was not very likely that he could come back in the +small boat. I should have given way long ago to despair had not Oliver +been with us; but he showed me that despair is on all occasions wrong, +and I endeavoured to overcome my anxiety. + +How quiet our party appeared that evening, so many having gone. My +uncle spoke but little. Oliver did his best to interest Grace and me; +and the Frau, though she did not talk very learnedly, talked away, and +did her best to amuse us. Every now and then she turned on Mr Sedgwick +and bantered him on his silence. Merlin went up to the seats which had +usually been occupied by the absent ones and snuffed at them all round. +Then he went and lay down in his usual place on a mat near the door. He +had seen them go off in the vessel in the morning. I wonder if he knew +where they had gone. I believe he was fully aware that they had gone in +search of Walter. + +There was another earthquake last night. The house shook almost as much +as before, and this morning I thought my uncle looked far more anxious +than ever; indeed, he observed that he was not quite certain whether it +would not have been wiser for us all to have gone on board the _Hope_. +"These earthquakes are often forerunners of an eruption," I heard him +remark to Oliver. Oliver and he went out soon afterwards to Hope +Harbour with their axes, and were absent all the day. When they came +back Oliver said he had been employed in cutting down trees. I asked +him what they were for. + +"Why, Mr Sedgwick thinks it may be as well to prepare a raft, in case +we should wish to leave the island before the return of the boat." + +"But could we possibly wish to do that?" I exclaimed. "Not under +ordinary circumstances," he answered. "But, Miss Emily, I would urge +you to brace up your nerves for whatever may occur; or better than that, +seek for strength from above to go through any danger to which you may +be exposed. I think indeed that Mr Sedgwick himself wished me to talk +to you about the matter, for he has grave apprehensions that there may +be, with short notice, an eruption of the mountain. I had terrible +evidence of what that may produce, when Walter and I escaped from our +island. He therefore thinks it prudent to have a raft ready sufficient +to carry us all. If we could build it, it would remain secure in Hope +Harbour, though we may pray that it may not be required. The trees we +have cut down are of a very light wood, which floats easily, and we are +going to place the planks which remain over from the vessel, with a +quantity of bamboo on the top of it, so that we may quickly make a +buoyant and secure raft." + +I believe I should have been far more alarmed at this information had I +received it from any one else, but Oliver spoke in so calm a way that I +felt sure that all would be for the best. I then told Grace, who was +perhaps more alarmed than I had expected her to be. I trusted, too, +that the _Hope_ would return before such a fearful event should occur, +and that we might be safe away from the island in her. We gradually +told the Frau what Mr Sedgwick apprehended. "Ah, yes!" she said, +looking up at the mountain, "I think so too. Before long that send up +stones and ashes, and send down rivers of lava from its sides; but I +hope we be away first. I would rather be living in my own Dutch land, +where we see no hill higher than a mole-hill, and where we have the sea +ready to come in over the country with every storm, than I would live +out in these beautiful lands, where the earthquake like the sea, and the +mountains are like so many cannons stuck in the ground with their +muzzles up." + +When my uncle came home I told him what I had heard, and begged he would +allow us to come and help him and Oliver to make the raft. "I do not +know that you can help us in building the raft," he said; "but you can +assist in preparing the provisions and stores, without which it would be +of little use, as we should only put to sea to be starved." + +This we gladly undertook to do, and immediately commenced arranging +packages for the buffaloes to carry. The Frau hurried off, and worked +very energetically, every now and then casting an anxious glance up at +the mountain. "What if it blow up before we ready?" she exclaimed. +"Dear, oh dear!" The buffaloes had become so accustomed to us that we +could lead them without difficulty, and as soon therefore as we were +ready, we started off by the well-beaten track to Hope Harbour. I will +not say that we were not a little anxious lest we might meet a mias or +tiger or other wild beast, but we had Merlin as a guard, besides which, +we hoped that the frequent firing of the guns had driven them away. We +found my uncle and Oliver hard at work upon the raft. It was now almost +ready to launch. "We must build a shed also in which to store our goods +till the moment comes for embarking, should we be compelled to quit the +island," he observed. "We will hope, however, for the best, and that +the old mountain will remain quiet till the _Hope_ returns." We made +three trips with the buffaloes, till we had collected an ample supply of +provisions, as also some additional clothing, and canvas with which to +form a covering to the raft. We were of some assistance also in putting +up the shed. This was soon done. It had, however, to be tolerably +secure, to prevent the entrance of monkeys, or any wandering bear which +might have found his way to the store. Both creatures are great +thieves, and would have carried off the whole of them. This done, my +uncle and Oliver made several improvements on the raft. A strong rail +was put up round it to serve as a bulwark, and a place raised in the +centre, also securely railed in, which they said should be our post. +They rigged also a couple of masts and sails, and some long oars, as +well as a rudder and some short paddles, which latter might be used at +times when the oars could not be so well worked. Altogether we looked +with some satisfaction on the raft, and felt thankful that we had the +means of escaping should we be driven from the island. + +We were now looking out every day for the return of the _Hope_. The +weather, which for long had been very fine, once more gave signs of +changing. We remembered too clearly the sad night when the brig was +lost, and we dreaded lest the cutter might be exposed to a similar +danger. Hitherto the weather had been beautifully calm and clear; now +clouds were gathering in the sky, though the wind was not as yet very +strong. + +"How dreadful it would be," said Grace, "if the mountain were to burst +forth while a hurricane was blowing! We should be driven from the +island, and yet not be able to venture on the sea." + +"We should not give way to such thoughts, Miss Grace," remarked Oliver. +"Let us go on trusting to Him who has hitherto taken care of us." + +"I feel rebuked," said Grace, a little time afterwards; "I will try to +quiet my alarms, and hope for the best." + +Having now made all the arrangements which could be thought of, we very +frequently went down to Flagstaff Rock to look out for the _Hope_. +Often we had to return disappointed, however. At length one day, when +Oliver, Grace, and I, attended by Merlin, were collected there, Grace +exclaimed-- + +"See! see! there is a white spot in the horizon!" + +We all looked towards it. + +"I fear it is a line of foam-crested seas," said Oliver. "See! it +extends far on either side. It is caused by a hurricane, which is +sweeping towards us." + +"Oh, but I am sure there is a sail too!" said Grace. "Look again, +Oliver. If you shade your eyes, you will see it rising above the foam." + +We all looked; and at length both Oliver and I agreed with Grace that +there was a vessel's sail. She seemed to be coming towards the island. +How eagerly we gazed at her! At length we had no doubt about the +matter; and Oliver said he was sure she was the cutter. We wished to +let Mr Sedgwick and the Frau know the good news; and yet neither of us +liked to leave the spot. + +"Merlin can remain with you," said Oliver at length, "and I will go and +tell them;" and off he set. + +The cutter drew nearer and nearer, carrying a press of sail, considering +the strong wind which was now blowing. She was apparently making for +Hope Harbour, instead of standing in towards Flagstaff Rock. From the +way of the wind, the entrance to Hope Harbour would be tolerably +sheltered. This probably was the reason. I understood enough about sea +affairs to know that she was carrying so much canvas in order to weather +Flagstaff Cape. When that was done, I trusted she would be safe. Oh, +how I wished we had a spy-glass to see who was on board! Could Walter +be there? How my heart beat! Poor dear Grace, too, was greatly +agitated. We had long wished for this moment; and now it had come. Not +only were we still in doubt, but agitated by anxiety for the safety of +those on board. It appeared to me that our friends were in great +danger, from the way the little cutter heeled over to the wind. On she +stood, without attempting to lessen the sail; when, as we were gazing at +her, suddenly a fearful blast struck her. Over bent her mast and sail. +We both of us shrieked with horror. Before we could look again she was +upset, and the sea breaking wildly over her. + +"Oh, she will sink! she will sink!" cried Grace--"and all will be +drowned!" + +She had passed the cape, and was driving in towards the shore, the sea +every instant increasing in height and fury. Would she float till she +reached it? or, should she reach it, would she escape the fearful rocks +which lined so long an extent of the coast? We watched her with fearful +anxiety, trying to ascertain what those on board were doing; but the +distance and the spray which drove over her almost concealed them from +our sight. We were still gazing at them, when we heard my uncle and +Oliver utter exclamations of dismay. They had just arrived at the spot +where we were. + +"We must go round to Cormorant Bay," said my uncle. "I think she will +drive ashore thereabouts, if she floats as long; and if our friends can +manage to cling on till then, they may possibly be saved. But the risk +is a fearful one." + +Hurrying from the rock, we had to go all the way round by the house to +get to the bay of which my uncle spoke. The Frau saw us as we passed, +and followed as fast as she could move, though she in vain attempted to +keep up with us. On we ran with Merlin. We no longer thought of +snakes, or orang-outans, or tigers, so eager were we to reach the bay. +As we passed the house, our uncle and Oliver snatched up some large +bamboos and ropes to assist them in getting our friends on shore. We +eagerly looked out through each opening towards the sea, in the hope of +seeing the vessel; but she was nowhere visible. Oh, how my heart +trembled lest she should have sunk before reaching the shore! Sometimes +our agitation was so great that Grace and I could scarcely proceed. +Again we regained our courage, and ran on; but I felt as if I was in +some fearful dream, so eager were we to get there, and yet so incapable +did we feel ourselves of moving fast. At length the bay to which we +were directing our course appeared between the trees. We made our way +down to the beach; but so fearfully agitated was the ocean that we could +not at first distinguish the vessel. Yes! but there she was, though-- +still floating, and at some distance from the land; but the foaming seas +were washing over her, and it seemed impossible that anybody could yet +be clinging to her sides. The spray broke in our faces, and prevented +us from seeing clearly. Oliver, however, at last exclaimed-- + +"Yes, yes--I am sure there is some one holding on to the bulwarks! Yes! +I see two--three figures! I am sure of that. Perhaps there are more." + +We stood with aching eyes gazing on the vessel. We could render her no +assistance. Still it was evident she was driving in closer and closer. +Happily the bay towards which she was coming was free of rocks; and +though a tremendous surf broke on it, yet it might be possible for them, +with our assistance, to escape to land should she once reach the beach. +As she drew near, my uncle fastened a rope round his waist, and told +Oliver to do the same. + +"Now, Frau," he said, "you take hold of this rope, and do not let me go, +or my life will be sacrificed. Girls, do you do the same for Oliver." + +And thus they stood, each with a long bamboo in his hand, ready to rush +in and help those who might still be alive. Now the thought pressed +itself upon me, "Is Walter among them? If he is, will he reach the +shore alive?" + +Grace and I grasped the rope tightly. Now a huge wave came roaring in, +with the vessel on its summit. She seemed close to us, and then away +she glided towards the ocean. Oh, how it tantalised us as we saw +several persons still clinging to her!--and I thought I could +distinguish Mr Hooker and Dick Tarbox. Yes--and there was a slight +figure also. "Can that be Walter? Yes, yes--it must be!" I thought. + +And now once again the vessel was driving towards the land. On--on she +came! Now at length she touched the beach. + +"Spring! spring!" cried Mr Sedgwick, rushing into the water, the Frau +holding the rope with all her might. Oliver followed his example. + +The figure on which my eyes were fixed let go its hold, and the next +instant was buffeting the waves, which seemed to be carrying him out to +sea. Oliver dashed in, we almost being dragged in after him. But we +held the rope tightly, leaning back against it; and Oliver grasped the +person with his hand, and with desperate energy we hauled them both +ashore. Oh, what joy and gratitude I felt when I recognised Walter, as +he staggered forward towards us! + +"Yes, I am safe, dear sister! And you--" He could say no more, ere he +sank on the ground. "Go and help the others," he said, faintly. "Do +not delay. On, Oliver, on!" + +Oliver again rushed forward, and caught hold of Potto Jumbo, who at that +moment leapt from the vessel, to which he had till then been clinging, +into the foaming surf. Oliver grasped him by his woolly hair just as he +was being torn away; and directly after, Potto, gaining his feet, rushed +up the sand carrying Oliver in his arms. Oliver himself was almost +overcome by his exertion. My uncle, in the meantime, had caught hold of +Mr Hooker, and placed him in safety, and was now rushing in to help +Dick Tarbox. He succeeded in his efforts. Meantime Potto Jumbo, taking +the rope off Oliver, fastened it round his own waist. "I go for the +others," he cried out. "You hold dere, Oliver and you young ladies. +Don't let go. Walter, he soon come all right--no fear." Saying this, +Potto rushed into the water, and reaching the wreck, seized hold of Mr +Thudicumb, who was still clinging to it. But where was honest Roger +Trew? Mr Thudicumb was landed, but greatly exhausted. Just then we +saw another figure holding on to the bulwarks forward; but he had before +been so completely covered with the foam, that we had not observed him. +Mr Sedgwick and Potto made a dash at him together, and though he +appeared more dead than alive, they succeeded in dragging him up the +beach. Still another person remained onboard. Who could he be? "I +see, I see!" cried Potto Jumbo. "I see; I go get him. He my cook-mate. +Hurrah! hurrah!" Saying this, Potto Jumbo fastened the end of Mr +Sedgwick's rope to his own, and crying out to the rest to hold it, he +darted once more into the sea. Twice the surf bore him back again to +the beach; but he persevered, shouting out at the same time, "Come, +come--no fear!" The person he was attempting to rescue heard him, and +waiting till a sea was approaching, sprang in. The wave carried him +towards Potto, who seized him in his powerful grasp; and those who had +hold of the rope hauling away, both were dragged up in safety. Yes, +there stood Macco, whom we supposed, as Walter had done, had been killed +by the savages. There he was, however, there could be no doubt about +that. He crawled to Walter's side, and taking his hand, looked in his +face, exclaiming, "Oh, I t'ankful you escape, Massa Walter. Me lub you +as one fader, one broder, one eberyt'ing." The expression of Macco's +countenance showed that his words were true. + +Not till now could I run to Walter's side, and for some minutes I could +do nothing else but put my arms round his neck and kiss him again and +again. + +"We may well thank Heaven that we have escaped," said Mr Hooker; "but +what will become of the vessel I cannot tell." + +"We must try and secure her," said Mr Thudicumb; "for though she is +getting a fearful bumping, if she is thrown on shore we may manage to +launch her again some day when we are ready for her." + +The matter, however, was settled in a different way; for another fierce +sea rolling towards us, drove her with such violence against the beach, +that her sides were completely beaten in, and in a few minutes she +became a confused mass of wreck. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY THREE. + +WALTER'S ADVENTURES. + +Although our friends were greatly exhausted by having to cling so long +to the cutter with the sea breaking furiously over them, after resting +for some time on the beach they were able to proceed to the house. I +clung to Walter's arm as we walked along, and could only again and again +say how rejoiced and thankful I was that he had escaped. He seemed so +pale and weak, that I forebore asking him questions. Still, of course, +I was longing to know what adventures he had gone through. He, however, +seemed more anxious to be told what had occurred to us during his +absence. + +"You shall read all the chief events in the continuation of your +journal," I said. "You remember, Walter, that you asked me to go on +with it should you be interrupted, and I have done so; and perhaps if I +read it to you I shall be able to make remarks as I go on, which will +still further enable you to understand all that has occurred since you +went away." + +The next day, as Walter was utterly unable to go out, I spent in reading +what I had written; and he then showed me his note-book, which he had +fortunately had with him, and in which he had also marked down the chief +part of his adventures. The particulars of the voyage of the _Hope_ I +had yet to learn. I now, however, handed him over his journal, that he +might enter more clearly the events he described to me. Mr Hooker +afterwards told us about the voyage of the _Hope_, which had terminated +in so disastrous a way to our little vessel. Happily, the mountain +continued burning slowly, though steadily, and our uncle told us he +trusted it would do so without committing further damage, though he +suspected that the beauties of many of the scenes we visited round its +base must have been considerably marred; indeed, now and then a puff of +wind brought a quantity of fine dust in our direction, which covered +everything, and even penetrated into the house. + +I found that Mr Hooker, and those who had suffered least from their +shipwreck, had gone to Hope Harbour. They said they wished to see if +anything could be saved from the cutter; but I suspect, from some +remarks which they let fall, that their intention was to increase the +size of the raft, and to make some further improvements on it, so that +it might carry, if required, the whole of the party without difficulty. + +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +WALTER'S JOURNAL. + +Ali seemed as anxious as I was to obtain a nautilus, and we agreed early +in the morning to set off in search of one. I found that he had brought +several bamboos full of water, as also a supply of sago-cake and rice. +We had our fish-pots with long lines ready to lower in deep water, with +fishing-lines and hooks and a supply of small fish for bait. We first +hauled up the pots which had been lowered a short distance from the +shore; but though there were several fine fish in them, no nautilus was +found. Ali now made me understand that we should be more likely to +obtain what we wanted near a reef at a considerable distance from the +shore, and taking the oars, he pulled away lustily out to sea. In a +short time a breeze sprang up, when we hoisted our little lugsail, and +skimmed merrily over the water, just rippled into wavelets by the brisk +breeze. Ali's countenance was at no time very prepossessing. I could +not help thinking that it had a more than usually sinister expression. +Still I persuaded myself that this was fancy, and, ashamed of my +suspicions, resolved to do as he proposed. At length I caught sight of +a part of the reef rising a few feet out of the water. By the white +line of the surf which extended on either side, I saw that it was of +considerable length under the surface. Lowering our sail, we pulled +round to leeward of it, where we found the water sufficiently shallow to +enable us to lower the pots. Ali made signs to me that we should be +sure to catch a nautilus at this point if we waited long enough. Having +put down the pots, we pulled a little distance along the reef, where he +proposed fishing with our lines. We had soon hauled in several fine +fish, one an enormous fellow, which must have weighed nearly two hundred +pounds. We had great difficulty in hauling it in; but believing that it +would be acceptable at home, I was unwilling to let it go. The fish +struggled violently, and in our efforts to get it in, one of our oars +slipped overboard. I was so eager to get the fish, that I scarcely +thought of the oar. We then got it into the boat; but it seemed +inclined to take it from us, and send us overboard. Ali hammered away +at its head and tail till at last he quieted it; not, however, till the +oar had been driven by a current to a considerable distance. Scarcely +had we got the fish in, when we had another bite, and this was also a +large fish, and occupied us some time. When I at length looked about +for the oar, I could not see it. We, however, hoisted up the stone +which served as an anchor, and Ali sculled in the direction we supposed +it had gone. He thought he saw it; but when we got up to the spot we +found only a piece of sea-weed floating on the surface. + +The weather, as you remember, had begun to change, and I saw it was time +for us to return to the shore. Without an oar, however, this was no +easy task, as the wind had begun to blow directly from the shore. It +now came in strong gusts, and though there was not much sea, still it +was sufficient to try the boat, and we were obliged to continue bailing +to keep her free of water. I now perceived clearly the dangerous +position in which we were placed. With only one oar, should the wind +continue blowing from the shore, we must inevitably be driven off. I +proposed getting back under the lee of the reef and anchoring. This we +did, and for some time held on. Our fish-pots had been lowered, and I +proposed hauling one of the nearest to us up. Great was my delight, on +getting it on board, to find that a nautilus had been caught. The shell +and creature were perfect, although it was very different from the +graceful one I had seen pictured in books, with its tentaculi spread +out, and apparently employed in rowing over the water; but in reality, +as Mr Hooker had told me, used as fishing-lines, or, at all events, for +catching its prey. Another pot was at some little distance, and so +delighted was I at catching this one, that I hoped we might find another +nautilus. We therefore hauled in our anchor. Scarcely had we done so, +when a tremendous blast came over the land, and before we could regain +the reef, we were out of soundings. The boat was now tossed about +violently, and I saw, and so did Ali, that our only prospect of +preserving our lives was to hoist the sail and keep before the wind. +The sea had changed greatly, and came dancing and foaming up round us. +Where we should drive to, we knew not. My heart sank within me at the +thought of being driven away from Emily and my friends, and I knew, too, +the great anxiety my absence would cause them. I could not tell also to +what dangers we might be exposed. If the boat escaped being swamped, +she might be cast upon a reef. We had, providentially, a good supply of +water and an abundance of food. Our fish, however, would not keep many +days; but while it lasted, we had no fear of starving. + +Whether Ali had intended to get away from the island or not I could not +tell. If he did, his purpose was answered. I saw him cut some of the +fish into strips, and hang them up to the mast. This he did for the +sake of drying them, and thus preserving them longer. All we could do +now was to keep the boat directly before the wind, for I dreaded lest +she should broach to and be immediately overturned. I cast a look back +at our island, which seemed gradually to sink into the sea, till at +length it was altogether lost to sight. Here we were in this small boat +tossing on the waves out of sight of land, and not knowing where we were +going. Perhaps Ali knew better than I did. He, at all events, did not +seem to be alarmed, and when unemployed, he continued humming melancholy +Malay airs, which certainly did not tend to raise my spirits. There is +a great difference in reading of an adventure and going through it. I +confess I should have felt less anxiety had Oliver been with me; but as +I could not exchange ideas with my companion, and we could only very +imperfectly understand each other, it was very trying. During the day I +had managed to steer pretty well, so that with occasional bailing we +kept the boat free of water; but at night it was far more difficult. +Still, we had for present safety to run on before the gale. Often I +fancied that I heard voices calling to me across the water. More than +once it appeared to me that tall ships were passing us; but as we could +not alter our course, there was no hope of nearing them; indeed, I +believe that they were phantoms of my imagination. The Malay did not +offer to steer. He seemed contented with the way I was doing so. In +spite of the dangerous position in which we were placed, I was every +moment becoming more and more sleepy, and felt that I would have given +anything to be able to go to sleep for a few minutes. At length I made +Ali understand that he must take the helm. He came carefully aft, and I +changed places with him. I had every reason to suppose that he knew +well how to steer, from the way I had seen him manage the boat, and I +therefore confided the helm to him without fear. Scarcely had I lain +with my back against the mast than I was fast asleep. It appeared to me +that the boat was flying on as before, though sometimes tossed even more +violently than at first. + +When I at length awoke the grey dawn was breaking, clouds were overhead, +and the dark seas rolled up on either side, foaming and hissing as if to +overwhelm our small boat. It appeared wonderful that she should be able +to ride over such tempestuous seas. Still, on she went, Ali steering as +carefully as I had done. I felt very thirsty, and took a draught of +water from one of the bamboos. Ali signed to me to give him another, +which he drank off; and I then handed him a little sago-bread and some +dried fish. He, however, preferred the fresh fish, which he ate raw. +I, as yet, had no inclination to do that, and preferred biting away at a +dried piece with my sago. I became more anxious when I saw how far we +were getting from the island, as I knew the difficulty we should have in +returning. After a time I offered to relieve Ali, and he then lay down +and went to sleep. In the course of the morning the sea had gone down +considerably; but we still continued running before the breeze. The +time seemed very, very long, and my only consolation was that the wind +was decreasing, and that, at all events, we might be able to direct our +course for the island. I forgot for the moment that the wind might have +changed, and that not knowing how we had been steering, even with the +aid of the sun we should be unable to find our way back. I was thankful +when Ali awoke and offered to take the helm. + +When I again opened my eyes, I found that Ali had been eating some fish +and sago and drinking the water. I had taken a draught, when, looking +to our supply, I found to my dismay that only one bamboo cask of water +remained. Ali, however, made no remark; indeed, my suspicions were +confirmed of his wish to get away from the island, and he, at all +events, seemed to know more nearly whereabouts we were than I did. I +knew that nothing caused so much dreadful suffering as want of water, +and I feared that we should be exposed to it unless we could fall in +with land. I was now able to stand up in the boat and scan the horizon, +but nowhere was land to be seen. The sun rising enabled us to steer +more steadily, and we continued to proceed towards the north. I now +tried to make Ali understand that we must economise our water to the +utmost. He took the bamboo, and I saw, instead of returning it to its +place, that he put it down by his side. I could not help thinking from +this that he intended to appropriate it to himself. However, as I had +lately had a draught, and was not thirsty, I made no remark. The sun +soon struck down with great heat upon our heads, and gave me an +increased desire for water. I made signs to Ali that I wished for some, +but he shook his head, as if to signify that I must wait some time +longer. I did so patiently, thinking that perhaps he was right. +However, at length I could brook no longer delay, and springing up, +seized the bamboo. He cast an angry glance at me, but even had he had a +weapon in his hand, I should not have been prevented from drinking the +water. I could have swallowed the whole of it, but refrained, and +merely took a small draught, barely sufficient to quench my burning +thirst. I then made signs to him that when he was equally thirsty he +might also have some, but kept it in my own possession. I suspected, +however, that when I was again compelled to go to sleep he would seize +it, and perhaps drink the whole of the contents. Now and then the +dreadful thought came across me that he might perhaps murder me, or +throw me overboard. I might be wronging the man; but I knew he had been +a pirate, and was not likely to be very particular as to what he would +do. + +Again daylight departed, and when at length I fell asleep, I was +dreaming of fountains and lakes and sparkling streams and draughts of +crystal water. I awoke to find my mouth parched with thirst, and on +lifting the bamboo, I discovered that every drop had been drained. I +felt sure that unless we could fall in with land death must be our +portion--at least, for my own part, I believed I could not go through a +whole day without water. The sun had not been up long before I began to +feel the suffering I had expected. I knew that drinking salt water was +dangerous in the extreme. I saw, however, that Ali was continually +chewing a little dried fish, and sometimes a few grains of rice, a +handful of which had been in the boat. I followed his example, but +found but little relief. Again and again I looked round in the hope of +seeing land. At length I caught sight ahead of a long line of white +breakers. I pointed them out to Ali, that we might avoid them, +supposing that a reef existed in that direction. He stood up and +examined them, and then altered the course of the boat a little. As we +approached, I saw beyond the breakers a line of white sand. It was, I +judged, a lately made coral island. We continued on till we got on the +lee side of it, when we ran close into the rocks. It appeared, as far +as I could judge, to be about a mile and a half in circumference, the +shore so steep that a big ship might have run in alongside it. The +whole was covered with fine white sand, without a vestige of vegetation. +I was unwilling to land, though I thought it possible water might be +obtained, for I had a dread that Ali might leave me there and go off by +himself. He seemed to understand my suspicions, and jumping out, made +the boat fast, and led the way over the sand. I saw that it was covered +with a great variety of sea-birds, some of which rose immediately we +advanced, and began shrieking and uttering loud cries as they hovered +over our heads, disputing our advance. We had literally to defend +ourselves with the boat-stretchers which we carried, and knocked over +several of them while on the wing as they flew towards us. They were +incited, we discovered, to attack us in defence of their young, numbers +of which, from the little gaping nudity just out of the shell to +well-fledged bantlings, covered the ground. There was also a great +number of eggs, many of which were newly laid. Of these we got a large +store, besides half filling the boat with the birds we had killed. In +vain, however, we searched all the island round for water. Not a drop +could we discover. Even the hollows in the rocks were dry. It was +evident that no rain had fallen there for a long time. The blood of the +birds, however, somewhat quenched our thirst. At first Ali would not +touch it, but on seeing me take it, he at length overcame his scruples. +I confess that when we returned to the boat I endeavoured to keep first, +still feeling that he was very likely to leave me. I think, however, I +wronged him there, as he made no attempt to get off without me. + +Once more we were steering to the north. All day long I kept a bright +look-out, in the hope of seeing some other island. Two days passed. +Oh, how fearfully did I suffer from thirst during the last of them; I +would have given everything I possessed for a draught of cold water. We +were gliding on during the night, when it seemed to me as if suddenly a +tall grove had sprung out of the water. I rubbed my eyes, and looked, +and looked again. Yes; there could be no doubt of it; we were passing a +palm-covered island. I awoke Ali, who had just before fallen asleep. +To land at night was dangerous. However some risk must be run. We +therefore continued close to the shore, in the hope of finding some +sheltered bay into which we might run the boat. The dawn was just +breaking, and at length, with the help of daylight, we discovered a +place where we thought we could venture to land. We ran in on a soft +white sand; but the sea following, almost filled the boat with water, +and we had to jump out and haul her up to escape a second wave, which +came rolling slowly in after the first. So eager were we to find water, +that the instant we had hauled the boat up out of reach of the seas, we +began running along the beach. + +The island was a small one, with numerous palm and other trees growing +on it. I eagerly looked out for the sago-palm, remembering that it was +in a grove of one of these trees we had found water on our island. We +searched and searched in vain. Already our tongues were clinging to the +roofs of our mouths. The birds had soon grown putrid, so that many +hours had passed since we had moistened our lips. I felt ready to drop, +and Ali also was almost overcome. We eagerly chewed the leaves of +trees, but they gave us no relief. Oh, how delightful would have been +the sound of a bubbling fountain! No sago-trees, no sign of water could +we discover. I found my knees shaking, my strength leaving me. At +length I could no longer stand. I leant against the trunk of a tall +tree, and gradually sank down to the ground. I began to dread that +death would overtake me, and what a fearful death! I had read of such, +but never supposed that I should realise it myself. Ali cast a look at +me. He could do nothing to help me. He was going to desert me, I +thought. My voice was failing. I tried to call him back, but I could +no longer articulate, and a dreamy, half-conscious state of feeling came +over me. "I shall thus sink calmly into death," I thought. I tried to +pray, I tried to collect my thoughts, but in vain. How long I thus +continued I know not, when I heard a voice shouting. It was Ali's. I +opened my eyes, and saw that he was running towards a tall tree. At +last I saw him ascend the trunk. It seemed wonderful how he could get +up. Presently I heard something drop. It was a bunch of cocoa-nuts; +another and another followed. I tried to crawl towards them, but had no +strength to move. Ali descended the tree. He seized a cocoa-nut, broke +it open, and drank the contents. Once more I tried to cry out. Then I +saw him running towards me. Oh, how delicious was the draught which he +poured down my throat! In a few seconds I felt like another being. My +strength returned. I sat up and eagerly clutched another cocoa-nut +which he handed me. In a wonderfully short time I felt perfectly +recovered. + +We hunted about, but could find very few more trees. We should soon, we +knew, consume the young fruit. We remained, however, on the island all +the day, and as we wandered along the beach, we came to some soft hot +sand, in which we discovered a number of turtles' eggs. We had now +sufficient to support life, but I well knew that our provisions would +not last long, and that we must once more put to sea. Ali also clearly +understood this. We quickly got a light with pieces of bamboo, and +cooked our eggs, and having loaded ourselves with as many cocoa-nuts as +we could carry, set off to return to the boat. As we went along, the +fear seized me that we had not hauled her up sufficiently, and that +perhaps she had been washed away. I could scarcely refrain from setting +off running, so eager was I to ascertain the truth. I soon, however, +found that my strength was not sufficiently restored for active +movement. On we went, till we had reached the beach where I thought we +had left the boat. She was nowhere to be seen. I looked about +anxiously. I was giving way to despair, when, casting my eyes along the +sand, I observed that it had been undisturbed. There were no traces of +our feet. I knew therefore that we could not have been at the spot. +Ali pointed along the beach, and we proceeded some way, when at length I +caught sight of a dark object in the distance. Yes, it was our boat; +but already the water had reached her stern, and in another minute she +would have floated away. We drew her up still further, and secured her +by her painter to a stone high up the beach. + +My suspicions about Ali had not been altogether removed, but still, the +way he had treated me in bringing the cocoa-nuts when he might have left +me to die, showed me that he could not have any sinister intentions. I +therefore proposed that we should sleep on shore that night, and proceed +to sea early the following morning. We accordingly built a hut high up +on the dry sand, and made ourselves comfortable beds with leaves, on +which we could stretch our limbs and rest at ease during the night. We +first, however, lighted a large fire, though there was not much fear of +any creatures disturbing us on that small island. + +Next morning we made a further search for turtles' eggs, and having +found a good supply, we placed them and our cocoa-nuts on board the +boat, and then launching her, once more put to sea, steering as before +to the northward, where we hoped to find land with food and water on it. +Our stock of sago-cake was getting low, but that mattered little, I +thought, as without water I found it very difficult to masticate. On, +on we sailed. I had miscalculated distances, for though, looking at the +chart, as I frequently had done on board the _Dugong_, the sea did not +appear of great width, yet when sailing across it in a small boat the +matter was very different. For two dreary days we glided on over the +calm sea, looking out for land, or for some passing vessel which might +take us on board; but neither appeared. I recollected Macco's wonderful +voyage in his frail canoe, and felt that I ought not to despair. The +Malay sat passive. What he was thinking of I could not tell. +Occasionally he offered to take the helm when I grew weary, and I soon +fell asleep. When I awoke, there he was sitting like a statue, scarcely +moving limb or eye. On we sailed. The sun rose and sank again, and +still we were in the midst of the circling horizon. Our stock of +cocoa-nuts was getting low; indeed, though the juice is very refreshing +for a draught, it cannot take the place of pure water. Our sago-cake +was exhausted. We had but three eggs remaining. It might be many days +more before we could reach another island, I feared, and if so, could we +support existence till then? These thoughts were passing across my mind +as the sun was reaching the horizon. I saw Ali bending forward and +looking under the sail. He said not a word, however. I gazed in the +same direction, but could see nothing. The sun sank beneath the water, +and darkness came on. I had been at the helm for some time, when I +found Ali taking it out of my hands, for I had dropped to sleep. I lay +down, and in an instant was unconscious of all that was taking place. + +When I awoke it was broad daylight. A dark shadow was passing across my +face. I looked up, and saw that we were gliding under some tall +mangrove bushes. I sprang up eagerly. We were entering the mouth of a +river. Astern, the blue sea shone in the beams of the rising sun. On +either side were dark trees. "Soon get water and food," said Ali. On +we glided. I felt my spirits and strength greatly restored, and +returned thanks to Heaven for bringing us into so promising a region. +We were soon amidst the most luxuriant vegetation. Tall trees rose up +on either side of the river, with thick underwood, which here and there +gave place to small patches of grass. From the banks we occasionally +saw huge alligators gliding slowly off into the water, or watching us as +we passed with their cruel-looking yellow eyes. Curiously shaped +lizards crawled along the banks, or lay extended on the boughs of the +trees, gazing at us, and occasionally puffing themselves up into +extraordinary shapes. From either side also came strange sounds--the +shrill call of pea-hens, the cooing of pigeons, high above all of which +was the pertinacious chattering of monkeys, while parrots and other +gaily-coloured birds flew from bough to bough, and gigantic butterflies +with brilliant wings skimmed over the surface of the stream. The +monkeys followed us as we proceeded, or else the banks must have been +thickly inhabited with them; some throwing themselves frantically from +bough to bough, coming close down to our heads, others uttering hoarse +cries, as if to frighten us away from their neighbourhood. Oftentimes I +could not help fancying that some natives were watching us, so +human-like did the faces of the larger monkeys appear. Now and then we +interrupted a little family enjoying themselves in a clear space at the +base of a tree, the patriarch sitting calmly watching the proceedings of +his progeny, while the mother was gambolling with her young one, or +seeking food among the grass, or under the roots of a tree; and then she +would come with her prize, and commence playing with her infant, and +caressing him like any human mother, tumbling about perhaps in rather a +strange fashion. As we came more in sight, the whole family would +scamper off, a few remaining to the last, grinning fiercely at us, +hooting and chattering hoarsely, and shaking the boughs in their +indignation at our unwelcome appearance. Anxious as I was, I could not +help being amused at these things; but Ali was utterly indifferent to +them. + +On we glided, till at a fresh turn of the river I saw rising above the +bank some buildings on poles, extending a considerable way along it. +The buildings we were approaching were raised eight or ten feet above +the water on strong posts. There were wide platforms of bamboo before +them, over part of which projected the roofs of the verandahs. Several +ladders hung down from the platforms to enable the inhabitants to ascend +from their boats. They were somewhat similar to those we had seen in +Papua, but far more substantial, and built in a much more elegant style. +The inhabitants, apparently, had only lately risen, and came out on the +platforms as we approached. The men were dressed in waistcloths of blue +cotton, hanging down behind, mostly bordered with red, blue, and white. +Some had handkerchiefs of the same colour bound round their heads, and +one or two were ornamented with gold lace. They wore also ear-rings of +brass, and moon-shaped, with heavy necklaces of white and black beads. +On their arms were numbers of rings made of brass or white shells, while +over their shoulders hung their long black shiny hair, which set off to +advantage their pure brown skin. Some of them held knife-headed spears +in their hands, while to a belt round the waist hung a long slender +knife and a pouch with materials for betel-chewing. One man, who seemed +to be the chief, wore on his head a bunch of large gaily-coloured +feathers secured by a circle round it. They were mostly +pleasant-looking people, and seemed ready to welcome us as we +approached. The women had far more covering than the men. Round the +waist they wore coils of ratan, stained red, to which their petticoats +were attached. Below it one whom we took to be a chief's wife wore a +girdle of small silver coins. Others had additional ornaments of +brass-wire, but most of them wore a large number of brass rings round +not only their arms, but their legs, from the knee to the ankle, while +curiously shaped hats adorned with beads ornamented their heads. +Altogether they were far superior in appearance to the savages I had +expected to see in these regions, and I had little doubt that we had +arrived at the mainland of Borneo, and that they were a tribe of Dyaks. + +We made signs that we were very thirsty, pointing to our lips, and the +chief, coming forward, beckoned us to ascend the ladder. This I did +first, Ali following with not so much confidence behind me. He was at +once perceived to be a Malay, and he must have known that his countrymen +are apt to ill-treat the Dyaks, and consequently he could scarcely have +expected to be received by them as a friend. From the looks of the +people, however, I had no fears of them, especially when one of the +girls, running off, brought back a large bamboo full of cool water. Oh, +how delicious it was! the first which had passed my lips for many days. +I handed it to Ali, whom they did not seem to treat so courteously as +they did me. When I signified that I should be glad of more, instantly +a fresh supply was brought me. The chief now addressed Ali, who, I +found, fully understood their language, and he seemed to be giving an +account of the cause which had brought us to their country. The chief +appeared satisfied; and now giving orders to some of the women, a basket +containing some pork and rice and some fine-looking bananas was brought +to us. I felt no great inclination to eat the pork and rice, for my +throat was hot and parched, but I got through a portion; and oh, how +delicious were the bananas! No sooner had I got them into my mouth than +they seemed to melt away. They were of the colour of the finest yellow +butter, and of an exquisite flavour. I felt as I ate that I could never +take enough of them. I saw in the open space behind the house a +plantation of them, showing that they were carefully cultivated. The +Dyaks showed me a corner of a room where I might rest, for they +perceived that I was sleepy and weary, and I believe most of the men +went out either to cultivate the ground or on a hunting expedition. +What became of Ali I could not tell; but as, after a little time, +notwithstanding his cool reception, he seemed to be at home with the +people, I concluded he would take care of himself. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY FOUR. + +WALTER'S ADVENTURES IN BORNEO. + +My Dyak hosts seemed well-disposed towards me; yet, I confess, I was not +altogether comfortable in their society. The first morning after my +arrival, just as I left my sleeping-corner, I saw a large basket +standing in the chief's room. Supposing it to contain provisions, I +looked into it, when, what was my horror to see it filled with a number +of dried Imuran heads grinning horribly up at me! I turned away in +disgust, when I saw the chief looking at me with a glance of triumph in +his eye, just as a civilised person would have been pleased at +exhibiting a collection of his orders of merit for gallantry in battle +or sagacity in the council. They were trophies, I found, taken by the +chief in his wars with neighbouring tribes. Probably it was the +possession of these which had raised him to his position in his tribe. + +Soon afterwards I saw a number of young men coming along. They were +singing and shouting. I saw that one of them had a head, yet gory and +fresh, on the top of a spear. A light brown girl, really a pretty +creature, ran out to welcome him; and I afterwards discovered that she +was his bride-elect, and that he had gone with his companions on a foray +in order to obtain this human head, to make himself worthy of her +affection. These people were, however, very gentle and mild in their +manners to each other, and had I not witnessed this, and similar sights, +I could scarcely have supposed they were the savages they have been +described. A party soon afterwards assembled, apparently to go out on a +hunting expedition. Each man had a wooden tube about five feet long. +This was a blow-pipe, through which bamboo arrows are shot with great +precision. The points are dipped in a subtle poison, which destroys +birds and small animals almost instantaneously when struck with them. +Some of the men, also, were armed with bows and arrows. The chief men +carried swords about two feet in length, slightly curved, and broad at +the end. They were admirably tempered, and the chief, to show me how +sharp they were, cut through with a blow a small bar of iron, and then +showed me the blade to prove that it was not in the least turned. The +poison of their arrows was, I believe, extracted from the juice of a +tree similar to the upas-tree of Java. It is called _ippo_. + +I accompanied them on the hunting expedition, when they used generally +the blow-pipe I have described. The instant a bird was struck, it +dropped dead to the ground. I observed that they immediately cut round +where it had been wounded, and all the birds thus killed were afterwards +eaten without any bad effect. + +Having completely recovered my strength, I was anxious to recommence our +voyage, and told Ali of my wish. He, however, seemed in no hurry to go +away; but signified that, if I would be content to wait a little longer, +he would accompany me. I endeavoured to employ the time in obtaining +some knowledge of the Dyak language, as also the habits and customs of +the people. I found that at a little distance from this village another +existed, inhabited by the same tribe, or at all events the people were +on terms of friendship with each other. There was great wailing one +day, and I suspected that a person of consequence, perhaps a chief, was +very ill, or had died, in the other village. Finding some of the people +going in that direction, I followed them. The path, however, was very +difficult to walk in, as it was sunk a foot or so below the ground on +either side, and was only broad enough for a man's foot to tread in; the +Dyaks walk in a peculiar manner, by placing one foot directly before the +other, without in the slightest degree turning out their toes. I found +on my arrival at the village that my suspicions were correct. The chief +was not dead, but very ill, and as I saw him lying on his mat in an +upper room, I perceived that he had not long to live. Had I known at +the time more of the customs of the people, I should have been greatly +alarmed for my own safety and that of Ali. + +On my return with several people of our village, the chief made signs to +me that he was going on an expedition. Supposing it to be for hunting, +I gladly signified that I was ready to accompany him. Several large +canoes, which I had not before seen, were now drawn out of a place of +concealment a little up the stream. Our chief with about forty +followers entered them, armed with their swords, bows and arrows, and +blow-pipes. Not till we had got a little way down the river did I +discover that they bore a more warlike appearance than would have been +the case had they been simply going on a hunting expedition. What had +become of Ali I could not tell, or I might have learned from him more +about the matter. We started soon after daybreak, and pulled along the +coast for a considerable distance, when we landed in a bay where +apparently there were no inhabitants, as the thick jungle came close +down to the water without a break on either side. Here the flotilla +remained till the sun sank low, when we shoved off and continued as +before along the coast. It was dark when we entered the mouth of +another river, up which we proceeded, the men paddling carefully, and +not a word being spoken. We kept close in with the bank, now and then +touching on the long straggling roots of a mangrove-tree, then forcing +our way through the entangled mass of underwood, out of which affrighted +birds flew shrieking amid the darkness. + +I had now but little doubt that we were on some marauding expedition. +Now and then we stopped, apparently that our leader might listen to +ascertain whether any enemy was near, when from the forest there came +forth shrill whistles, chirrups, unearthly cries, drumming noises, such +as make one of these Indian forests apparently more full of life during +the night than when the sun sheds his beams over the scene. Now we +glided away more towards the centre of the river, which was as smooth as +polished glass, and reflected, wherever the trees left an opening, the +millions of stars which sparkled in the clear sky overhead; while above +us on either side rose the tall stems of the mighty trees, waving their +sable plumes in the air; and often, as if some sprites were amusing +themselves in letting off rockets, sparks of fire darted out in thick +masses, now appearing in one spot, now in another amid the waving +leaves. The sparks were produced by thousands and tens of thousands of +fire-flies. Thus we made our way up the stream, now branching off in +one direction now in another, till I could not possibly have discovered +my way again to the ocean. At length we drew up under a thick shaded +bank, when the chief and most of his followers landed, stepping +noiselessly over the soft green sward as they made their way through the +forest. One man only was left in each canoe. I also remained, having +now stronger fears than ever that my companions were bent on evil. Not +a sound was heard except those I have before described proceeding from +the forest. Suddenly I saw a bright light burst forth amid the branches +of the trees. Loud shrieks and cries rent the night air. My companions +seemed highly excited, and could scarcely restrain themselves from +leaping on shore and deserting the canoes. The cries increased. Shouts +of triumph rose above them. For some minutes they continued. So +fearful were the sounds that they made my heart sink within me, and +gladly would I have escaped from them. Then all was silent. In a few +minutes we heard steps coming through the forest. I had little doubt +that some village had been attacked by my friends, and expected to see a +number of prisoners brought to the canoes; but, instead, every man bore +a round ball in his hand, so it seemed through the gloom; but when they +stepped into the canoes, what was my horror to discover that each was a +human head held by the hair. Shoving off their canoes, they began to +paddle away down the stream up which we had come. Once more they were +silent, as they had been when we approached the ill-fated village. I +had now no doubt that they had set fire to it while the inhabitants were +fast asleep, and then, as they rushed out to escape the flames, they had +waylaid and cut off the heads of all they could catch hold of. + +When daylight broke, we had already gained the mouth of the river. Each +man who had been so fortunate as to kill an enemy, sat with a gory head +by his side, and my horror was increased when I saw that several were +those of women and children. I turned away sick at heart from the +spectacle. The river opened out on one side into a wide lagoon, and as +the mists of night rose, I saw at no great distance a tall bird with red +plumage standing in the water seeking his prey. His body was +comparatively small, but he had an enormous neck, and a bill a yard +long, it seemed, and of immense size at the head. I knew him at once to +be an adjutant bird--the chief of fishermen. Soon he began to move his +head rapidly about, then he made some rapid strides into deep water, +into which he plunged his long beak, and presently rose with a large +fish held by it. The fish wriggled about as if attempting to escape, +then by a sudden jerk he seemed to throw it into his mouth, down which +it disappeared. + +Again we were at sea, paddling along parallel with the shore. There was +no longer a necessity for silence, and the Dyaks gave vent to their joy +and satisfaction at the success of their headhunting with shouts and +songs and peals of laughter. "It was no laughing matter to the once +peaceful inhabitants of the village you have so ruthlessly destroyed," I +should have liked to have said, but as they would not have understood +the sentiment, I remained silent, and I saw that they smiled whenever I +turned away my eye with disgust as it chanced to fall upon their gory +trophies. They met, on our return, with an enthusiastic welcome. +Directly on landing they set off to the neighbouring village, probably +to console the dying chief with the sight of the heads they had brought, +to assure him that in his passage to the other world he would have no +lack of retainers. They had been gone some time, and the house was +almost deserted, when I saw Ali paddling up in our boat to the steps. +He sprang up on the platform and came to me. "Bad people dese," he +said. "Dey cut off Ali's head, dey cut off Walter's head," and he made +a significant sign across his throat. "I know what do, ay, ay." + +I could not understand his purpose--indeed, he did not deign further to +explain himself. He had left the boat at the steps. He made signs to +me to get into her. I did so, and found that he had supplied her with a +pair of oars and a number of bamboos of water, as well as a supply of +rice and fish and other articles of food. He then made signs to me to +row a little way down the river, and there to wait for him. I had got +to a little distance, when I saw some one moving under the house, where +a quantity of dry husks of rice and stalks of various sorts had been +collected. I recognised Ali by his costume, different from that of the +Dyaks. Presently I saw him making his way from under the house, and +coming along the path near the spot where he had told me to meet him. +Just then several Dyaks sprang out from the jungle; I saw the bright +gleam of a sword, and the instant afterwards Ali's body fell to the +ground, and a Dyak waved his head in triumph in the air. Such might be +my fate, I thought. A strong breeze was blowing. While the Dyaks were +rejoicing round the head of the man it appeared to me they had so +treacherously murdered, I saw a bright flame spring up from under the +house. Presently it caught the dried bamboos which formed the flooring, +and in a few seconds the whole building was in flames. As the greater +number of the inhabitants were absent, there were not people enough to +attempt to put it out. A few seemed to run into the building, but +quickly retreated. I dared not return, warned by the fate of Ali, and +suspecting that, should I fall into the Dyaks' power, I should be +treated in the same way. I therefore bent to my oars, and began to pull +down the stream as fast as I could go. I might have hoisted my sail, +but that, I thought, might attract the attention of the Dyaks. In the +meantime the whole house was wrapped in flames, while the wind blew the +light embers towards the neighbouring houses and trees. The rice +plantation caught fire, and soon I saw the fire extending on either side +down the banks of the river. It seemed as if a hundred torches had been +applied to the jungle at the same moment, but it was not so. The spark +which Ali had kindled was the origin of the whole. Fearful was the +rapidity with which the flames had spread among the dry brushwood. For +months probably not a drop of rain had fallen there. Now the fire +worked its way amid the leaves and dry grass, now the flames mounted the +trees, wrapping round the tall palms, the leaves being like touch-paper; +and no sooner was one ignited, than the next caught fire. Thus both +banks of the river soon bore the appearance of being covered with +gigantic torches flaming and waving in the air. The sun had set by this +time, the flames looking more fierce and lurid amid the darkness of +night. Away the fire leaped from tree to tree, licking up with its +fiery tongue every object it encountered. I pulled for my life, for the +fierce flames blew across from side to side of the stream, making a +fiery arch overhead, while the boughs as they burnt through came +crashing down in masses of fire astern of me. + +Fast as I rowed, the flames came faster, and it seemed impossible that I +should escape. A fearful death, I thought, was about to overtake me. +It was like some terrible dream. I dreaded lest the boat might ground +on some bank, or run against the wide-spreading roots of the +mangrove-trees. But on, on; I felt that my only prospect of escape was +to persevere. I had often to turn my head round, to try and discover +the branch of the stream up which we had come. I saw one at length on +my left, and pulled down it, having strong doubts, however, whether it +was the right one. At length I appeared to have got to a distance from +the flames, which I could see however, burning up as brightly as before +amid the trunks of the trees which lined the banks of that part of the +stream through which I was now making my way. My arms began to ache, +perspiration dropped from my brows, but still I must go on. I was by +this time getting out of sight of the flames, but I could still see the +glare of the burning forest rising above the topmost boughs of the +trees. Finding myself in a broad stream, I began at length to breathe +more freely. The wind came down it. I guessed by that that it led +directly to the sea. For the first time I dared to cease rowing, and +stepping the mast, hoisted my sail. Strange sounds came out of the +woods on either side, and sometimes I fancied I could hear the shouts of +the Dyaks pursuing me, to revenge on my head the destruction of their +village. I knew that an account of the catastrophe would soon have been +conveyed to the tribe whose chief lay dead, and I thought it probable +that they would come in pursuit of me and cut me off, should it be known +that I had escaped. I glided on, recovering my strength with the rest I +was thus able to afford myself. And now the river opened out wider than +before, and I saw through the gloom the calm sea spread out before me. +There was not a ripple on the bar. The current ran smoothly, and my +boat, carried on its tide, glided out into the ocean. + +I was now as eager to escape from the land as I before had been to reach +it, but in what direction to steer my course I knew not. On I sailed. +The boat now began to rise and fall on the swell of the open ocean. She +was well provisioned for many days, and I trusted by economising my food +to make it last till I should reach some land inhabited by civilised +people. As far as I could judge, therefore, I steered to the +south-west. Encouraged by Macco's preservation under somewhat similar +circumstances, I hoped either to be picked up as he was, or to reach the +shore I was in search of in safety. When day broke I was already at +some distance from the land--too far, I hoped, to be seen by any of the +Dyaks who might be in search of me. I had, however, miscalculated my +strength, for having been pulling for so long during the night, I soon +began to feel excessively fatigued, and longed to lie down and sleep. +At length I could no longer resist the temptation, and lowering my sail +and mast, I stretched myself in the bottom of the boat. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY FIVE. + +WALTER'S ADVENTURES CONTINUED. + +How long I had slept I could not tell, when a voice reached my ear. My +heart bounded. Could it be some one calling me from a ship! I tried to +rise, but felt unable. It was still night. Presently I saw rising high +above me, as I thought, the lofty masts and sails of a large ship. On +she came, so fast it seemed that a rope thrown from her could reach me. +At length I tried to shout. I lifted up my hands, for I thought they +would not fail to heave a rope, but she glided by. I could see no one +on her deck, but I thought I could count the ports. She must be a ship +of war, I fancied. On she went. I turned my aching eyes towards her as +she glided away from me; and I thought a shout of mocking laughter came +over the water towards me in answer to my appeals for help. Again and +again I tried to cry out; but it seemed as if my voice would not leave +my chest. I lay still in the bottom of the boat, with a feeling of +hopeless despair creeping over me. Then again I closed my eyes; and +when I once more opened them, the sun was shining across the water, just +risen from his ocean bed. There was not a breath of air blowing across +the water. No land was in sight. Here and there a flying-fish rose out +of the mirror-like deep, skimming across it, again to disappear. Once +more I rose, and was about to seize the oars, when I bethought me that +it would be labour in vain. In what direction should I pull? Hunger +reminded me of the provisions Ali had put on board the boat. I took a +draught of water and ate some food. It restored my strength; and I now +began to suspect that the ship I had seen had been but a phantom of the +brain, and that I had been dreaming all the time. I sat at the helm, +longing for a breeze. Then I stepped my mast and hoisted my sail, +hoping that it might come, and I should be ready for it. + +I remembered that I had not offered up my petitions to Heaven. I knelt +down in the boat and prayed fervently. Once more I rose, refreshed in +body and mind. I began to reflect that He who had hitherto guarded me +from so many dangers would guard me still. The thought restored +confidence to my heart. Presently I saw a light ripple on the water. +It disappeared; but again, at a little distance, another cat's-paw sped +over the surface. I hoped it might be the forerunner of a breeze. Soon +my sail began to bulge out. A gentle breeze blew me along. Now the +boat was running rapidly along through the smooth water. I felt sure, +should I keep to the south or south-west, that I should fall in at last +with land. To regain the island I knew was almost a vain hope, and I +might lose too much valuable time in making the attempt. Hour after +hour I sat at the helm, gliding over the water. Again I thought of poor +Macco. How much better off I was than he had been. I had a supply of +provisions and water, and was in a well-built boat, and knew that I must +in a short time, if I continued on my course, inevitably fall in with +land; whereas he had been on the wide Indian Ocean, and might have +sailed on for many hundred miles without meeting it. Thus I continued +all day long, till night again came down over the world of waters. For +many hours during the night I kept awake. At length I began to feel my +head drop on my breast. Each time I did so I raised myself with an +effort; but I found I could only keep awake for a short time, when again +that terrible drowsiness came over me. It arose, I knew, from weakness, +and the hot sun to which I had been exposed all day. Still I steered on +before the wind. I did my utmost to keep awake till daylight should +again appear. I thought my eyes were open, and that I was steering as +before. Suddenly I felt a violent shock; and starting up, I found the +seas washing round me, and tall trees rising up a short distance ahead. +The boat had run upon a sandy beach. Another sea came rolling in, and +sent the boat broadside on to the beach, throwing me out. With +difficulty I crawled up over the sand. The sheet had been made fast; +and what was my dismay to see the boat's head going round, and before I +could rush into the water to seize her, she had already receded from the +shore. I was on the point of rushing into the water to swim after her, +when, overcome by weakness, I sank on the sand; and I well knew that had +I made the attempt I should probably have lost my life. I endeavoured +to collect my scattered thoughts; but rudely roused from sleep, I had +difficulty in reflecting where I could be. At length, however, I began +to consider that I could not possibly have reached Java, or any of the +large islands in a line with it; and thought I must be on some smaller +island; but whether inhabited or not I could not tell, or whether or not +I could there find the means of supporting life. How anxiously I +watched my boat, hoping that perhaps some other sea might put her head +round, and that once more she might return to the shore. The breeze had +freshened, and she quickly glided away. In a short time I could no +longer distinguish her amidst the gloom of night. + +I sat down on the beach, endeavouring to consider what I should do. I +saw, at a short distance behind me, a thick wood; while on either side +dark rocks ran into the sea. "I might have been driven against those," +I reflected; "and had I been so, in all probability the boat would have +been dashed to pieces, and I should have been drowned. Have I not +reason then to be thankful that I have been preserved? No, I should be +wrong to despair. I will yet hope that I may find means of preserving +my life." With this thought I lay on the sand to wait till the light of +day would enable me to explore the island and search for the means of +supporting existence. I had no food, no weapon of defence; but on +feeling in my pocket I was thankful to find I had my knife. Oh, of how +much value was that little clasp-knife then to me! At first the noise +of the surf had prevented me from hearing any other sound; but, as my +ears got accustomed to it, I could distinguish the usual noises of an +Eastern jungle--the cries of the night-birds, and the chattering and +moaning of the monkeys. They gave me assurance that I should be able to +support existence, for I knew that where they were food would be found. +My mind thus set somewhat more at rest, I dropped to sleep. + +The bright rays of the sun shining in my eyes awoke me; and rising to my +feet I found that I was on a green, smiling island, with rocks and hills +scattered here and there towards the centre; while a thick belt of +palms, the ever-present pandanus, and numerous other trees, surrounded +it. My first thought was to search for water. The experience I had +gained when with Macco on our island was now of the greatest assistance +to me. Had I been cast alone upon such a spot I might have perished; +but now I knew well where to search for the sign of water. I had not +gone far when I saw between the trees a grove of bamboo. I soon cut +down a stout piece, the point of which I sharpened; and thus it served +me as a staff and a weapon of defence. I also made a spade, such as +Macco had manufactured; and before long I came to a hollow under some +trees where the ground appeared soft. I eagerly set to work to dig, and +after getting down to the depth of three or four feet, my satisfaction +was great to see water springing up. I had expected to be compelled to +dig much deeper. A piece of bamboo served me as a cup, and allowing the +water to settle, I was enabled to obtain a delicious draught. Thus one +of my chief causes of apprehension was dissipated. + +Returning along the beach, I walked along looking up for some cocoa-nut +trees. The shore, however, was lined with rocks, and it did not occur +to me that at such a spot they were not likely to be found. I then +remembered that it was only on low beaches, where the nuts had been +washed ashore, that I had ever seen the trees growing. I therefore +climbed to the top of the highest rock in the neighbourhood, and looked +along the shore, in the hope of discovering some open beach. I saw one +at some distance, and eagerly made towards it. I was not disappointed, +for no sooner had I reached it than I saw in the centre a grove of +cocoa-nut palms. But how should I be able to climb so tall a tree, weak +and unnerved as I was! I was approaching the nearest tree, eagerly +casting up my eyes towards the tempting fruit, which hung down in +clusters, when I heard a loud hammering sound; and there I saw on the +ground a huge crab, such as I had before met with in Amboyna, busily +employed in breaking the shell. If I could kill him, I could secure +both meat and vegetable at the same time. I had got close to him before +he heard me approach, when he began to sidle off at a great rate. +Seizing the cocoa-nut which he had just broken, I ran after him. +Brought to bay, he lifted up his huge claw; but I darted my spear +through the joint and fixed him in the sand. As I did so I dashed the +cocoa-nut with all my might on his back. It bounded off; but I seized +it again, and once more struck him a blow which effectually prevented +him from making further resistance. + +I had now an ample supply of food for a hearty meal. I was at no loss +to light a fire; and collecting a supply of sticks and leaves, I struck +a light with the two pieces of bamboo as Macco had done, and soon had +the crab roasting before the fire; while I satisfied the cravings of +hunger with a draught from the cocoa-nut and a portion of the fruit. I +now hunted about under the trees and found several other cocoa-nuts +which had fallen, and though not equal to those which were less ripe, +they were sufficient to satisfy hunger and support life. Having thus +obtained the means of subsistence, I bethought me that the next wisest +thing to do would be to build a hut. I had been greatly tormented by +mosquitoes and sandflies, and I thought by going a little way into the +interior I might avoid them. On searching I discovered a large rock +within which was a cave. Here I thought I might find shelter, and at +the same time light a fire, the smoke of which might keep off my +tormentors. As I had but little clothing, and found the night, after +the heat of the day, chilly--though, probably, in England it would have +been considered intensely hot--I determined to build a front to my cave, +so that I might keep out the night air, and at the same time any +unwelcome intruders. The cave was in a peculiarly sheltered spot; and, +indeed, had I been in search of such a retreat, I do not think I should +have discovered it. + +I cut down a number of bamboos, and these I placed close together in +front of the cave, leaving only a narrow opening through which I could +pass. I strengthened the interior by cross pieces, thus leaving only +room to creep under. The door I also formed of bamboo, which I could +shut closely. I thus hoped that I might not only keep out any large +animals, but snakes or reptiles, which might be inclined to get in. I +made a torch of dry wood, with which I surveyed my cave, carefully +examining every hole and crevice. I discovered several bats, which I +soon put to flight. Had I been very hungry, I should probably have +killed them for food; but while I saw a prospect of obtaining cocoa-nuts +and crabs, I was not reduced to such an extremity. + +I little thought at the time of what importance this hiding-place would +be to me. It took me some time to scrape out the dirt on the ground, +and it was almost dark before I had finished the operation. I managed, +however, to collect some leaves and branches with which to form my bed. +I had only time to eat a piece of cocoa-nut and crab for supper before +darkness came on. I then lighted my torch, and with the smoke managed +to drive away all the mosquitoes, and then shut to my door. Closely, +however, as I had placed the bamboos, the creatures quickly came back +again; and I had to start up and strike a light and make some more +smoke, in order to get rid of them before I could again go to sleep. +However, I got tired of this operation, and at length dropped off to +sleep, allowing them to sting me at their will. + +I soon found that I ought to have been grateful for having been cast on +this island. Scarcely had I left my abode the next morning, when I came +upon a tree with enormous leaves, many of them a foot wide and a foot +and a half long. From it hung a fruit in the form of a melon, attached +by its stem directly to the trunk or limbs. I recognised it at once as +the valuable bread-fruit tree. Here was a supply of wholesome food for +me as long as I might have, I hoped, to live on the island. To get at +the fruit, however, was the difficulty, though it was at no great +height. I bethought me, therefore, that I would make a ladder of +bamboo. I should have liked to have had some fruit for breakfast, but +as it would take some time to make my ladder securely, I had to content +myself with the remainder of the crab and some more cocoa-nut, and a +draught of water from my well. I had, indeed, to go towards the well +for the purpose of obtaining a bamboo. To secure the rounds, I cut a +quantity of fine ratan, or some of the smaller creeper, which answered +the purpose pretty well; and to prevent them slipping, I secured from +the top to the bottom a piece of ratan twined round them on both sides. +My ladder, though not very sightly, was, I hoped, thus made secure. On +reaching the bread-fruit, I was delighted to find that it was scarcely +yet mature,--the best state, indeed, for eating. I eagerly cut down a +couple of the melon-like fruit and descended with them to the ground. + +As my breakfast had not been substantial, I lost no time in cutting up a +bread-fruit into slices, which I toasted before the fire, pouring over +it a little cocoa-nut milk. + +I must not take up too much space in describing the various events of my +life on the island. I spent most of the clay on the beach, sometimes +clambering up to the top of a high rock, whence I could gain an +extensive view of the sea, in the hope of seeing some vessel passing, +and being able to attract her attention. + +I may say at once that I had an abundance of food, both crabs and +shell-fish, and various fruits, so that I was kept in good health. My +clothes, however, had already been much worn, and were now torn almost +into tatters by my excursions through the woods. + +I had just climbed up a rock, when I saw a fleet of native vessels +approaching the island. I examined them anxiously, and was soon +convinced that they were either the same pirates who had paid us a visit +at my uncle's island, or gentry of a similar character. I could not +help feeling considerable alarm for my own safety. What was I to do? +If they touched on the island, should I be able to conceal myself from +them? As I had walked about the woods the possibility of such a +contingency had occurred to me. At first I thought of hiding away in my +cave; but the marks of the fire outside, and the trees I had cut down, +should they find their way to it, might betray me. Still I knew that, +even should they land, they were not likely to go far into the interior. +Near the top of the rock was a hollow in which I might lie completely +concealed, with the assistance of a few boughs, which I might place +across it. Here, therefore, I determined to take up my post, should I +see that they intended landing. As they came nearer I left the beach +and watched them from the underwood. I was soon convinced that they +were pirates, probably on some marauding expedition, and that they were +about to land. I hoped that they would not remain long, as probably +they were coming ashore to repair some of their vessels, or to obtain +cocoa-nuts or water. At length I saw the vessels entering the bay. +Some anchored, while others ran on to the beach, when their crews, +leaping out, carried tackles and ropes to the nearest trees, and began +to haul them up. My idea as to their object, therefore, was correct. I +retired as soon as they had done this, making my way as silently as +possible towards the spot I had fixed on. I had, as far as I was able, +obliterated the marks of my fire by covering them with leaves and broken +branches. I had also concealed the mouth of my cave with branches, in a +way which I thought looked so natural, that no one would attempt to +enter. I then climbed up to my proposed hiding-place, carrying some +other branches which I had cut down for the purpose I contemplated. I +felt somewhat like a bird in a nest, for I was completely concealed from +the view of those below; at the same time I could look out between the +branches and see what was going forward. I had taken the precaution of +carrying up some provisions with me, so that I might not suffer from +hunger. + +I had remained here for some time, when I heard the Malays shouting to +each other in the distance. What the cause of their doing so was I +could not guess, as they are not generally addicted to making a noise. +The sounds now grew nearer; then once more they appeared to recede. +Sometimes I fancied that they had discovered some sign of a person being +on the island, and were in search of me. Still, my concealment was so +complete that I hoped to escape discovery. Presently I heard a noise as +if some human being or beast was breaking through the underwood, and +looking out I caught sight of a man running. I looked again and again. +Could my eyes deceive me? If that was not Macco, it was a person +wonderfully like him. And yet I felt sure I had seen Macco killed on +the shore of Papua; but yet he was so unlike a Malay or a Dyak, or any +of the inhabitants of New Guinea, that I could scarcely suppose he could +be any other than Macco. It seemed to me that he was looking about for +some place to conceal himself. I could resist the temptation no longer, +but shouted out, "Macco, Macco!" He stopped and looked up with a glance +of astonishment. "Macco, is it you?" I again cried out. + +"Yes, yes; oh, de joy!" he answered. + +I now showed myself, and scrambling down from my aerie, I was in a few +minutes by his side, taking his hands and looking into his face. + +"Yes, yes; you Massa Walter!" he could only exclaim, his feelings +overcoming him. + +"But why are you thus running through the wood?" I asked. + +"I run from de pirates. Dey make me slave," he answered. + +"Then climb up here with me; there is room for both of us," I said. "No +time to be lost, or your pursuers may overtake you." + +He was quickly stowed away in the hollow, across which I drew the bushes +as before. We had not been there long when again the voices of the +Malays sounded nearer. They were making their way through the jungle, +evidently determined to retake their captive. After a time they drew +near the rock. They seemed to be passing close to the spot where we lay +hid; but so well had I concealed the opening to the cavern, that though +they went completely round the rock, they did not discover it. Macco +trembled in every limb at the thought of being retaken. I whispered to +him to be calm, for I was in hopes we should escape. The shadows of the +trees began to grow longer and longer, and soon we had the satisfaction +of seeing the shades of evening draw over the island. We were safe, I +now knew, till the following morning, for I was sure the Malays would +not wander about during the night in a strange place. I therefore +invited Macco to descend, that we might rest more comfortably in my +cavern. I here had, as I before said, a supply of food, to which Macco +did justice, for I found that he had been a long time without a meal. + +His history was a brief one. He had remained for some time as a slave +among the Papuans, and had then been sold by them to some traders, who +were carrying him off, when they were attacked by the pirates, into +whose possession he thus fell. They had compelled him to work at the +oars in their boats. The labour, he said, he did not so much mind, as +the fearful scenes of cruelty which he was obliged to witness. He +therefore determined to make his escape on the first opportunity. +Having lived so well on our island, he determined to hide himself on +landing on this one, preferring to live a life of solitude to the +society of heathen savages. "Now, Massa Walter, I no care. Oliver +always say One above look after poor people who lub him, and now I know +he does." We slept soundly in our cave, and at the earliest dawn +clambered back into our aerie. + +I had been longing for a companion from the time I landed, and often and +often thought how far better would have been my lot if I had had Oliver +or Macco with me; and here the latter had been sent to bear me company. +We spent the day in our hiding-place, for we were afraid that the Malays +might renew their search for Macco; and we could still hear them in the +far distance, their voices reaching to the top of the rock over the +heads of the trees. I was proposing to descend to try and see what they +were about, when again we heard their voices drawing near. We could not +help feeling anxious, lest on this occasion they might discover us. + +"But we must hope for the best," I said half aloud. + +"Yes, Massa Walter, hope for de best," repeated Macco; "and if it no +come, still hope for de best. All best when we put trust in God." + +Once more we caught sight of the Malays forcing their way through the +forest, and calling to each other, evidently again searching for Macco. +Several times I thought they were coming close up to the mouth of the +cavern, and once a party of them stopped directly under where we were +concealed. I held my breath with anxiety, and my heart once more +bounded as if released from a weight when I saw them take their way +through the forest. + +We again passed the night in my abode, and afterwards climbed up to the +top of the rock. No sounds reached our ears. "Now I must go and see if +they are really getting away," I said, "but you stay here. I know my +way through the forest, and one person is less likely to be discovered +than two." I accordingly set out towards the beach, taking my bamboo +spear, which I trailed after me. Some of the pirate vessels had their +sails hoisted, and were gliding out of the bay. The crews of the others +were just shoving them off into deep water. I watched them eagerly, and +at length they all went on board. Still I thought it possible that at +the last moment some might land, and make another search for Macco. I +therefore waited till they were all well out of the bay, and then +hurried back with the satisfactory intelligence to my dark-skinned +friend. "We have reason to be t'ankful, Massa Walter," he observed. +"Dose great cut-t'roats!" I was now much happier than before, having +Macco as my companion; at the same time, I was very anxious to let my +dear Emily know that I was safe. I told Macco of my anxiety. + +"Why, then, we not build canoe?" he said. "It take time, but it can be +done." + +"But I have only my knife to do it with," I said. + +"But I have knife too," he said, drawing out a longish weapon from his +belt. + +Still I thought with such weapons our object could not be attained. Two +days after that, as I was walking on the beach, I saw something sticking +up in the sand. I was going to pass it carelessly, when I thought it +was a piece of wrought wood. I went towards it, when great was my +astonishment, and greater still my satisfaction, to find that it was a +Malay axe, which had been left by the pirates in the sand. I called to +Macco, who was at a little distance. "Dere, dere!" he exclaimed. "Now +no difficulty. I use dat well, and build boat." At first I proposed +making a dug-out, but Macco said he had often assisted in boat-building, +and that a plank boat would be far superior. + +"But how are we to get the planks?" + +"Oh," he said, "I split some of de trees, and work dem down." + +"But that would take so very long," I observed. + +"Neber mind, Massa Walter. Long time come to end, and work done." + +His courage raised my spirits, and I now determined to set heartily to +work in carrying out our proposed undertaking. Several days passed +away, and some progress had been made. Macco had already cut down a +tree, and formed some wedges to split it up with, when one morning, +while he was at his work, I agreed to go down to the beach to look for +some shell-fish or crabs as a variety to our food. No sooner did I +reach it than my eye caught sight of a white sail shining in the morning +sun. I rubbed my eyes. I could not be mistaken. No; there was a +European vessel, I was sure of it, with a single mast. Could she be the +cutter which my friends had proposed building? Were they on their +homeward voyage, or were they coming to look for me? Perhaps, after +all, the island where I now was might be at no great distance from +theirs. Perhaps they were sailing away, having given me up in despair. +I could not move from the spot, but kept gazing and gazing at the sail +to ascertain whether it was approaching. Yes, yes; I was sure it was. +On it came. The breeze freshening, the seas rolled in on the beach. +Nearer and nearer drew the cutter. I ran down to the water, and waved +my hands and shouted. They could not have heard me, but yet they came +in directly towards where I was standing. Presently I saw the sails +brailed up, and now a boat, with several people in her, put off from the +vessel. They approached. Mr Hooker was in the stern. The boat's head +was turned round, so as to allow her to drop in through the surf. I +rushed in towards her, and burst into tears as I shook my kind friend's +hand, and helped him to spring on shore. + +"My dear boy, you are safe! We had given up almost all hope of finding +you, when we picked up your boat!" he exclaimed. + +Great was my astonishment to find that the boat was my own craft which +had brought me to the island. + +"Are they all well?" I asked, looking eagerly towards the vessel. "Is +Emily well, and Grace, and Oliver?" + +"Yes, yes," he answered; "all are well. We left them at the island; but +there is no time to be lost. The weather looks threatening, Mr +Thudicumb says, and the sooner you are away from this the better. Step +in now. I suppose there is nothing to detain you?" + +"No, but I have a friend," I answered; and told them how Macco had +escaped from the pirates. + +Begging them to wait, I ran back to where I had left him at work. + +"Well den," he said, "we leab de boat for some oder person to build. I +bery glad to see Potto Jumbo and my old friends." + +I ran back to the boat, Macco following me. We were soon on board, and +pulling to the cutter. All sail was then made for Sedgwick Island; for +so we resolved to call it. The weather, however, got worse and worse, +but still Mr Thudicumb was very anxious to enter Hope Harbour; and in +spite of the threatening sky and strong wind and increasing sea, we +continued our course towards it. The loss of the vessel, and the +merciful way in which our lives were preserved, has already been +detailed by Emily. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY SIX. + +AN ERUPTION OF THE BURNING MOUNTAIN. + +The mountain had been quiet for some days. Our apprehensions of an +eruption had passed away. We had succeeded in hauling the _Hope_ on +shore; and Mr Thudicumb was of opinion that we should be unable to +repair her, though it might take some time to enable us to do so +sufficiently to prosecute our voyage to Singapore. We were all in good +spirits, as we trusted that after so many misadventures we should be +able to succeed. The Frau and the girls had been busily employed in +preparing a fresh supply of provisions, while sago, rice, and maize, and +sugar-cane in abundance, had been brought from the plantation. My uncle +and I had been out shooting, and had killed a couple of deer, three +hogs, and a number of wood-pigeons and other birds. We had thus a good +supply of meat. + +We had all retired to rest, and were in the expectation in a few days of +getting the _Hope_ ready for launching. Suddenly we were awaked by my +uncle's voice shouting out, "Up! up! Sleepers, awake! Put on your +clothes, and endeavour to retain your presence of mind." In an instant +I was wide-awake, and knew by the tone of his voice that something +serious had happened; indeed, the bright glare against the thick foliage +of the trees in front of my window would have told me so. Oliver and I +dressed rapidly, and ran to the room occupied by the Frau and the young +ladies. + +"What is it? what is it?" I heard the Frau exclaiming. + +"Quick, quick," I answered; "put on your clothes, and take whatever you +have of most value." + +They were already dressed, and now came to the door with looks of terror +in their countenances. + +"We shall have time to save our lives, I trust, if we do not delay," +said my uncle, who now appeared in the chief room. + +Here we all collected. Each man bore on his shoulders as much provision +as he could carry, done up in bags, already prepared for the purpose. +"On," cried my uncle. "Mr Thudicumb and Tarbox desire to bring up the +rear; I will lead the way." We hurried down the steps, and began our +march toward Hope Harbour. The mountain was throwing up sheets of +flame, amid which appeared huge masses of rock and stones, while over +our heads came down a shower of light ashes. Already a fringe of flame +surrounded the mountain. It was the jungle which had caught fire, and +was blazing furiously. The bright glare of the flames was reflected on +the trees on one hand, making the night as bright as day. My uncle had +set at liberty his poor animals. "They must seek their own safety," he +observed; "and their instincts may guide them to the least dangerous +spot." Mr Hooker insisted upon taking Emily's arm, I supported Grace, +and Roger Trew begged the Frau to let him help her. Macco walked with +Oliver, while Potto Jumbo ran to the front to assist my uncle in +clearing the way. We hastened forward as fast as we could move, the +poor Frau panting with the unusual exertion she was compelled to make. +The very heavens seemed on fire. The earth shook. The wild beasts in +the forests roared and howled. The birds uttered strange cries of +terror, and flew here and there. At length we reached the bamboo +bridge. At such a moment it seemed a fragile structure to cross. Not a +moment was to be lost, however, for already the fire seemed rushing out +towards us, the trees crackling and hissing as the flames caught them. +Terror-stricken animals rushed past us, heeding us not. My uncle, Mr +Hooker, and the Frau, with their companions, had crossed, and Grace and +I were on the bridge. It seemed to be shaken violently, and as I looked +up towards the mountain, I saw a mass of liquid fire rushing down the +sides, and apparently wending its way towards us. I had nearly gained +the further end of the bridge, when another violent shock occurred, and +the frail structure fell into the water. With difficulty could I haul +my companion up the bank. But where were Oliver and the other three +men? They too saw the stream of fire rushing towards them. I trembled +lest we should be separated, or they might be overwhelmed in the +destruction we were endeavouring to escape. Macco cried out to Oliver, +"Come on! come on!" and taking his arm, he rushed down the bank and +plunged into the stream, from which a vapour was ascending, as if it was +already heated by the fire above. I could not desert Grace, or I would +have hurried back to assist them; but they needed it not, for the next +instant Macco and Oliver landed, Mr Thudicumb and Tarbox were already +in the water, and the other two were stretching out their hands to help +them. I felt greatly relieved when I saw them all landed. + +But even now our danger was fearful. On came the fire, on came the +stream of lava. We had still a long way to go, it seemed. The rest of +the party, not knowing what had occurred, had already got to some +distance. We rushed after them at increased speed. Poor Grace could +scarcely support herself, but I helped her along. At length we overtook +our friends. "On, on!" cried Mr Sedgwick, every now and then turning +back and pointing towards the beach, much as an officer might encourage +a forlorn hope, only we were flying from danger instead of running into +it. The fire seemed scarcely a hundred yards from us, and already we +felt the heat of the advancing conflagration. At length the bay opened +out before us, but the fire was by this time close on one hand, and the +flames were curling up some tall palms which we the instant before had +passed. Crash followed crash as the trees sank before the devouring +element. Already it had gained the edge of the path and ignited the +wood on the opposite side. We had to pass under an arch of fire. I +entreated Oliver to keep close behind us. He and Macco sprang forward. +At that moment there came a crash, and a tall tree fell directly behind +them, cutting off the mate and boatswain. It was no time to stop, +however. I felt this for my companion's sake, and I know not, even if I +had been alone, that I should have ventured to turn back to help them. + +I feared that our two friends had been lost. Without them, how could we +expect safely to navigate our frail raft? We had got some way, almost +clear of the wood, when I heard shouts, and turning my head, greatly to +my relief I saw both Mr Thudicumb and Tarbox leaping over the burning +trunk, their clothes already on fire. They were striking out the +flames, however, and rushing on. "On! on!" I heard Tarbox shouting +out, and his voice seemed as strong and cheery as ever. In a few +seconds they overtook us, and we altogether rushed frantically out of +the burning forest. A minute later none of us could have passed. We +hurried down to the beach. "On board the raft! on board the raft!" +shouted my uncle, "for the lava may rush down from the mountain even +here." + +The raft was moored securely in the harbour, and, since I had seen it, +had been greatly enlarged and improved. Potto Jumbo and Roger Trew +rushed into the water, and cutting--the cable, towed it ashore. The +provisions meantime were carried from the house where they had been +stored, and those we had brought with us were put on board. We all now +hastened on to the raft. The masts, and spars, and oars, and all the +other things which had been prepared were also placed on it. "Now, +shove off!" cried my uncle, "and Heaven protect us! Mr Thudicumb, we +beg you to take charge of the raft. My duty is over." Merlin was the +last of our party who leaped on board. With long poles, which had been +got ready for the purpose, we shoved off. Not a moment too soon; for +already the lava which had overflowed the stream was making its way +towards the harbour, while the showers of dust increased, thickly +covering the raft. + +I cast an affectionate look at the _Hope_. She had been the means of +rescuing me from my solitary island, and restoring me to my sister and +friends. In a few minutes, she would probably be a mass of cinders. As +soon as we were clear of the harbour, we got out our oars and paddles, +and urged the raft away from the island. It was nearly calm. The heat +was drawing the air towards the mountain, thus creating a contrary +breeze to what we expected to find, or wished for. The scene which took +place on our own island when Macco and I were carried from it, was +vividly recalled to my mind. There was the mountain blazing away, with +a vast sea of flame surging at its base, spreading here and there with +fearful rapidity, while the showers of ashes came every instant thicker +and thicker. Three streams of lava were descending from the sides of +the mountain, sweeping away in one instant the tall trees against which +it forced its course as if they had been willow wands. Even now it +seemed as if destruction might overtake us. We urged on the raft with +all the energy of despair. Mr Thudicumb steered, the rest of us worked +the oars. The Frau and the two girls were seated in the centre, +surrounded by the lockers which contained our provisions. While the +water was smooth, there was no danger, but we could not help seeing +that, exposed to a heavy sea, there would be great risk of our being +washed off it. + +We soon had reason to be thankful that we had escaped from the island, +for the fire was every instant seen to be extending on both sides, while +the eruption became more furious than ever. Suddenly a loud roar was +heard coming over the water, and a vast rent was made in the side of the +mountain. It seemed like the work of magic. The whole outline was in +an instant changed. The conical top was rolling down, while in other +places huge mounds were seen to be forced up as it were out of the +earth. The glare of the conflagration reached us even at the distance +we were from the island. I had been watching Emily and Grace, and +though their countenances exhibited anxiety, there was no senseless +terror perceptible. The Frau certainly did show alarm, and every now +and then hid her face when the mountain sent forth fresh volumes of +flame, or continued roars were heard as vast fragments of rock were +hurled up into the air, and came crashing down on the earth, new +openings being made in the side of the mountain. + +"There is a breeze from the eastward," I heard Mr Thudicumb exclaim. +"Hoist the sails, lads!" + +The masts had already been stepped. We hoisted our two lugsails, with a +small jib on the bowsprit, which had been rigged ahead, and the raft +feeling its effects, glided over the surface. + +"We may reach some part of Java, even if we cannot get as far as +Singapore," observed Mr Thudicumb. "It would be a long voyage in such +a craft as this; but if the weather holds fair, and our provisions last +out, I see no reason why we should not accomplish it. We shall have the +sun soon, and that will help us to steer the right course when we lose +sight of the island." + +Streaks of bright light were now appearing in the east, and presently +the whole sky was overspread with a ruddy glow, which increased in +intensity near the horizon, till the sun, a vast globe of fire, rose +above the waters, and quickly shot upwards in the sky. Still we were +not clear altogether of the cinders which fell in light showers upon our +heads, but we had lost all dread of being overwhelmed by any heavier +substance, though we could see that many huge stones and rocks were +falling into the water astern of us. The very island itself was torn +and rent by the various subterranean powers working away beneath it, and +it seemed probable, from what was taking place, that the whole would ere +long be submerged by the ocean. How thankful we were when at length, +the breeze freshening, we were carried to a distance from the awful +spot. + +"Should we not return thanks to Him who has preserved us?" said Oliver +at length in a quiet tone to Mr Hooker. + +"Certainly we should, my boy," was the answer; and together we knelt +down on the raft, Mr Thudicumb still steering, and offered up our +thanks to him who rules the winds and seas and all the powers of the +earth. + +With a better appetite than might have been expected, and with cheerful +spirits, we went to breakfast. No distinction was made between the +ladies and gentlemen and the men. All shared alike. We had an oil +lamp, with which we could boil our tea, and our other provisions we were +compelled to eat cold. Few of them indeed required cooking. + +Day after day we glided on, still favoured by fine weather. The little +tent we had brought sheltered the Frau and her charges. Those who had +been on watch also were not sorry in the day-time to creep into it and +go to sleep. Thus we all obtained sufficient rest, and those alone who +have been exposed as we were, can understand how sweet that rest was. + +"A sail! a sail!" cried Roger Trew. The beams of the rising sun were +shining on the white canvas of a ship which was hull down a long way to +the westward. She seemed to be crossing our course, but whether we +could reach her before she had stood to any great distance seemed +doubtful. We got out our oars to increase the speed of our raft. How +eagerly we all kept looking towards that patch of white just rising +above the horizon! We drew nearer and nearer. Perhaps the look-out +aloft might have seen us. From the deck of the ship we could scarcely +have been visible. Frequently, as we drew nearer, I felt inclined to +shriek out and to shout to her to stay for us. + +"Do you think she is English?" asked Mr Hooker. + +"Little doubt about it," answered Mr Thudicumb. "She is a merchantman, +though probably bound round from Singapore to trade with some of these +islands, and maybe to go to Sydney, or perhaps up to China." + +It seemed very doubtful, however, whether she would perceive us before +she had got to a distance. Already she was ahead of us, standing away +on the port tack. Our eyes, as they had hitherto been, were still fixed +on her. + +"See! see! there is lift tacks and sheets!--the helm's a-lee!--she's +coming round!" shouted Tarbox. "We are seen! we are seen!" + + + +CHAPTER THIRTY SEVEN. + +OLD ENGLAND REACHED AT LAST--CONCLUSION. + +The ship was standing towards us. We had now no doubts of her being a +large English merchantman. She was a new ship, too, apparently. +Presently she was hove to. A boat was lowered, and with rapid strokes +pulled towards us. "Who are you? Where do you come from?" asked some +one in the boat as we lowered our sails. + +"Our answer would be a long one, friend," said Mr Sedgwick. "We are +English people escaping from a burning mountain." + +"You will be welcome aboard our ship at all events," was the answer. +"Here, catch hold of this rope, and we will tow your raft alongside." + +A rope was hove to us over the stern of the boat, and without further +words we were towed away towards the ship. I eyed her with pleasure. I +had often thought that if I once got ashore I should never wish to go to +sea again. On looking, however, at her fine proportions and trim +rigging, I felt that I should be proud to be an officer of such a craft. + +Of course we did not move quickly. It was some time before we were +alongside. "Come, we must now take you on board," said the officer in +the boat. "The ladies first, I conclude." The Frau, Emily, and Grace +were handed in. "We can take more, though. Here you, young man, and +one of you gentlemen." Mr Hooker followed him into the boat. + +An accommodation ladder was let down, as the sea was as smooth as in a +sheltered harbour. The Frau was helped up the side first, and the two +girls followed. Suddenly I heard a loud shriek of astonishment, and +presently whose face should I see but that of my old friend Captain +Davenport appearing at the gangway. In another instant he had his +daughter Grace in his arms. + +"My mother! where is my mother?" exclaimed Grace. + +"Here, here, my child!" and Mrs Davenport received her daughter from +her husband's arms. Both held her, gazing anxiously at her face. + +"You are restored to us, my child," said Mrs Davenport. + +"And Emily, our second daughter!" exclaimed the old captain, taking +Emily in his arms. She received almost as loving a welcome as Grace had +done, and I had ample reason to be thankful for my reception. + +I must make a long story short. We found that Captain and Mrs +Davenport, after waiting at Singapore for some months, vainly expecting +our return, and after having made every inquiry in their power for the +missing _Dugong_, had at length given up the search, under the belief +that we had been lost in a typhoon. A ship had touched at Singapore +whose captain had died, and Captain Davenport having lost so much of his +property in the _Bussorah Merchant_, had been compelled to accept the +charge of taking her home. He had there been immediately appointed to +the command of a new ship--the _Ulysses_. The offer he gladly accepted, +as she was, after touching at Singapore, to proceed round the south +coast of Borneo, and thus up through the Sea of Celebes to the +Philippine Islands and Japan. He had faint hopes of finding us, but yet +the opportunity was not to be lost. + +Our meeting was indeed wonderful, and we had reason to be thankful that +we had been saved the sufferings to which we might have been subjected, +and that their anxiety was thus happily ended. I need scarcely say that +Mrs Davenport and her husband suffered greatly at the supposed loss of +their daughter, while I fully believe they mourned also greatly for us; +indeed, they treated both Emily and I as if we were their own children, +and nothing could exceed their kindness and attention. Captain +Davenport offered to return to Singapore for the sake of landing Mr +Hooker and our uncle; but they preferred remaining on board the ship, +declaring that they must set to work to replace the treasures they had +lost; and as the ship was to remain for several days at every place she +touched at, they hoped in a limited degree to do so; but I could not +help being amused sometimes at hearing them mourning the loss of their +specimens--not, however, so much on their own account as on that of the +scientific world in general. + +"But surely, uncle," I said one day, "you have saved your note-books, +and from them you may give a good deal of information." + +"Of course, Walter," he answered. "That is my great consolation. Had +it not been for that, I scarcely think I could have survived the +terrible disaster." + +We had reason to be thankful that we had fallen in with the _Ulysses_, +for we had not been on board a couple of days when it came on to blow +hard, and so heavy a sea got up, that I suspect our raft would scarcely +have held together, or at all events we should probably have been washed +off it. I must reserve the notes we made at the fresh places we visited +for another occasion. + +At length we were once more on our homeward voyage. The first mate of +the ship having got appointed to the command of a vessel which had lost +her master, Mr Thudicumb took his place. The boatswain also was taken +ill, and Dick Tarbox became boatswain in his stead; while the other men +entered as seamen on board the _Ulysses_. + +We arrived in England after a prosperous voyage. I told Captain +Davenport that I hoped he would allow me to accompany him again to sea, +trusting that I might soon obtain a berth as mate on board his ship. + +"I should be very glad to have you, Walter," he said; "but I have +received some information which will make it your duty, I suspect, to +remain on shore. When I was last in England, I saw an account in the +newspapers of the death of the surviving children of your father's elder +brother, and now he himself has followed them to the grave. As far, +therefore, as I can learn, you are heir-at-law to the title and estates +of Lord Heatherly." + +I almost lost my breath as I listened to this information. I could +scarcely indeed believe it. + +"I think you must be mistaken, my dear sir," I answered. "I never even +heard my father say that he was likely to succeed to the title." + +"Probably not," said Captain Davenport, "as your eldest uncle had two +children, and Lord Heatherly had a younger brother; but as all four have +since been removed by death, I believe that there is no other heir than +yourself." + +This information he gave me at his house at Poplar, where Emily and I +were residing with him. That very afternoon our uncle, Mr Sedgwick, +arrived. He, too, had just heard of the death of my uncle, Mr +Heathfield, though he was not aware that all his children were also +dead. + +"I see that I must bestir myself, Walter, for your and Emily's +interests," he observed. "Captain Davenport is right, I am sure, in +supposing that you are the heir-at-law to Lord Heatherly, besides which +you have inherited some property which would have been your mother's." + +My uncle, though an enthusiastic naturalist, was also a man of action. +He proposed immediately setting off to visit Lord Heatherly, and to see +whether he would acknowledge my claims. + +"I was once well acquainted with his lordship," he observed, "and I +think he will attend to my representations. If he does not, we must see +how far the law can help us. I have, however, little doubt that he will +be ready to acknowledge you as his heir." + +The next day a postchaise arrived at the door, when my uncle and I +started in it for Hampshire, in which county Lord Heatherly resided. As +we neared the house, I observed the sadly dilapidated condition of +numerous cottages we passed; indeed, the whole property seemed to wear +an air of neglect very unusual, I must say, about an English estate. On +arriving at the house, the servant who opened the door said that Lord +Heatherly was very ill, and could not possibly see strangers. + +"But I am not a stranger," said Mr Sedgwick; "and this young gentleman +is a relation of his lordship,--indeed, the nearest he has; and probably +Lord Heatherly would be glad to see one who will some day succeed to his +name and estates." + +The manner of the servant immediately changed. "Lord Heatherly, sir, +is, I am afraid, dying," he answered; "but I will let his lordship know +who has come, and possibly he may be ready to do as you wish. At the +same time, pray understand, sir, that it will not be my fault if he +refuses to see the young gentleman." + +"Of course not, my good man," said Mr Sedgwick. + +In a short time the servant returned, saying that Lord Heatherly would +see us. We found the old lord lying on a stately bed in a handsome +room, a harsh-featured nurse by his side, while a footman stood at the +foot of the bed ready to receive orders. + +"Mr Sedgwick, I remember you," he said. "Your sister married my +cousin.--And so this lad claims to be my heir? Let me look at him. I +remember Walter Heathfield's features well. Yes, I can believe that you +are his son. I have made no will. All my estates are entailed, and if +you can prove that you are next of kin, you will succeed. It matters +not to me, though I should prefer that they were inherited by one who +has been brought up as a gentleman. I do not wish to dispute your +rights, if you are really my heir. The doctors say I am dying. They +may be right. I have lived a number of years, and I am pretty well +tired of life. You think, young gentleman, that you are about to +succeed to a noble inheritance; but let me tell you that an estate like +this entails many cares and responsibilities. The responsibilities I +have ignored. Of the cares I have had enough. If you follow in my +footsteps, you will find but little satisfaction in the property. It is +somewhat heavily encumbered; and if my brother Jack had succeeded, it +would in a short time have been still more so. There, I have given you +a few hints; it will be your own fault if you do not take them. +Speaking so much has wearied me. You and Mr Sedgwick are welcome to +remain in the house as long as you please. If I am alive to-morrow +morning I shall be happy to see you again. You will find dinner +prepared for you. And now, good afternoon." + +My cousin, who was propped up with pillows, made an inclination with his +head, but did not even attempt to hold out his hand. My uncle bowed, +and I followed his example as we left the room. We found the servants +arranged in the hall, and with many bows they ushered us into the +drawing-room. Soon afterwards the housekeeper made her appearance, and +begged to learn my commands. I declined, however, giving any, saying +that we were but guests in the house of Lord Heatherly, and would trust +to her to act as she thought fit. I asked Mr Sedgwick whether he +wished to remain. + +"Yes, Walter," he said; "I think it will be the best thing to do. If +his lordship publicly acknowledges you it will be nine-tenths of the law +in your favour; and, indeed, as I cannot learn who else claims to be the +heir, I trust that you will have no competitor." + +I had never in my life seen a better entertainment than was in a short +time put before my uncle and me. I felt very shy when sitting down at +table with so many attendants, and was very glad when dinner was over +and they retired. My uncle and I then drew our chairs towards the fire, +and talked over my prospects. Certainly the change seemed very great, +when I reflected that not a year ago I was living a solitary being, cast +away on an island in the Eastern Seas, and that I was now heir to a +title and a large estate. + +During the night I was awaked by hearing the sound of footsteps moving +along the passage, and soon afterwards there was a rap at the door. I +jumped out of bed, and asked who it was. It was the butler, who entered +the room and lighted the candles. + +"His lordship is very much worse, sir," he said; "and if you wish to see +him alive, you should come immediately." + +I hurried on my clothes, and, accompanied by Mr Sedgwick, who had also +been roused, repaired to Lord Heatherly's room. The doctor was by his +side. He made a sign to us to come forward. The dying man opened his +eyes and fixed them on me. "He is my heir," he said. "In a few minutes +he will be Lord Heatherly, and I shall be dust." + +Scarcely had he uttered these words when I saw a fearful alteration take +place in his countenance. The medical man held his pulse, and presently +I saw him lean forward and close my cousin's eyes, whose last gaze had +been fixed on me. + +"He is gone," said the doctor, "and I can be of no further service. +Probably the young Lord Heatherly and you, sir," he added, turning to +Mr Sedgwick, "will give such directions as you may think fit. You, I +conclude, are acquainted with the late Lord Heatherly's wishes." + +Strange were the sensations which came over me. I had scarcely realised +till then my position. I felt, indeed, utterly unfit to think or act +for myself, and was very glad when I once more found myself in my own +room and in bed. + +As may be supposed, I slept but little for the remainder of the night; +and the next morning when the servants addressed me as "your lordship," +I almost felt as if they were mocking me; indeed, I was not a little +annoyed by the constant repetition of the expression. At length I +begged my uncle to come with me to the study, giving directions to the +servants that we should be left alone. However, we were soon +interrupted by persons who came to take orders for the funeral, and I +found myself at once with numberless responsibilities on my shoulders. +The first moment of quiet I could find I sat down to write to Emily, and +to send messages to our kind friends. Mr Sedgwick undertook to come +back as soon as various necessary arrangements were made, and to bring +her to Heatherly Hall. I begged that he would invite Grace to accompany +her, requesting that, after the funeral, Captain and Mrs Davenport +would come also. + +I will pass over the account of the funeral, which was attended, I am +sorry to say, with very few real mourners, though all the families in +the neighbourhood sent their carriages, and a few gentlemen who had been +more intimately acquainted with the late lord came themselves. + +In a short time another claimant appeared; but as I had been +acknowledged in the presence of sufficient witnesses by the late lord, +he soon withdrew his claim, and I was left in undisputed possession of +the title and property. I remembered Lord Heatherly's remarks with +regard to the responsibilities of my position, and I considered well +what they were. He acknowledged that he had reaped but poor enjoyment +from his wealth. "That also may be my case," I said to myself; "but one +thing I will do, I will pray for guidance from above, and will endeavour +to fulfil to the best of my power the responsibilities cast on me." My +uncle had an old friend, a clever and honest lawyer, whose services I +immediately engaged; and with his aid, and that of the steward of the +estate, I set to work to ascertain what incumbrances existed, and what +was most required to be done on the property. The cottages of the poor +tenants were in a sadly dilapidated state. My first care was to have a +number built in a style best suited to their wants, with four or more +rooms in each, and with various conveniences for their comfort. They +were well drained, and had an ample supply of good water. For their +spiritual wants I engaged an experienced missionary, who might +constantly go among them; and while he preached the glad tidings of +salvation, might ascertain who were sick or suffering, and report to me +accordingly, that I might relieve them. + +Among my first guests was Oliver Farwell. He took an eager interest in +what was going forward, and greatly assisted the missionary in his +labours. I asked Oliver what profession he purposed following, whether +he wished again to go to sea. + +"I should probably have done so," he answered; "but Mr Hooker has +proposed that I should go to college, and my tastes certainly lead me to +adopt one of the learned professions. I delight in study, and should +like to choose the one by which I might the most benefit my +fellow-creatures. Had I my free choice, I should wish to become a +minister of the gospel, for I am sure to no more honourable or important +calling can man devote the energies and talents with which his Maker has +endowed him." + +"I am thankful to hear that, Oliver," I answered. "You and I have been +like brothers so long, that you must allow me to treat you as a younger +brother, and bear your college expenses. I have, too, I understand, two +livings in my gift, the incumbents of which are at present old men, and +I gladly promise to present you to the first which becomes vacant, +should you by that time have been ordained." + +"I will tell Mr Hooker of your kind intentions," he answered; "and +indeed, Lord Heatherly, I am truly grateful to you for them." + +It sounded very odd to hear Oliver calling me Lord Heatherly. "Call me +Walter, as before, my dear Oliver," I said. "You and I must always be +Oliver and Walter to each other." + +As soon as a number of decent cottages had been put up, I offered them +to the tenants at the same rents that they had paid for the ruinous +ones, which I then had pulled down, as I found they were utterly unfit +to be repaired. On their sites, after the ground had been drained, I +erected others; and in the course of two or three years, no one would +have recognised the place. Three or four wretched public-houses or +beerhouses had existed in the village. I declined renewing the leases +of the tenants of these, and got a respectable man to take a new and +decent inn, which I had built for the purpose. That part of the parish +had been noted for poachers, and the number of other disorderly +characters it contained. These either left the place or took to better +callings. + +One of my earliest undertakings was to have a good school-house erected, +with a residence for the master and mistress, in the most central +position I could fix on. By giving rewards and encouragements to the +pupils, in a short time there was not a child on the property who did +not attend school. + +I consulted Emily, as also my uncle and Mr Hooker, as to how I could +best prove my gratitude to Captain and Mrs Davenport. They managed to +place a sum to his credit at his banker's, in a way which prevented him +from suspecting from whom it came. Shortly afterwards I found, from the +way he spoke of the satisfactory addition to his fortune, he had no idea +that I was the donor. + +"Our great wish had been to give our dear Grace a finished education," +observed Mrs Davenport. "She is already as well informed as most girls +of her age, but probably a few accomplishments would be advantageous to +her. With our increased income we can now afford to send her to a +first-rate school. I have heard of one where the mistress is not only +an accomplished lady, but a pious woman, who watches over the most +important interests of her pupils, and from the account I have heard +from the young ladies under her charge, I feel sure that Grace cannot +fail to benefit by spending two or three years with her." + +When Emily found that Grace was to go to school, she begged to accompany +her. I had too many duties to perform to allow me to go to college, +which I should otherwise have done, though already rather old, I +fancied, for commencing a university career. I, however, through Mr +Hooker, found a first-rate tutor, and during the time my sister and +Grace were at school, I read hard every day with him. I found also his +advice of great assistance in my efforts to improve the condition of the +people committed to my charge. + +Captain Davenport had not given up the sea entirely; but after making +two or three successful voyages, he so improved his means, that he was +able to retire and live on shore, where he obtained a lucrative +employment. + +He had some time before presented me with Merlin, who soon made himself +at home in the house, though he never went far from it, evidently +considering it, as the ship had been, under his especial charge. +Whenever he heard me narrating our adventures, he pricked up his ears, +as if he understood what was said, and wished to corroborate my account. +He lived to extreme old age, amiable and faithful to the last. + +Emily, at length, having left school, came to reside with me, and +preside over my establishment. I should have said that it was far less +difficult to manage than in my cousin's time, as I had dismissed several +of the footmen and grooms, as well as other useless hangers-on, who, I +felt sure, benefited neither themselves nor me, by living lives of +idleness. As may be supposed, Emily, who had grown into a beautiful +young woman, had no want of admirers; but, to my surprise, she refused +several excellent offers in succession. + +"Why should I leave your house, my dear brother?" she answered, when one +day I gently expostulated with her on the subject. "When you have a +wife of your own, it will be time enough for me to do so; unless she +wishes me to remain." + +Soon after this, Oliver Farwell, who had generally spent his vacation +with me, was ordained, and the incumbent of the chief living belonging +to the property having died, I presented him to it, and he commenced a +career of sympathising care over the flock committed to him, which soon +endeared him to them, while he gained the love and respect of people of +all denominations in the parish. + +"It is a long time since the Davenports paid us a visit," I said to +Emily one day. "Will you write and invite them? I am sure that you +will be glad to have your old friend Grace with you." + +I had not seen Grace for a long time, and I somehow or other always +thought of her as the little girl who had been Emily's friend, and the +daughter of our kind protector during our adventures in the Eastern +Archipelago. I could scarcely believe my eyes when an elegant and +refined young lady stepped out of the carriage which brought Captain and +Mrs Davenport to my house. I had never thought of marrying; indeed, I +had not been attracted by any of the young ladies in my immediate +neighbourhood. When I saw Grace, however, and found her sweet, and +amiable, and well-instructed, and refined, and right-minded, possessed +indeed of all the qualities which should adorn a woman, new thoughts and +feelings took possession of me, and I became convinced that no lady in +the world was more calculated to add to my happiness than she was. +Still, I could not tell how her own feelings might be engaged. Perhaps +Emily saw how things were going on, for one day she said to me-- + +"I do not think you need be afraid, Walter; and if you ask her, I shall +be very much surprised if she refuses you." + +Thereon, before many hours had passed away, I spoke to Grace, and found +that there was every prospect of all my hopes of happiness being +realised. + +"And, Emily," I said to her the next day, "will you confide to me the +reason why you have refused so many good offers of marriage? I do not +wish to get rid of you, and I am very certain that you would add greatly +to Grace's happiness if you remain here." + +"In that case," she answered, "I think it will be my duty, as well as +pleasure, to remain your guest." + +"That is not a categorical answer," I remarked. "Come, Emily, tell me, +is there no one for whom you have more regard than for those unhappy +gentlemen whom you refused?" I saw a gentle blush rise to her cheek. +"Well," I said, "I shall ask Oliver Farwell to come and stay here. He +keeps away far more than there is any necessity for, as he can easily +ride across the park to his vicarage, and equally well attend to his +duties as he can when residing there." + +"If Mr Farwell keeps away, he has probably good reason for doing so," +answered Emily; "though, of course, you are welcome to ask him to come +over here, if you like to do so. I greatly respect him, and I am sure +whatever he does is from a right motive." + +The following day I rode over to the vicarage, and pressed Oliver to +come and stay with us, and help to entertain Captain and Mrs Davenport. +I saw he hesitated somewhat. Though he congratulated me sincerely on +my prospect of marriage, he uttered an involuntary sigh as he ceased +speaking. "I hope, my dear Oliver, that you may enjoy the same +happiness yourself," I said. "I am very certain that the usefulness of +a clergyman is greatly increased by the assistance of a suitable wife-- +one who will sympathise with him in his unavoidable trials and +disappointments, and who will attend to many of the cases of distress +which he may find it difficult to manage." He looked grave, and then I +thought he gave an inquiring glance up at my face. "Yes, Oliver," I +said; "and I am sure if you can find a woman possessed of the qualities +you desire, and her heart is disengaged, she is not likely to refuse to +share your fortunes." + +Before I left, Oliver had promised to come over that day to the hall. +Whatever Emily had intended to do, somehow or other before long Oliver +found out that, should he make her an offer, she was not likely to +refuse him. + +The two marriages took place on the same day, and among those who were +present were Dick Tarbox, Roger Trew, Potto Jumbo, and our old friend +Macco--Merlin wearing a huge favour on this occasion. Macco, indeed, +was installed soon afterwards as a butler at the vicarage; while Potto +Jumbo became under-cook in my establishment, and soon, by his +intelligence and attention, rose to be head-cook. Dick Tarbox and Roger +Trew promised, when they gave up the sea, to come and settle down on my +estate, and I pointed out the site where I would build two cottages for +their accommodation. + +My friends and I had gone through many trials and dangers together, and +I believe we had all learned an important lesson from them,--to put +implicit trust in a merciful God who watches over his creatures, who +allows not a sparrow to fall to the ground unknown to him, who desires +the happiness of all, and who has made the way plain and simple, having +given us the most minute directions by which that happiness may be +obtained. + +THE END. + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of In the Eastern Seas, by W.H.G. Kingston + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK IN THE EASTERN SEAS *** + +***** This file should be named 21387.txt or 21387.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/3/8/21387/ + +Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |